University of Virginia - fce-digs.comfce-digs.com/library/documents/doc_20170119ircph2...Inspection Checklist HECO-7 General Conditions of the Construction Contract for Capital Outlay

This text WILL NOT PRINT

Size: 11"h x 8.5"w Revised 9.20.12

University of Virginia

WO: 2513122 / PIMS: P04405

SUBMITTED BY:

Dewberry Engineers Inc. 4805 Lake Brook Drive Suite 200Glen Allen, Virginia 23060 200 804.290.7957

SUBMITTED TO:

University of Virginia 575 Alderman Road Charlottesville, Virginia 22903

IRC Plant Connections Hot Water Package

100% Construction Documents

January 19, 2017

Site-Work On-Demand Construction

This page intentionally left blank

Dewberry Engineers Inc. Table of Contents DEI# 50082886 00 01 02 - 1

UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA IRC PLANT CONNECTIONS HOT WATER PACKAGE January 19, 2017 100% Construction Documents Procurement and Contract Documents

00 01 02 Table of Contents 01/19/2017 00 01 07 Seals Page 01/19/2017 00 01 15 List of Drawing Sheets 01/19/2017

Prebid/Preproposal Question Form On-Demand Bid Form

HECO-6a&b 2012 Vusbc Statement of Structural & Special Inspections Form & Inspection Checklist

HECO-7 General Conditions of the Construction Contract for Capital Outlay Projects

CO-7 Commonwealth Of Virginia General Conditions of the Construction Contract

CO-10.2 Commonwealth Of Virginia Standard Bid Bond

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Division 01 – General Requirements 01 00 00 General Requirements 01/19/2017 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01/19/2017 01 14 00 Work Restrictions 01/19/2017 01 18 00 Project Utility Sources 01/19/2017 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01/19/2017 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01/19/2017 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01/19/2017 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01/19/2017 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements 01/19/2017 01 43 00 Quality Assurance and Control 01/19/2017 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01/19/2017 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities 01/19/2017 01 52 00 Construction Facilities 01/19/2017 01 55 00 Vehicular Access and Parking 01/19/2017 01 56 00 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures 01/19/2017 01 56 16 Dust Control 01/19/2017 01 58 00 Project Identification 01/19/2017 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements 01/19/2017 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals 01/19/2017

Division 02 – Existing Conditions

02 41 19 Site Demolition 01/19/2017

Division 03 – Concrete

03 30 00 Cast In Place Concrete 01/19/2017

University of Virginia 100% Construction Documents IRC Plant Connections Hot Water Package January 19, 2017 UVA WO: 2513122 PIMS: P04405


Division 22 – Plumbing

22 01 00 Basic Plumbing Requirements 01/19/2017 22 05 01 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods 01/19/2017 22 05 19 Plumbing Gauges 01/19/2017 22 05 23 Plumbing Valves 01/19/2017 22 05 29 Plumbing Hangers and Supports 01/19/2017 22 05 53 Plumbing Identification 01/19/2017 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 01/19/2017 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping 01/19/2017 22 13 19 Plumbing Specialties 01/19/2017 22 13 23 Domestic Water Pumps 01/19/2017 22 35 00 Domestic Water Heat Exchangers 01/19/2017

Division 23 – Mechanical

23 01 00 HVAC General Requirements 01/19/2017 23 01 10 HVAC Submittal List 01/19/2017 23 05 00 HVAC Firestopping 01/19/2017 23 05 11 HVAC Electrical Provisions 01/19/2017 23 05 13 Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 01/19/2017 23 05 14 Variable Speed Controllers 01/19/2017 23 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping 01/19/2017 23 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping 01/19/2017 23 05 19 Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping 01/19/2017 23 05 23 Valves for Hydronic Piping Systems 01/19/2017 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping 01/19/2017 23 05 53 HVAC Systems Identification 01/19/2017 23 05 55 HVAC Piping System Flushing and Testing 01/19/2017 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balance 01/19/2017 23 07 16 HVAC Equipment Insulation 01/19/2017 23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation 01/19/2017 23 09 00 Digital Controls and Instrumentation 01/19/2017 23 09 01 Building Automation Systems – UVA Supplement 01/19/2017 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping 01/19/2017 23 21 16 Hydronic Piping Specialties 01/19/2017 23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps 01/19/2017 23 21 33 Underground Hydronic Piping 01/19/2017 23 22 13 Steam and Condensate Return Piping 01/19/2017 23 22 16 Steam and Condensate Return Piping Specialties 01/19/2017. 23 57 00 Heat Exchanges for HVAC 01/19/2017

Division 26 – Electrical

26 01 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 01/19/2017 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 01/19/2017 26 05 19 Conductors and Cables 01/19/2017 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding 01/19/2017 26 05 29 Hangers and supports 01/19/2017 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes 01/19/2017 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 01/19/2017 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 01/19/2017 26 28 13 Fuses 01/19/2017 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 01/19/2017



Division 31 - Earthwork

31 10 00 Site Preparation: Clearing and Grubbing 01/19/2017 31 20 00 Earth Moving 01/19/2017 31 23 19 Dewatering 01/19/2017 31 25 00 Erosion and Sediment Control 01/19/2017

Division 32 – Exterior Improvements

32 12 16 Asphalt Paving 01/19/2017 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 01/19/2017

Division 33 – Utilities

33 01 00 Utility Line Testing 01/19/2017 33 05 00 Earthwork: Utilities 01/19/2017 33 05 13 Precast Concrete: Manholes 01/19/2017 33 05 14 Precast Concrete: Utility Structures 01/19/2017 33 05 23 Directional Drilling 01/19/2017 33 05 26 Utility Location and Identification 01/19/2017

END OF SECTION 00 01 02



Dewberry Engineers Inc. List of Drawing Sheets DEI# 50082886 00 01 15 - 1

SECTION 00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

GENERAL

T1.01 Cover Sheet 01/19/2017 CIVIL

C0.01 General Notes 01/19/2017 C0.02 Erosion and Sediment Control Notes 01/19/2017 C1.01 Existing Site Conditions 01/19/2017 C1.02 Existing Site Conditions 01/19/2017 C1.03 Survey Tables 01/19/2017 C2.01 Demolition Plan and Erosion and Sediment Control Phase I 01/19/2017 C2.02 Demolition Plan and Erosion and Sediment Control Phase I 01/19/2017 C3.01 Utility Plan 01/19/2017 C3.02 Utility Plan 01/19/2017 C3.03 Site Restoration and Erosion and Sediment Control Phase II 01/19/2017 C3.04 Site Restoration and Erosion and Sediment Control Phase II 01/19/2017

C4.01 Medium Temperature Hot Water Profile 01/19/2017 C5.01 Erosion and Sediment Control Details 01/19/2017 C5.02 Construction Details 01/19/2017 C5.03 Construction Details 01/19/2017 C6.01 Temporary Traffic Control Plan 01/19/2017 C6.02 Temporary Traffic Control Plan 01/19/2017

STRUCTURAL

S0.01 General Structure Notes, Plans and Details 01/19/2017 S5.01 Structural Details 01/19/2017

MECHANICAL

M0.01 Mechanical Legend, Notes & Schedules 01/19/2017 M2.01 Memorial Gymnasium Mechanical Demolition Plan 01/19/2017 M2.02 Mary Munford Mechanical Demolition Plan 01/19/2017 M3.01 Memorial Gymnasium Mechanical New Work Plan 01/19/2017 M3.02 Mary Munford Mechanical New Work Plan 01/19/2017 M3.03 Mechanical Utility New Work 01/19/2017 M3.04 Mechanical Utility New Work 01/19/2017 M4.01 Mary Munford Enlarged Mechanical Room New Work Plan 01/19/2017 M5.01 Mechanical Flow Schematics 01/19/2017


Dewberry Engineers Inc. List of Drawing Sheets DEI# 50082886 00 01 15 - 2

M5.02 Mechanical Flow Schematics 01/19/2017 M5.03 Mechanical Details 01/19/2017 M5.04 Mechanical Details 01/19/2017 M5.05 Mechanical Details 01/19/2017

ELECTRICAL

E0.01 Electrical Legend and Notes 01/19/2017 E2.01 Memorial Gymnasium Electrical Demolition Plan 01/19/2017 E3.01 Memorial Gymnasium Electrical New Work Plan 01/19/2017 E3.02 Mary Munford Electrical New Work Plan 01/19/2017


Division 0: Procurement and Contract Documents

www.dewberry.com

PRE-PROPOSAL / PRE-BID QUESTION FORM Use separate form for each question submitted

Date: __________________________

Project: _IRC Plant Connections Hot Water Package_______ PIMS # _P04405 ________________

Project Code: _n/a__________________________________ WO #_2513122_________________

Question concerning Drawing Sheet # ____________:

____________________________________________ _____________________

____________________________________________ _________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

Question concerning Specification Section # ____________, page _________, paragraph _________:

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

All responses to questions will be made by Amendment / Addendum

Submitted by: (Print) ____________________________ ______ (Sign) ________________ ______

Organization_ _______ Phone #

A/E Firm: _Dewberry Engineers Inc. ______ ATTN: Devin Keeler __ UVA PM: Kate Meyer____ Email to: [email protected] and [email protected] A/E (email) UVA Project Manager (email)

mailto:[email protected]



SITE WORK “ON-DEMAND” CONSTRUCTION

BID FORM

Date:

Bidder: University of Virginia, Office of Contract Administration 1000 Ednam Center, Suite 100 Charlottesville, Virginia 22903 (Overnight Delivery) P.O. Box 400892, Charlottesville, VA 22904-4892 (U.S. Mail) ATTN: George Cullen Contract Administrator for Construction

Project Title: IRC Plant Connections Hot Water Package

University of Virginia

Charlottesville, Virginia

UVA Work Order # 2513122

PIMS # P04405 In accordance with the “On-Demand” Construction Request for Proposal, the resulting contract, and the bid documents for the above-referenced project, the undersigned bidder proposes to furnish all supervision, labor, equipment, and materials and to perform all work necessary for construction of the project, in accordance with Plans and Specifications dated 01/19/17, and the Addenda noted below, as prepared by Dewberry Engineers Inc. for the consideration of the following amounts: BASE BID (INCLUDING THE FOLLOWING PARTS): Part A: Lump sum price for all work to install approximately 1,100-LF of medium temperature hot water supply and return piping and associated appurtenances, complete, and in accordance with the Plans and Specifications: PART A: BASE BID AMOUNT:

Dollars ($ ). (Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) PART B: EXCAVATION OF ROCK MATERIAL: Lump sum price for excavation of rock material, where authorized or directed, and proper disposal off-site of excess material, complete per specifications (price per cubic yard) Final amount shall be adjusted upward or downward based on actual quantity authorized: PART B: EXCAVATION OF ROCK MATERIAL ESTIMATED QUANTITY OF 200-CY) @ $ per CY =

Dollars ($ ). (Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)

TOTAL BASE BID AMOUNT (FOR PARTS A AND B): Dollars ($ ). (Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bid Guarantee: Attached here is a bid guarantee in the form of a ________________ in the amount of 5% (five percent) of the total Base Bid Amount (Only required for Base Bid Amount of $1,000,000 or more). Contract award will be based on the TOTAL BASE BID AMOUNT shown above (including any properly submitted bid modifications) plus as many Additive Bid Items as the Owner in its discretion decides to award. Time for Completion: The undersigned understands that time is of the essence and agrees that the date for Substantial Completion of the entire project shall be on or before June 30, 2017, and Final Completion shall be achieved within 30 consecutive calendar days after the date of Substantial Completion as determined by the A/E. The bidder has relied upon the following public historical climatological records: The Virginia State Climatology Office for Charlottesville, Virginia.

Acknowledgment is made of receipt of the following Addenda: If notice of acceptance of this bid is given to the undersigned within 30 days after the opening of bids, or any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned will execute and deliver a contract in the prescribed form (Contract Between University and Contractor, HECO-9) within 10 days after the contract has been presented to him for signature. The required payment and performance bonds, on the forms prescribed, shall be delivered to the Owner along with the signed contract. Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986: The undersigned certifies that it does not and will not during the performance of the Contract for this project violate the provisions of the Federal Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986, which prohibits employment of illegal aliens. Either the undersigned or one of the following individuals, if any, is authorized to modify this bid prior to the deadline for receipt of bids by writing the modification and signing his name on the face of the bid, on the envelope in which it is enclosed, on a separate document, or on a document which is faxed to the University: I certify that the firm name given below is the true and complete name of the bidder and that the bidder is legally qualified and licensed by the Commonwealth of Virginia, Department of Professional and Occupational Regulation, to perform all Work included in the scope of the Contract. (The Bid Form must be signed by a Corporate Officer or a person who has written delegated authority to commit this firm for the purposes described herein by the Owner or Corporate Officer of this firm.) Firm Affix Seal of Incorporation: Authorized Signature Print Name Title: Telephone: Fax:

E-mail address: Contractor # FEIN

HE

CO

-6b

2012 C

ode V

ers

ion

Pro

ject

Tit

le:

I

RC

Pla

nt

Co

nn

ecti

on

s H

ot

Wate

r P

ackag

e

(Revis

ed 1

2/1

4)

RE

Q'D

MA

TE

RIA

L/

TY

PE

OF

IN

SP

EC

TIO

NT

HIS

AC

TIV

ITY

(A/E

add lin

es a

s n

eeded t

o identify

oth

er

required ite

ms)

PR

OJ ?

RE

FE

RE

NC

E

Soil

Cla

ssify &

Test

Exi

sting S

oils

& F

ill M

ate

rials

Specs,

1705.6

X (

Spot)

Soil

Com

paction O

f F

ill M

ate

rials

Specs,

1705.6

X

Soil

Bearing A

t B

ott

om

Of

Footing E

xcavations

Specs,

1705.6

X (

Spot)

Pile

sD

rivin

g R

ecord

s,

Tip

& C

uto

ff E

levations

1705.7

, 1705.9

X4

Pile

sLoad T

est

1705.7

X4

Cais

sons

Drilli

ng,

Siz

e,

Bearing C

onditio

ns,

Mate

rials

1705.8

, 1705.3

X

Concre

teR

eady-M

ix P

lant

Qualit

y C

ontr

ol

Specs,

1704.2

.52

X,

1

Concre

teM

ix D

esig

n T

ests

And C

ert

ific

ate

sX

Specs,

1705.3

XX

, 1

Rein

f. S

teel

Shop D

raw

ings O

f R

ein

forc

ing S

teel

Specs

X

Rein

f. S

teel

Pla

cem

ent

Of

Rein

forc

ing S

teel

1705.3

X (

Spot)

X (

Spot)

X

Rein

f. S

teel

Weld

ing

1705.2

.2X

(S

pot)

2X

,1

Form

work

Shape,

Location,

Dim

ensio

ns

1705.3

X (

Spot)

XX

Form

work

Rem

oval and R

eshoring

1705.3

X (

Spot)

Concre

teT

est

Cylin

ders

& S

trength

Test

X1705.3

, 1910.1

0X

4

Concre

teM

ix P

roport

ions &

Mix

On D

eliv

ery

Tic

kets

X1705.3

X (

Spot)

Concre

teS

lum

p T

est

X1705.3

X4

X

Concre

teP

lacem

ent

Pro

cedure

sX

1705.3

XX

(S

pot)

X (

Spot)

Concre

teC

uring T

em

pera

ture

s &

Techniq

ues

X1705.3

XX

Pre

str

essed

Pre

str

essin

g P

rocedure

s &

Forc

es

1705.3

X2

X,1

Pre

str

essed

Shop D

raw

ings O

f P

restr

essed U

nits

Specs

X

Pre

cast

Qualit

y C

ontr

ol O

f M

anufa

ctu

rer

1704.2

.52

X,

1

Pre

cast

Shop D

raw

ings O

f P

recast

Specs

X

Pre

cast

Ere

ction O

f P

recast

1705.3

X (

Spot)

X (

Spot)

XX

Pre

cast

Inspection O

f C

onnections

1705.3

X (

Spot)

Anchors

Anchors

Cast

In C

oncre

teS

pecs,

1705.2

.1,

1909

X (

Spot)

Pro

ject/

PIM

S C

od

e:

P04405

OW

NE

R'S

TE

ST

LA

B

A/E

OF

RE

CO

RD

SM

OK

E

CO

NT

RO

L

INS

PE

CT

ION

/ T

ES

T B

Y *

20

12

VU

SB

C S

PE

CIA

L I

NS

PE

CT

ION

S

PR

OJE

CT

INS

PE

CT

OR

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

/

SU

PP

LIE

R

FO

UN

DA

TIO

NS

CO

NC

RE

TE

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

HE

CO

-6b

2012 C

ode V

ers

ion

Pro

ject

Tit

le:

I

RC

Pla

nt

Co

nn

ecti

on

s H

ot

Wate

r P

ackag

e

(Revis

ed 1

2/1

4)

RE

Q'D

MA

TE

RIA

L/

TY

PE

OF

IN

SP

EC

TIO

NT

HIS

AC

TIV

ITY

(A/E

add lin

es a

s n

eeded t

o identify

oth

er

required ite

ms)

PR

OJ ?

RE

FE

RE

NC

E

Pro

ject/

PIM

S C

od

e:

P04405

OW

NE

R'S

TE

ST

LA

B

A/E

OF

RE

CO

RD

SM

OK

E

CO

NT

RO

L

INS

PE

CT

ION

/ T

ES

T B

Y *

20

12

VU

SB

C S

PE

CIA

L I

NS

PE

CT

ION

S

PR

OJE

CT

INS

PE

CT

OR

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

/

SU

PP

LIE

R

Qualit

y A

ssura

nce

Indic

ate

Qualit

y A

ssura

nce L

evel (A

, B

or

C)

AC

I 530,

1.1

9.1

, 2,

3X

Cla

y M

asonry

Cert

ific

ate

s,

Tests

& T

echnic

al D

ata

AC

I 530,

Table

1.1

9.1

X (

Spot)

X3

Concre

te M

asonry

Cert

ific

ate

s,

Tests

& T

echnic

al D

ata

AC

I 530,

Table

1.1

9.1

X (

Spot)

X3

Rein

f. S

teel

Shop D

raw

ings

Specs

X

Rein

f. S

teel

Siz

e,

Gra

de,

Type,

Location,

Spacin

g O

f R

ein

f S

teel

AC

I 530,

Table

1.1

9.1

X (

Spot)

Anchors

Manufa

ctu

rer's D

ata

AC

I 530,

Table

1.1

9.1

X (

Spot)

X3

Accessories

Manufa

ctu

rer's D

ata

Specs

X3

Mort

ar

& G

rout

Mix

Desig

n A

nd D

ata

Specs

X3

Mort

ar

& G

rout

Fie

ld S

am

ple

sA

CI

530,

Table

1.1

9.1

X (

Spot)

4

Ris

k C

at.

IV

A/E

Shall

edit lis

t as r

equired b

y A

CI

530

Table

s 1

.19.2

, 1.1

9.3

X

Fabricato

rQ

ualit

y C

ontr

ol In

spection O

f S

hop

1704.2

.52

X,

1

Faste

ners

Mfr

's C

ert

ific

ate

Of

Com

plia

nce

AIS

C 3

60-1

02

3

Str

uct.

S

teel

Mfr

's C

ert

ific

ate

Of

Com

plia

nce

AIS

C 3

60-1

02

3

Weld

M

atl's

Manufa

ctu

rer's C

ert

ific

ate

Of

Com

plia

nce

AIS

C 3

60-1

02

3

Meta

l D

eckin

gW

eld

ing t

o S

upport

s1705.2

.2X

(S

pot)

Meta

l D

eckin

gM

anufa

ctu

rer's C

ert

ific

ate

Of

Com

plia

nce

1705.2

.22

3

Deta

ilsS

hop D

raw

ings R

evie

wS

pecs

X

Ere

ction

Insta

llation O

f H

igh-S

trength

Bolts

AIS

C 3

60-1

0X

(S

pot)

Ere

ction

Weld

ing

AIS

C 3

60-1

0X

(S

pot)

Ere

ction

Ste

el F

ram

ing A

nd C

onnections

AIS

C 3

60-1

0X

(S

pot)

X (

Spot)

X

ST

EE

L C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

MA

SO

NR

Y C

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

HE

CO

-6b

2012 C

ode V

ers

ion

Pro

ject

Tit

le:

I

RC

Pla

nt

Co

nn

ecti

on

s H

ot

Wate

r P

ackag

e

(Revis

ed 1

2/1

4)

RE

Q'D

MA

TE

RIA

L/

TY

PE

OF

IN

SP

EC

TIO

NT

HIS

AC

TIV

ITY

(A/E

add lin

es a

s n

eeded t

o identify

oth

er

required ite

ms)

PR

OJ ?

RE

FE

RE

NC

E

Pro

ject/

PIM

S C

od

e:

P04405

OW

NE

R'S

TE

ST

LA

B

A/E

OF

RE

CO

RD

SM

OK

E

CO

NT

RO

L

INS

PE

CT

ION

/ T

ES

T B

Y *

20

12

VU

SB

C S

PE

CIA

L I

NS

PE

CT

ION

S

PR

OJE

CT

INS

PE

CT

OR

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

/

SU

PP

LIE

R

( N

ote

: S

DC

refe

rs t

o S

eis

mic

Desig

n C

ate

gory

. )

Str

uctu

ral S

teel

Weld

ing a

nd B

oltin

g1705.1

1.1

X (

Spot)

Wood

Fie

ld G

luein

g1705.1

1.2

X

Wood

Faste

nin

g O

f S

eis

mic

Forc

e R

esis

tance S

yste

m1705.1

1.2

X (

Spot)

X

Lig

ht

Gage S

teel

Faste

nin

g1705.1

1.3

X (

Spot)

X

Com

ponents

Mechanic

al &

Ele

ctr

ical -

Anchora

ge a

nd L

abelin

g (

SD

C =

C)

1705.1

1.4

, 1705.1

1.6

X (

Spot)

Com

ponents

Arc

hitectu

ral -

Cla

ddin

g,

Veneer,

Non-B

earing W

alls

(S

DC

= D

)1705.1

1.5

X (

Spot)

Com

ponents

Access F

loors

(S

DC

= D

)1705.1

1.5

.1X

(S

pot)

Com

ponents

Sto

rage R

acks (

SD

C =

D)

1705.1

1.7

X (

Spot)

Concre

teR

ein

forc

ing S

teel (S

DC

=B

)1705.1

2.1

23

Fabrication

Qualit

y C

ontr

ol In

spection O

f S

hop

1704.2

.52

X,

1

Wood

Gra

de S

tam

pS

pecs,

1703.5

X (

Spot)

X

Wood/L

ight

Gage

Faste

nin

g P

er

Code A

nd D

raw

ings

1705.2

.2.1

.1,

1705.5

.1X

(S

pot)

X

Tru

sses

Shop D

raw

ings

Specs

X

Tru

sses

Tru

ss P

lacem

ent,

Bra

cin

g a

nd F

aste

nin

g &

Anchora

ge

Specs,

1705.5

.2X

(S

pot)

X

Lam

inate

sS

hop D

raw

ings

Specs

X

Lam

inate

sId

entification P

er

Shop D

raw

ings

Specs

X (

Spot)

X

Sheath

ing

Gra

de S

tam

p,

Thic

kness &

Faste

nin

gS

pecs,

1705.5

.1X

X (

Spot)

X

SE

ISM

IC R

ES

IST

AN

CE

TE

ST

ING

(as r

eq

uir

ed

by V

US

BC

1705.1

2)

WO

OD

& L

IGH

T G

AG

E S

TE

EL

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

SE

ISM

IC F

OR

CE

RE

SIS

TA

NC

E IN

SP

EC

TIO

NS

(as r

eq

uir

ed

by V

US

BC

1705.1

1)

HE

CO

-6b

2012 C

ode V

ers

ion

Pro

ject

Tit

le:

I

RC

Pla

nt

Co

nn

ecti

on

s H

ot

Wate

r P

ackag

e

(Revis

ed 1

2/1

4)

RE

Q'D

MA

TE

RIA

L/

TY

PE

OF

IN

SP

EC

TIO

NT

HIS

AC

TIV

ITY

(A/E

add lin

es a

s n

eeded t

o identify

oth

er

required ite

ms)

PR

OJ ?

RE

FE

RE

NC

E

Pro

ject/

PIM

S C

od

e:

P04405

OW

NE

R'S

TE

ST

LA

B

A/E

OF

RE

CO

RD

SM

OK

E

CO

NT

RO

L

INS

PE

CT

ION

/ T

ES

T B

Y *

20

12

VU

SB

C S

PE

CIA

L I

NS

PE

CT

ION

S

PR

OJE

CT

INS

PE

CT

OR

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

/

SU

PP

LIE

R

Spra

y-o

nM

anufa

ctu

rer's D

ata

Specs

X3

Spra

y-o

nS

urf

ace C

onditio

ns

1705.1

3.2

X

Spra

y-o

nA

pplic

ation

1705.1

3.3

X3

Spra

y-o

nT

hic

kness

1705.1

3.4

X

Spra

y-o

nD

ensity

1705.1

3.5

X

Spra

y-o

nB

ond S

trength

1705.1

3.6

X

Mastic/I

ntu

mescent

Fire-R

esis

tant

Coatings -

Mate

rials

, A

pplic

ation

1705.1

4X

X (

Spot)

X3

GW

B F

irepro

of

Manufa

ctu

rer's D

ata

Specs

X3

GW

B F

irepro

of

Pla

cem

ent

Of

Mate

rials

Specs

X (

Spot)

X

Fire W

all

Assem

bly

Manufa

ctu

rer's D

ata

Specs,

706.2

X3

Fire W

all

Assem

bly

Pla

cem

ent

Of

Mate

rials

Specs,

706.2

X (

Spot)

X

Mate

rials

Manufa

ctu

rer's D

ata

Specs

X3

Pre

para

tion

Conditio

n O

f S

ubstr

ate

Specs,

1705.1

5.1

X (

Spot)

X

Applic

ation

Meth

ods,

Pro

port

ions &

Thic

kness O

f In

sta

llation

Specs,

1705.1

5.1

X (

Spot)

X (

Spot)

X

Ducts

Devic

e L

ocation A

nd A

ir D

uct

Leakage

1705.1

7.1

X

Syste

mP

ressure

Diffe

rence,

Flo

w M

easure

ments

& D

ete

ction T

esting

1705.1

7.1

X

Contr

ols

Activation S

equence

1705.1

7.1

X

FIR

EP

RO

OF

ING

SM

OK

E C

ON

TR

OL

(s

ee n

ote

5 )

EX

TE

RIO

R IN

SU

LA

TIO

N &

FIN

ISH

SY

ST

EM

S (

EIF

S)

HE

CO

-6b

2012 C

ode V

ers

ion

Pro

ject

Tit

le:

I

RC

Pla

nt

Co

nn

ecti

on

s H

ot

Wate

r P

ackag

e

(Revis

ed 1

2/1

4)

RE

Q'D

MA

TE

RIA

L/

TY

PE

OF

IN

SP

EC

TIO

NT

HIS

AC

TIV

ITY

(A/E

add lin

es a

s n

eeded t

o identify

oth

er

required ite

ms)

PR

OJ ?

RE

FE

RE

NC

E

Pro

ject/

PIM

S C

od

e:

P04405

OW

NE

R'S

TE

ST

LA

B

A/E

OF

RE

CO

RD

SM

OK

E

CO

NT

RO

L

INS

PE

CT

ION

/ T

ES

T B

Y *

20

12

VU

SB

C S

PE

CIA

L I

NS

PE

CT

ION

S

PR

OJE

CT

INS

PE

CT

OR

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

/

SU

PP

LIE

R

NO

TE

S:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

a. T

he p

lant is

a c

ert

ifie

d p

roduction p

lant m

eeting the q

ualit

y a

ssura

nce s

tandard

s o

f a

Unle

ss n

ote

d o

therw

ise, th

e r

efe

rence n

um

bers

lis

ted r

efe

r to

the 2

012 V

US

BC

.

Revie

ws r

ecord

s a

nd test re

sults f

or

confo

rmance w

ith r

equir

em

ents

.

Specia

l In

spection f

irm

shall

have e

xpert

ise in f

ire p

rote

ction e

ngin

eeri

ng, m

echanic

al engin

eeri

ng, and

cert

ific

ation a

s a

n a

ir b

ala

ncer.

The s

pecia

l in

specto

r lis

ted o

n the c

over

page a

nd the A

gency a

re

responsib

le f

or

veri

fyin

g that th

e inspecto

r (s

) fo

r sm

oke c

ontr

ol is

qualif

ied a

s r

equir

ed b

y V

US

BC

1705.1

7.2

.

b. T

he p

lant m

ain

tain

s a

n a

gre

em

ent w

ith a

n independent in

spection o

r qualit

y a

ssura

nce

re

cogniz

ed n

ational sta

ndard

s o

rganiz

ation f

or

that pro

duct.

mate

rials

/pro

ducts

.

c. T

he p

lant has a

n in-s

hop q

ualit

y a

ssura

nce inspection p

rogra

m b

y a

n independent te

sting

in

spections s

hall

not be less than o

ne e

very

six

month

s.

agency to c

onduct peri

odic

in-p

lant qualit

y a

ssura

nce inspections. T

he f

requency o

f th

ese

A/E

shall

revie

w f

abri

cato

r/supplie

r/pro

ducer

cert

ific

ate

s f

or

confo

rmance w

ith a

ppro

pri

ate

Fabri

cato

r, s

upplie

r, r

eady-m

ixed p

lant or

oth

er

pro

duction p

lant shall

pro

vid

e c

ert

ific

ate

s f

rom

an a

ppro

ved

or

qualit

y a

ssura

nce a

gency f

or

the w

ork

/pro

duct to

be p

rovid

ed o

n this

pro

ject.

sta

ndard

s o

f pra

ctice a

nd q

ualit

y a

ssura

nce.

Contr

acto

r/supplie

r shall

subm

it m

anufa

ctu

rer's c

ert

ific

ate

s o

f com

plia

nce f

or

the

follo

win

g c

rite

ria:

independent in

spection, te

sting o

r qualit

y a

ssura

nce a

gency a

ttesting that th

e p

lant m

eets

at le

ast one o

f th

e

HECO-7 (7/14/15) Page 1 of 8

1

HECO-7

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT FOR CAPITAL OUTLAY PROJECTS

1. This addendum, HECO-7, modifies the Commonwealth of Virginia’s General Conditions

of the Construction Contract DGS-30-054 Form CO-7 (04/15), (attached) for use on all Capital Outlay Projects.

2. For all forms referenced in the attachment by ‘‘CO-”, replace ‘‘CO-” with ‘‘HECO-,’’ except the CO-9a and CO-13.

3. In §1, add definition for the term “Rules,” as follows:

Rules: The Rules Governing Procurement of Goods, Services, Insurance, and Construction, attached as Attachment 1 to that certain Policy Governing the Procurement of Goods, Services, Insurance, and Construction, and the Disposition of Surplus Materials adopted by the Board of Visitors of the University of Virginia, attached as Exhibit P to that certain Management Agreement dated November 15, 2005, by and between the Commonwealth of Virginia and The Rector and Visitors of the University of Virginia, as amended (Chapters 933 and 943 of the 2006 Acts of Assembly, as amended by Chapters 675 and 685 of the 2009 Acts of Assembly and Chapters 116 and 161 of the 2011 Acts of Assembly).

4. In §2(a), delete the words “Commonwealth of Virginia in its Construction and

Professional Services Manual” and insert in their place the words “University of Virginia in its Higher Education Capital Outlay Manual.”

5. In §3(e), delete the words “Building Official for State-owned Buildings” and insert in their place the words “Building Official for the University.”

6. Delete §4(a) and insert the following in its place:

(a) §10 of the Rules shall be applicable. It provides as follows:

http://www.dgs.state.va.us/FormsCenter/tabid/820/Default.aspx?udt_1673_param_detail=176

HECO-7 (7/14/15) Page 2 of 8

2

1. During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:

a. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age, disability, or other basis prohibited by state law relating to discrimination in employment, except where there is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of the contractor. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.

b. The contractor, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, will state that such contractor is an equal opportunity employer.

c. Notices, advertisements and solicitations placed in accordance with federal law, rule or regulation shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of meeting the requirements of this section.

2. The contractor will include the provisions of the foregoing paragraphs a, b and c in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.


(a) §11 of the Rules shall be applicable. It provides as follows:

“During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees to (i) provide a drug-free workplace for the contractor’s employees; (ii) post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of a controlled substance or marijuana is prohibited in the contractor's workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition; (iii) state in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor that the contractor maintains a drug-free workplace; and (iv) include the provisions of the foregoing clauses in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.

HECO-7 (7/14/15) Page 3 of 8

3

For the purposes of this section, ‘drug-free workplace’ means a site for the performance of work done in connection with a specific contract awarded to a contractor in accordance with these Rules, the employees of whom are prohibited from engaging in the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession or use of any controlled substance or marijuana during the performance of the contract.”


For contracts with a value exceeding one million dollars ($1,000,000), the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner or its designated representative, a University of Virginia Standard Performance Bond (HECO-10) and Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond (Form HECO-10.1), each fully executed by the Contractor and one or more surety companies legally licensed to do business in Virginia and each in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the accepted bid. If more than one Surety executes a bond, each shall be jointly and severally liable to the Owner for the entire amount of the bond. Sureties shall be selected by the Contractor, subject to approval by the Owner. No payment on the Contract shall be due and payable to the Contractor until the bonds have been approved by the Owner and the Office of the Attorney General of Virginia. In order to facilitate review of the bonds by the Office of the Attorney General, the power of attorney from the surety company to its agent who executes the bond shall be attached to the bond.

9. In §8(b), delete the references to “§2.2-4337.A.2 of the Code of Virginia” and insert in

their place references to “§29(A)(2) of the Rules.”

10. In §8(c), delete the reference to “§2.2-4338 of the Code of Virginia” and insert in its place a reference to “§30 of the Rules.”

11. In §8(d), delete the reference to “five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000)” and insert in its place a reference to “one million dollars ($1,000,000).

12. In §11(b), delete the reference to “§2.2-4332 of the Code of Virginia” and insert in its place a reference to “§25 of the Rules.”

13. Delete §11(c) and insert the following in its place:

(c) During the performance of the Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain Commercial General Liability insurance to include Premises / Operations Liability,

HECO-7 (7/14/15) Page 4 of 8

4

Products and Completed Operations Coverage, Independent Contractor's Liability, Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability, Contractual, and Personal Injury Liability, which shall insure him against claims of personal injury, including death, as well as against claims for property damage, which may arise from operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. The amounts of general liability insurance shall be not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate combined limit. The Commonwealth of Virginia, The Rector and Visitors of the University of Virginia, and their respective officers, employees and agents, shall be named as additional insureds with respect to the Work being procured. The Supplemental General Conditions may require the Contractor to provide an Umbrella insurance policy in a specified amount for the Project.

14. Delete §11(e) and insert the following in its place:

(e) The Asbestos Contractor or Subcontractor, as the case may

be, shall provide occurrence-based liability insurance with asbestos coverages in an amount not less than $1,000,000 and shall name the following as additional insureds: The Commonwealth of Virginia, The Rector and Visitors of the University of Virginia, their respective officers, employees and agents; the Architect/Engineer (if not the Asbestos Project Designer); and the Contractor (where the asbestos work is being performed by the Asbestos Subcontractor). In those cases where only claims-made liability insurance is available, the policy will remain in force throughout the time of the asbestos work and for a minimum of two years beyond the completion of the work without coverage interruption, and if coverage is discontinued within that two year period, the extended reporting period endorsement must be added to the policy to cover the two year requirement beyond work completion.

15. In §12 delete the entire existing section and section title and insert the following in its

place:

“12. INSURANCE FOR OWNER, UNIVERSITY, AND CM/GC

HECO-7 (7/14/15) Page 5 of 8

5

(a) The University maintains property insurance on existing buildings (including fire, vandalism, and extended coverage).

(b) For all projects the CM/GC, at its cost, shall obtain and maintain in the names of the Owner, University, and CM/GC, Builders’ Risk Insurance for the total Project in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the construction Contract Price.

(c) Builders’ Risk Insurance shall be adjusted as required if the Contract Price changes.

(d) Insurance agreements shall include a provision that the

University may take occupancy of portions of the Work as it is completed, and prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, and that the Builders’ Risk Insurance provided by the CM/GC shall continue until the University accepts the entire, completed Work, unless alternative insurance coverage has been approved by the University’s Office of Risk Management (i.e. University property coverage of completed and occupied areas).

(e) The amount of any deductible must be acceptable to the

University. The CM/GC will be liable for any deductible whenever a claim arises.

(f) The loss, if any, is to be made adjustable with and payable

to the Owner and University, in accordance with its interests, as they may appear.

(g) The Owner and University and their officers, employees,

and its agents, shall be named as additional insured in any liability policy of insurance issued.

(h) Written evidence of the insurance shall be filed with the

University no later than thirty (30) days following the award of the construction phase Contract. In the event of cancellation of this insurance, not less than thirty (30) days prior written notice must be sent to the University. A copy of the policy or certificate of insurance shall be given to the University upon demand.

HECO-7 (7/14/15) Page 6 of 8

6

(i) The value of the Builders’ Risk Insurance shall include the costs of excavations, backfills, foundations, underground utilities, and site work.

(j) The CM/GC and the individual Subcontractors and CM

Agency Trade Contractors are responsible for providing any desired coverage for their buildings, equipment, materials, tools, or supplies that are on-site.

(k) Any insurance provided through the University on

buildings, construction, additions, or renovations will not extend to the CM/GC nor the individual Subcontractors and CM Agency Trade Contractors buildings, equipment, materials, tools, or supplies unless these items are to become property of the Owner upon completion of the Project and the Owner has assumed responsibility for such items at the time of the loss.

(l) Subcontractors and CM Agency Trade Contractors are covered under the CM/GC’s Builders’ Risk Insurance policy and need not provide Builders’ Risk Insurance.

16. In §13, delete the last sentence.

17. In §36(d), delete the reference to “§2.2-4333 of the Code of Virginia” and insert in its

place a reference to “§26 of the Rules.”

18. Delete §36(i) and insert the following in its place:

(i) Interest. (1) Interest shall accrue, at the rate determined pursuant to

subsection 2, on all amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor that remain unpaid after seven (7) days following the payment date.

(2) The rate of interest charged the Owner pursuant to

subsection 1 shall be the base rate on corporate loans (prime rate) at large United States money center commercial banks as reported daily in the publication entitled The Wall Street Journal. Whenever a split prime rate is published, the lower of the two rates shall be used. However, in no event shall the rate of interest charged exceed the rate of interest established pursuant to §58.1-1812 of the Code of Virginia.

HECO-7 (7/14/15) Page 7 of 8

7

(3) Notwithstanding subsection 1, no interest penalty shall be charged when payment is delayed because of disagreement between the Owner and the Contractor regarding the quantity, quality or time of delivery of goods or services or the accuracy of any invoice received for the goods or services. The exception from the interest penalty provided by this subsection shall apply only to that portion of a delayed payment that is actually the subject of the disagreement and shall apply only for the duration of the disagreement.

(4) This section shall not apply to retainage during the period

of time prior to the date the final payment is due. (5) Notwithstanding subsection 1, no interest penalty shall be

paid to any debtor on any payment, or portion thereof, withheld pursuant to the Comptroller’s Debt Setoff Program, as authorized by the Virginia Debt Collection Act (§2.2-4800 et seq. of the Code of Virginia), commencing with the date the payment is withheld. If, as a result of an error, a payment or portion thereof is withheld, and it is determined that at the time of setoff no debt was owed to the Commonwealth of Virginia, then interest shall accrue at the rate determined pursuant to subsection 2 on amounts withheld that remain unpaid after seven days following the payment date.

(6) These same provisions relating to payment of interest to the

Contractor shall apply also to the computation and accrual of interest on any amounts due from the Contractor to the Owner for deductive change orders and to amounts due on any claims by the Owner.

(7) The date of mailing of any payment by the U.S. Mail is

deemed to be the date of payment to the addressee. 19. In §37, delete the references to §2.2-4354, Code of Virginia” and insert in their place

references to “§45 of the Rules.”

20. In §38(a), delete the last sentence in the first paragraph and insert the following in its place:

The Contractor agrees and understands that the authority of the Owner’s designee is limited by §8 of the Rules and any applicable statute.

HECO-7 (7/14/15) Page 8 of 8

8

21. In §38(b), delete the last sentence in the second paragraph and insert the following in its place:

Changes to the Contract time and/or Price shall be effective when signed by both parties.

22. In §43(f), delete the reference to “§2.2-4335 of the Code of Virginia” and insert in its place a reference to “§27 of the Rules.”

23. In §47, delete the respective references to §§2.2-4363, 2.2-4364, 2.2-4365 and 2.2-4366 of the Code of Virginia and insert in their place references to §§53, 54, 55 and 56 of the Rules, respectively.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

1

COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE PAGE

1. DEFINITIONS 3

2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7

3. LAWS AND REGULATIONS 7

4. NONDISCRIMINATION 9

5. PROHIBITION OF ALCOHOL AND OTHER DRUGS 10

6. TIME FOR COMPLETION 10

7. CONDITIONS AT SITE 11

8. CONTRACT SECURITY 12

9. SUBCONTRACTS 13

10. SEPARATE CONTRACTS 13

11. CONTRACTOR'S AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE 14

12. "ALL-RISK" BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE 15

13. TAXES, FEES AND ASSESSMENTS 15

14. PATENTS 15

15. ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S STATUS 16

16. INSPECTION 17

17. SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR 19

18. CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION, METHODS AND PROCEDURES 19

19. SCHEDULE OF THE WORK 20

20. SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT 23

21. ACCESS TO WORK 24

22. SURVEYS AND LAYOUT 24

23. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 25

24. SUBMITTALS 26

25. FEES, SERVICES AND FACILITIES 28

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

2

26. EQUALS 29

27. AVAILABILITY OF MATERIALS 29

28. CONTRACTOR'S TITLE TO MATERIALS 29

29. STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS INSTALLATION & WORKMANSHIP 29

30. WARRANTY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 30

31. USE OF SITE AND REMOVAL OF DEBRIS 31

32. TEMPORARY ROADS 32

33. SIGNS 32

34. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 32

35. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS 32

36. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR 33

37. PAYMENTS BY CONTRACTOR 37

38. CHANGES IN THE WORK 37

39. EXTRAS 43

40. CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT 43

41. OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE THE CONTRACT FOR CAUSE 44

42. TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 45

43. DAMAGES FOR DELAYS; EXTENSION OF TIME 45

44. INSPECTION FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION & FINAL INSPECTION 48

45. GUARANTEE OF WORK 49

46. ASSIGNMENTS 50

47. CONTRACTUAL DISPUTES 51

48. ASBESTOS 52

49. TRAINING, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT 52

50. PROJECT MEETINGS 53 51. SMALL BUSINESSES AND WOMEN-OWNED AND MINORITY-OWNED (SWAM) 54

BUSINESS PROCUREMENT PLAN

PLEASE NOTE: The CO-7, General Conditions of the Construction Contract, has been created specifically for the use of agencies of the Commonwealth of Virginia, which may not alter any provisions without the express written approval of the Virginia Department of General Services, Division of Engineering and Buildings. The General Conditions have significant legal implications and shall not be altered or modified. Nothing in the CO-7, General Conditions of the Construction Contract, shall be amended or deleted or its intent changed, except by an approved and properly issued Supplemental General Condition. The Commonwealth makes no representation as to their suitability for any other purpose. (Note: Political subdivisions intending to modify the General Conditions for their use should consult with their legal counsel.)

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

3

1. DEFINITIONS Whenever used in these General Conditions of the Construction Contract ("General Conditions") or in the Contract Documents, the following terms have the meanings indicated, which are applicable to both the singular and plural and the male and female gender thereof: Agency: The Agency, institution or department which is a party to the Contract. For purposes of the Contract, the term Owner shall include such Agency, whether or not the Agency owns the site or the building. Architect, Engineer, Architect/Engineer or A/E: The term used to designate the Architect and/or the Engineer that contracts with the Owner to provide the Architectural and Engineering services for the Project. The A/E is a separate contractor and not an agent of the Owner. The term includes any associates or consultants employed by the A/E to assist in providing the A/E services. Beneficial Occupancy: The condition after Substantial Completion but prior to Final Completion of the Project at which time the Project, or portion thereof, is sufficiently complete and systems operational such that the Owner could, after obtaining necessary approvals and certificates, occupy and utilize the space for its intended use. Guarantees and warranties applicable to that portion of the Work begin on the date the Owner accepts the Project, or a portion thereof, for such Beneficial Occupancy, unless otherwise specified in the Supplemental General Conditions or by separate agreement. Change Order: A document (Form CO-11) issued on or after the effective date of the Contract Between Owner and Contractor (Form CO-9) which is agreed to by the Contractor and approved by the Owner, and which authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Price and/or the Contract Completion Date. The term Change Order shall also include written orders to proceed issued pursuant to Section 38 (a) (3). A Change Order, once signed by all parties, is incorporated into and becomes a part of the Contract. Code of Virginia: 1950 Code of Virginia as amended. Sections of the Code referred to herein are noted by § xx-xx. Construction: The term used to include new construction, reconstruction, renovation, restoration, major repair, demolition and all similar work upon buildings and ancillary facilities, including any draining, dredging, excavation, grading or similar work upon real property. Contract: The Contract Between Owner and Contractor, Form CO-9, hereinafter referred to as the Contract. Contract Completion Date: The date by which the Work must be substantially complete. The Contract Completion Date is customarily established in the Notice to Proceed, based on the Time for Completion. In some instances, however, the Contract contains a mandatory Contract Completion Date, which shall be stated in the Invitation for Bid or Request for Proposal, as applicable. Contract Documents: The Contract between Owner and Contractor (Form CO-9) signed by the Owner and the Contractor and any documents expressly incorporated therein. Such incorporated documents customarily include the bid submitted by the Contractor, these General Conditions, any Supplemental General Conditions, any Special Conditions, the plans and the specifications, and all modifications, including addenda and subsequent Change Orders. Contract Price: The total compensation payable to the Contractor for performing the Work, subject to modification by Change Order. Contractor: The person with whom the Owner has entered into a contractual agreement to do the Work on this project.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

4

Date of Commencement: the date as indicated in the written Notice to Proceed, the receipt of the earliest Building Permit, or a date mutually agreed to between the Owner and Contractor in writing, whichever is the latest. Day(s): Calendar day(s) unless otherwise noted. Defective: An adjective which, when modifying the word Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, deficient, does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of inspections, standards, tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents, or Work that has been damaged prior to the A/E's recommendation of Final Payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion or Beneficial Occupancy). Drawing: A page or sheet of the Plans which presents a graphic representation, usually drawn to scale, showing the technical information, design, location, and dimensions of various elements of the Work. The graphic representations include, but are not limited to, plan views, elevations, transverse and longitudinal sections, large and small scale sections and details, isometrics, diagrams, schedules, tables and/or pictures. DSBSD: Virginia Department of Small Business and Supplier Diversity Emergency: Any unforeseen situation, combination of circumstances, or a resulting state that poses imminent danger to health, life or property. Final Completion Date: The date of the Owner's acceptance of the Work from the Contractor upon confirmation from the Architect/Engineer and the Contractor that the Work is totally complete in accordance with Section 44(b). Field Order: A written order issued by the A/E which clarifies or explains the plans or specifications, or any portion or detail thereof, without changing the design, the Contract Price, the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. Final Payment: The final payment that the Contractor receives pursuant to the applicable provisions of Section 36, except in the event no final payment is made due to termination of the Contract under either Sections 41 or 42. In the event of a termination for cause under Section 41, the Final Payment shall be when the termination became effective. In the event of a termination for convenience under Section 42, the Final Payment shall be either the payment of compensation for termination that the Contractor receives according to the provisions of Subsection 42, or the Owner’s determination that no compensation for termination is due the Contractor under Subsection 42, as the case may be. Float: The excess time included in a construction schedule to accommodate such items as inclement weather and associated delays, equipment failures, and other such unscheduled events. It is the contingency time associated with a path or chain of activities and represents the amount of time by which the early finish date of an activity may be delayed without impacting the critical path and delaying the overall completion of the Project. Any difference in time between the Contractor's approved early completion date and the Contract Completion Date shall be considered a part of the Project float. Float, Free: The time (in days) by which an activity may be delayed or lengthened without impacting upon the start day of any activity following in the chain. Float, Total: The difference (in days) between the maximum time available within which to perform an activity and the duration of an activity. It represents the time by which an activity may be delayed or lengthened without impacting the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. Notice: All written notices, including demands, instructions, claims, approvals and disapprovals, required or authorized under the Contract Documents. Any written notice by either party to the Contract shall be

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

5

sufficiently given by any one or combination of the following, whichever shall first occur: (1) delivered by hand to the last known business address of the person to whom the notice is due; (2) delivered by hand to the person's authorized agent, representative or officer wherever they may be found; or (3) enclosed in a postage prepaid envelope addressed to such last known business address and delivered to a United States Postal Service official or mailbox. Notice is effective upon such delivery. All notices to the Owner should be directed to the Project Manager. If the Owner and the Contractor agree in writing that Notices transmitted by Facsimile (Fax) or e-mail are acceptable for the Project, such Notice shall be transmitted to the Fax number or e-mail address listed in the agreement and shall have a designated space for the Fax or e-mail Notice recipient to acknowledge his receipt by authorized signature and date. The Fax or e-mail Notice with authorized signature acknowledging receipt shall be Faxed or e-mailed back to the sender. The Faxed or e-mailed Notice shall be effective on the date it is acknowledged by authorized signature. All Faxed or e-mailed Notices shall also be sent by hard copy, which shall be effective upon delivery, as provided herein. Notice shall be effective upon the date of acknowledgment of the Faxed or e-mailed Notice or the date of delivery, whichever occurs first.

Notice to Proceed: A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor (with a copy to A/E) fixing the date on which the Contract time will commence for the Contractor to begin the prosecution of the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Notice to Proceed will customarily identify a Contract Completion Date. Owner: The public body with whom the Contractor has entered into a contractual agreement and for whom the Work or services is to be provided. The term "Owner", as used herein, shall also mean the Agency. Person: This term includes any individual, corporation, partnership, association, company, business, trust, joint venture, or other legal entity. Plans: The term used to describe the group or set of project-specific drawings which are included in the Contract Documents. Project: The term used instead of the specific or proper assigned title of the entire undertaking which includes, but is not limited to, the "Work" described by the Contract Documents. Project Inspector: One or more persons employed by the Owner to inspect the Work for the Owner and/or to document and maintain records of activities at the Site to the extent required by the Owner. The Owner shall notify the Contractor in writing of the appointment of such Project Inspector(s). The scope of the Project Inspector's authority with respect to the Contractor is limited to that indicated in Section 16 (e) and (f) and as supplemented by the Owner in writing to the Project Inspector and to the Contractor. Project Manager: The Project Manager as used herein shall be the Owner's designated representative on the Project. The Project Manager shall be the person through whom the Owner generally conveys written decisions and notices. All notices due the Owner and all information required to be conveyed to the Owner shall be conveyed to the Project Manager. The scope of the Project Manager's authority is limited to that authorized by the Owner, who shall provide written information to the Contractor at the Preconstruction meeting defining those limits. Upon receipt of such information, the Contractor shall be on notice that it cannot rely on any decisions of the Project Manager outside the scope of his authority. Nothing herein shall be construed to prevent the Owner from issuing any notice directly to the Contractor. The Owner may change the Project Manager from time to time and may, in the event that the Project Manager is absent, disabled or otherwise temporarily unable to fulfill his duties, appoint an interim Project Manager. Provide: Shall mean furnish and install ready for its intended use.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

6

Schedule of Values: The schedule prepared by the Contractor and acceptable to the Owner which indicates the value of that portion of the Contract Price to be paid for each trade or major component of the Work. Site: Shall mean the location at which the Work is performed or is to be performed. Specifications: That part of the Contract Documents containing the written administrative requirements and the technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards, and workmanship which describe the proposed Work in sufficient detail and provide sufficient information for the Building Official to determine code compliance and for the Contractor to perform the Work. (The General Conditions, any Supplemental General Conditions, various bidding information and instructions, and blank copies of various forms to be used during the execution of the Work are usually bound with the Specifications.) Subcontractor: A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of the Work. Subcontractor includes any person who provides on-site labor but does not include any person who only furnishes or supplies materials for the Project. Submittals: All shop, fabrication, setting and installation drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, samples, and other data required by the Contract Documents which are specifically prepared by or for the Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a Supplier and submitted by the Contractor to illustrate material or equipment conformance of some portion of the Work with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Substantial Completion: The condition when the Owner agrees that the Work, or a specific portion thereof, is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that it can be utilized by the Owner for the purposes for which it was intended. The Owner at its sole discretion may, after obtaining the necessary approvals and certificates, take Beneficial Occupancy at this time or choose to wait to occupy until after Final Completion is achieved. Supplemental General Conditions: That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements the General Conditions. Supplier: A manufacturer, fabricator, distributor, material-man or vendor who provides material for the Project but does not provide on-site labor. Small Business Procurement Plan: The proposed percentage of small business participation in the Total Base Bid Amount submitted by the Contractor as part of its Bid. Time for Completion: The number of consecutive calendar days following the Date of Commencement which the Contractor has to substantially complete all Work required by the Contract. Underground Facilities: All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which are or have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal, traffic or other control systems or water. Work: The services performed under this Contract including, but not limited to, furnishing labor, and furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction. The Work also includes the entire completed construction, or the various separately identifiable parts thereof, required to be provided under the Contract Documents or which may reasonably be expected to be provided as part of a complete, code compliant and functioning system for those systems depicted in the plans and specifications.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

7

2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

(a) The Contract Between Owner and Contractor (CO-9), the Workers' Compensation Certificate of Coverage (CO-9a), the Standard Performance Bond (CO-10), the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond (CO-10.1), the Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (CO-12), the Affidavit of Payments of Claims (CO-13), the Contractor's Certificate of Substantial Completion (CO-13.2a), and the Contractor's Certificate of Completion (CO-13.2) issued by the Commonwealth of Virginia are forms incorporated in these General Conditions by reference and are made a part hereof to the same extent as though fully set forth herein. They must be used by the Contractor for their respective purposes.

(b) All time limits stated in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the Time for

Completion of the Work, are of the essence of the Contract. (c) The Contract Between Owner and Contractor shall be signed by the Owner and the Contractor in

as many original counterparts as may be mutually agreed upon, each of which shall be considered an original.

(d) Anything called for by one of the Contract Documents and not called for by the others shall be of

like effect as if required or called for by all, except that a provision clearly designed to negate or alter a provision contained in one or more of the other Contract Documents shall have the intended effect. In the event of conflicts among the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall take precedence in the following order: the Contract between Owner and Contractor; the Supplemental General Conditions; the General Conditions; the Special Conditions; the specifications with attachments; and the plans.

(e) If any provision of this Contract shall be held invalid by any court of competent jurisdiction, such

holding shall not invalidate any other provision. (f) All correspondence, invoices, memoranda, submittals and other documents related to this Project

whether generated by the Owner, the A/E, the Contractor or others should be identified at the beginning of the document with the eleven digit (XXX-XXXXX-XXX) Project Code Number. Additional identification such as a job number, purchase order number or such may also be shown at the generator's option.

3. LAWS AND REGULATIONS

(a) The Contractor shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work and shall give all notices required thereby. The Contractor shall assure that all Subcontractors and tradesmen who perform Work on the project are properly licensed by the Department of Professional and Occupational Regulation as required by Title 54.1, Chapter 11, Articles 1 and 3 and by applicable regulations.

(b) This Contract and all other contracts and subcontracts are subject to the provisions of Articles 3

and 5, Chapter 4, Title 40.1, Code of Virginia, relating to labor unions and the "right to work." The Contractor and its Subcontractors, whether residents or nonresidents of the Commonwealth, who perform any Work related to the Project shall comply with all of the said provisions.

(c) IMMIGRATION REFORM AND CONTROL ACT OF 1986: By signing this Contract, the

Contractor certifies that it does not and will not during the performance of this Contract violate the provisions of the Federal Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986, which prohibits employment of illegal aliens.

(d) E-VERIFY PROGRAM: Pursuant to Code of Virginia, § 2.2-4308.2, any employer with more

than an average of 50 employees for the previous 12 months entering into a contract in excess of

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

8

$50,000 with any agency of the Commonwealth to perform work or provide services pursuant to such contract shall register and participate in the E-Verify program to verify information and work authorization of its newly hired employees performing work pursuant to such public contract. Any such employer who fails to comply with these provisions may be debarred from contracting with any agency of the Commonwealth for a period up to one year. Such debarment may cease upon the employer’s registration and participation in the E-Verify program. If requested, the employer shall present a copy of their Maintain Company page from E-Verify to prove that they are enrolled in E-Verify.

(e) The provisions of all rules and regulations governing safety as adopted by the Safety Codes

Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia and as issued by the Department of Labor and Industry under Title 40.1 of the Code of Virginia shall apply to all Work under this Contract. Inspectors from the Department of Labor and Industry shall be granted access to the Work for inspection without first obtaining a search or administrative warrant.

(f) Building Permit: Because this Project is on Commonwealth of Virginia property, codes or zoning

ordinances of local political subdivisions do not apply to Work on the property. The Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code applies to the Work and is administered by the Building Official for State-owned Buildings. The Building Permit will be obtained and paid for by the Owner. All other permits, local license fees, business fees, taxes, or similar assessments imposed by the appropriate political subdivision and the Department of Environmental Quality shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. See Section 25 for utility connection fees and services.

(g) The Contractor shall include in each of its subcontracts a provision requiring each Subcontractor

to include or otherwise be subject to the same payment and interest requirements in Subsections (a), (b), and (c) of Section 37 of these General Conditions with respect to each lower-tier Subcontractor and Supplier.

(h) The Contractor, if not licensed as an asbestos abatement contractor in accordance with § 54.1-514,

Code of Virginia, shall have all asbestos-related Work performed by subcontractors who are duly licensed as asbestos contractors for the Work required.

(i) Lead Based Paint Activities: If the Contract Documents indicate that lead based paint is present on

existing materials, components, or surfaces, the Contractor shall conform to the following:

(1) The requirements set forth in 59 Federal Register 45,872 (September 2, 1994) Proposed Rule) - Lead; Requirements for Lead based Paint Activities (Proposed Rules) in selecting and performing the means, methods and procedures for performing the Work. This includes, but is not limited to, training of personnel, lead abatement, encapsulation of lead containing materials, removal and handling of lead containing materials, and methods of disposal. When the Final Rule, to be codified at 40 CFR 745, supersedes the Proposed Rule, the Contractor shall be responsible for conforming to the Final Rule, as of the effective date set forth therein.

(2) The requirements for employee protection contained in 29 CFR Part 1926, Subpart D,

and the requirements for record-keeping contained 29 CFR Part 1910. (3) The Virginia Department of Labor and Industry's (DLI) Emergency Regulation published

in the May 27, 1996 Virginia Register, requiring, among other things, that a permit be issued to the lead abatement contractor, or any subsequent regulation issued by DLI.

(j) If the Contractor violates laws or regulations that govern the Project, the Contractor shall take

prompt action to correct or abate such violation and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless against any fines, and/or penalties that result from such violation. To the extent that such violation is the result of negligence or other actionable conduct of the Contractor, the Contractor shall

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

9

indemnify and hold the Owner harmless against any third party claims, suits, awards, actions, causes of action or judgments, including but not limited to attorney's fees and costs incurred thereunder, that arise or result from such violation.

(k) If the Work includes any land disturbing activities, the Contractor shall have on-site an individual

certified by the Department of Environmental Quality as a Responsible Land Disturber in accordance with § 10.1-563, Code of Virginia.

(l) The Contractor is neither required nor prohibited from entering into or adhering to agreements

with one or more labor organizations, or otherwise discriminating against subcontractors for becoming or refusing to become, or remaining signatories to or otherwise adhering to, agreements with one or more labor organizations. This section does not prohibit contractors or subcontractors from voluntarily entering into agreements with one or more labor organizations. Both the agency and contractor are entitled to injunctive relief to prevent any violation of this section.

This section does not apply to any public-private agreement for any construction in which the

private body, as a condition of its investment or partnership with the state agency, requires that the private body have the right to control its labor relations policy and perform all work associated with such investment or partnership in compliance with all collective bargaining agreements to which the private party is a signatory and is thus legally bound with its own employees and the employees of its contractors and subcontractors in any manner permitted by the National Labor Relations Act, 29 U.S.C. § 151 et seq., or the Railway Labor Act, 45 U.S.C. § 151 et seq.

This section does not prohibit an employer or any other person covered by the National Labor

Relations Act or the Railway Labor Act from entering into agreements or engaging in any other activity protected by law.

This section shall not be interpreted to interfere with the labor relations of persons covered by the

National Labor Relations Act or the Railway Labor Act.

4. NONDISCRIMINATION (a) § 2.2-4311 of the Code of Virginia shall be applicable. It provides as follows:

1. During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows:

a. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age, disability, or other basis prohibited by state law relating to discrimination in employment, except where there is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of the contractor. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.

b. The Contractor, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, will state that such Contractor is an equal opportunity employer.

c. Notices, advertisements and solicitations placed in accordance with federal law, rule or regulation shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of meeting the requirements of this section.

2. The Contractor will include the provisions of the foregoing paragraphs a, b and c in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.”

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

10

(b) Where applicable, the Virginians with Disabilities Act and the federal Americans with Disabilities Act shall apply to the Contractor and all Subcontractors.

5. PROHIBITION OF ALCOHOL AND OTHER DRUGS

(a) § 2.2-4312 of the Code of Virginia shall be applicable. It provides as follows:

“During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees to (i) provide a drug-free workplace for the contractor's employees; (ii) post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of a controlled substance or marijuana is prohibited in the contractor's workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition; (iii) state in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor that the contractor maintains a drug-free workplace; and (iv) include the provisions of the foregoing clauses in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. For the purposes of this section, "drug-free workplace" means a site for the performance of work done in connection with a specific contract awarded to a contractor in accordance with this chapter, the employees of whom are prohibited from engaging in the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession or use of any controlled substance or marijuana during the performance of the contract.”

(b) The Contractor shall also establish, maintain and enforce policies which prohibit the following acts by all Contractor, Subcontractor and Supplier personnel at the Site: (1) The manufacture, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of alcohol, marijuana or

other drugs, except possession and medically prescribed use of prescription drugs; and (2) The impairment of judgment or physical abilities due to the use of alcohol, marijuana or

other drugs, including impairment from prescription drugs. 6. TIME FOR COMPLETION

(a) The Time for Completion shall be designated by the Owner on the Invitation for Bids, Request for

Proposals, or other prebid/proposal documents. In some instances, the Time for Completion may be stated on the Invitation for Bids, Request for Proposals, or other prebid/pre-proposal document in the form of a Contract Completion Date. The Work must be substantially completed by the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall achieve Final Completion within thirty (30) days after the date of Substantial Completion.

(b) The Time for Completion shall be stated in the Contract between Owner and Contractor and shall

become a binding part of the Contract upon which the Owner may rely in planning the use of the facilities to be constructed and for all other purposes. If the Contractor fails to substantially complete the Work within the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, as set forth in the Contract, he shall be subject to payment of actual damages incurred by the Owner or liquidated damages, if provided for in the Contract.

(c) The Contractor, in submitting his bid or proposal, acknowledges that he has taken into

consideration normal weather conditions. Normal weather does not mean statistically average weather, but rather means a range of weather patterns which might be anticipated based on weather data for the past ten (10) years, (i.e., conditions which are not extremely unusual). Normal weather conditions shall be determined from the public historical records available, including the U.S. Department of Commerce, Local Climatological Data Sheets, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration / Environmental Data and Information Service, National Climatic Center and National Weather Service. The data sheets to be used shall be those for the locality or localities closest to the site of the work. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor because of adverse weather conditions; however, an extension of time for abnormal weather will

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

11

be considered by the Owner under the following conditions, all of which must be strictly complied with by the contractor:

(1) The request for additional time shall be further substantiated by weather data collected

during the period of delay at the Site. Said data must demonstrate that an actual departure from normal weather occurred at the Site during the dates in question.

(2) The extension requested must be supported by a delay in completion of the entire Project

shown on the critical path of the accepted CPM Schedule or the approved bar graph schedule required for the Project. Extensions will be granted only for delays in completion of the Project, not for that portion of any delay which consumes only "float" time.

(3) A request for extension of time based on abnormal weather must be made in writing

within fourteen (14) calendar days of the completion of the calendar month during which abnormal weather is claimed at the Site.

(4) All of the evidence and data supporting the request (including both historical data and the

recordings at the Site during the time of delay) must be furnished to the Owner before any consideration will be given to the request. That supporting data shall be submitted by the end of the calendar month following the month for which the request is made.

(d) The failure by the Contractor to comply with any and all of the conditions in (c) above shall

constitute a waiver of claims for the extension of time for abnormal weather. (e) The Contractor represents and agrees that he has taken into account in his bid the requirements of

the bid documents, the Contract Documents, local conditions, availability of materials, equipment, and labor, and any other factors which may affect the performance of the Work. The Contractor agrees and warrants that he will achieve Substantial Completion of the Work to allow the Owner to have Beneficial Occupancy not later than the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date. The Contractor agrees and warrants that he will achieve Final Completion of the Work (the entire completion of all Work, including "punch list" items), not later than thirty (30) days after achieving Substantial Completion.

7. CONDITIONS AT SITE

(a) The Contractor shall have visited the Site prior to bidding or submitting its proposal and is totally responsible for having ascertained pertinent local conditions such as location, accessibility and general character of the Site, and the character and extent of existing conditions, improvements and work within or adjacent to the Site. Claims, which result from the Contractor's failure to do so, will be deemed waived.

(b) If, in the performance of the Contract, hidden physical conditions of a building being modified are

exposed revealing unusual or materially different conditions from those ordinarily encountered or inherent in work of this nature, or if subsurface or latent conditions at the Site are found which are materially different from those frequently present in the locality or from those indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor must report such conditions to the Owner and to the Architect/Engineer before the conditions are disturbed. Upon such notice, or upon his own observation of such conditions, the Architect/Engineer shall promptly propose such changes in the Contract Documents as he finds necessary to conform to the different conditions. Any change in the cost of the Work or additional time needed for completion must be requested pursuant to Sections 38, 39 and/or 43 of these General Conditions.

(c) If the Contractor, during the course of the Work, observes the existence of any material which he

knows, should know, or has reason to believe is hazardous to human health, the Contractor shall

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

12

promptly notify the Owner. The Owner will provide the Contractor with instructions regarding the disposition of the material. The Contractor shall not perform any Work involving the material or any Work causing the material to be less accessible prior to receipt of special instructions from the Owner.

8. CONTRACT SECURITY

(a) For contracts with a value exceeding five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000), the Contractor

shall deliver to the Owner or its designated representative, a Commonwealth of Virginia Standard Performance Bond, DGS-30-084 (Form CO-10) and a Commonwealth of Virginia Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond, DGS-30-088 (Form CO-10.1) each fully executed by the Contractor and one or more surety companies legally licensed to do business in Virginia and each in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the accepted bid or proposal. If more than one Surety executes a bond, each shall be jointly and severally liable to the Owner for the entire amount of the bond. Sureties shall be selected by the Contractor, subject to approval by the Owner. No payment on the Contract shall be due and payable to the Contractor until the bonds have been approved by the Owner and the Office of the Attorney General of Virginia. In order to facilitate review of the bonds by the Office of the Attorney General, the power of attorney from the surety company to its agent who executes the bond shall be attached to the bond, or, if not so attached, prior to the execution of the bonds by the surety, recorded in the Office of the Clerk of Court for the City of Richmond, Virginia, at the John Marshall Court Building, 400 North Ninth Street, except when the Owner is one of the following, in which case the power of attorney must be recorded with the Clerk of Court in the place shown:

OWNER PLACE OF RECORDATION University of Virginia City of Charlottesville Old Dominion University City of Norfolk Norfolk State University City of Norfolk Christopher Newport University City of Newport News Virginia Polytechnic Institute County of Montgomery and State University

(b) For the purposes of all Standard Labor and Material Payment Bonds entered into, the term

"subcontractors" as used in § 2.2-4337(A)(2) of the Code of Virginia is interpreted to mean any contractors who participated in the prosecution of the Work undertaken by the Contractor (referred to in § 2.2-4337(A)(2) of the Code of Virginia as the "prime contractor"), whether such contractor had a direct contract with the Contractor (prime contractor) or whether there were one or more other intervening Subcontractors contractually positioned between it and the Contractor (prime contractor).

(c) See § 2.2-4338 of the Code of Virginia, for alternative forms of security for payment and/or

performance bonds. (d) For contracts with a value of less than five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000), the Contractor

will not be required to provide a Standard Performance Bond and a Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond as described above unless the Invitation for Bid or Request for Proposal states that such bonds will be required.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

13

9. SUBCONTRACTS

(a) The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the signing of the Contract, notify the Owner and Architect/Engineer in writing of the names of all Subcontractors proposed for the principal parts of the Work and of such others as the Architect/Engineer may direct. Where the specifications establish qualifications or criteria for Subcontractors, manufacturers, or individuals performing Work on the Project, the Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining that those proposed meet the criteria or qualifications. The Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor that the Owner may, within a reasonable time, object to as unsuitable. Neither the Owner nor the Architect/Engineer shall direct the Contractor to contract with any particular Subcontractor unless provided in the specifications or Invitation for Bids or Request for Proposal.

(b) The Owner may select a particular Subcontractor for a certain part of the Work and designate on

the Invitation for Bids or Request for Proposal that the Subcontractor shall be used for the part of the Work indicated and that the Subcontractor has agreed to perform the Work for the subcontract amount stipulated on the bid or Proposal form. The Contractor shall include the stipulated amount plus his Contractor markups in the bid or Proposal. In such case, the Contractor shall be responsible for that Subcontractor and its work and the Subcontractor shall be responsible to the Contractor for its work just as if the Contractor had selected the Subcontractor. If the Contractor has a reasonable objection to the Subcontractor being assigned, then the Contractor shall note the exception in his bid or proposal and the reason for the exception and maintain appropriate provisions for coordinating the work of the Subcontractor. The Owner, at its sole discretion, may accept the Contractor’s bid or proposal with the exception noted and contract separately with the Subcontractor under the provisions Section 10 of the contract or assign a different Subcontractor.

(c) The Owner shall, on request, furnish to any Subcontractor, if practicable, the amounts of payments

made to the Contractor, the Schedule of Values and Requests for Payment submitted by the Contractor and any other documentation submitted by the Contractor which would tend to show what amounts are due and payable by the Contractor to the Subcontractor.

(d) The Contractor shall be fully responsible to the Owner for all acts and omissions of his agents and

employees and all succeeding tiers of Subcontractors and Suppliers performing or furnishing any of the Work. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between Owner or Architect/Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Architect/Engineer to pay for or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, except as may otherwise be required by law.

(e) The Contractor shall be fully responsible for his invitees at the Site and for those of his

Subcontractors, Suppliers, and their employees, including any acts or omissions of such invitees. (f) The Contractor agrees that he alone is responsible for all dealings with his Subcontractors and

Suppliers, and their subcontractors, employees and invitees, including, but not limited to, the Subcontractors' or Suppliers' claims, demands, actions, disputes and similar matters unless specifically provided otherwise by the Contract or by statute.

10. SEPARATE CONTRACTS

(a) The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with the Project, the Work under which may proceed simultaneously with the execution of this Contract. The Contractor shall afford other separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work. The Contractor shall cooperate with them and shall take all reasonable action to coordinate his Work with theirs. If the Owner has listed other separate contracts in the Invitation for Bids or Requests for Proposal which it expects to proceed simultaneously with the Work of the Contractor, and has included the estimated timing of such

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

14

other Contracts in the Invitation for Bids or Requests for Proposal, the Contractor shall integrate the schedule of those separate contracts into his scheduling. The Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to assist the Owner in maintaining the schedule for all separate contracts. If the work performed by the separate contractor is defective or performed so as to prevent or threaten to prevent the Contractor from carrying out his Work according to the Contract, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer upon discovering such conditions.

(b) If a dispute arises between the Contractor and any separate contractor(s) as to their responsibility

for cleaning up as required by Sections 31 (c) and 31 (d) of these General Conditions, the Owner may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the respective contractors in proportion to their responsibility. If a Contractor disputes the Owner's apportionment of clean-up costs, it shall be that contractor's burden to demonstrate and prove the correct apportionment.

11. CONTRACTOR'S AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE

(a) The Contractor shall not commence Work under this Contract until he has obtained all the insurance required hereunder from an insurer authorized to do business in Virginia and such insurance has been approved by the Owner; nor shall the Contractor allow any Subcontractor to commence Work on his subcontract until the same types of insurance in an appropriate amount have been obtained by the Subcontractor and approved by the Contractor. Approval of insurance by the Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of the Contractor hereunder.

(b) The Contractor shall take out, and shall maintain in force at all times during the performance of

the Work, Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance for all of his employees engaged in the Work in an amount not less than the minimum required by § 2.2-4332 and § 65.2-100 et seq. of the Code of Virginia. In case any of the Work is sublet, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor similarly to provide Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance for all of the latter's employees to be engaged in the Work. Prior to award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit, on the form provided by the Owner, a Certificate of Coverage verifying Workers' Compensation. The Contractor shall likewise obtain a Certificate of Coverage for Workers' Compensation coverage from each subcontractor prior to awarding the subcontract and shall provide a copy to the Owner.

(c) During the performance of the Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain

commercial general liability insurance to include Premises / Operations Liability, Products and Completed Operations Coverage, Independent Contractor's Liability, Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability, and Personal Injury Liability, which shall insure him against claims of personal injury, including death, as well as against claims for property damage, which may arise from operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. The amounts of general liability insurance shall be not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate combined limit. The Commonwealth of Virginia, its officers, employees and agents, shall be named as an additional insured with respect to the Work being procured. The Supplemental General Conditions may require the Contractor to provide an Umbrella insurance policy in a specified amount for the Project.

(d) During the performance of the Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain automobile

liability insurance which shall insure him against claims of personal injury, including death, as well as against claims for property damage, which may arise from operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. The amounts of automobile insurance shall be not less than $1,000,000 combined limit for bodily injury and property damage per occurrence.

(e) The Asbestos Contractor or Subcontractor, as the case may be, shall provide occurrence-based

liability insurance with asbestos coverages in an amount not less than $1,000,000 and shall name

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

15

the following as additional insureds: The Commonwealth of Virginia, its officers, its employees and its agents; the Architect/Engineer (if not the Asbestos Project Designer); and the Contractor (where the asbestos work is being performed by the Asbestos Subcontractor).

12. "ALL RISK" BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE

(a) Contractor Controlled During Construction: The Contractor, at his cost, shall obtain and maintain in the names of the Owner and the Contractor "all-risk" builder's risk insurance (or fire, extended coverage, vandalism and malicious mischief insurance, if approved by the Owner and the Director, Division of Engineering and Buildings) upon the entire structure or structures on which the Work of this Contract is to be done and upon all material in or adjacent thereto which is intended for use thereon, to one hundred percent (100%) of the insurable value thereof (i.e. construction costs, soft costs, FF&E, and the residual value of the existing structure to remain). Such insurance may include a deductible provision if the Owner so provides in the Supplemental General Conditions, in which case the Contractor will be liable for such deductions, whenever a claim arises. The loss, if any, is to be made adjustable with and payable to the Owner, in accordance with its interests, as they may appear. The Owner, its officers, employees and its agents, shall be named as an additional insured in any policy of insurance issued. Written evidence of the insurance shall be filed with the Owner no later than thirty (30) days following the award of the Contract. In the event of cancellation of this insurance, not less than thirty (30) days prior written notice must be sent to the Owner. A copy of the policy of insurance shall be given to the Owner upon demand.

(b) Owner Controlled During Construction: The Owner maintains insurance coverage on its

buildings. On re-roofing, renovation, and interior modifications of existing building projects where the Owner continues to occupy the building, or a portion thereof, while the Work is being performed, the Contractor shall provide “all risk” builders risk insurance, as described above, in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the cost of the Work (i.e. construction costs, soft costs, and FF&E costs). In those instances, the Contract between the Owner and Contractor for the project shall expressly exclude the project from the requirements of Subsection 12(a). The Contractor is responsible for providing any desired coverage for Contractor's or Subcontractors' buildings, equipment, materials, tools or supplies that are on-site.

(c) The value of the builder's risk insurance shall exclude the costs of excavations, backfills,

foundations, underground utilities and sitework. (d) Any insurance provided through the Department of Treasury, Division of Risk Management, on

buildings, construction, additions or renovations will not extend to Contractor's nor Subcontractors' buildings, equipment, materials, tools or supplies unless these items are to become property of the Owner upon completion of the Project and the Owner has assumed responsibility for such items at the time of the loss.

13. TAXES, FEES AND ASSESSMENTS

The Contractor shall, without additional expense to the Owner, pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes, fees, and assessments except the taxes, fees and assessments on the real property comprising the Site of the project. If the State Building Official elects to have the local building official inspect the Work as provided by § 36-98.1 of the Code of Virginia, the Owner shall pay the resulting fees to the local building official.

14. PATENTS

The Contractor shall obtain all licenses necessary to use any invention, article, appliance, process or technique of whatever kind and shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall hold the Owner, its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any loss or liability for or on account of the

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

16

infringement of any patent rights in connection with any invention, process, technique, article or appliance manufactured or used in the performance of the Contract, including its use by the Owner, unless such invention, process, technique, article or appliance is specifically named in the specifications or plans as acceptable for use in carrying out the Work. If, before using any invention, process, technique, article or appliance specifically named in the specifications or plans as acceptable for use in carrying out the Work, the Contractor has or acquires information that the same is covered by letters of patent making it necessary to secure the permission of the patentee, or other, for the use of the same, he shall promptly advise the Owner and the Architect/Engineer. The Owner may direct that some other invention, process, technique, article or appliance be used. Should the Contractor have reason to believe that the invention, process, technique, article or appliance so specified is an infringement of a patent, and fail to inform the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, he shall be responsible for any loss or liability due to the infringement.

15. ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S STATUS

(a) The Architect/Engineer shall have authority to endeavor to secure the faithful performance by Owner and Contractor of the Work under the Contract. He shall review the Contractor's Submittals for conformance to the requirements of the Contract Documents and return copies to the Contractor with appropriate notations. He shall interpret the requirements of the plans and specifications and issue Field Orders to the Contractor as may be required. He shall recommend to the Owner suspension of the Work (in whole or in part) whenever such suspension may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the Contract. He shall have authority to reject, in writing, Work, including material, installation or workmanship, which does not conform to the requirements of the plans and specifications. He shall determine the progress and quality of the Work, subject to the right of the Owner to make an overriding decision to the contrary. Upon request by the Contractor, the Architect/Engineer shall confirm, in writing within fourteen (14) days, any oral order or determination made by him.

(b) The Architect/Engineer shall have no authority to approve or order changes in the Work which

alter the design concept or which call for an extension of time or a change in the Contract Price. (c) Although the Owner is bound by the terms of the Contract with the Contractor, including the plans

and specifications, the Owner shall have the right, but not the duty, to countermand any decision of the Architect/Engineer and to follow or reject the advice of the Architect/Engineer, including but not limited to acceptance of the Work, as it deems best. In those instances where the Architect/Engineer has been given authority to act, the Architect/Engineer shall promptly do so, but in the case of disagreement between the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, the decision of the Owner shall be final. The Contractor shall not be bound by any determination, interpretation or decision of the Architect/Engineer, if it is later determined that the same is not in accord with the Contract Documents. The party taking issue with the determination, interpretation or decision of the Architect/Engineer shall give the other party written notice of such fact within fourteen (14) days after the determination, interpretation or decision is communicated by the Architect/Engineer. In the actual performance of the Work, however, the Contractor shall, in the first instance, proceed in accordance with instructions given by the Architect/Engineer unless the Owner and the Contractor mutually agree that the Contractor shall proceed otherwise.

(d) All orders from the Owner to the Contractor shall either be transmitted through the

Architect/Engineer or communicated directly to the Contractor and the Architect/Engineer by the Owner.

(e) Should the Owner choose to employ another or different Architect/Engineer, the status of the

Architect/Engineer so employed shall be the same as that of the former Architect/Engineer. (f) The Architect/Engineer will provide to the Owner and the Contractor after each visit to the Site, a

written report indicating the date, time of day, weather conditions and the names of the persons representing the Architect/Engineer who participated in the visit. The report will advise the Owner

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

17

of any problems that were noted and shall compare the Architect/Engineer's observations of the actual progress of the Work with that reported by the Contractor. On the basis of his on-Site observations as Architect/Engineer, he will make every reasonable effort to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the Contractor. He shall have the authority to inspect the Work, to note and report Defective Work and deviations from the Contract Documents to the Owner, to reject same, and to recommend to the Owner the suspension of the Work when necessary to prevent Defective Work from proceeding or being covered.

(g) The Architect/Engineer shall not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques,

sequences or procedures (other than those expressly specified in Contract Documents), or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, and he shall not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Contractor's own responsibilities.

(h) The Architect/Engineer generally conveys written decisions and notices to the Contractor through

the Project Manager and shall generally receive information and Notices from the Contractor through the Project Manager unless otherwise agreed. The Owner may delegate from the Architect/Engineer to the Project Manager certain inspection, verification, acceptance, rejection, and administrative duties and authority, but any such delegation shall be in writing and a copy thereof provided to the Contractor.

(i) The provisions of this section are included as information only to describe the relationship

between the Owner, A/E, and Contractor. No failure of the A/E to act in accordance with this section shall relieve the Contractor from his obligations under the Contract or create any rights in favor of the Contractor.

16. INSPECTION

(a) All material and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination and testing by the Owner, the Architect/Engineer, the Project Inspector, authorized inspectors and authorized independent testing entities at any and all times during manufacture and/or construction. The Architect/Engineer and the Owner shall have authority to reject defective material and workmanship and require its correction. Rejected workmanship shall be satisfactorily corrected and rejected material shall be satisfactorily replaced with proper material without charge therefor, and the Contractor shall promptly segregate and remove the rejected material from the Site. If the Contractor fails to proceed at once with replacement of rejected material and/or the correction of defective workmanship, the Owner may, by contract or otherwise, replace such material and/or correct such workmanship and charge the cost to the Contractor, or may terminate the right of the Contractor to proceed as provided in Section 41 of these General Conditions, the Contractor and surety being liable for any damage to the same extent as provided in Section 41 for termination thereunder.

(b) Site inspections, tests conducted on Site or tests of materials gathered on Site, which the Contract

requires to be performed by independent testing entities, shall be contracted and paid for by the Owner. Examples of such tests are the testing of cast-in-place concrete, foundation materials, soil compaction, pile installations, caisson bearings and steel framing connections. The Contractor shall promptly furnish, without additional charge, all reasonable facilities, labor and materials necessary and convenient for making such tests. Except as provided in (d) below, whenever such examination and testing finds defective materials, equipment or workmanship, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of reexamination and retesting. Although conducted by independent testing entities, the Owner will not contract and pay for tests or certifications of materials, manufactured products or assemblies which the Contract, codes, standards, etc., require to be tested and/or certified for compliance with industry standards such as Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or ASTM. If fees are charged for such tests and certifications, they shall be paid by the Contractor. The Contractor shall also pay for all inspections, tests, and certifications which the Contract specifically requires him to perform or to pay, together with any

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

18

inspections and tests which he chooses to perform for his own purposes, but are not required by the Contract.

(c) Where Work is related to or dependent on the Defective Work, the Contractor shall stop such

related or dependent Work until the Defective Work or deficiency is corrected or an alternative solution is presented that is satisfactory to the Owner. Where Work is rejected because of defective material or workmanship, the Contractor shall stop like Work in other areas or locations on the Project until the matter is resolved and the Owner has approved corrective measures.

(d) Should it be considered necessary or advisable by Owner or the Architect/Engineer at any time

before final acceptance of the entire Work to make an examination of any part of the Work already completed, by removing or tearing out portions of the Work, the Contractor shall on request promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor and material to expose the Work to be tested to the extent required. If such Work is found to be defective in any respect, due to the fault of the Contractor or his Subcontractors, the Contractor shall bear all the expenses of uncovering the Work, of examination and testing, and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such Work is found to meet the requirements of the Contract, the actual cost of the Contractor's labor and material necessarily involved in uncovering the Work, the cost of examination and testing, and Contractor's cost of material and labor necessary for replacement including a markup of fifteen (15%) percent for overhead and profit shall be paid to the Contractor and he shall, in addition, if completion of the Work has been delayed thereby, be granted a suitable extension of time. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs and expenses in removing and replacing the Work if the Contractor had covered the Work prior to any inspection or test contrary to the instructions of the A/E, Owner or Project Inspector.

(e) The Project Inspector has the authority to recommend to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner

that the Work be suspended when in his judgment the Contract Documents are not being followed. Any such suspension shall be continued only until the matter in question is resolved to the satisfaction of the Owner. The cost of any such Work stoppage shall be borne by the Contractor unless it is later determined that no fault existed in the Contractor's Work.

(f) The Project Inspector has the right and the authority to:

(1) Inspect all construction materials, equipment, and supplies for quality and for compliance with the Contract Documents and/or approved shop drawings and Submittals.

(2) Inspect workmanship for compliance with the standards described in the Contract

Documents.

(3) Observe and report on all tests and inspections performed by the Contractor.

(4) Recommend rejection of Work which does not conform to requirements of the Contract Documents.

(5) Keep a record of construction activities, tests, inspections, and reports. (6) Attend all joint Site construction meetings and inspections held by the Owner and/or the

A/E with the Contractor. (7) Check materials and equipment, together with documentation related thereto, delivered

for conformance with approved Submittals and the Contract. (8) Check installations for proper workmanship and conformance with shop drawing and

installation instructions.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

19

(9) Assist in the review and verification of the CO-12, Schedule of Values & Certificate for Payment, submitted by the Contractor each month.

(10) Do all things for or on behalf of the Owner as the Owner may subsequently direct in

writing. (g) The Project Inspector has no authority to:

(1) Authorize deviations from the Contract Documents;

(2) Enter into the area of responsibility of the Contractor's superintendent;

(3) Issue directions relative to any aspect of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or in regard to safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work;

(4) Authorize or suggest that the Owner occupy the Project, in whole or in part; or (5) Issue a certificate for payment.

(h) The duties of the Project Inspector are for the benefit of the Owner only and not for the

Contractor. The Contractor may not rely upon any act, statement, or failure to act on the part of the Project Inspector, nor shall the failure of the Project Inspector to properly perform his duties in any way excuse Defective Work or otherwise improper performance of the Contract by the Contractor.

17. SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR

(a) The Contractor shall have a competent foreman or superintendent, satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, on the Site at all times during the progress of the Work. The superintendent or foreman shall be familiar with and be able to read and understand the plans and specifications, and be capable of communicating orally and in writing with the Owner's inspectors and the Contractor's workers. The Contractor shall be responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract except where otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, and for all safety and worker health programs and practices. The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing, of any proposed change in superintendent, including the reason therefor, prior to making such change.

(b) The Contractor shall, at all times, enforce strict discipline and good order among the workers on

the Project, and shall not employ on the Work, or contract with, any unfit person, anyone not skilled in the Work assigned to him, or anyone who will not work in harmony with those employed by the Contractor, the Subcontractors, the Owner or the Owner's separate contractors and their subcontractors.

(c) The Owner may, in writing, require the Contractor to remove from the Site any employee or

Subcontractor's employee the Owner deems to be incompetent, careless, not working in harmony with others on the Site, or otherwise objectionable, but the Owner shall have no obligation to do so.

18. CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION, METHODS AND PROCEDURES

(a) The Contractor shall be solely responsible for supervising and directing the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, except where otherwise specified in the

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

20

Contract Documents. However, the Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or selection of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is indicated in and required by the Contract. The Contractor is solely responsible to the Owner that the finished Work complies with the Contract Documents.

The Contractor shall be solely responsible for health and safety precautions and programs for workers and others in connection with the Work. No inspection by, knowledge on the part of, or acquiescence by the Architect or Engineer, the Project Inspector, the Owner, the Owner's employees and agents, or any other entity whatever shall relieve the Contractor from its sole responsibility for compliance with the requirements of the Contract or its sole responsibility for health and safety programs and precautions.

(b) If a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is indicated in or

required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, sequence, technique or procedure of construction acceptable to Architect/Engineer, subject to the Owner's right to disapprove. The Contractor must submit its written request for the substitution to the Architect/Engineer with sufficient information to allow the Architect/Engineer to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that indicated or required by the Contract.

(c) The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identification of any drawings shall not

control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade.

19. SCHEDULE OF THE WORK

(a) General: The Contractor is responsible for the scheduling and sequencing of the Work, for coordinating the Work, for monitoring the progress of the Work, and for taking appropriate action to keep the Work on schedule. The Contractor may attempt to achieve Substantial Completion on or before the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date established by the Contract and receive payment in accordance with Section 36 for the Work completed each period. However, the date established by the Contract Documents as the deadline for achieving Substantial Completion must be used in all schedules as the date on which Substantial Completion will be achieved. The time (in days) between the Contractor's planned early completion and the contracted Time for Completion is part of the Project "Total Float" time and will be used as such. Extensions of time pursuant to Sections 38, 39, and 43, damages for delay, and all other matters between the Owner and the Contractor will be determined using the contractually required Substantial Completion date, not an early Substantial Completion date planned by the Contractor.

Within two (2) weeks after the Contractor signs the Contract Between Owner and Contractor, unless otherwise extended by the Owner at the time of the signing, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner, with a copy to the Architect/Engineer, a preliminary bar graph schedule for accomplishing the Work based upon the Time for Completion stated in the Contract. The preliminary schedule shall be in sufficient detail to show the sequencing of the various trades for each floor level, wing or work area. The Owner will notify the Contractor of its acceptance of or objections to the preliminary schedule within fifteen (15) days of receipt by the Owner. A fully complete Project schedule for accomplishing the Work must be submitted in like manner no later than sixty (60) days after the Contract is signed by the Owner.

The Owner's failure to reject or its acceptance of any schedule, graph, chart, recovery schedule, updated schedule, plan of action, etc. shall not constitute a representation or warranty by the Owner, including but not limited to a representation or warranty that the schedule is feasible or practical nor shall any such acceptance or failure to reject relieve the Contractor from sole responsibility for completing the Work within the time allowed.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

21

No progress payments will be payable to the Contractor until after it has submitted a preliminary schedule which is acceptable to the Owner. Neither the second progress payment nor any subsequent payment shall be payable to the Contractor until it has submitted a fully complete Project schedule accepted by the Owner. Nor shall subsequent progress payments be payable to the Contractor unless and until he submits the monthly bar graphs or status reports required by Section 19(d) herein or unless and until he provides any recovery schedule pursuant to Section 19(e) herein.

Failure to provide a satisfactory preliminary or fully complete Project schedule within the time limits stated above shall be a breach of contract for which the Owner may terminate the Contract in the manner provided in Section 41 of these General Conditions.

The fully complete Project schedule for accomplishing the Work shall be of the type set forth in subparagraph (1) or (2) below, as appropriate:

(1) For Contracts with a price of $1,500,000 or less, a bar graph schedule will satisfy the

above requirement. The schedule shall indicate the estimated starting and completion dates for each major element of the work. See (b) below.

(2) For Contracts with a price over $1,500,000, a Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule shall

be utilized to control the planning and scheduling of the Work. The CPM schedule shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be paid for by the Contractor. See (c) below.

(b) Bar Graph Schedule: Where a bar graph schedule is required, it shall be time-scaled in weekly

increments, shall indicate the estimated starting and completion dates for each major element of the Work by trade and by area, level, or zone, and shall schedule dates for all salient features, including but not limited to the placing of orders for materials, submission of shop drawings and other Submittals for approval, approval of shop drawings by Architect/Engineer, the manufacture and delivery of material, the testing and the installation of materials, supplies and equipment, and all Work activities to be performed by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall allow sufficient time in his schedule for the A/E to conduct whatever associated reviews or inspections as may be required under the A/E's contract with the Owner. If the A/E and the Contractor are unable to agree as to what constitutes sufficient time, the Owner shall determine the appropriate duration for such Architect/Engineer activities. Each Work activity will be assigned a time estimate by the Contractor. One day shall be the smallest time unit used.

It is the Contractor's responsibility to submit a schedule that shows Substantial Completion of the Work by the Contract Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date and any interim deadlines established by the Contract.

(c) CPM Schedule: Where a CPM schedule is required, it shall be in the time-scaled precedence

format using the Contractor's logic and time estimates. The CPM schedule shall be drawn or plotted with activities grouped or zoned by Work area or subcontract as opposed to a random (or scattered) format.

The CPM schedule shall be time-scaled on a weekly basis and shall be drawn or plotted at a level of detail and logic which will schedule all salient features of the Work, including not only the actual construction Work for each trade, but also the submission of shop drawings and other Submittals for approval, approval of shop drawings by Architect/Engineer, placing of orders for materials, the manufacture and delivery of materials, the testing and installation of materials and equipment, and all Work activities to be performed by the Contractor. Failure to include any element of Work required for the performance of this Contract shall not excuse the Contractor

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

22

from completing all Work required within the Time for Completion, Contract Completion Date and any interim deadlines established by the Contract.

The Contractor shall allow sufficient time in his schedule for the A/E to conduct whatever associated reviews or inspections as may be required under the A/E's contract with the Owner. If the A/E and the Contractor are unable to agree as to what constitutes sufficient time, the Owner shall determine the appropriate duration for such Architect/Engineer activities. Each Work activity will be assigned a time estimate by the Contractor. One day shall be the smallest time unit used.

It is the Contractor's responsibility to submit a schedule that shows Substantial Completion of the Work by the Contract Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date and any interim deadlines established by the Contract.

When completed, the CPM schedule shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner for review. The CPM schedule will identify and describe each activity, state the duration of each activity, the calendar dates for the early and late start and the early and late finish of each activity, and clearly highlight all activities on the critical path. "Total float" and "free float" shall be indicated for all activities. Float time, whether "free float" or "total float" as defined in Section 1, shall not be considered for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Owner or the Contractor, but must be allocated in the best interest of completing the Work within the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. Extensions to the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date, when granted by Change Order, will be granted only when equitable time adjustment exceeds the Total Float in the activity or path of activities affected by the change provided that the Owner has reasonably provided information necessary to allow for the orderly progression of the Work. On contracts with a price over $5,000,000, the CPM schedule shall also show what part of the Contract Price (expressed in U.S. dollars) is attributable to each activity on the schedule and shall be in agreement with the schedule of values, the sum of which for all activities shall equal the total Contract Price. The CPM schedule shall have no line-item activities longer than thirty (30) days in duration, and activities shall be included to provide sufficient detail for effectively managing the sequence of the Work. When acceptable to the Owner and Architect/Engineer as to compliance with the requirements of this Section, the schedule shall become the CPM schedule for the Project. Acceptance of the schedule by the Owner does not indicate agreement with, nor responsibility for the proposed or actual duration of any activity or logic shown on the accepted schedule.

(d) Monthly Project Reports: The Contractor shall review progress not less than each month, but as

often as necessary to properly manage the Project and stay on schedule. The Contractor shall collect and preserve information on Change Orders, including extensions of time. The Contractor shall evaluate this information and update the latest accepted schedule as often as necessary to finish within the Contract Time for Completion or before the Contract Completion Date. The Contractor shall submit to the A/E along with his monthly request for payment a copy of the bar graph schedule annotated to show the current progress. For projects requiring a CPM schedule, the Contractor shall submit a monthly report of the status of all activities. The bar graph schedule or monthly status report submitted with each periodic request for payment shall show the Work completed to date in comparison with the Work scheduled for completion, including but not limited to the dates for the beginning and completion of the placing of orders; the manufacture, testing and installation of materials, supplies and equipment. The form shall be approved by the A/E and the Owner; however, a bar graph or a CPM schedule marked, colored or annotated to reflect the above will usually satisfy this requirement. If any elements of the Work are behind schedule, regardless of whether they may prevent the Work from being completed on time, the Contractor must indicate in writing in the report what measures he is taking and plans to take to bring each such element back on schedule and to ensure that the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date is not exceeded.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

23

(e) Progress Delay: Should any of the following conditions exist, the Owner may require the Contractor to prepare, at no extra cost to the Owner, a plan of action and a recovery schedule for completing the Work by the Contract Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date:

(1) The Contractor's monthly project report indicates delays that are, in the opinion of the

A/E or the Owner, of sufficient magnitude that the Contractor's ability to complete the Work by the scheduled Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date is brought into question;

(2) The CPM schedule sorted by early finish shows the Contractor to be thirty (30) or more

days behind the critical path schedule at any time during construction up to thirty (30) days prior to scheduled Substantial Completion date;

(3) The Contractor desires to make changes in the logic (sequencing of Work) or the planned

duration of future activities of the CPM schedule which, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or the Owner, are of a major nature.

The plan of action and recovery schedule, when required, shall explain and display how the Contractor intends to regain compliance with the current accepted, fully completed, Project CPM schedule, as updated by approved change orders.

The plan of action, when required, shall be submitted to the Owner for review within two (2) business days of the Contractor receiving the Owner's written demand. The recovery schedule, when required, shall be submitted to the Owner within five (5) calendar days of the Contractor's receiving the Owner's written demand.

(f) Early Completion of Project: The Contractor may attempt to achieve Substantial Completion on

or before the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. However, such planned early completion shall be for the Contractor's convenience only and shall not create any additional rights of the Contractor or obligations of the Owner under this Contract, nor shall it change the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. The Contractor shall not be required to pay damages to the Owner because of its failure to achieve Substantial Completion by its planned earlier date. Likewise, the Owner shall not pay the Contractor any additional compensation for achieving Substantial Completion early nor will the Owner owe the Contractor any compensation should the Owner, its officers, employees, or agents cause the Contractor not to achieve Substantial Completion earlier than the date required by the Contract Documents.

If the Contractor seeks to change the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date to reflect an earlier completion date, he may request or propose such a change. The Owner may, but is not required to, accept such proposal. However, a change in the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date shall be accomplished only by Change Order. If the Contractor's proposal to change the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date is accepted, a Change Order will be issued stating that all references in the Contract, including these General Conditions, to the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date shall thereafter refer to the date as modified, and all rights and obligations, including the Contractor's liability for actual damages, delay damages and/or liquidated damages, shall be determined in relation to the date, as modified.

20. SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT

(a) Before submittal of the first partial payment request under the Contract, the Contractor shall prepare for review and approval of the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, a schedule of the estimated values listed by trades or by specification sections of the Work, totaling the Contract Price. Where the total project has multiple parts or phases, the Contractor shall prepare appropriate schedules of values to facilitate reviews and justifications for payments.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

24

All requests for payment shall be made in the ASTM Uniformat II structure on the Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) pages 1 and 2. Succeeding pages may be on the Form CO-12 continuation sheets or a computerized spreadsheet which is in the same format and which contains the same information. Where a computerized spreadsheet is used, one copy of the entire Schedule of Values shall be provided to the Owner in an agreed electronic format (e.g. EXCEL) with the initial request for payment.

(b) If the Contractor requests, or intends to request, payment for materials stored in an approved and

secure manner, the Schedule of Values must indicate the amount for labor and the amount for materials, and in a supplement thereto must include an itemized list of materials for that trade or Work section. The material breakdown shall be in sufficient detail to allow verification of the quantities required for the Project, the quantities delivered, the Work completed, and the quantities stored on or off Site.

(c) The "Value of Work Completed" portion of the Form CO-12 shall be completed, the Contractor's

certification completed and signed, and the appropriate substantiating material attached to each Certificate for Payment (CO-12). Such substantiating material includes, but is not limited to, invoices for materials, delivery tickets, time sheets, payroll records, daily job logs/records, and similar materials which, in the opinion of the Owner and the A/E, are necessary or sufficient to justify payment of the amount requested.

(d) The labor progress for any task or activity shall be calculated based upon the percentage of Work

complete up to fifty percent (50%) of the completion of the task or activity. Thereafter, the evaluation of labor progress will be based upon the effort required to complete that task or activity. The material progress shall be calculated as the invoiced dollar cost of materials used in relationship to the amount estimated as necessary to complete a particular element of Work. When calculating material progress, credit shall be given for installed material as well as that stored on the Site and any material stored off Site which has been certified by the Architect/Engineer in accordance with Section 36 of these General Conditions.

(e) Should Work included in previous Form CO-12 submittals, and for which payment has been

made, subsequently be identified, by tests, inspection, or other means, as not acceptable or not conforming to Contract requirements, the "Value of Work Completed" portion of the first Form CO-12 submitted after such identification shall be modified to reduce the "completed" value of that Work by deleting the value of that which has been identified as not acceptable or nonconforming.

21. ACCESS TO WORK

The Architect/Engineer, the Owner, the Project Manager, the Owner's inspectors and other testing personnel, inspectors from the Department of Labor and Industry, and others authorized by the Owner, shall have access to the Work at all times. The Contractor shall provide proper facilities for access and inspection.

22. SURVEYS AND LAYOUT

(a) The Owner shall furnish the Contractor all necessary documents showing property lines and the location of existing buildings and improvements. The Contractor shall provide competent surveying and engineering services to execute the Work in accordance with the Contract and shall be responsible for the accuracy of these surveying and engineering services.

(b) The Owner shall provide such general reference points and benchmarks on the Site as will enable

the Contractor to proceed with the Work will be established in the plans and specifications. If the

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

25

Contractor finds that any previously established reference points have been lost or destroyed, he shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer.

(c) The Contractor shall protect and preserve the established benchmarks and monuments and shall

make no changes in locations without written notice to the Architect/Engineer and the written approval from the Owner. Any of these which may be lost or destroyed or which require shifting because of necessary changes in grades or locations shall, subject to prior written approval of the Owner, be replaced and accurately located by the Contractor.

23. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

(a) The general character and scope of the Work are illustrated by the plans and the specifications. If the Contractor deems additional detail or information to be needed, he shall request the same in writing from the Architect/Engineer. His request shall precisely state the detail or information needed and shall explain why it is needed. The Contractor shall also indicate a date when the requested information is required. The Architect/Engineer shall provide by Field Order such further detail and information as is necessary by the date required so long as the date indicated is reasonable. Any additional drawings and instructions supplied to the Contractor shall be consistent with the Contract Documents, shall be true developments thereof, and shall be so prepared that they can be reasonably interpreted as a part thereof. The Contractor shall carry out the Work in accordance with the additional detail drawings and instructions at no additional cost or time to the Owner.

(b) If the Contractor finds a conflict, error, omission, or other discrepancy in the plans or

specifications, he shall notify the Architect/Engineer in writing as soon as possible, but before proceeding with the affected Work. The Architect/Engineer shall issue a clarification by Field Order to the Contractor stating the correct requirements. If the Contractor deems the Field Order requires additional Work, he shall notify the A/E of such prior to proceeding with that Work and he shall submit a request for Change Order along with a detailed substantiating cost proposal through the A/E to the Owner within fourteen (14) calendar days. If such conflict, error, omission or other discrepancy in plans or specifications was reasonably apparent or with reasonable diligence should have been apparent to the Contractor prior to submitting its bid or Proposal, and the Contractor failed to submit questions to the A/E in the time and manner required by the Instructions to Bidders or Request for Proposal, then any claims shall be deemed waived and the Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation or time, or entitled to sue the Owner based on such conflict, error, omission or other discrepancy. If the Contractor performs any Work, or is delayed in performing any Work, where such Work involves a conflict, error, omission, or other discrepancy in the plans and specifications that the Contractor knew about, or with reasonable diligence should have known about, and fails to notify the A/E and Owner as required, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such performance or delay and shall bear all costs attributable to correcting any Work requiring correction or to any delay, and such conflict, error, omission, or other discrepancy shall not be the basis for a claim, cause of action or right to sue the Owner.

(c) In case of differences between small and large scale drawings, the large scale drawings shall

govern. Where on any of the drawings a portion of the Work is drawn out and the remainder is indicated in outline, the parts drawn out shall apply also to all other like portions of the Work.

(d) Where the word "similar" appears on the drawings, it shall be interpreted in its general sense and

not as meaning identical, and all details shall be worked out in relation to their location and their connection with other parts of the Work.

(e) The specifications are divided into several parts, or sections, for convenience only, since the entire

specifications must be considered as a whole. The divisions of the specifications are not intended to control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or to limit the Work

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

26

performed by any trade. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the coordination of the trades, Subcontractors and vendors engaged in the Work and for the compensation of the trades, Subcontractors and vendors for the Work performed.

(f) Measurements or dimensions shown on the drawings for Site features, utilities and structures shall

be verified at the Site by the Contractor before commencing the Work. The Contractor shall not scale measurements or dimensions from the drawings. If there are discrepancies, the Architect/Engineer shall be consulted. If new Work is to connect to, match with or be provided in existing Work, the Contractor shall verify the actual existing conditions and necessary dimensions prior to ordering or fabrication.

(g) As-Built Drawings: The Contractor shall maintain at the Site for the Owner one copy of all

drawings, specifications, addenda, approved shop or setting drawings, Change Orders and other modifications (collectively referred to herein as "As-Built Drawings") in good order and marked to record all changes as they occur during construction. These shall be available to the Architect/Engineer, the Owner, the Project Inspector, the Owner's other inspectors and to the Owner's testing personnel. The drawings shall be neatly and clearly marked in color during construction to record all variations made during construction. The representation of such variations shall include such supplementary notes, symbols, legends, and details as may be necessary to clearly show the as-built construction.

(h) Record Drawings: Upon completion of the Work and prior to the final inspection, the Contractor

shall deliver to the Architect/Engineer, for preparation of the Record Drawings, one complete set of "As-Built Drawings" referred to in the preceding subsection.

24. SUBMITTALS

(a) The Contractor shall submit a listing of all Submittals required by the Architect/Engineer or which the Contractor identifies as necessary, fixing the dates for the submission of shop or setting drawings, samples and product data. The listing shall be in a format acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall identify all Submittals with the Owner's Project Code Number as required by Section 2(f).

(b) Submittals shall be forwarded to the Architect/Engineer for approval if required by the

specifications or if requested by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner. No part of the Work dealt with by a Submittal shall be ordered, fabricated or installed by the Contractor, save at his own risk, until such approval has been given.

Working drawings, shop drawings and/or submittals for fire protection, fire alarm, fire detection and security systems shall be submitted to, and approved by, the Building Official prior to ordering, fabricating or installing such systems. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for obtaining such approval. No part of the Work involving such systems shall be ordered, fabricated or installed by the Contractor until such approval has been obtained.

(c) The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer for approval the name of the manufacturer,

the model number, and other identifying data and information respecting the performance, capacity, nature and rating of the machinery and mechanical and other equipment which the Contractor contemplates incorporating in the Work. When Submittals are required by this Contract for materials, the Contractor shall furnish full information concerning the material or articles which he contemplates incorporating in the Work. When required, samples shall be submitted for approval at the Contractor's expense, with all shipping charges prepaid. Machinery, equipment, material and articles installed or used without required approval shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

27

(d) Unless otherwise indicated or required elsewhere in the specifications, shop drawings shall be submitted in the form of one reproducible tracing and three blue line or black line prints. Catalog cuts, product data and other non-reproducible literature, except certificates, shall be submitted in six (6) copies minimum, of which three (3) will be retained by the Architect/Engineer and the remainder will be returned to the Contractor. As is mutually agreeable to the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and Contractor, Submittals may be provided in electronic format in lieu of hardcopy format.

(e) Submittals shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal which shall list the Project Code

Number, the Submittals included, the specification section number applicable to each, and the date shown on each Submittal. Submittals shall be complete in every respect and bound in sets. Each Submittal shall be clearly marked to show each item, component and/or optional feature proposed to be incorporated into the Project. Cross reference to the plans or specifications as needed to identify the use for which the item or component is intended.

(f) The Contractor shall check the Submittals for compliance with the requirements of the Contract

Documents. The Contractor shall clearly note in writing any and all items which deviate from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Reasons for deviation shall be included with the Submittal. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for checking all dimensions and coordinating all materials and trades to ensure that the components or products proposed, individually or in combination, will fit in the space available and that they will be compatible with other components or products provided.

(g) After checking each submittal, the Contractor shall stamp each sheet of the Submittal with the

Contractor's review stamp. Data submitted in a bound volume or on one sheet printed on two sides, may be stamped on the front of the first sheet only. The Contractor's review stamp shall be worded as follows:

The equipment and material shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated into this Project, is in compliance with the Contract drawings and specifications unless otherwise shown in bold face type or lettering and listed on a page or pages headed "DEPARTURES FROM DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS", and can be installed in the allocated spaces. Reviewed by _______________________________________ Date ____________________

The person signing the review stamp shall be the person designated in writing by the Contractor as having that authority. (A copy of such designation shall be forwarded to the A/E prior to or with the first Submittal.) The signature on the stamped review statement shall be handwritten in ink, or in the case of electronic submittals, electronically signed in accordance with § 59.1-479 et seq. of the Code of Virginia. Stamped signatures are not acceptable.

(h) The Contractor shall forward all Submittals sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to

allow reasonable time for checking, correcting, resubmitting and rechecking. (i) If a Submittal indicates a departure from the Contract requirements, the Architect/Engineer may

reject the Submittal or, if he deems it to have merit, may recommend it to the Owner, who shall approve or reject it as the Owner, in its sole discretion, sees fit. The departure from the Contract requirements shall be further authorized by a Change Order, if a reduction or increase in the Contract Price is appropriate.

(j) The Architect/Engineer is responsible to the Owner, but not to the Contractor, to verify that the

Submittals conform to the design concept and functional requirements of the plans and specifications, that the detailed design portrayed in shop drawings and proposed equipment and

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

28

materials shown in Submittals are of the quality specified and will function properly, and that the Submittals comply with the Contract Documents.

(k) The Work shall be in accordance with approved Submittals. Approval of the Contractor's

Submittals by the A/E does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility of complying with the Contract and all drawings and specifications, except as changed by Change Order.

(l) The plans and/or specifications may indicate that the Architect/Engineer designed or detailed a

portion of the plans around a particular product (most commonly a piece of equipment). Should a different product be proposed by the Contractor and accepted, all modifications, rerouting, relocations and variations required for proper installation and coordination to comply with the design concept and requirements of the Contract Documents shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be made at no extra cost to the Owner. If the plans were noted as designed or detailed around a particular product and/or if a product is named when a "brand name or equal" specification has been used, this is not intended to favor or preclude the use of other products pursuant to Section 26 of these General Conditions. Rather such design merely acknowledges the reality that in many instances the Architect/Engineer must have a basis to design and detail around for dimensions and characteristics of a product or system.

(m) Additional Submittal requirements are shown in the specifications.

25. FEES, SERVICES AND FACILITIES

(a) The Contractor shall obtain all permits, except the Building Permit, and pay for all fees and charges necessary for temporary access and public right-of-way blockage or use, for temporary connections to utilities and for the use of property (other than the Site) for storage of materials and other purposes unless otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.

(b) Certain projects such as renovations and interior modifications of existing buildings will usually

have water and electric service to the building. In those instances, water and electric power, if required for the Work under the Contract, will be furnished by the Owner subject to reasonable use by the Contractor, only to the extent and capacity of present services. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing required connections, temporary wiring, piping, etc. to these services in a safe manner and in accordance with applicable codes. All temporary wire, pipe, etc. shall be removed before the Substantial Completion inspection. Acceptance by the Contractor of the use of Owner's water and electricity constitutes a release to the Owner of all claims and of all liability to the Contractor for whatever damages which may result from power and water outages or voltage variations.

(c) The Owner shall pay any connection charges for permanent utility connections directly to the

utility Supplier. The Contractor shall coordinate such connections with the utility Supplier. (d) It is understood that, except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the

Contractor, either directly or through his Subcontractors, shall provide and pay for all material, labor, tools, equipment, water, light, power, telephone and other services or facilities of every nature whatsoever necessary to execute completely and deliver the Work within the Contract Time for Completion or before the Contract Completion Date.

(e) The Contractor shall provide temporary facilities including Contractor’s office space, Owner’s

Project Inspector office space (if required by the specifications), toilet facilities, and storage space, as required for the operations and the protection of the material and work. Number, sizes and locations shall be subject to approval of the Owner. Sanitary facilities shall be plumbed into an approved waste treatment system or shall be an approved type of chemical toilet and shall be regularly serviced.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

29

26. EQUALS (a) Brand names: Unless otherwise stated in the specifications, the name of a certain brand, make or

manufacturer denotes the characteristics, quality, workmanship, economy of operation and suitability for the intended purpose of the article desired, but does not restrict the Contractor to the specific brand, make, or manufacturer; it is set forth to convey to the Contractor the general style, type, character and quality of the article specified.

(b) Equal materials, equipment or assemblies: Whenever in these Contract Documents, a particular

brand, make of material, device or equipment is shown or specified, such brand, make of material, device or equipment shall be regarded merely as a standard. Any other brand, make or manufacturer of a product, assembly or equipment which in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer is the equal of that specified, considering quality, capabilities, workmanship, configuration, economy of operation, useful life, compatibility with design of the Work, and suitability for the intended purpose, will be accepted unless rejected by the Owner as not being equal.

(c) Substitute materials, equipment or assemblies: The Contractor may propose to substitute a

material, product, equipment, or assembly which deviates from the requirements of the Contract Documents but which the Contractor deems will perform the same function and have equal capabilities, service life, economy of operations, and suitability for the intended purpose. The proposal must include any cost differentials proposed. The Owner will have the A/E provide an initial evaluation of such proposed substitutes and provide a recommendation on acceptability and indicate the A/E's redesign fee to incorporate the substitution in the design. If the proposed substitute is acceptable to the Owner, a Change Order will be proposed to the Contractor to accept the substitute and to deduct the cost of the A/E redesign fee and the proposed cost savings from the Contract Price. The Owner shall have the right to limit or reject substitutions at its sole discretion.

(d) The Contractor shall be responsible for making all changes in the Work necessary to adapt and

accommodate any equal or substitute product which it uses. The necessary changes shall be made at the Contractor's expense.

27. AVAILABILITY OF MATERIALS

If a brand name, product, or model number included in the Contract Documents is not available on the present market, alternate equal products or model numbers may be proposed by the Contractor through the Architect/Engineer for approval by the Owner.

28. CONTRACTOR'S TITLE TO MATERIALS

No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by the Contractor, or by any Subcontractor or Supplier, subject to any security interest, installment or sales contract or any other agreement or lien by which an interest is retained by the seller or is given to a secured party. The Contractor warrants that he has clear and good title to all materials and supplies which he uses in the Work or for which he accepts payment in whole or in part.

29. STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS INSTALLATION & WORKMANSHIP

(a) Unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract, all equipment, material, and accessories

incorporated in the Work are to be new and in first class condition. (b) Unless specifically approved by the Owner or required by the Contract, the Contractor shall not

incorporate into the Work any materials containing asbestos or any material known by the industry to be hazardous to the health of building construction workers, maintenance workers, or occupants. If the Contractor becomes aware that a material required by the Contract contains

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

30

asbestos or other hazardous materials, he shall notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer immediately and shall take no further steps to acquire or install any such material without first obtaining Owner approval.

(c) All workmanship shall be of the highest quality found in the building industry in every respect. All

items of Work shall be done by craftsmen or tradesmen skilled in the particular task or activity to which they are assigned. In the acceptance or rejection of Work, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of workmen. Poor or inferior workmanship (as determined by the Architect/Engineer, the Owner or other inspecting authorities) shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense such that the Work conforms to the highest quality standards of the trades concerned, or otherwise corrected to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer, the Owner, or other inspecting authority, as applicable.

(d) Under the various sections of the plans or specifications, where specified items are supplied with

the manufacturer's printed instructions, recommendations, or directions for installation, or where such instructions, recommendations, or directions are available, installation of the specified items shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions unless those instructions contradict the plans or specifications, in which case the Architect/Engineer will be notified for an interpretation and decision.

(e) Under the various sections of the plans or specifications, where reference is made to specific codes

or standards governing the installation of specified items, installation shall in all cases be in strict accordance with the referenced codes and standards. Where no reference is made to specific codes or standards, installation shall conform to the generally recognized applicable standards for first-class installation of the specific item to be installed. Contractors are expected to be proficient and skilled in their respective trades and knowledgeable of the Codes and Standards of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), National Electric Code (NEC), Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and other codes and standards applicable to installations and associated work by his trade.

(f) Where the manufacturer's printed instructions are not available for installation of specific items,

where specific codes or standards are not referenced to govern the installation or specific items, or where there is uncertainty on the part of the Contractor concerning the installation procedures to be followed or the quality of workmanship to be maintained in the installation of specific items, the Contractor shall consult the Architect/Engineer for approval of the installation procedures or the specific standards governing the quality of workmanship the Contractor proposes to follow or maintain during the installation of the items in question.

(g) During and/or at the completion of installation of any items, the tests designated in the plans or

specifications necessary to assure proper and satisfactory functioning for its intended purpose shall be performed by the Contractor or by its Subcontractor responsible for the completed installation. All costs for such testing are to be included in the Contract Price. If required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall furnish prior to final inspection the manufacturers' certificates evidencing that products meet or exceed applicable performance, warranty and other requirements, and certificates that products have been properly installed and tested.

30. WARRANTY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

(a) The Contractor warrants that, unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment incorporated in the Work under the Contract shall be new, in first class condition, and in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor further warrants that all workmanship shall be of the highest quality and in accordance with the Contract Documents and shall be performed by persons qualified at their respective trades.

(b) Work not conforming to these warranties shall be considered defective.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

31

(c) This warranty of materials and workmanship is separate and independent from and in addition to

any of the Contractor's other guarantees or obligations in the Contract or under Virginia law. 31. USE OF SITE AND REMOVAL OF DEBRIS

(a) The Contractor shall: (1) Perform the Work in such a manner as not to interrupt or interfere with the operation of

any existing activity on, or in proximity to, the Site or with the Work of any other separate contractor;

(2) Store his apparatus, materials, supplies and equipment in such orderly fashion at the Site

of the Work as will not unduly interfere with the progress of his Work or the work of any other separate contractor; and

(3) Place upon the Work or any part thereof only such loads as are consistent with the safety

of that portion of the Work. (b) The Contractor expressly undertakes, either directly or through his Subcontractor(s), to effect all

cutting, filling or patching of the Work required to make the same conform to the plans and specifications, and, except with the consent of the Architect/Engineer, not to cut or otherwise alter the Work of any other separate contractor. The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portion of the Work or Site, including existing improvements, unless called for by the Contract.

(c) The Contractor expressly undertakes, either directly or through his Subcontractor(s), to clean up

frequently all refuse, rubbish, scrap materials and debris caused by his operations, to the end that at all times the Site shall present a neat, orderly and workmanlike appearance. No such refuse, rubbish, scrap material and debris shall be left within the completed Work nor buried on the building Site, but shall be removed from the Site and properly disposed of in a licensed landfill or otherwise as required by law.

(d) The Contractor expressly undertakes, either directly or through his Subcontractor(s), before Final

Payment or such prior time as the Owner may require, to remove all surplus material, false Work, temporary structures, including foundations thereof, plants of any description and debris of every nature resulting from his operations and to put the Site in a neat, orderly condition; to thoroughly clean and leave reasonably dust free all finished surfaces including all equipment, piping, etc., on the interior of all buildings included in the Contract; and to clean thoroughly all glass installed under the Contract, including the removal of all paint and mortar splatters and other defacements.

If the Contractor fails to clean up at the time required herein, the Owner may do so and charge the costs incurred thereby to the Contractor in accordance with Section 10 (b) of these General Conditions.

(e) The Contractor shall have, On-Site, an employee certified by the Department of Environmental

Quality as a Responsible Land Disturber who shall be responsible for the installation, inspection and maintenance of erosion control and stormwater management measures and devices. The Contractor shall prevent Site soil erosion, the runoff of silt and/or debris carrying water from the Site, and the blowing of debris off the Site in accordance with the applicable requirements and standards of the Contract and the Virginia Department of Environmental Quality’s Erosion and Sediment Control Regulations and the Virginia Stormwater Management Regulations.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

32

32. TEMPORARY ROADS

Temporary roads, if required, shall be established and maintained until permanent roads are accepted, then removed and the area restored to the conditions required by the Contract Documents. Crushed rock, paving and other road materials from temporary roads shall not be left on the Site unless permission is received from the Owner to bury the same at a location and depth approved by the Owner.

33. SIGNS

The Contractor may, at his option and without cost to the Owner, erect signs acceptable to the Owner on the Site for the purpose of identifying and giving directions to the job. No signs shall be erected without prior approval of the Owner as to design and location.

34. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

(a) The Contractor expressly undertakes, both directly and through his Subcontractors, to take every reasonable precaution at all times for the protection of all persons and property which may come on the Site or be affected by the Contractor's Work.

(b) The Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety

precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Any violation of these requirements or duties or any potential safety hazard that is brought to the attention of the Contractor by the Architect/Engineer, the Owner, or any other persons shall be immediately abated.

(c) The provisions of all rules and regulations governing health and safety as adopted by the Safety

Codes Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia, issued by the Department of Labor and Industry under Title 40.1 of the Code of Virginia, shall apply to all Work under this Contract.

(d) The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of all his Work from damage and

shall protect the Owner's property from injury or loss arising in connection with this Contract. He shall make good any such damage, injury or loss, except as may be directly and solely due to errors in the Contract Documents or caused by agents or employees of the Owner. The Contractor shall adequately protect adjacent property to prevent any damage to it or loss of use and enjoyment by its owners. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all passageways, guard fences, lights and other facilities for protection as required by public authority, local conditions, or the Contract.

(e) In an emergency affecting the health, safety or life of persons or of the Work, or of the adjoining

property, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Architect/Engineer or the Owner, shall act, at his discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury. Also, should he, to prevent threatened loss or injury, be instructed or authorized to act by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner, he shall so act immediately, without appeal. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of any emergency work shall be determined as provided by Section 38 of these General Conditions.

(f) When necessary for the proper protection of the Work, temporary heating of a type approved by

the Architect/Engineer must be provided by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, unless otherwise specified.

35. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

The Contractor shall suspend activity on and protect any portion of the Work that may be subject to damage by climatic conditions.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

33

36. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR (a) Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the Owner will make partial payments to the

Contractor on the basis of a duly certified and approved Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment, Form CO-12, showing the estimate of the Work performed during the preceding calendar month or work period, as recommended by the Architect/Engineer. When evaluating the Contractor's Form CO-12, the Architect/Engineer will consider the value of the Work in place, the value of approved and properly stored materials, the status of the Work on the critical path with regard to the Time for Completion, and the estimated value of the Work necessary to achieve Final Completion. The Architect/Engineer will schedule a monthly pay meeting to occur no earlier than the 25th day of the month represented by the payment request or not later than the 5th day of the following month. The Contractor shall submit his monthly estimate of Work completed on Form CO-12 in accordance with the Contract between the Owner and Contractor so that it is received by the Architect/Engineer and the Owner's Project Manager at least one work day prior to the date scheduled by the Architect/Engineer for the monthly pay meeting. The Owner will review the estimate with the Architect/Engineer and the Contractor at the monthly pay meeting, which shall be considered the receipt date, and may approve any or all of the estimate of Work for payment. In preparing estimates, the material delivered to the Site and preparatory Work done shall be taken into consideration, if properly documented as required by Section 20 of these General Conditions, or as may be required by the Architect/Engineer so that quantities may be verified. In addition to material delivered to the Site, material such as large pieces of equipment and items purchased specifically for the Project, but stored off the Site within the Commonwealth of Virginia, may be considered for payment, provided all of the following are accomplished prior to the submission of the monthly payment request in which payment for such materials is requested:

(1) The Contractor must notify the Owner in writing, at least ten (10) days prior to the

submission of the payment request, through the Architect/Engineer, that specific items will be stored off Site in a designated, secured place within the Commonwealth of Virginia. The Schedule of Values must be detailed to indicate separately both the value of the material and the labor/installation for trades requesting payment for stored materials. By giving such notification and by requesting payment for material stored off Site, the Contractor warrants that the storage location is safe and suitable for the type of material stored and that the materials are identified as being the property of the Contractor, and agrees that loss of materials stored off the Site shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to timely furnish these types and quantities of materials for the Project and meet the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, subject to Section 43 (b) of these General Conditions. If the storage location is more than 20 miles from the Site, the Contractor may be required to reimburse the Owner for the cost incurred for travel to the storage location to verify the Contractor's request for payment for materials stored off Site. A Supplementary Agreement shall be required for payment by the Owner to the Contractor for materials or equipment that is stored offsite at a location that is not within the Commonwealth of Virginia.

(2) Such notification, as well as the payment request, shall:

(a) Itemize the quantity of such materials and document with invoices showing the

cost of said materials; (b) Indicate the identification markings used on the materials, which shall clearly

reference the materials to the particular project; (c) Identify the specific location of the materials, which must be within reasonable

proximity to the Site and within the Commonwealth of Virginia;

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

34

(d) Include a letter from the Contractor's Surety which confirms that the Surety on the Performance Bond and the Labor and Material Payment Bond has been notified of the request for payment of materials stored off the Site and agrees that the materials are covered by the bond; and

(e) Include a certificate of all-risk builder's risk insurance in an amount not less than

the fair market value of the materials, which shall name the Owner and the Contractor as co-insureds.

(3) The Architect/Engineer shall indicate, in writing, to the Owner that Submittals for such

materials have been reviewed and meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, that the stored materials meet the requirement of the plans and specifications, and that such materials conform to the approved Submittals. Should the A/E deem it necessary to visit the storage site to make such review, the Contractor shall bear the costs incurred therewith.

(4) The Owner, through the Architect/Engineer, shall notify the Contractor in writing of its

agreement to prepayment for such materials. (5) The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing, through the Architect/Engineer, when

the materials are to be transferred to the Site and when the materials are received at the Site.

(b) Payment will not be made for materials or equipment stored on or off the Site which are not

scheduled for incorporation into the Work within the six months next following submission of the request for payment, unless the Contractor has the prior consent of the Owner, which consent may be granted or withheld by the Owner in its discretion if, in the opinion of the Owner, it is not necessary to procure the materials more than six months in advance of use to assure their availability when needed.

(c) No payment shall be made to the Contractor until:

(1) The Contractor furnishes to the Owner its Social Security Number (SSN) if an individual, or its Federal Employer Identification Number (FEIN) if a proprietorship, partnership, corporation or other legal entity.

(2) Certificates of Insurance or other satisfactory evidence of compliance by the Contractor

with all the requirements of Section 11 (and Section 12 if applicable) of these General Conditions have been delivered to the Owner.

(3) Copies of any certificates of insurance required of a Subcontractor under Section 11 have

been delivered to the Owner for payments based on Work performed by a Subcontractor. (4) The Contractor has (i) submitted a preliminary schedule which is acceptable to the Owner

in accordance with Section 19(a), (ii) submitted a fully complete Project schedule accepted by the Owner in accordance with Section 19(a), (iii) maintained the monthly bar graphs or status reports required by Section 19(d), or (iv) provided a recovery schedule pursuant to Section 19(e), as each of them may be required.

(d) In making such partial payments, five percent (5%) of each payment to the Contractor shall be

retained until Final Completion and acceptance of all Work covered by the Contract, unless otherwise provided by any law, regulation or program of the federal government. Such retainage shall be held to assure faithful performance of the Contract and may also be used as a fund to deduct amounts due to or claimed by the Owner, including, but not limited to, payment to the Owner of all moneys due for deductive change orders, credits, uncorrected Defective Work,

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

35

interest, damages, and the like. (§ 2.2-4333 of the Code of Virginia) The Owner may, at its sole discretion, agree on an item by item basis to release the retainage on items which are fully 100% complete and which have accepted by the Owner as being tested and complete and on which no further action or work will be required. Retainage which is released by the Owner shall be distributed by the Contractor in conformance with Section 37 of these General Conditions.

(e) All material and Work for which partial payments are made shall thereupon become the sole

property of the Owner, but this provision shall not relieve the Contractor from the sole responsibility for all materials and Work, including those for which payment has been made, or for the restoration of any damaged materials or Work. Nor shall this provision serve as a waiver of the right of the Owner to require the fulfillment of all of the terms and conditions of the Contract.

(f) The Final Payment, which shall include the retainage, less any amounts due to or claimed by the

Owner, shall not become due until the Architect/Engineer and the Owner agree that Final Completion has been achieved and until the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner through the Architect/Engineer a Certificate of Completion by the Contractor (Form CO-13.2) and an Affidavit of Payment of Claims (Form CO-13), stating that all Subcontractors and Suppliers of either labor or materials have been paid all sums claimed by them for Work performed or materials furnished in connection with this Project less retainage. Amounts due the Owner which may be withheld from the Final Payment may include, but are not limited to, amounts due pursuant to Section 3(i), Section 16(a)-(d), Section 31(d), costs incurred to repair or replace Defective Work, costs incurred as a result of the Contractor's negligent acts or omissions or omissions of those for whom the Contractor is responsible, delay damages under Section 43(h), and any liquidated or actual damages. If all Subcontractors and Suppliers of labor and materials have not been paid the full amount claimed by them, the Contractor shall list each to which an agreed amount of money is due or which has a claim in dispute. With respect to all such Subcontractors and Suppliers, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner, along with the Affidavit of Payment of Claims (Form CO-13), an affidavit from each such Subcontractor and Supplier stating the amount of their subcontract or supply contract, the percentage of completion, the amounts paid to them by the Contractor and the dates of payment, the amount of money still due if any, any interest due the Subcontractor or Supplier pursuant to Section 37(b) below, and whether satisfactory arrangements have been made for the payment of said amounts. If no agreement can be reached between the Contractor and one or more Subcontractors or Suppliers as to the amounts owed to the Subcontractors or Suppliers, the Owner may, in its discretion, pay such portion of the moneys due to the Contractor which is claimed by the Subcontractor or Supplier into a Virginia Court or Federal Court sitting in Virginia, in the manner provided by law. Said payment into court shall be deemed a payment to the Contractor. Nothing in this Section shall be construed as creating any obligation or contractual relationship between the Owner and any Subcontractor or Supplier, and the Owner shall not be liable to any Subcontractor or Supplier on account of any failure or delay of the Owner in complying with the terms hereof.

Before Final Payment is made, the Owner shall confirm that the Contractor has certified compliance with the contract’s small business procurement plan by providing a report in accordance with DSBSD’s requirements. If there are variances between the Contractor’s required small business procurement plan and the actual participation, the Contractor shall provide a written explanation which shall be kept with the contract file and made available upon request. The Owner, in its sole discretion, may withhold the Final Payment until the Contractor is in compliance with its small business procurement plan.

(g) Upon successful completion of the final inspection and all Work required by the Contract,

including but not limited to the delivery of As-Built drawings, equipment manuals, written warranties, acceptance of the Work by the Owner and the delivery of the affidavits required in Section 36(f) of these General Conditions, the Architect/Engineer shall deliver the written Certificate of Completion by the Architect/Engineer (Form CO-13.1) to the Owner, with a copy to the Contractor, stating the entire amount of Work performed and compensation earned by the

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

36

Contractor, including extra work and compensation therefor. The Owner may accept the Work for occupancy or use while asserting claims against the Contractor; disputing the amount of compensation due to the Contractor; disputing the quality of the Work, its completion, or its compliance with the Contract Documents; or any other reason.

(h) Unless there is a dispute about the compensation due to the Contractor, Defective Work, quality of

the Work, compliance with the Contract Documents, completion itself, claims by the Owner, other matters in contention between the parties, or unless monies are withheld pursuant to the Comptroller's Debt Setoff Program, within thirty (30) days after receipt and acceptance of the Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) in proper form by the Architect/Engineer at the monthly pay meeting, which shall be considered the receipt date, the Owner shall pay to the Contractor the amount approved by the Architect/Engineer, less all prior payments and advances whatsoever to or for the account of the Contractor. In the case of Final Payment, the completed Affidavit of Payment of Claims (Form CO-13), the Certificate of Completion by the Contractor (Form CO-13.2) and the Certificate of Completion by the Architect/Engineer (Form CO-13.1) shall accompany the final Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) which is forwarded to the Owner for payment. The date on which payment is due shall be referred to as the Payment Date. In the event of disputes, payment shall be mailed on or before the Payment Date for amounts and Work not in dispute, subject to any set offs claimed by the Owner; provided, however in instances where further appropriations are required by the General Assembly or where the issuance of further bonds is required, in which case, payment shall be made within thirty (30) days after the effective date of such appropriation or within thirty (30) days after the receipt of bond proceeds by the Owner. All prior estimates and payments including those relating to extra Work may be corrected and adjusted in any payment and shall be corrected and adjusted in the Final Payment. In the event that any request for payment (CO-12) by the Contractor contains a defect or impropriety, the Owner shall notify the Contractor of any defect or impropriety which would prevent payment by the Payment Date, within five (5) days after receipt of the Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) by the Owner from the Architect/Engineer.

(i) Interest shall accrue on all amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor which remain unpaid

seven (7) days following the Payment Date. Said interest shall accrue at the discounted ninety-day U.S. Treasury bill rate as established by the Weekly Auction and as reported in the publication entitled The Wall Street Journal on the weekday following each such Weekly Auction. During the period of time when the amounts due to the Contractor remain unpaid following the seventh (7) day after the Payment Date, the interest accruing shall fluctuate on a weekly basis and shall be that established by the immediately prior Weekly Auction. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to gather and substantiate the applicable weekly interest rates to the satisfaction of the Owner and to calculate to the satisfaction of the Owner the interest due. In no event shall the rate of interest charge exceed the rate of interest charged pursuant to § 58.1-1812 of the Code of Virginia. No interest shall accrue on retainage or when payment is delayed because of disagreement between the Owner and the Contractor regarding the quantity, quality or timeliness of the Work, including, but not limited to, compliance with Contract Documents or the accuracy of any Request for Payment received. This exception to the accrual of interest stated in the preceding sentence shall apply only to that portion of a delayed payment which is actually the subject of such a disagreement and shall apply only for the duration of such disagreement. Nothing contained herein shall be interpreted, however, to prevent the withholding of retainage to assure faithful performance of the Contract. These same provisions relating to payment of interest to the Contractor shall apply also to the computation and accrual of interest on any amounts due from the Contractor to the Owner for deductive change orders and to amounts due on any claims by the Owner. The date of mailing of any payment by the U.S. Mail is deemed to be the date of payment to the addressee.

(j) The acceptance by the Contractor of the Final Payment shall be and operate as a release to the

Owner of all claims by the Contractor, its Subcontractors and Suppliers, and of all liability to the

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

37

Contractor whatever, including liability for all things done or furnished in connection with this Work, except for things done or furnished which are the subject of unresolved claims for which the Contractor has filed a timely written notice of intent, provided a claim is submitted no later than sixty (60) days after Final Payment. Acceptance of any interest payment by the Contractor shall be a release of the Owner from claims by the Contractor for late payment.

(k) No certificate for payment issued by the Architect/Engineer, and no payment, final or otherwise,

no certificate of completion, nor partial or entire use or occupancy of the Work by the Owner, shall be an acceptance of any Work or materials not in accordance with the Contract, nor shall the same relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or Defective Work or operate to release the Contractor or his Surety from any obligation under the Contract, the Standard Performance Bond and the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond.

37. PAYMENTS BY CONTRACTOR (§ 2.2-4354, Code of Virginia)

Under § 2.2-4354, Code of Virginia, the Contractor is obligated to: (a) Within seven (7) days after receipt of amounts paid to the Contractor by the Owner for Work

performed by the Subcontractor or Supplier under this Contract,

(1) Pay the Subcontractor or Supplier for the proportionate share of the total payment received from the Owner attributable to the Work performed by the Subcontractor or the materials furnished by the Supplier under this Contract; or

(2) Notify the Subcontractor or Supplier, in writing, of his intention to withhold all or a part

of the Subcontractor or Supplier's payment with the reason for nonpayment; (b) Pay interest to the Subcontractor or Supplier on all amounts owed by the Contractor that remain

unpaid after seven (7) days following receipt by the Contractor of payment from the Owner for Work performed by the Subcontractor or materials furnished by the Supplier under this contract, except for amounts withheld as allowed under subsection (a) (2) of this Section.

(c) Include in each of his subcontracts a provision requiring each Subcontractor to include in each of

its subcontracts a provision requiring each subcontractor to include or otherwise be subject to the same payment and interest requirements with respect to each lower tier subcontractor. Each Subcontractor shall include with its invoice to, or request for payment from, the Contractor, a certification that that Subcontractor has paid each of its suppliers and lower tier subcontractors their proportionate share of previous payments received from the Contractor attributable to the Work performed or the materials furnished by it under this Contract.

The Contractor's obligation to pay interest to the Subcontractor or Supplier pursuant to subsection (b) of this Section is not an obligation of the Owner. A modification to this Contract shall not be made for the purpose of providing reimbursement for such interest charge. A Contractor's cost reimbursement claim shall not include any amount for reimbursement of such interest charge.

38. CHANGES IN THE WORK

(a) The Owner may at any time, by written order utilizing the Commonwealth of Virginia Change Order Form CO-11 and without notice to the sureties, make changes in the Work which are within the general scope of the Contract, except that no change will be made which will increase the total Contract Price to an amount more than twenty percent (20%) in excess of the original Contract Price without notice to sureties. At the time of the Preconstruction Meeting described in Section 50(b), the Contractor and the Owner shall advise each other in writing of their designees authorized to accept and/or approve changes to the Contract Price and of any limits to each designee's authority. Should any designee or limits of authority change during the time this

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

38

Contract is in effect, the Contractor or Owner with such a change shall give written notice to the other within seven (7) calendar days, utilizing the procedures set forth in these General Conditions. The Contractor agrees and understands that the authority of the Owner's designee is limited by Virginia Code §2.2-4309 and any other applicable statute.

In making any change, the charge or credit for the change shall be determined by one of the following methods as selected by the Owner:

(1) Fixed Price: By a mutually agreed fixed amount change to the Contract Price and/or

time allowed for completion of the Work. The Change Order shall be substantiated by documentation itemizing the estimated quantities and costs of all labor, materials, and equipment required as well as any mark-up used. The price change shall include the Contractor's reasonable overhead and profit, including overhead for any unreasonable delay arising from or related to the Change Order and/or the change in the Work. See Subsections (d), (e) and (f), below.

(2) Unit Price: By using unit prices and calculating the number of net units of Work in each

part of the Work which is changed, either as the Work progresses or before Work on the change commences, and by then multiplying the calculated number of units by the applicable unit price set forth in the Contract or multiplying by a mutually agreed unit price if none was provided in the Contract. No additional percentage markup for overhead or profit shall be added to the unit prices.

(3) Cost Reimbursement: By ordering the Contractor to perform the changed Work on a

cost reimbursement basis by issuing two Change Orders citing this Subsection, an initiating Change Order, authorizing the changed Work, and a confirming Change Order approving the additional cost and time for the changed Work. The initiating Change Order shall: (i) Describe the scope or parameters of the change in the Work;

(ii) Describe the cost items to be itemized and verified for payment and the method

of measuring the quantity of work performed; (iii) Address the impact on the schedule for Substantial Completion; (iv) Order the Contractor to proceed with the change to the Work; (v) Order the Contractor to keep in a form acceptable to the Owner, an accurate,

itemized account of the actual cost of the change in the Work, including, but not limited to, the actual costs of labor, materials, equipment, and supplies;

(vi) Order the Contractor to annotate a copy of the Project schedule to accurately

show the status of the Work at the time this first Change Order is issued, to show the start and finish dates of the changed Work, and the status of the Work when the changed Work is completed; and

(vii) State that a confirming Change Order will be issued to incorporate the cost of

the ordered changed in the Work into the Contract Price and any change in the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date.

The Contractor shall sign the initiating Change Order acknowledging he has been ordered to proceed with the change in the Work. The Contractor's signature on each initiating Change Order citing this Subsection 38(a)(3) as the method for determining the cost of

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

39

the Work shall not constitute the Contractor's agreement on the cost or time impact of the ordered Work.

Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by the Owner, such costs shall not exceed those prevailing for the trades or crafts (based upon rates established by the US Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics, or other generally recognized cost data publication), materials, and equipment in the locality of the Project, may include only those items listed as allowable in Subsection 38(e), and shall not include any of the costs listed as not allowable in Subsection 38(f). The Owner shall be permitted, on a daily basis, to verify such records and may require such additional records as are necessary to determine the cost of the change to the Work.

Within fourteen (14) days after the conclusion of such ordered Work, the Contractor and the Owner shall reach agreement on (i) a cost for the ordered Work, based on the records kept and the Contractor's allowance for overhead and profit determined in accordance with the provisions set forth in Subsections 38(d), (e), and (f) below; and (ii) the change in the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, if necessary, as a result of the ordered Work. Such costs and time shall be incorporated into a confirming Change Order which references the initiating Change Order. If agreement on the cost and time of the changed Work cannot be reached within the fourteen (14) days allotted, the Contractor may submit a claim for the disputed cost or time as provided for in Section 47.

(4) By issuing a unilateral change order in the amount deemed appropriate by the Owner for the Work. If the Contractor objects to the amount or scope of the change order then the Contractor may within the 14 days of the date of the change order file a claim for the disputed amount as provided for in section 47.

(b) The Contractor shall review any Owner requested or directed change and shall respond in writing

within fourteen (14) calendar days after receipt of the proposed change (or such other reasonable time as the Owner may direct), stating the effect of the proposed change upon his Work, including any increase or decrease in the Contract time and price. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner an itemized breakdown of the quantities and prices used in computing the proposed change in Contract Price.

The Owner shall review the Contractor's proposal and respond to the Contractor within thirty (30) days of receipt. If a change to the Contract Price and Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date are agreed upon, both parties shall sign the Change Order. If the Contract Price and Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date are not agreed upon, the Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed under Subsection 38(a)(3), above. Change Orders shall be effective when signed by both parties, unless approval by the Governor or his designee is required, in which event the Change Order shall be effective when signed by the Governor or his designee.

(c) In figuring changes, any instructions for measurement of quantities set forth in the Contract shall

be followed.

(d) Overhead and profit for both additive and deductive changes in the Work (other than changes covered by unit prices) shall be paid by applying the specified percentage markups only on the net cost of the changed Work (i.e. difference in cost between original and changed Work excluding overhead and profit). Said percentages for overhead and profit shall reasonably approximate the Contractor’s overhead and profit, but shall not exceed the percentages for each category listed below:

(1) If a Subcontractor does all or part of the changed Work, the Subcontractor's mark-up for

overhead and profit on the Work it performs shall be a maximum of fifteen percent

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

40

(15%). The Contractor's mark-up for overhead and profit on the Subcontractor's price shall be a maximum of ten percent (10%).

(2) If the Contractor does all or part of the changed Work, its markup for overhead and profit

on the changed Work it performs shall be a maximum of fifteen percent (15%). (3) If a Sub-subcontractor at any tier does all or part of the changed Work, the Sub-

subcontractor's markup on that Work shall be a maximum of fifteen percent (15%). The markup for overhead and profit on a sub-subcontractor's Work by the Contractor and all intervening tiers of Subcontractors shall not exceed a total of ten percent (10%).

(4) Where Work is deleted from the Contract prior to commencement of that Work without

substitution of other similar Work, one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price attributable to that Work shall be deducted from the Contract Price. However, in the event that material Submittals have been approved and orders placed for said materials, a lesser amount, but in no case less than eighty percent (80%) of the Contract Price attributable to that Work, shall be deducted from the Contract Price. The credit to the Owner for reduced premiums on labor and material bonds and performance bonds shall in all cases be one hundred percent (100%).

(e) Allowable costs for changes in the Work may include but are not limited to the following:

(1) Labor costs for employees directly employed in the change in the Work, including

salaries and wages plus the cost of payroll charges and fringe benefits and overtime premiums, if such premiums are explicitly authorized by the Owner.

(2) Materials incorporated into the change to the Work, including costs of transportation and

storage, if applicable. If applicable, all cash discounts shall accrue to the Contractor, unless the Owner deposits funds with the Contractor to make such payments, and all trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from the sale of surplus materials shall accrue to the Owner.

(3) Equipment incorporated in the changed Work or equipment used directly in

accomplishing the Work. If rented expressly for accomplishing the change in the Work, the cost shall be the rental rate according to the terms of the rental agreement, which the Owner shall have the right to approve. If owned by the Contractor, the costs shall be a reasonable price based upon the life expectancy of the equipment and the purchase price of the equipment. If applicable, transportation costs may be included.

(4) Costs of increases in premiums for the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond and

the Standard Performance Bond, provided coverage for the cost of the change in the Work results in such increased costs. At the Owner's request, the Contractor shall provide proof of his notification to the Surety of the change in the Work and of the Surety's agreement to include such change in its coverage. The cost of the increase in premium shall be an allowable cost but shall not be marked up.

(5) Contractor and Subcontractor overhead costs as set forth in Subsection (d) markups above. (6) Agreed Compensation for Overhead for Changes to Time for Completion or

Contract Completion Date for Changes to the Work: If the change in the Work also changes the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date by adding days to complete the Work, an itemized accounting of the following direct Site overhead and home office overhead and other indirect overhead expenses set forth in subparagraphs (i) and (ii) below may be considered as allowable costs for compensation in addition to those shown above:

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

41

(i) Direct Site Overhead Expenses:

The Contractor’s per diem expenses, as shown by the itemized accounting, for the following allowable direct Site overhead expenses: The Site superintendent's pro-rata salary, temporary Site office trailer, and temporary Site utilities including basic telephone service, electricity, heat, water, and sanitary / toilet facilities for each day added. All other direct expenses are covered by and included in the Subsection 38(d) markups above.

(ii) Home Office and Other Indirect Overhead Expenses:

A five percent (5%) markup on the above direct Site overhead expenses will be allowed as compensation for the Contractor’s home office overhead and all other direct or indirect overhead expenses for days added to the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date for a change in the Work. All other overhead and other direct or indirect overhead expenses are covered by and included in this markup and the Subsection (d) markups above.

(7) Any other costs directly attributable to the change in the Work with the exception of

those set forth in Subsection 38(f) below. (f) Allowable costs for changes in the Work shall not include the following:

(1) Costs due to the negligence of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, their

employees, or other persons for whom the Contractor is responsible, including, but not limited to, costs for the correction of Defective Work, for improper disposal of material, for equipment wrongly supplied, for delay in performing the Work, or for delay in obtaining materials or equipment.

(2) Home office expenses including payroll costs for the Contractor's officers, executives,

administrators, accountants, counsel, timekeepers, clerks, and other similar administrative personnel employed by the Contractor, whether at the Site or in the Contractor's principal or branch office for general administration of the Work. These costs are deemed overhead included in the percentage markups allowable in Subsections 38(d) above.

(3) Home and field office expenses not itemized in Subsection 38(e)(6) above. Such items

include, but are not limited to, expenses of Contractor's home and branch offices, Contractor's capital expenses, interest on Contractor's capital used for the Work, charges for delinquent payments, small tools, incidental job costs, rent, utilities, telephone and office equipment, and other general overhead expenses.

(4) Other items reasonably determined by the Owner to not be allowed.

(g) All Change Orders, except the "initial" Change Orders authorizing work citing Subsection 38(a)(3) procedures, must state that the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date is not changed or is either increased or decreased by a specific number of days. The old Time for Completion and, if changed, the new Time for Completion must be stated.

If the Contractor requests an extension to the Time for Completion or a later Contract Completion Date, he must provide written justification for the extension to the Architect/Engineer and to the Owner. The written justification must demonstrate an anticipated actual increase in the time required to complete the Work beyond that allowed by the Contract as adjusted by prior change orders or amendments to the Contract, not just an increase or decrease in the time needed to complete some portion of the total Work. When a CPM schedule is required by the Contract, no

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

42

extension to the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date shall be allowed unless, and then only to the extent that, the additional or changed Work increases the length of the critical path beyond the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date. If approved, the increase in time required to complete the Work shall be added to the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date. The Owner may decrease, by Change Order, the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date when an Owner-requested deletion from the Work results in a decrease in the actual time required to complete the Work as demonstrable on the Bar Graph Schedule or on the CPM Schedule, whichever is appropriate. The Contractor may submit a request to decrease, by Change Order, the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date under the procedures and subject to the considerations set forth in Section 19(f). No request for such decrease shall be considered for approval unless the proposed shorter schedule is otherwise acceptable under Sections 19(b) or (c), whichever is applicable. The Change Order decreasing the Time for Completion or changing the Contract Completion Date must be signed by both the Owner and the Contractor.

With the exception of Change Orders under Subsection 38(a)(3), which shall arrive at a change to the Contract Price and any change to time using the procedures set forth therein, each Change Order shall include all time and monetary impacts of the change, whether the Change Order is considered alone or with all other changes during the course of the Project. Failure to include a change to time and changes in the Contract Price attributable to the change in time under Subsections 38(a)(1) or (2) shall waive any change to the time and Contract Price unless the parties mutually agree in writing to postpone a determination of the time related impacts of the change. Such a determination may be postponed not more than forty-five (45) days to give the Contractor an opportunity to demonstrate a change in the time and price needed to complete the Work. During any such postponement, the Work shall proceed, unless the Owner agrees otherwise.

If at any time there is a delay in the critical path of the Work due to postponement, due to the Contractor's efforts to justify an extension of the time or an increase in the Contract Price, or due to the Contractor's refusal to proceed with any of the Work, pending agreement on a change in time or price, such delay and any Contractor costs resulting from it shall not serve as the basis for the extension of the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date or for an increase in the Contract Price.

(h) The acceptance by the Contractor of any payment made by the Owner under a Change Order shall

be and operate as a release to the Owner of all claims by the Contractor and of all liability owing to the Contractor for all things done or furnished in connection with the Work described in the Change Order. The execution of any Change Order by the Owner shall not be an acceptance of any Work or materials not in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship or operate to release the Contractor or his surety from any obligation arising under the Contract, the Standard Performance Bond, or the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond.

(i) Payments will not be made for any Work, labor, or materials performed on a unit price or a

Subsection 38(a)(3) basis until the Contractor has furnished the Owner documents, certified as true and correct by an authorized officer or agent of the Contractor, evidencing the cost of such Work, labor, and materials. The Owner may require any or all of the following documentation to be provided by the Contractor.

For Work performed on a Unit Price basis: (1) Certified measurements of authorized and approved excavations, over-excavations, fills

and/or backfills, and similar work; and/or

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

43

(2) Certified measurements of piling installed, caissons installed, and similar work; and/or (3) Daily records of waste materials removed from the Site and/or fill materials imported to

the Site. For Work performed on a Subsection 38(a)(3) basis: (1) Certified payroll records showing the name, classification, date, daily hours, total hours,

rate, and extension for each laborer, foreman, supervisor, or other worker; and/or (2) Equipment type & model, dates, daily hours, total hours, rental rate, or other specified

rate, and extension for each unit of equipment; (3) Invoices for materials showing quantities, prices, and extensions; (4) Daily records of waste materials removed from the Site and/or fill materials imported to

the Site; (5) Certified measurements of over-excavations, piling installed and similar work; and/or (6) Transportation records for materials, including prices, loads, and extensions. Requests for payment shall be accompanied and supported by invoices for all l materials used and for all transportation charges claimed. If materials come from the Contractor's own stock, then an affidavit may be furnished, in lieu of invoices, certifying quantities, prices, etc. to support the actual cost.

39. EXTRAS

If the Contractor claims that any instructions given to him by the Architect/Engineer or by the Owner, by drawings or otherwise, involve extra Work which increases the scope of the Contract, then, except in emergencies endangering life or property, he shall give the Architect/Engineer and the Owner written notice thereof before proceeding to execute the Work. Said notice shall be given promptly enough to avoid delaying the Work and in no instance later than fourteen (14) days after the receipt of such instructions. Should it not be immediately clear to the Contractor that the change involves extra Work outside the scope of the Contract, written notice shall be sufficient if given as soon as possible after such realization, but in no event later than fourteen (14) days after the start of such Work. If the Owner agrees, a Change Order shall be issued as provided in Section 38 of these General Conditions, and any additional compensation shall be determined by one of the three (3) methods provided in Subsection 38(a), as selected by the Owner. If the Owner does not agree, then any claims for compensation for the extra Work shall be filed in accordance with Section 47.

40. CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT

If the Work should be stopped under an order of any court or other public authority for a period of ninety (90) days through no fault of the Contractor or anyone employed by him, or if the Owner should fail to pay to the Contractor within thirty (30) days any sum certified by the Architect/Engineer when no dispute exists as to the sum due or any provision of the Contract, then the Contractor may, upon ten (10) calendar days written notice to the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, stop Work or terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for the cost of the Work actually performed, together with overhead and profit thereon, but profit on the Work performed shall be recovered only to the extent that the Contractor can demonstrate that he would have had profit on the entire Contract if he had completed the Work. The Contractor may not receive profit or any other type of compensation for parts of the Work not performed. The Contractor may recover the reasonable cost of physically closing down the Site, but no other costs of termination. The Owner may offset any claims it may have against the Contractor against the amounts due

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

44

to the Contractor. In no event shall termination of the Contract by the Contractor terminate the obligations of the Contractor's surety on its payment and performance bonds.

41. OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE THE CONTRACT FOR CAUSE

(a) If the Contractor should be adjudged as bankrupt, or if he should make a general assignment for

the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency, the Owner may terminate the Contract. If the Contractor should refuse or should repeatedly fail, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials and equipment, or if he should fail to perform the Work in a diligent, efficient, workmanlike, skillful, and careful manner, or if he should fail or refuse to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if he should fail to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or Suppliers of material or labor, or if he should disregard laws, ordinances or the written instructions of the Architect/Engineer or the Owner, or otherwise be in substantial violation of any provision of the Contract, then the Owner may terminate the Contract.

(b) Prior to termination of the Contract, the Owner shall give the Contractor and his surety ten (10)

days written notice of such termination in the manner provided in Section 1 (definition of "Notice") of these General Conditions and allow ten (10) days during which the Contractor and/or his surety may rectify the basis for the notice. If rectified to the satisfaction of the Owner within said ten (10) days, the Owner may rescind its notice of termination. If not, the termination for cause shall become effective at the end of the ten (10) day notice period without further notice to the Contractor. In the alternative, the Owner may, in writing, postpone the effective date of the termination for cause, at its sole discretion, if it should receive reassurances from the Contractor and/or its surety that the basis for the termination will be remedied in a time and manner which the Owner finds acceptable. If at any time after such postponement, the Owner determines that Contractor and/or its surety has not or is not likely to rectify the causes of termination in an acceptable manner or within the time allowed, then the Owner may immediately terminate the Contract for cause, without the necessity of further ten (10) day notice, by notifying the Contractor and his surety in writing of the termination. In no event shall termination for cause terminate the obligations of the Contractor's surety on its payment and performance bonds.

(c) Upon termination of the Contract becoming effective, the Owner shall take possession of the Site

and of all materials, tools and equipment thereon and shall proceed as follows:

(1) No Security Provided: If no security has been provided pursuant to Section 8 herein, the Owner shall finish the Work by whatever method he may deem expedient. If the expense of finishing the Work, including compensation for additional managerial and administrative services, shall exceed the unpaid balance of the Contract Price, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner, together with any other expenses of terminating the Contract and having it completed by others.

(2) Security Provided: If security has been provided pursuant to Section 8 herein, the

Owner shall provide Notice to the Surety that termination of the Contract became effective and proceed as set forth in the Standard Performance Bond, CO-10, Form DGS-30-084, and the Terms and Conditions therein. If the expense of finishing the Work, including compensation for additional managerial and administrative services, shall exceed the unpaid balance of the Contract Price and the penal amount of the Standard Performance Bond, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner, together with any other expenses of terminating the Contract and having it completed by others.

(d) If it should be judicially determined that the Owner improperly terminated this Contract for cause,

then the termination shall be deemed to be a termination for the convenience of the Owner and the Contractor’s rights and remedies shall be solely limited to those provided by Section 42 of these General Conditions.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

45

(e) Termination of the Contract under this Section is in addition to and without prejudice to any other

right or remedy of the Owner. Any actions by the Owner permitted herein shall not be deemed a waiver of any other right or remedy of the Owner under the Contract or under the law. The Owner may offset any claims it may have against the Contractor against the amounts due to the Contractor. The provisions of this Section shall survive termination of the Contract.

42. TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE

(a) The Owner may terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, at any time without cause upon giving the Contractor written notice of such termination in the manner provided in Section 1 (definition of "Notice") of these General Conditions. Upon such termination, the Contractor shall immediately cease Work and remove from the Site all of its labor forces, equipment and such of its materials as Owner elects not to purchase or to assume in the manner hereinafter provided. Upon such termination, the Contractor shall take such steps as Owner may require to assign to the Owner the Contractor's interest in all Subcontracts and purchase orders designated by Owner. After all such steps have been taken to Owner's satisfaction, the Contractor shall receive as full compensation for termination and assignment the following:

(1) Amounts due for Work performed in accordance with the Contract subsequent to the

latest approved Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) through the date of termination; and

(2) All amounts then otherwise due under the terms of this Contract associated with the

Work performed prior to the date of termination; and (3) Reasonable compensation for the actual cost of demobilization incurred by the Contractor

as a direct result of such termination. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any compensation or damages for lost profits or for any other type of contractual compensation or damages other than those provided in Subsection 42(a). The Owner may offset any claims it may have against the Contractor against the amounts due to the Contractor. Upon payment of the foregoing, Owner shall have no further obligations to Contractor of any nature. The Contractor agrees to waive all claims against the Owner for any consequential damages that may arise from or relate to the Owner’s termination of the Contract including, but not limited to, damages for loss of revenue, income, profit, business, reputation, or bonding capacity.

(b) In no event shall termination for the convenience of the Owner terminate the obligations of the Contractor's surety on its payment and performance bonds.

(c) Any actions by the Owner permitted herein shall not be deemed a waiver of any other right or

remedy of the Owner under the Contract or under the law. The provisions of this Section shall survive termination of the Contract.

43. DAMAGES FOR DELAYS; EXTENSION OF TIME

(a) Excusable Non-Compensable Delays: If and to the extent that the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by strikes, fires, unusual delays in transportation or unavoidable casualties, or other causes outside the control of the Owner or the Contractor, with the exception of delays caused by weather provided for in Section 6, for which the Contractor intends to request an extension of either the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date, as the case may be, then the Contractor shall give the Owner and Architect/Engineer written notice of the delay within fourteen (14) days of the inception of the delay. The Contractor shall also give written notice to the Owner and Architect/Engineer of the termination of the delay not more than fourteen

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

46

(14) days after such termination. If the Owner agrees with the existence and the impact of the delay, the Owner shall extend the Time for Completion, the Contract Completion Date or Final Completion Date, as the case may be, for the length of time that the date for Substantial Completion or Final Completion was actually delayed thereby, and the Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated or actual damages for delay during the period of such extension nor shall the Contractor be due compensation or damages of any kind, under any theory of law, as a result of such delay, the impact of such delay, or acceleration of Work as a result of such delay. In the event a CPM schedule is required by the Contract, no extension of the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date shall be granted unless the Contractor demonstrates a delay in the critical path of the approved CPM schedule or approved bar graph schedule.

(b) Excusable Compensable Delays: If and to the extent that the Contractor is unreasonably delayed

at any time in the progress of the Work by any acts or omissions of the Owner, its agents, or employees due to causes within the Owner's control, and the Contractor intends to request an extension of either the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date, as the case may be, and/or additional compensation for damages, if any, caused by the delay, then the Contractor shall notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer immediately at the time of the occurrence giving rise to the delay by the fastest means available and shall give written notice no later than two (2) working days after inception of the delay. The Contractor's written notice shall specify the nature of the delay claimed by the Contractor, the cause of the delay, and the impact of the delay on the Contractor's Work schedule. The Owner shall then have three (3) working days to respond to the Contractor's notice with a resolution, remedy, direction to alleviate the delay, or rejection of the Contractor’s notice of delay. The Owner’s failure to respond within the time required shall be deemed to be a rejection of the Contractor’s notice. The Contractor shall also give written notice to the Owner and Architect/Engineer of the termination of the delay not more than fourteen (14) days after such termination. If and to the extent that a delay is caused by or due to the Owner or A/E taking any actions permitted or required by the Contract, the Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of time or additional compensation only for the portion of the delay that is unreasonable, if any.

(c) Non-Excusable Non-Compensable Delays: The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension

of the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date or to any additional compensation for delays if and to the extent they are (1) caused by acts, omissions, fault, or negligence of the Contractor or his Subcontractors, agents or employees or due to foreseeable causes within their control, including, but not limited to, delays resulting from Defective Work including workmanship and/or materials, from rejected work which must be corrected before dependent work can proceed, from Defective Work or rejected work for which corrective action must be determined before like work can proceed, from incomplete, incorrect, or unacceptable Submittals or samples, or from the failure to furnish enough properly skilled workers, proper materials or necessary equipment to diligently perform the work in a timely manner in accordance with the Project schedule; or (2) due to causes that would entitle the Owner to recover delay costs or damages.

(d) No extension of time or additional compensation, if applicable, will be granted for any delay

unless the claimed delay directly affects the critical path of the approved CPM schedule or the schedule shown on the approved bar graph schedule, whichever is applicable, and any float has been consumed. No extension of time or additional compensation shall be given for a delay if the Contractor failed to give notice in the manner and within the time prescribed in Subsections 43(a) or (b) above, whichever applies. Furthermore, no extension of time or additional compensation shall be given for any delay unless a written request therefor is made in writing to the Owner, with a copy to the Architect/Engineer, within twenty (20) days of the end of the delay. The request shall state the cause of the delay, the number of days of extension requested, and any additional compensation requested by the Contractor. Failure to give written notice of either the inception or the termination of the cause of delay or failure to present a claim for extension of time and/or

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

47

monetary compensation within the times prescribed shall constitute a waiver of any claim for extension or additional compensation based upon that cause.

(e) Requests for extensions of time and/or compensation for delays pursuant to Subsection 43(b)

above must be substantiated by itemized data and records clearly showing that the Work delayed was on the critical path of the approved CPM schedule or on the sequence of Work on the approved bar graph schedule, as modified, whichever applies, and that the additional time and/or costs incurred by the Contractor are directly attributable to the delay in the Work claimed. Furthermore, compensation for delay shall be calculated from the contractual Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, as adjusted by Change Order, and shall not be calculated based on any early completion planned or scheduled by the Contractor, unless a Change Order has been executed pursuant to Section 19(f) changing the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date to reflect such early completion. See Section 19 for procedures for the Contractor to follow if he plans early completion of the Work and wishes to request a Change Order reflecting the early completion date.

Agreed Compensation/Liquidated Damages for Owner Delay:

If and to the extent that the Contractor is entitled to an extension in the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date and additional compensation purely as a result of delay under Subsection 43(b) and not as a result of a change in the Work under Section 38, the agreed compensation and liquidated damages due the Contractor for days added to the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date for each day of such delay shall be the per diem expenses as determined from an itemized accounting of the direct Site overhead expenses and home office and other indirect overhead expenses only as specified in Subsections 38(e)(6)(i) and (ii). These expenses shall exclude any and all expenses specified in Subsection 38(f).

(f) If the Contractor submits a claim for delay damages pursuant to Subsection 43(b) above, the

Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for a percentage of all costs incurred by the Owner in investigating, analyzing, negotiating, and litigating or arbitrating the claim, which percentage shall be equal to the percentage of the Contractor's total delay claim which is determined through litigation or arbitration to be false or to have no basis in law or in fact. (§ 2.2-4335, Code of Virginia)

(g) Any change in the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date shall be

accomplished only by issuance of a Change Order. (h) Agreed Compensation/Liquidated Damages for Contractor Delay: If the Contractor fails to

complete the Work within the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date, the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner in the amounts set forth in the Supplemental General Conditions, if any, not as a penalty, but as fixed, agreed, and liquidated damages for delay until the Work is substantially or finally completed as the case may be. If liquidated damages are not so fixed in the Supplemental General Conditions, the Contractor shall be liable for any and all actual damages sustained as a result of delay. In addition to damages for delay, whether liquidated or actual, the Contractor shall also be liable for any and all actual damages sustained by the Owner as a result of any other breach of the Contract, including, but not limited to, Defective Work and abandonment of the Contract.

(i) If liquidated damages are provided by the Supplemental General Conditions, the following

provisions apply:

(1) If the Work is not substantially complete by the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, the Contractor shall owe to the Owner, not as a penalty but as Step One liquidated damages, the sum stated in the Supplemental General Conditions for Step One

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

48

liquidated damages for each and every partial or total calendar day of delay in Substantial Completion.

(2) Once the Work is substantially complete, the accrual of Step One liquidated damages

shall cease and the Contractor shall have thirty (30) calendar days in which to achieve Final Completion of the Work.

(3) If Final Completion of the Work is not achieved on or before the thirtieth (30th) calendar

day after Substantial Completion, and if the Owner has not granted any extension of time, the Contractor shall owe to the Owner, not as a penalty but as Step Two liquidated damages, the sum stated in the Supplemental General Conditions as Step Two liquidated damages for each and every partial or total calendar day of delay in Final Completion.

(j) The Contractor waives any and all defenses as to the validity of any liquidated damage provisions

in the General Conditions or other Contract Documents, or of any liquidated damages assessed against the Contractor, on the grounds that such damages are void as penalties or are not reasonably related to actual damages.

44. INSPECTION FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION & FINAL COMPLETION

(a) The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing on the Certificate of Partial or Substantial Completion by the Contractor (Form CO-13.2a), of the date when the Work or designated portion thereof, will be, in his opinion, substantially complete and ready for inspection and testing to determine if it has reached Substantial Completion. The notice shall be given at least ten (10) days in advance of said date and shall be forwarded through the Architect/Engineer, who will attach his written endorsement as to whether or not he concurs with the Contractor's statement that the Work will be ready for inspection and testing on the date given. The Architect/Engineer's endorsement is a convenience to the Owner only and shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility in the matter nor shall the Architect/Engineer's endorsement be deemed to be evidence that the Work was substantially complete and ready for inspection and testing. Inspection and testing shall take place at a time(s) mutually agreeable to the Contractor, Owner and Architect/Engineer.

The inspection shall include a demonstration by the Contractor that all equipment, systems and operable components of the project function properly and in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall furnish access for the inspection and testing as provided in Section 21 of these General Conditions. The inspection and testing shall determine whether Substantial Completion has been accomplished and shall result in a written list of unfinished Work and Defective Work, commonly referred to as a "punch list", which must be finished and corrected to obtain Final Completion.

After successful completion of the testing and the Architect / Engineer determines that, in its opinion, the Work, either in whole or in part, is substantially complete, the Architect / Engineer shall notify the Owner, in writing on the Certificate of Partial or Substantial Completion by the Architect/Engineer (Form CO-13.1a), that the Work, or a specified portion thereof, is recommended to be declared substantially complete. The Owner shall notify the Contractor, in writing, of the date the Owner accepts the Work, or the specified portion thereof, as substantially complete or the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the deficiencies to be corrected or completed before such Work will be accepted as substantially complete.

(b) The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing on the Certificate of Completion by the Contractor (form CO-13.2), of the date when the Work has reached or will reach Final Completion and will be ready for final inspection and testing. The notice shall be given at least five (5) days in advance of said date and shall be forwarded through the Architect/Engineer, who will attach his endorsement as to whether or not he concurs in the Contractor's statement that the Work will be ready for inspection and testing on the date given. That inspection and any necessary testing shall be conducted in the same manner as the inspection for Substantial Completion. When the Work is

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

49

finally and totally complete, including the elimination of all defects, the Work shall be finally accepted by the Owner and Final Payment shall be made in accordance with Section 36 of these General Conditions.

(c) The Architect/Engineer shall conduct the inspections. The Owner may elect to have other persons of its choosing also participate in the inspections. If one or more Substantial or Final Completion re-inspections are required, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all costs of re-inspection or, at the Owner's option, the costs may be deducted from payments due to the Contractor.

(d) A representative of the State Fire Marshal's Office will either be present at the Substantial and Final Completion inspections or otherwise inspect the completed Work and advise the Owner whether the Work meets the fire safety requirements of the applicable building code.

(e) Approval of Work at or as a result of any inspection required herein shall not release the

Contractor or his surety from responsibility for complying with the Contract. 45. GUARANTEE OF WORK

(a) Except as otherwise specified, all Work shall be, and is hereby, guaranteed by the Contractor against defects resulting from the use of materials, equipment or workmanship, which are defective, inferior, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract, for one (1) year from the date of Final Completion of the entire Project by the Owner. Equipment and facilities which have seasonal limitations on their operation (e.g. heating or air conditioning units) shall be guaranteed for one (1) full year from the date of seasonally appropriate tests and acceptance, in writing, by the Owner. Where the Owner agrees to take Beneficial Occupancy of a portion or phase of the Work which has been determined to be substantially complete before the entire Work is finally completed, the guarantees for the materials, equipment and workmanship in that portion or phase shall begin on the date that the Owner takes Beneficial Occupancy, unless otherwise specified in the Supplemental General Conditions, Special Conditions, or by separate agreement. At six (6) months and eleven (11) months after substantial completion, the Contractor shall meet with the Owner to review the status of and assign value to any unresolved warranty, guarantee, and punch list items.

(b) If, within any guarantee period, Work which is not in accordance with the Contract, Defective Work, or inferior material, equipment or workmanship is noted by the Owner or Architect/Engineer which requires or renders necessary repairs or changes in connection with the guaranteed Work, the Contractor shall, promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner, such notice being given not later than two weeks after the guarantee period expires, and without expense to the Owner:

(1) Place in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such guaranteed Work and correct all defects, inferior materials, equipment or workmanship therein;

(2) Make good all damage to the structure or Site or equipment or contents thereof, which, in the opinion of the Owner or the Architect/Engineer, is the result of the use of materials, equipment or workmanship which are inferior, defective or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract; and

(3) Make good any Work or materials or the equipment and contents of structures and/or Site disturbance that results from fulfilling the provisions of this Section.

(c) In any case, when in fulfilling the requirements of the Contract and this guarantee or any other guaranty or warranty, the Contractor disturbs any work performed by a separate contractor, he shall restore such work to a condition satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer and Owner and guarantee such restored work to the same extent as if it was guaranteed under this Contract.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

50

(d) If the Contractor, after notice, fails to proceed promptly to comply with the terms of the guarantee as set forth in this Section, the Owner may have the defects or inferior materials, equipment or workmanship corrected and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expense incurred.

(e) All special warranties and guarantees applicable to definite parts of the Work that may be stipulated in or required by the Contract Documents shall be subject to the terms of this Section during the first year of the life of such special warranty or guarantee.

(f) The guarantee of this Section shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, applicable to or arising from this Contract or by law.

(g) Nothing contained in this Section shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents, including liability for Defective Work under Section 30. This Section relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor as set forth in this Section to correct the Work and does not limit the time within which his obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to his other obligations under the Contract Documents.

(h) In the event the Work of the Contractor is to be modified by another contractor, either before or after the Final Inspection provided by Section 44 of the General Conditions, the first Contractor shall remain responsible in all respects under this Section's Guarantee of Work and under any other warranties or guarantees, express or implied, applicable to or arising from this Contract or by law. However, the Contractor shall not be responsible for any defects in material or workmanship introduced by the contractor modifying his Work. The first Contractor and the contractor making the modifications shall each be solely responsible for his respective work. The contractor modifying the earlier Work shall be responsible for any damage to or defect introduced into the Work by his modification. If the first contractor claims that a subsequent contractor has introduced defects of materials and/or workmanship into his Work, it shall be the burden of the contractor making the claim to demonstrate clearly the nature and extent of such introduced defects and the other contractor's responsibility for those defects. Any contractor modifying the work of another shall have the same burden if he asserts that defects in his work were caused by the contractor whose work he is modifying.

(i) The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Commonwealth of Virginia, the Owner and the Owner’s consultants, representatives, agents and employees from and against any and all claims, causes of action, losses, costs, expenses or damages, including but not limited to attorney's fees, of any kind or nature whatsoever, arising from or relating to any bodily injury, including sickness, disease or death, or any property damage, that result from or arise out of the work performed by the Contractor, or by or in consequence of any neglect in safeguarding the Work, through the use of unacceptable materials in the Work, or resulting from any act, omission, negligence, or misconduct of the Contractor, any of his subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. The Owner may retain as much of the moneys due the Contractor under the Contract as the Owner considers necessary to ensure that a fund will be available to pay a settlement or judgment of such suits, actions, or claims. If insufficient monies are or will become due, the Contractor’s surety and/or insurers will not be released from liability until all such claims and actions have been settled and suitable evidence to that effect has been furnished the Owner.

46. ASSIGNMENTS

Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract in whole or any part without the written consent of the other, nor shall the Contractor assign any moneys due or to become due to him hereunder, without the prior written consent of the Owner. Consent to assignment shall not be unreasonably withheld. No assignment shall relieve any party from its obligations under the Contract.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

51

47. CONTRACTUAL DISPUTES (§ 2.2-4363, Code of Virginia) (a) Contractual claims, whether for money or for other relief, shall be submitted, in writing, no later than

sixty (60) days after Final Payment; however, written notice of the Contractor's intention to file such claim must be given within fourteen (14) days of the time of the occurrence or beginning of the Work upon which the claim is based. Such notice shall state that it is a “notice of intent to file a claim” and include a written statement describing the act or omission of the Owner or its agents that allegedly caused or may cause damage to the Contractor and the nature of the claimed damage. The submission of a timely notice is a prerequisite to recovery under this Section. Failure to submit such notice of intent within the time and in the manner required shall be a conclusive waiver of the claim by the Contractor. Oral notice, the Owner’s actual knowledge, or a written notice given after the expiration of fourteen (14) days of time of the occurrence or beginning of the Work upon which the claim is based, shall not be sufficient to satisfy the requirements of this Section. Although the Contractor may be required to submit certain classes of claims prior to Final Payment, and the Contractor is not prevented from submitting claims during the pendency of the Work, the Owner shall not be obligated to render a final written decision on any claim until after Final Payment. All claims shall state that they are “claims” pursuant to this Section, be submitted along with all practically available supporting evidence and documentation and the certification required by Subsection 47(f), and request a final decision. Certificates for payment, applications for payment, vouchers, invoices and similar requests for payment submitted for work done by the Contractor in accordance with the expected contract performance are routine submissions and shall not be considered claims under this Section. Proposed or requested change orders, demands for money compensation or other relief, and correspondence and e-mails to the Owner or its representatives, which do not strictly comply with the requirements of this Section, shall not be considered claims under this Section.

(b) No written decision denying a claim or addressing issues related to the claim shall be considered a

denial pursuant to this Section unless the written decision makes express reference to this Section and is signed by the Agency head or his designee. The Contractor may not institute legal action prior to receipt of the Owner's final written decision on the claim unless the Owner fails to render such a decision within ninety (90) days of submission of the claim, at which time the claim shall be deemed denied.

(c) The decision of the agency head or other signatory on the Contract shall be final and conclusive unless the Contractor within six (6) months of the date of the final decision on a claim, initiates legal action as provided in § 2.2-4364 of the Code of Virginia. Failure of the Owner to render a decision within 90 days shall not result in the Contractor being awarded the relief claimed nor shall it result in any other relief or penalty. The sole result of the Owner's failure to render a decision within 90 days shall be the Contractor's right to immediately institute legal action. No administrative appeals procedure pursuant to § 2.2-4365 of the Code of Virginia has been established for contractual claims under this Contract.

(d) Pursuant to § 2.2-4366, Alternative Dispute Resolution, of the Code of Virginia, the Owner may enter into an agreement with the Contractor to submit disputes arising from the performance of this Contract to arbitration and utilize mediation and other alternative dispute resolution procedures. However, such procedures entered into by the Owner, the Commonwealth, or any department, institution, division, commission, board or bureau thereof, shall be non-binding and subject to § 2.2-514, as applicable.

(e) In the event that a dispute, claim or controversy between the Owner and the Contractor arises regarding the requirements of the Contract, the performance of the Work, payment due the Contractor, the terms of any Change Order, or otherwise, the Contractor shall not stop, suspend or delay the Work or any part of the Work to be performed under the Contract, or under any Change Order, or as ordered by the Owner. The Contractor shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work to completion, including work required in any Change Order or as directed by the Owner.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

52

(f) Along with a claim submitted under this Section, the Contractor shall submit a Claim Certification Form (DGS-30-234) certifying that the claim is a true and accurate representation of the claim. Claims submitted without the Claim Certification Form shall not constitute a proper claim and, if not submitted with the certification within the time required, shall be deemed to be waived.

(g) The remedies provided in these General Conditions, including costs, expenses, damages or extensions of time, shall be the Contractor’s sole remedies for the acts, omissions or breaches of the Owner, which shall survive termination or breach of the Contract.

48. ASBESTOS

(a) This subsection applies to projects involving existing buildings where asbestos abatement is not a part of the Work, when the scope of the project has been reviewed and a comprehensive survey conducted by an individual licensed by the Virginia Department of Professional and Occupational Regulation to conduct building inspections for asbestos containing materials in buildings, and where the Owner has attempted to remove or encapsulate all asbestos containing material that may become friable or damaged during this Project.

Prior to commencement of Work, the results of the comprehensive survey or any other asbestos survey shall be made available to the Contractor, who shall be responsible for performing his Work so as not to disturb any remaining asbestos, encapsulated or otherwise, identified in such survey or surveys.

If the Contractor discovers or inadvertently disturbs any material that he knows, should have known or has reason to believe, may contain asbestos that has not been previously identified, was overlooked during the removal, was deemed not to be friable or was encapsulated, the Contractor shall stop Work in the area containing or suspected to contain the asbestos, secure the area, and notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer immediately by telephone or in person with written notice as soon as possible. The Owner will have the suspect material sampled.

If the sample is positive and must be disturbed in the course of the Work, the Owner shall have the material repaired or removed and shall pay for the bulk sample analysis.

Except as provided in § 11-4.1 of the Code of Virginia, if the material disturbed is not within the Contractor's authorized Work and/or Work area or under this Contract, the Contractor shall pay for all associated sampling and abatement costs.

(b) If asbestos abatement is included as a part of the Work, the Contractor shall assure that the asbestos abatement work is accomplished by those duly licensed as described in Section 3 of these General Conditions and in accordance with the specific requirements of the Contract and all applicable laws and regulations.

(c) If asbestos abatement is included as part of the Work, the licensed asbestos Subcontractor shall obtain the insurance required under Section 11 (e) of these General Conditions.

49. TRAINING, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT

(a) As a part of the Work, the Contractor in conjunction with his Subcontractors and Suppliers shall provide the Owner's operations and maintenance personnel with adequate instruction and training in the proper operation and maintenance of any equipment, systems, and related controls provided or altered in the Work. The training requirements may be further defined in the specifications.

(b) The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a minimum of two (2) copies of operating, maintenance and parts manuals for all equipment and systems provided in the Work. Further specific requirements may be indicated in the specifications.

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

53

50. PROJECT MEETINGS

(a) The intention of this Section is that the Contractor, the Owner and the A/E have timely exchange of information and cooperate to accomplish the Work as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for managing the Work, obtaining approvals and requesting clarifications on a timely, reasonable basis. The Owner and its A/E are responsible for making a reasonable effort to provide timely responses to the Contractor.

(b) Preconstruction Meeting:

Prior to the start of construction and no later than 15 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, a "Preconstruction" meeting shall be held with attendees to include the Owner's Project Manager and Project Inspector, the Architect/Engineer's project manager and representatives of each design discipline involved in the Project, the Regional Fire Marshal, the Contractor's project manager and superintendent (and scheduler, if Contractor desires), and representatives of the Contractor's major Subcontractors. The purpose of the meeting is to clarify and discuss the specifics related to, but not limited to, the following: (1) Persons involved from each entity and their chain of authority including the names of

persons authorized to sign Change Orders and any limits to their authority. Name of Contractor’s on-site certified Responsible Land Disturber.

(2) Names, addresses, telephone numbers and FAX numbers to be used for Requests for Information (RFI), Requests for Clarification (RFC), Requests for Proposals (RFP), shop drawings, Submittals, and notices.

(3) Contractor's proposed construction schedule and Owner's sequencing requirements, if any.

(4) Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) requirements and procedures.

(5) Procedures for shop drawings, product data and Submittals.

(6) Procedures for handling Field Orders and Change Order Form CO-11.

(7) Procedures for Contractor's request for time extension, if any.

(8) Construction Site requirements, procedures and clarifications to include: - Manner of conducting the Work - Site specialties such as dust and erosion control, stormwater management, project

signs, clean up and housekeeping, temporary facilities, utilities, security, and traffic - Safety - Layout of the Work - Quality control, testing, inspections, and notices required - Site visits by the A/E and others - Owner's Project Inspector duties - Running Punch List - As-Built Drawings

(9) Procedures and documentation of differing or unforeseen Site conditions

(10) Monthly Pay Meeting

(11) Assignment of responsibility for generation of meeting minutes of all project meetings.

(12) Project Close-Out requirements and procedures

(13) Project records

(c) Monthly Pay Meeting:

DGS-30-054 CO-7 (04/15)

54

Section 36 establishes the requirement for a monthly pay meeting which will usually be held at or near the Site. In addition to Owner, A/E and Contractor representatives, the following representatives, at a minimum, should be available to attend portions of the meeting, as applicable or necessary:

- Owner's Project Inspector - Contractor's project superintendent - A/E representative of each discipline where Work was performed for the current pay

request or where Work is projected to be performed in the coming month. - A representative of each subcontractor who performed work included in the current

pay request. - A representative of each subcontractor who is projected to perform work in the

coming month.

The following topics should be included, as a minimum, in the monthly pay meeting:

(1) Observations of status, quality and workmanship of Work in progress (2) Validation of the Schedule of Values and Certificate for payment (3) Conformance with proposed construction schedule (4) Outstanding Requests for Information, Requests for Clarification and Requests for

Proposal (5) Submittals with action pending (6) Status of pending Change Orders (7) Status of Running Punch List items (8) Work proposed for coming pay period (9) Discussions of any problems or potential problems which need attention

(d) Other Meetings: Requirements for other meetings, such as progress meetings, coordination meetings, pre-installation meetings and/or partnering meetings, may be included in the Contract Documents.

51. SMALL BUSINESS PROCUREMENT PLAN

The Owner has developed small business utilization requirements for increasing procurement from small businesses in its construction program. The Owner’s small business requirements may, at the Owner’s option, be included in the contract documents for use by the Contractor in developing its plan for involving small businesses through subcontracting, and through the purchasing of goods, materials, supplies and services in the Contractor’s construction program. The Owner’s plan provides requirements for the Contractor in developing a plan, for submitting its plan and for reporting its achievements in meeting the requirements established for the Contract.

If the Contractor is not a DSBSD certified small business, and the Contractor entered a small business participation percentage on the Bid Form, the Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the posting of the Notice of Intent to Award but not later than 30 days after the effective date of the contract, provide a list of Subcontractors that are proposed to perform the work, including small business Subcontractors, vendors and suppliers showing their DSBSD certification numbers where applicable. Upon receipt of the list, the Owner may, based on the Agency small business procurement plan, require the Contractor to provide additional information on work that has been bid by small business Contractors, and areas in which the scope of work may be reduced in size to increase the pool of potential small business Contractors. Selection of particular Subcontractors for a certain part of the work shall be made in accord with Section 9, Subcontracts of the General Conditions.

* * * E N D O F G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S * * *

DGS-30- 090 CO-10.2 (Rev 12/07) Page 1 of 2

COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA STANDARD BID BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That , the Contractor (“Principal”) whose

principal place of business is located at and (“Surety”) whose address for delivery

of ‘Notices’ is located at are held and firmly bound unto the Commonwealth of Virginia,

, the Owner (“Obligee”) in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Amount (Total Base Bid

plus all Additive Bid Items) Bid by Principal, for the payment whereof, Principal and Surety

bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and

severally, firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for

NOW, THEREFORE, the conditions of this obligation are as follows. This Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Principal will not withdraw his bid during the period of thirty (30) days following the opening of bids; that if his bid is accepted, Principal will enter into a formal contract with the Owner in accordance with the Contract Between Owner and Contractor, Form CO-9, included as a part of the Invitation for Bids (IFB Documents); that Principal will submit a properly executed and authorized Standard Performance Bond and Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond on the forms included in the IFB documents; and that in the event of the withdrawal of said bid within said period, or failure to enter into said contract and give said bonds within ten (10) days after Principal has received notice of acceptance of his bid, Principal and Surety shall be jointly and severally liable to the Owner for the difference between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Owner may contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, up to the amount of the bid guarantee. This amount represents the damage to the Owner of account of the default of the bidder in any particular thereof. The Surety represents to the Principal and to the Obligee that it is legally authorized to do business in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

DGS-30- 090 CO-10.2 (Rev 12/07) Page 2 of 2 Signed and sealed this day of Contractor / Principal (SEAL) _________________________________________ By:_________________________________ Witness Typed Name: Title: Surety (SEAL) By:_________________________________ Attorney-in-Fact Typed Name:

AFFIDAVIT AND ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ATTORNEY-IN-FACT COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA (or alternatively, Commonwealth or State of ) CITY of I, the undersigned notary public, do certify that , whose name is signed to the foregoing bid bond in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Total Bid Amount and which names the Commonwealth of Virginia, , as Obligee, personally appeared before me today in the above jurisdiction and made oath that he/she is the attorney-in-fact of , a corporation which is the Surety in the foregoing bond, that he/she is duly authorized to execute on the above Surety’s behalf the foregoing bond pursuant to the Power of Attorney noted above and attached hereto, and on behalf of the surety, he/she acknowledged the foregoing bond before me as the above Surety’s act and deed. She/he has further certified that her/his Power of Attorney has not been revoked. [Complete if Power is recorded: Clerk’s Office: ; Deed Book/Page No. or Instrument No.: .] Given under my hand this day of . _________________________________ Notary Public (SEAL) My name (printed) is: My registration number is: My commission expires:

Division 1: General Requirements

www.dewberry.com



Dewberry Engineers Inc. General Requirements DEI# 50082886 01 00 00 - 1

SECTION 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. This Division 1 shall be used with the General Conditions (HECO-7/CO-7; HECO-7CM; and HECO-7DB/CO-7DB), Supplemental General Conditions, and the other Contract Documents. The term "University" is synonymous with "Owner."

1.2 UNIVERSITY'S REPRESENTATIVES

A. The University may assign a Construction Administration Manager (CAM). The duties of the CAM are: to assist the University's Project Manager (PM) as the University’s on-site representative for the construction phase; to coordinate all construction phase Consultants; to coordinate other Consultants, the A/E, and the Construction Manager (CM) / General Contractor (GC) communications; to expedite resolution of all conflicts; to perform additional quality assurance oversight (such as inspection, verification, acceptance, rejection) and other administrative oversight. The CAM shall be provided copies of all written decisions and notices to the CM/GC and information and notices from the CM/GC. All activities not specifically required to be performed by the A/E may be performed by the CAM or by the University’s other Consultants.

B. The University may also remove/reassign from the A/E to any selected Consultants certain

inspection, verification, acceptance, rejection, and administrative duties and authority. The University shall provide the CM/GC and the A/E information in writing defining the limits of the selected Consultants’ authority.

1.3 GOVERNING AUTHORITY AND APPLICABILITY OF PROVISIONS

A. The CM/GC shall abide by all University regulations and amendments and all other applicable laws and regulations of the Commonwealth, including those that may be issued during the Contract. This governing authority applies to all employees of the CM/GC and all Trade/Subcontractors. In particular, regulations pertaining to sexual harassment, drug and alcohol use, abusive and offensive language, and smoking should be noted.

1.4 RESUMES FOR CM/GC’S PERSONNEL

A. The CM/GC shall submit to the University, at least one week prior to the Preconstruction Meeting, a resume for each principal staff member who will work on the project, including PM, Superintendent, Foreman, and Quality Control Representative.

B. Resumes shall include, at a minimum, educational background, length of time with the company,

and past work experience, with an outline of responsible positions held. C. The University reserves the right to interview and to reject any staff member for specific reasons

and request new resume submissions. 1.5 PARTNERING

A. Not Applicable 1.6 SWAM FIRM UTILIZATION

A. It is the policy of the University to contribute to the establishment, preservation, and strengthening of SWaM firms and to encourage their participation in University procurement activities. Towards that end, the University encourages CMs/GCs to provide for the participation of SWaM firms through partnerships, joint ventures, subcontracts, and other contractual opportunities. The University has a SWaM firm overall participation goal of 43% for procurement opportunities.



Where it is practicable for any portion of awarded contracts to be subcontracted to other firms, the University encourages the use of SWaM firms.

B. Names of SWaM firms currently registered with and certified by the Virginia Department of Small

Business and Supplier Diversity (SBSD) and desiring to work at the University may be obtained from the University Department of Procurement and Supplier Diversity Services. See http://www.procurement.virginia.edu/pagediversity for additional information.

C. If the total amount of a contract with the University exceeds $100,000, Contractors shall complete

and submit quarterly reports, on forms provided by the Department of Procurement and Supplier Diversity Services in accordance with the University’s SWaM plan, to document Trade/Subcontractor and Supplier expenditures to SWaM firms in connection with the project. The successful firm shall provide the UVA SWaM Contract Administrator with the name of the responsible person within their organization who will be the SWaM contact and who will be responsible for reporting verifiable SWaM expenditures resulting from this contract.

1.7 LEED CERTIFICATION

A. LEED certification requirements do not apply to this contract. 1.8 SECURITY AND PERSONNEL IDENTIFICATION

A. Contractors will not be required to provide identification badges to personnel onsite. B. Contractors shall be required to wear high visibility clothing or construction vests which will

identify the name of the Construction Firm performing the work. 1.9 BUILDING INFORMATION MODELING (BIM)

A. Building Information Modeling is not required for this project. 1.10 INFECTIOUS CONTROL RISK ASSESSMENT

A. Infectious Control Requirements do not apply to projects outside the UVA Health System 1.11 RFI FORM AND LOG

A. CM/GC shall use the RFI form at the end of this section or an alternate form acceptable to the University. The form is intended to be completed electronically and emailed.

B. CM/GC shall carefully study and compare Contract Documents before proceeding with fabrication

and installation of Work and shall promptly advise the A/E of any error, inconsistency, omission, or apparent discrepancy discovered.

C. CM/GC shall allot time in construction scheduling for liaison with A/E for handling queries and

clarifications. D. The University reserves the right to require the CM/GC to reimburse the University for additional

fees from the A/E and A/E’s Consultants for performing review services for the CM/GC if A/E is able to respond to a RFI by making specific reference to a Drawing Sheet or Specification Section.

E. CM/GC shall maintain in the field office a copy of an RFI Log indicating current status of each

item.

REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

https://protect-us.mimecast.com/s/ar6NBQur18gUJ?domain=procurement.virginia.edu



Date: RFI # To: From: Project Name: State Project Code #: PIMS #: Subject: Spec Section: Drawing # REQUEST: The above request has been researched and is not answered by the Contract documents. Name: Signature: Title: RESPONSE: Name: Signature: Title:




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Summary of Work DEI# 50082886 01 11 00 - 1

SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK

1.1 WORK COVERED UNDER THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Name: IRC Plant Connections Hot Water Package B. Owner: The Commonwealth of Virginia and The Rector and Visitors of the University of Virginia

(collectively referred to as the “University”) C. A/E of Record: Dewberry Engineers Inc. D. The Work consists of the following, but is not limited to, installation of approximately 1,100 LF of

medium temperature hot water supply/return piping, and associated appurtenances. Contractor shall stub medium temperature hot water lines into two mechanical rooms (Memorial Gym and Munford House) with valve and blind flange. See project manual and drawings for all work included in the project.

1.2 UNIVERSITY FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Not applicable. 1.3 ASSIGNED WORK

A. Not applicable. 1.4 WORK SEQUENCE

A. CM/GC shall construct Work in stages to accommodate University's occupancy requirements during the construction period. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with the University. Working days may be limited due to University events and schedule. CM/GC to coordinate with University PM for days when works shall not take place.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Work Restrictions DEI# 50082886 01 14 00 - 1

SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS

1.1 CONCURRENT UNIVERSITY OCCUPANCY

A. Partial Occupancy

1. The University intends to occupy all buildings adjacent to this project.

2. The University intends to occupy portions of the site to provide pedestrian access to all

buildings on Grounds. The limits of construction shall not obstruct access to or egress from any buildings. See project documents for more specific information.

3. Parking impacts will be limited to those directly impacted by the construction. All parking lots shall remain open through construction with suitable vehicular and bus access.

4. See §1.3D for smoking restrictions.

B. Continued Occupancy – Adjacent Areas 1. Certain areas will be occupied during entire construction period for conduct of normal

operations. 2. CM/GC shall cooperate with University in scheduling operations to minimize conflict and to

permit continuous usage. Perform Work so as not to interfere with operations of occupied areas. Ingress and egress for patients, staff and support services must be continuously maintained.

1.2 CM/GC USE OF SITE AND PREMISES

A. Access to Site: No restrictions.

B. Emergency Egress/Access: Contractor shall maintain all building emergency exits during construction. Contractor shall maintain all fire lanes

C. Construction Operations: Limited to areas shown on drawings.

D. Time Restrictions for Performing Work: 8am – 6pm, Monday through Friday. Work outside these times shall not be construed as constituting additional cost to the University. Work hours in the vicinity of occupied housing areas are restricted to 8am – 6pm all days. No deliveries shall occur between 7 AM - 8:30 AM and 4 PM - 6:00PM Monday through Friday.

E. Night Work Hours: Defined as between 6 PM and 8 AM, Monday through Friday. CM/GC to request permission in writing at least five (5) days in advance for Work at these times. Work at these times must be authorized in advance in writing before proceeding. Work executed during these times shall not be construed as “overtime” and shall not result in additional cost to University.

F. Weekend Work Hours: Defined as between 6 PM Friday and 8 AM Monday. CM/GC request

permission in writing at least five (5) days in advance for Work at these times. Work at these times must be authorized in advance in writing before proceeding. Work executed during these times shall not be construed as “overtime” and shall not result in additional cost to University.

G. Contractor shall coordinate work and timing with University and current building occupants.



H. Loading dock access: Maintain access to all loading docks and adjacent construction laydown areas.

I. Staging Areas: Limited to the locations as shown on the drawings.

1.3 OPERATIONS OUTSIDE CONSTRUCTION LIMITS

A. Use of certain passageways and other areas, outside of defined limits of operation, will be granted on an as needed basis. Requests must be made in writing at least seven (7) days in advance.

B. The CM/GC shall comply with designated travel paths, staging areas, dumpster locations, and

other restricted items indicated on Drawings. C. University dining facilities will not be available for general CM/GC use. D. Occupied University buildings and grounds, including the construction limits, are a non-smoking

environment. Smoking is allowed only in designated areas. For Health System projects, see http://www.healthsystem.virginia.edu/internet/environment/media/SmokingMap.pdf for prohibited smoking areas.

1.4 WORK SITE PROTECTION

A. CM/GC shall prevent traffic on lawn and landscaped areas unless indicated on the plans. B. Storage of equipment or materials shall not be allowed within the driplines of existing trees

schedule to remain. C. Contractor shall properly protect the work zone through the use of approved traffic control

measures. At the end of each work day, contractor shall cover excavation with road plates to restore two-way traffic after hours. Excavations that will remain exposed (ie. manholes) overnight shall be protect with concrete vehicular barriers and 8’ high chainlink fencing.

1.5 HOT WORKS OPERATIONS

A. The CM/GC shall follow all Virginia Occupational Safety and Health (VOSH) standards/regulations on Hot Works operations and is subject to VOSH inspections. CM/GCs certify that they have a Hot Works program in place with proper oversight that includes recognition of the risk of after-hours ignition from Hot Work and the requirement for a fire watch.

1.6 SAFETY PROCEDURES

A. Contractor is required to maintain a safe working environment and have a safety plan in place for the protection of all persons within the limits of construction.

B. Use of FP&C Incident Notification Procedures & UVA Department of Risk Management

Incident Report Form is required on all projects. See links below: FP&C Cover Sheet for Incident Report UVA Risk Management Incident Report Form

1.7 ELECTRONIC DEVICES

http://www.healthsystem.virginia.edu/internet/environment/media/SmokingMap.pdf

http://www.fm.virginia.edu/fpc/Documents/FPCCoverSheetIncidentReport.docx

http://www.virginia.edu/riskmanagement/documents/IncidentRptForm.pdf



A. Not applicable 1.8 BLASTING

A. Blasting is strictly prohibited on University Grounds. Exceptions require the approval of the Chief Facilities Officer.

1.9 STORMWATER PERMIT NOTIFICATION

A. Site work may not proceed any sooner than two (2) days after the CM/GC has filed with the Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ): 1.) A Virginia Stormwater Management Program (VSMP) General Permit for Stormwater

Discharges from Construction Activities (VAR10) Registration Statement http://www.deq.virginia.gov/Portals/0/DEQ/Water/Publications/CGPRegistrationStatement2014.pdf and

2.) A Permit Application Fee Form http://www.deq.virginia.gov/Portals/0/DEQ/Water/Publications/CGPPermitFeeForm2014.pdf See the instructions attached to each form for completion guidance.

B. For sites of 1 acre in size or greater, land disturbing operations may not proceed until the CM/GC

submits a complete and accurate registration statement and receives acceptance of the registration from the Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ). The registration statement for coverage under the General VPDES Permit for Discharges of Stormwater from Construction Activities (VAR10) is available at http://www.deq.virginia.gov/Portals/0/DEQ/Water/Publications/CGPRegistrationStatement2014.pdf.

The permit application fee form is available at http://www.deq.virginia.gov/Portals/0/DEQ/Water/Publications/CGPPermitFeeForm2014.pdf. See the instructions attached to each form for completion guidance.

C. UVA must also have received approval of any required erosion and sediment control (E&SC)

and/or stormwater management plans before land disturbing operations can begin. 1.10 RAILROAD RIGHT-OF-WAYS

A. All Contractors working for the University performing Work within and adjacent to railroad tracks owned by Norfolk Southern (NS) Railroad shall enter into an Agreement with NS governing the Contractor’s duties and liabilities as to such Work.

1.11 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT EXHAUST

A. Contractor may be required to utilize equipment with exhaust scrubbers in/around building HVAC

intakes or other sensitive areas (ie. Hospital Patient Care, etc.)

B. Idling of equipment or vehicles is not permitted.


http://www.deq.virginia.gov/Portals/0/DEQ/Water/Publications/CGPRegistrationStatement2014.pdf


http://www.deq.virginia.gov/Portals/0/DEQ/Water/Publications/CGPPermitFeeForm2014.pdf



http://www.deq.virginia.gov/Portals/0/DEQ/Water/Publications/CGPPermitFeeForm2014.pdf



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Project Utility Sources DEI# 50082886 01 18 00 - 1

SECTION 01 18 00

PROJECT UTILITY SOURCES 1.1 IDENTITY OF UTILITY COMPANIES

Identity of utility companies providing services in the vicinity of the project area: - Comcast - City of Charlottesville Gas - City of Charlottesville Water - City of Charlottesville Sewer - Rivanna Water & Sewer Authority - University of Virginia Utilities




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Payment Procedures DEI# 50082886 01 29 00 - 1

SECTION 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

1.1 INVOICING

A. Unless otherwise directed by the University representative: 1. The University is committed to processing your application for payment request as

expeditiously as possible. To assist us in that effort, it is important that Contractors submit their monthly billing in the proper manner and in the correct form.

2. The University’s project team, Project Manager and Construction Administration Manager, are responsible for the processing of the Contractor’s invoices. They will provide detailed steps to assure that your invoices are processed in a timely manner. These will be discussed at your Project Preconstruction Meetings.

3. Invoice review process (Monthly Pay meeting prior to official submission):

The University’s project team along w/ appropriate representatives from the contractor team, will review a draft of the schedule of values. At the conclusion of this review/discussion, a final schedule of values will be developed/agreed upon.

4. At the conclusion of the invoice review process and as instructed by the project team, the

Contractor is to access the University’s e-Builder system and: • Enter their final agreed upon schedule of values via the e-Builder invoice process • Attach a copy of the schedule of values (excel spreadsheet)

5. The latest revised Schedule of Values form can be found here:

• http://www.fm.virginia.edu/fpc/HECOManual/HECOMForms/UVAHECO-12.xlsm

6. No other method of invoice submission, unless otherwise directed, is acceptable.

7. By utilizing and approving the appropriate steps in the e-Builder invoice process, all required signatures (contractor’s and University representatives), along with A/E’s certification signature are now electronic. (This replaces the previously required original wet signatures.)

8. Incorrect and/or nonconforming Schedule of Values may be returned for correction, thus

delaying payment.

B. Include all of the following information on the Schedule of Values in the section provided:

• Project Title * • UVA Purchase Order # * • UVA Work Order # *

* This information is located on your formal Notice to Proceed (NTP) and may also be obtained from the Contract Administrator, George Cullen, (434) 982-4620 or Facilities Management Fiscal Technician Senior, Christine Eppard, (434) 982-5856.

C. Vendors can now access invoice payment as far back as 90 days by using the Tax Payer Identification # on the Vendor Invoice/Payment Status Lookup page. https://www.procurement.virginia.edu/pagevendorinvlookup. Additional questions regarding the status of your payment may be directed to Christine Eppard ([email protected]) or (434) 982-5856.

1.2 CHANGES

https://protect-us.mimecast.com/s/27nKBot5Em6iG?domain=fm.virginia.edu


Dewberry Engineers Inc. Payment Procedures DEI# 50082886 01 29 00 - 2

A. Contractor's itemized breakdown of quantities and prices used in computing a proposed change in contract price (HECO-11) shall be provided on forms HECO-GC-1, HECO-SC-1, and HECO-SS-1.

1.3 INVOICING FOR ASBESTOS REMOVAL

A. Not applicable. The University shall directly contract with asbestos abatement contractors as required by this project.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Project Management and Coordination DEI# 50082886 01 31 00 - 1

SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

1.1 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Scheduling: GC is required to schedule Progress Meetings throughout progress of the Work at regular intervals, and at a minimum of two (2) per month. The monthly pay meeting, required by the General Conditions, may serve as a Progress Meeting. The GC is also required to coordinate scheduled meeting dates with the University and A/E.

B. Brief Progress Summary & Work Projection: GC is required to provide a brief summary, in

narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report on projected Work for a minimum of the next two (2) weeks.

C. Attendance Required: Project Superintendent, major Trade/Subcontractors, and Suppliers,

representatives of the University and the A/E, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous Progress Meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project that may include:

1. Schedule 2. Issues 3. Requests for Information 4. Requests for Proposal 5. Estimated Change Orders 6. Change Orders 7. Submittals 8. Applications for Payment 9. Safety, Security, and Conduct 10. University Coordination 11. Utility Outage Requests

E. A/E will record minutes and distribute copies to participants. 1.2 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. GC to schedule Pre-installation Meetings for all utility systems affected by the Project,. Such meetings should include the A/E, the Project Engineer for the discipline, the CAM, the Inspector, a University Facility Operator, any Commissioning Agent, the GC’s PM and Superintendent, the Mechanical Trade/Subcontractor’s PM and Superintendent, and a representative of the major Supplier/Manufacturer.

B. GC shall require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of the specific

section. C. GC to notify A/E and University at least four (4) working days in advance of meeting date. D. GC to prepare agenda and summary to facilitate review of:

1. All required submittal approvals. 2. Conditions of installation, preparation, and installation procedures. 3. Coordination with related Work.


Dewberry Engineers Inc. Project Management and Coordination DEI# 50082886 01 31 00 - 2

4. All required tests and reports.

E. GC to record minutes and distribute copies within three (3) days after meeting to participants, with copies to those affected by decisions made.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGS

A. Required by the General Conditions, this meeting will be scheduled by the University. The A/E will record minutes and distribute copies to the participants.

1.4 MONTHLY PAY MEETINGS

A. Required by the General Conditions, this meeting will be scheduled by the A/E. The A/E will record minutes and distribute copies to the participants.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Construction Progress Documentation DEI# 50082886 01 32 00 - 1

SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

1.1 PHOTOGRAPHY

A. Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work produced by an experienced photographer, acceptable to University. The photographs are to be provided to the University without copyright limitations, the University may use them at their discretion in any publication, website, or other medium.

B. Take photographs at a maximum of three days prior to each application for a payment and as

follows: 1. Site Clearing 2. Excavations 3. Foundations 4. Structural Framing 5. Enclosure of Building 6. Final Completion C. Take photographs as evidence of existing project conditions as follows: 1. Interior Views

2. Exterior Views 1.2 IMAGE FILES

A. Full color; at least one image file of each view. B. File format: JPEG or TIFF. C. Contrast: High. D. Resolution: at least 5 megapixel image (approximately 2,500 pixels on the long edge) or greater,

use highest/best JPEG resolution or TIFF format; do not submit RAW file format. Do not compress files if you perform any image editing.

E. File name: project name, date (use date format: month day year; e.g., Sept 19 2009 - no periods, commas, or dashes), view description, compass heading. 1.3 DIGITAL MEDIA

A. Deliver digital media to the University as taken or at time of next payment request on CD-ROM or coordinate with Resource Center ([email protected]) for downloading. 1.4 TECHNIQUE

A. Provide factual presentation. B. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of field, and

minimum distortion.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Construction Progress Documentation DEI# 50082886 01 32 00 - 2

1.5 VIEWS

A. Consult with the University for instructions on views required. 1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. The resubmittal procedure is the same as that specified for initial Submittals. Changes made since the previous Submittal are to be identified (highlighted or bubbled).

B. A/E will record time required to review resubmittals after original Submittal and first resubmittal.

University retains the right to require the CM/GC to reimburse University for additional fees from A/E and A/E's Consultants for reviewing Submittal more than two (2) times unless the processing results from approved Change Orders causing revisions to previously approved Submittals.

1.7 DISTRIBUTION

A. Deliver digital media with each Application for Payment.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Submittal Procedures DEI# 50082886 01 33 00 - 1

SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. See HECOM Definitions §2.2. 1.2 SUBMITTAL FORM AND LOG

A. CM/GC shall use either the Submittal Register at http://dgs.state.va.us/tabid/820/Default.aspx?udt_1673_param_detail=274 or one of its own making acceptable to the University.

B. CM/GC shall maintain in the field office a copy of the Submittal Log / Schedule indicating the

current status of each item. C. CM/GC shall allot time in the construction scheduling for liaison with the A/E for review of

Submittals. Except for special Submittals, such as those with design calculations and/or detailed Shop Drawings, Submittals will be reviewed in an average time of 7 working days. Submittal items that are inter-related should be submitted at the same time.

D. Schedule finish sample Submittals for approval of color, texture, graining, or other finish at least

30 days before purchase, assembly, or fabrication. 1.3 SUBMITTALS, GENERAL

A. A/E will return Submittals without processing if they do not contain the CM/GC’s stamp, if they are not initialed or signed by an authorized person, if they are not dated, or if it becomes evident that they have not been properly reviewed. Resultant delays are the responsibility of the CM/GC.

B. CM/GC shall bind Submittals in a manner suitable for 8-1/2 x 11-inch file folder storage, except

where doing so is not workable. C. CM/GC shall transmit Submittals with all transportation charges prepaid. D. All submittals, shop drawings, and RFI’s shall be made electronically. CM/GC will be required to

use the University’s Sharepoint (or e-Builder) site for the distribution of electronic submittals, shop drawings, RFI’s, etc.

E. All text and figures included in the submittal shall be legible. A/E will return submittals without

processing if materials are illegible. Resultant delays are the responsibility of the CM/GC. Original electronic documents are preferred. Scans of printed material are not preferred.

F. If cutsheets contain multiple products, systems, components, sizes, etc. Contractor shall clearly indicate which product(s) is to be reviewed. Submission of general product literature is not sufficient.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. CM/GC shall bind in complete sets and provide digital copies. Folding of prints is acceptable. B. CM/GC shall allot time in construction scheduling for liaison with A/E for review of Shop

Drawings. Except for special Submittals, such as those with design calculations and/or detailed Shop Drawings, Submittals will be reviewed in an average time of 7 working days.

http://dgs.state.va.us/tabid/820/Default.aspx?udt_1673_param_detail=274



C. CM/GC shall present all drawings in a clear and consistent manner. Each drawing shall: contain the project name and number; identify each element of the drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, schedule, or room number of the Contract Documents.

D. CM/GC shall show detail, materials, dimensions, thickness, methods of assembly, attachments,

relation to adjoining Work, and other pertinent data and information. E. CM/GC shall verify dimensions and field conditions and clearly indicate both. F. CM/GC shall not use Contract Drawings for Shop Drawings and shall provide original Shop

Drawings with changes from Contract Drawings clearly indicated. G. No item shall be marked as “By Others” or similarly.

1.5 PARTIAL SUBMITTALS

A. A/E will not review partial or incomplete Submittals. Complete Submittals for each item are required. Submittals will not be considered official until it is complete in every respect. Delays resulting from partial Submittals are the responsibility of the CM/GC.

1.6 RESUBMITTALS

A. The resubmittal procedure is the same as that specified for initial Submittals. Changes made since the previous Submittal are to be identified (highlighted or bubbled).

B. A/E will record time required to review resubmittals after original Submittal and first resubmittal.

University retains the right to require the CM/GC to reimburse University for additional fees from A/E and A/E's Consultants for reviewing Submittal more than two (2) times unless the processing results from approved Change Orders causing revisions to previously approved Submittals.

1.7 DISTRIBUTION

A. Duplicate and distribute reproductions of Shop Drawings, product data, samples, and other Submittals which bear A/E's stamp of approval to the Project record documents file, the Project site file, Trade/Subcontractors, Suppliers, other affected Contractors, and other entities requiring the information.

B. Provide each testing and inspection agency one set of approved Submittals for their exclusive

use in providing specified quality control testing and inspection services. See §01400. C. See HECOM §3.11 for University submittal requirements.

1.8 SUBMITTAL FORM



SUBMITTAL FORM Submit separate form for each product – see General Conditions §24

Project Name: Project Code:

TRANSMITTAL To: CM/GC Date: Submittal # A From: Trade/Subcontractor By: Resubmission

Quantity Reference #

Title / Description / Manufacturer

Spec Section Title, Paragraph / Drawing Detail Reference

Submitted for Review & Approval Resubmitted for Review & Approval Complies with Contract requirements Will be available to meet construction schedule A/E review time included in construction schedule Other remarks on above submission:

Substitution involved - substitution request attached

If substitution involved, submission includes full point by point comparative data or preliminary details

Items included in submission will be ordered immediately upon receipt of approval

TRANSMITTAL To: A/E - Attention Date Received by CM/GC:

B From: CM/GC Date Transmitted by CM/GC:

Reviewed, Coordinated, and Approved by CM/GC

Remarks on above submission: One copy retained by sender

TRANSMITTAL To: CM/GC Date Received:

C From: A/E Other Signed Dated Returned:

Approved Approved as Noted Disapproved / Resubmit Not Subject to Review Submission Incomplete; Resubmit Received; No Action Required Full point by point comparative data

required to complete approval process

Provide File Copy with corrections

identified Reproducible copies

only returned

Remarks on above submission: One copy retained by sender

TRANSMITTAL To: Trade/Subcontractor Date Received:

D From: CM/GC Signed Dated Returned:

Copies University One copy retained by sen Remarks on above:





Dewberry Engineers Inc. Regulatory Requirements DEI# 50082886 01 41 00 - 1

SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

1.1 UTILITY EXCAVATION

A. All planned excavations on University property require a University Excavation Permit (see 1.1.D below.) The University's "Request for Excavation Permit” shall be completed and submitted by the CM/GC to the CAM and the Utilities Department within two (2) hours of contacting MISS UTILITY. The University’s "Request for Excavation Permit” notifies only the University of a planned excavation and does not result in notification of MISS UTILITY.

B. The University is a subscriber to the MISS UTILITY underground utility location and notification

system. In addition to University and MISS UTILITY requirements, the City of Charlottesville (434-971-3320) also requires that requests for excavation permits be submitted for City maintained streets or sidewalks. Any excavation of state roads requires notification and coordination with the Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT). All planned excavations require notification of MISS UTILITY per state and federal regulations. It is the responsibility of the CM/GC to notify MISS UTILITY at 1-800-552-7001 of the planned excavation and at 1-800-552-3120 to obtain subsequent verification that utilities have been marked.

C. Excavation shall not proceed without a University Excavation Permit and the completion of the

above requirements. D. See next page for the Excavation Permit.



University of Virginia - Facilities Management - Utilities Distribution Divisions 575 Alderman Road, Charlottesville, VA 22903-2476 - Phone: 434-982-4654 - FAX: 434-982-5073

REQUEST FOR EXCAVATION PERMIT (Submit completed form to Utilities Department within two hours of notifying MISS UTILITY)

CONDITIONS OF REQUEST 1. This excavation permit is for University of Virginia property only. 2. Notify MISS UTILITY at 1-800-552-7001 of the planned excavation and at 1-800-552-3120 to obtain subsequent

verification that utilities have been marked. 3. Utility field locations are valid for 15 calendar days from date of notification. 4. This permit does not constitute project approval or acceptance, nor does it negate any requirement for project

management or review of specifications. Facilities Management project specifications may affect excavation requirements.

5. This excavation permit does not grant or confirm easement approval when required. Easement approval is required for all privately (non-University) owned cables. Contact Real Estate Management at 982-5841.

6. Trenching may occur no closer to trees than one foot for every one inch of truck diameter, measured at four feet above ground level (e.g. no digging closer then 10 feet from a tree of 10 inch diameter).

7. Trenches must be backfilled and tamped in 6-inch layers. All stone, sticks, and other debris larger then 1/2 inch shall be removed from top six inches of backfill.

8. Disturbed structures, ground turf, plants, and beds must be restored within 14 days of expiration of this permit, after which Facilities Management may undertake restoration at the expense of negligent party without prior notice.

9. Guidance on turf seed, plant replacement, exceptions, etc. is available from the Superintendent, Facilities Management Landscape Division, 982-4655, who shall inspect for and enforce compliance with these requirements.

10. Additional restrictions and exceptions:

Name of Requester Date Permit(s) needed From: To: Requester’s Organization Phone Fax Requester’s Full Address, Including Zip Code REQUIREMENTS 1. Detailed plans indicating location, depth, etc., of planned excavation must be attached. Plans must show all adjacent

buildings, streets, sidewalks, and landscape features affected, including trees, shrubs, etc. 2. Contractor has marked site of planned excavation at time of request with white paint. _______ Yes _______ No 3. Statement providing specific reason for excavation plus any other pertinent information: ________ UNIVERSITY OFFICIAL AUTHORIZING THIS ACTIVITY

Name/Signature Title Dept. Phone UVA Work Order Number Miss Utility Number During excavation of site if an unmarked line is encountered or utility line damaged, contractor must immediately contact Facilities Management Utilities Piping and Electrical Distribution at 982-4654 or 982-4641.

================================================================================================== This portion to be completed by Utilities Piping and Electrical Distribution Divisions - Request received in Utilities Department: Date/time: By whom: - Superintendent Landscape Division copied: Date/time: By whom: - ITC notified to locate utilities: Date/time: By whom: - Notice received that ITC field locations have been completed: (required within 40 hours of notification to ITC by Utilities) Date/time: By whom: - UVA utility field location complete: Date/time: By whom:






Dewberry Engineers Inc. Quality Assurance and Control DEI# 50082886 01 43 00 - 1

SECTION 01 43 00 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

1.1 GENERAL

A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Quality Control (QC) services.

B. QC services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports performed by

independent agencies, governing authorities, and the CM/GC. They do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the A/E.

C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve the CM/GC of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements.

D. Requirements of this section relate to fabrication and installation procedures.

1. Specific QC requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the sections

that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and installation procedures.

2. Inspections, tests, and related actions specified are not intended to limit the CM/GC’s QC

procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for the CM/GC to provide QC services required by the A/E, University, or

authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this section. 1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. University testing and laboratory services: The University shall employ and pay for independent testing and laboratory services, as specified in individual Specification sections and as required under Chapter 17 - Structural Tests and Inspections of the current Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code, and required by the other governing authorities, except where they are specifically indicated to be the CM/GC’s responsibility, or are provided by another identified entity.

B. CM/GC Responsibilities:

1. The CM/GC shall employ and pay an independent agency, to perform inspections, tests, and

similar QC services which are designated in the Specifications as a CM/GC requirement to provide.

2. Where the University has engaged a testing agency or other entity for testing and inspection

of a part of the Work and the CM/GC is also required to engage an entity for the same or related element, the CM/GC shall not employ the entity engaged by the University unless otherwise agreed in writing with the University.

3. Failure and Re-testing: Regardless of the original assignment of responsibility for inspection,

testing, or similar services, the CM/GC shall be responsible for re-testing where results of required inspections, tests, or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements. Removal and replacement Work necessitated by such noncompliance shall be at the CM/GC's expense. When inspections or tests cannot be performed after proper notification and at the fault of the CM/GC, rescheduling costs will be the CM/GC’s responsibility.



4. Coordination: Regardless of the original assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services, the CM/GC shall coordinate, with each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and similar services, the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. In addition the CM/GC shall coordinate with each agency’s activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. The CM/GC is responsible for:

a. Scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples and similar activities; b. Notifying the A/E and testing agency 48 hours in advance of operations requiring testing

services; and c. Providing incidental labor and facilities to facilitate inspections, tests, sample taking and

appropriate sample storage.

5. Protection and Repair: Regardless of the original assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services, repair and protection are the CM/GC’s responsibility. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Protect construction exposed by or for QC service activities, and protect repaired construction.

1.3 TEST AND INSPECTION CERTIFIED REPORTS

A. For CM/GC provided services, the CM/GC shall forward a certified written report from the independent agency of each inspection, test or similar service within one week of the test date and with four (4) copies; two (2) copies for the University and two (2) copies for A/E. Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency

2. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections

3. Names of individuals making the inspection or test

4. Designation of the Work and test method

5. Identification of product and Specification section

6. Complete inspection or test data

7. Test results and an interpretation of test results

8. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing

9. Professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract

Document requirements

10. Name and signature of laboratory inspector

11. Recommendations on retesting

1.4 QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION OF SERVICE AGENCIES

A. All testing service agencies, engaging in inspection and testing services, including independent testing laboratories, shall be prequalified as complying with “Recommended Requirements for



Independent Laboratory Qualification” by the American Council of Independent Laboratories, and shall specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. Each service agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized to operate in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

B. Additionally, each laboratory shall:

1. Comply with the requirements of ASTM D3740 and E329. 2. Maintain full-time registered engineer on staff to review and supervise services. 3. Calibrate testing equipment at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to

either the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) or accepted values of natural physical constants.

CM/GC’s QC REQUIRED CERTIFICATION LOG - sample

Section Paragraph Certification Requirement Certification Record Date

Completed 07141 3.1 Cold Fluid-Applied

Waterproofing Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report

07210 3.1 Building Insulation Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report 07270 3.1 Firestopping Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report 07532 3.1 (CSPE) Single-ply membrane

roofing Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report

3.2 Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report 3.3 Post application Bi-weekly CQC report

07901 3.1 Joint Sealants Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report 08212 3.1 Stile and Rail Wood Doors Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report 08462 3.1 Swinging Automatic Entrance

Doors Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report

3.7B Post application Letter 0880 3.1 Glazing Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report 09300 3.1 Tile Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report 09550 3.2 Wood Flooring Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report 09660 3.1B Resilient Tile Flooring Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report

3.2C Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report 3.2E Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report

09680 3.1 Carpet Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report 09950 3.1B Wall Coverings Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report 11132 3.1B Projection Screens Post application Bi-weekly CQC report 14100 3.1B Dumbwaiters (if picked up) Post application Bi-weekly CQC report 16030 3.2A Adjusting, Balancing, and

System Testing Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report

3.2C Post application Letter 3.3C Post application Letter 3.4G Pre-application Letter 3.4H Pre-application Letter 3.4I Post application Letter

15050 1.4 Demolition Pre-application Letter 15060 3.1 Pipe and Pipe Fittings Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report

3.7 Post application Letter 15210 3.1A Vibration Isolation Periodic Bi-weekly CQC report [Periodic]



15220 3.1B Water Treatment Post application Bi-weekly CQC report Letter 3.23 Plumbing General Provisions Post application Letter 15761 3.1E Fan Coil Units Post application Bi-weekly CQC report 15770 3.1B Packaged Air Handling Units Post application Bi-weekly CQC report

3.1E Post application Bi-weekly CQC report 3.1F Post application Bi-weekly CQC report 3.1I Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report

15820 3.1C Fans Post application Bi-weekly CQC report 15846 3.1I Pre-fabricated Ductwork Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report

3.2 Post application Bi-weekly CQC report 15899 3.1C Adjustable Frequency Drive

Units Post application Letter

16470 3.1 Panelboards Post application Bi-weekly CQC report 16623 3.1 Elevator Equipment Wiring Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report 16721 3.2 Fire Alarm and Smoke

Detection System Post application Letter

16722 3.2 Intrusion Detection and Security Access System

Post application Letter

17000 3.4D Building Automation System Post application Letter 1.5 MOCKUPS

1. Not Applicable 1.6 EQUALS AND SUBSTITUTES

A. See General Conditions §26 in either the HECO-7/CO-7.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Temporary Facilities and Controls DEI# 50082886 01 50 00 - 1

SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

1.1 TEMPORARY MATERIALS

A. Temporary materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards.

1.2 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed Work in a manner to prevent damage from construction operations. B. Provide special protection as detailed in individual Specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable materials for protection of installed products and to control

activity in the immediate Work area to minimize damage. D. Protect finished Work from damage, defacement, stains, scratches, and wear. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary

upon such surfaces, the CM/GC shall obtain recommendations for protection from the weatherproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

F. Prohibit vehicular/equipment traffic on lawn and landscaped areas.

1.3 TEMPORARY INSTALLATIONS

A. Install, maintain, and operate temporary utilities and services to ensure continuous operation, and modify and extend such temporary systems as Work progresses.

B. Install temporary facilities and controls in a manner that produces a uniform appearance, that is

structurally adequate for the required purposes, and that is properly maintained. C. Modify and relocate temporary facilities and controls as necessary to accommodate progress of

Work. 1.4 CLEANING, REMOVAL, AND RESTORATION

A. Maintain the construction site in a clean and orderly manner; provide for routine removal of trash and construction debris; provide appropriate waste receptacles and containers on site; and remove all such receptacles and containers prior to Substantial Completion inspection.

B. Remove all temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, controls, and materials

prior to Substantial Completion inspection. C. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary Work. D. Restore existing facilities and equipment used during construction to original condition.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Temporary Utilities DEI# 50082886 01 51 00 - 1

SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

1.1 GENERAL

A. “Enclosure” is defined as the state of construction when: exterior walls are erected; doors and windows are installed; glazing, roof deck, and roofing are complete; and other openings in the exterior envelope are equipped with temporary enclosures.

1.2 ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING

A. CM/GC Supplied Utilities: CM/GC shall provide temporary electrical service required for power and lighting, arrange provisions with utility company or University, and pay costs for service and energy consumed. The service shall be equipped with a meter, main disconnect, and over current protection. Connections to existing systems must be approved by the University. The CM/GC shall pay the costs for service and the energy consumed.

B. CM/GC shall provide electrical service sized to provide adequate temporary power and lighting. C. CM/GC shall provide a branch distribution system from the temporary power source with

distribution boxes and outlets located so that power and lighting is available throughout active Work areas.

D. Permanent receptacles may be utilized during construction. E. Existing receptacles may be utilized as a source of temporary electric service for remodeling

Work within an existing building. F. CM/GC shall replace receptacle plates and wiring devices damaged during construction. G. CM/GC shall provide lighting to ensure safe construction operations and to allow proper finishing

operations. H. Permanent lighting systems may be utilized during construction. I. Existing lighting system may be utilized for temporary lighting for remodeling Work within an

existing building. J. CM/GC shall: restore permanent (and/or existing) lighting systems used during construction to

new (and/or original) condition; replace defective fixtures, controls, and other component parts and; clean fixtures and replace lamps. Lighting shall not be directed skyward.

K. All temporary wiring shall be removed before completion of project.

1.3 HEATING, COOLING, AND VENTILATING

A. CM/GC Supplied Utilities: Prior to Enclosure, CM/GC shall provide heating, cooling, and ventilation as necessary to protect materials, products, and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity. CM/GC shall provide and pay for costs of supervision, operation, maintenance, fuel, and energy consumed.

B. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist in the curing of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.


Dewberry Engineers Inc. Temporary Utilities DEI# 50082886 01 51 00 - 2

C. No permanent HVAC system shall be operated without the permanent filters and/or strainers in place. Upon Substantial Completion, all filters and/or strainers shall be replaced with new filter/strainers. All temporary filters shall be removed prior to occupancy.

1.4 TELEPHONE

A. Contractor’s personnel shall have individual mobile phones, paid for by the contractor, for the purpose of executing the Work.

1.5 WATER

A. University Supplied Utilities: The University will provide the CM/GC with existing source(s) of water for construction use where feasible. The CM/GC is responsible for coordinating Work related to temporary water requirements without compromising the University’s need for water and protecting the building water supply. The CM/GC shall conserve water to the extent practicable and shall use a reasonable amount of water for construction. The CM/GC shall pay for water usage and related sewer costs above the reasonable amount if the University determines an unreasonable or excessive amount of water has been used by the CM/GC. Should the CM/GC's use of water required for Work exceed the limits of available water to the building the CM/GC shall reduce water consumed and/or pay for such modifications as required to eliminate compromising the University system’s ability to meet water requirements for existing services.

B. Where UVA water lines are not easily accessible, contractor shall provide alternate means of supplying water such as a water truck or engaging with City of Charlottesville.

1.6 UTILITY OUTAGES

A. The following restrictions apply to utility outages. B. Authority to schedule power outages must be obtained from the University. The University will

coordinate the interruption of service with the CM/GC and all University parties affected.

C. In all cases the CM/GC shall keep utility and service outages to a minimum and proceed only after written approval of the University is received.

D. CM/GC requests for outages shall include an identification of areas that will be affected by the

proposed outage. E. CM/GC requests for outages shall be submitted a minimum of five (5) working days [preferred ten

(10) days for extensive outages] in advance of the proposed outage.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Construction Facilities DEI# 50082886 01 52 00 - 1

SECTION 01 52 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

1.1 FIELD OFFICES

A. Contractor is not required to provide a field office or trailer.

1.2 SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide and maintain temporary sanitary facilities and enclosures. Existing and new permanent facilities are not available for use.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Vehicular Access and Parking DEI# 50082886 01 55 00 - 1

SECTION 01 55 00 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING

1.1 TEMPORARY ACCESS ROADS AND APPROACHES

A. Construct and maintain temporary roads and approaches to serve the construction area. Temporary roads must not interfere with public routes and must be maintained so as not to be a source of offsite dirt, debris, and litter.

B. Extend and relocate temporary access roads and approaches as Work progress requires.

Provide detours necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. C. Provide and maintain access to all fire protection equipment (ie. fire hydrants, post indicator

valves, fire department connections or Siamese connections) and keep all fire protection equipment free of obstructions.

D. Consult with authority having jurisdiction in establishing public thoroughfares to be used for site

access haul routes (i.e. the University, City of Charlottesville, Albermarle County and/or VDOT). E. Keep all public streets, drives, and walks adjacent to site and haul routes clean and free of dirt,

debris, and litter caused by construction operations. Any dirt, debris, and litter caused by construction operations must be removed immediately. Contractor shall be responsible for street sweeping on a regular basis and at the conclusion of each segment of construction.

F. Install appropriate vehicle / under carriage washing procedures as detailed in the Specifications.

1.2 TEMPORARY PARKING

A. The contractor may park within the construction fence limits.

B. If additional parking is required, parking permits for on-grounds parking may be purchased by the CM/GC from the University Parking and Transportation Office, 1101 Millmont Street, Charlottesville, VA 22903.

C. Existing on-site streets and parking facilities may not be used by construction personnel. D. CM/GC and delivery trucks may park within the staging areas indicated on the Drawings. E. Parking violators will be subject to towing and fines.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Temporary Barriers and Enclosures DEI# 50082886 01 56 00 - 1

SECTION 01 56 00 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

1.1 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations.

B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-

way and for public access to existing building. C. Provide construction fence and vehicular barriers around construction site as shown in the

Drawings; equip with gates and locks. Gates shall be “double locked” including one lock provided by the contractor and one provided by the University. 1. Chainlink fence

a. 8’ Height b. Equip with green mesh screen with sufficient opening to minimize wind damage. Number

and sizing of openings by contractor. c. Direct bury fence post. In paved areas contractor may use 2’ x 1’ stands provided they

are properly anchored with sandbags.

2. Vehicular Safety Barriers (Precast concrete or water filled)

3. Road Plates a. Contractor shall utilize road plates to return traffic to normal condition while construction

is inactive. b. Contractor shall install asphalt along edges of asphalt plate to create smooth transition of

the travelled way. c. Road plates shall be structurally capable of fully supporting highway loads. d. Contractor shall also have road plates on hand during construction of critical intersections

in order to facilitate emergency vehicle traffic.

D. Exterior Closures: 1. Provide temporary weather-tight closure at exterior openings to accommodate acceptable

working conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons.

2. Provide access doors with appropriate hardware and locks.

E. Interior Closures:

1. Provide temporary barriers to separate construction areas from University occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust into occupied areas, to prevent entry of unauthorized persons in construction areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment.

2. Construct of adequate framing and surface with non-combustible materials having closed

joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces. 3. Closures with fire rated corridors shall meet fire-rating equivalents. 4. Paint surfaces exposed to view in occupied areas in colors directed by the Architect.


Dewberry Engineers Inc. Temporary Barriers and Enclosures DEI# 50082886 01 56 00 - 2

F. Tree and Plant Protection:

1. Preserve and protect existing trees and plants designated to remain post-construction. 2. Provide 4 foot high chain link fences around drip line or beyond as approved by the

University, with access for maintenance. 3. Consult with University Architect/Arborist; remove agreed-on roots and branches which

interfere with construction; employ University approved arborist to remove and to treat cuts. 4. Protect areas within barriers from traffic, parking, storage, dumping, chemically injurious

materials and liquids, ponding, and continuously running water. 5. Contractor shall provide wooden logging mats in wooded areas to protect against excessive

rutting of access road, damage to tree trunks or tree roots.

6. Replace trees and plants damaged by construction operation with ones of similar size and approved by the University. Trees lost or damaged shall be replaced on an inch for inch basis. For example, an 8-inch tree can be replaced by two (2) 4-inch trees. All replacement trees shall be 1.5” caliber or larger. Coordinate with Office of University Architect for exact type and location of replacement trees.

1.2. SECURITY

A. Provide security and facilities to protect the worksite and existing premises from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft.

B. Conduct all operations in a manner to avoid risk of loss, theft, or damage by vandalism.

1.3 NOISE CONTROL

A. Execute Work as quietly as practicable to avoid unnecessary disturbances to occupants within and around the premises.

B. High-level noise operations must be performed in accordance with local regulations and must be

approved by University prior to proceeding. C. Loud noise and vibrations, which cause disturbance in residential, hospital, and/or laboratory

areas, must be controlled and coordinated in advance with the University.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Dust Control DEI# 50082886 01 56 16 - 1

SECTION 01 56 16 DUST CONTROL

1.1 GENERAL Execute Work by methods to minimize dust rising from construction operations.

Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into the atmosphere. A. Construction activities causing disturbance of existing dust, or creating new dust, must be conducted in tight enclosures cutting off any flow of dust particles into adjacent occupied areas. B. Before any construction on site begins, CM/GC must properly brief all workers on site to ensure full compliance with the dust control measures in the Construction Documents. Conduct a field review of all dust control policies. Fill out and sign a checklist approved by the CAM. C. CM/GC installs temporary construction dust control barriers and closures above ceilings to prevent the transmission of dust into adjacent occupied areas. D. Do not allow dust and debris to accumulate; remove dust daily; transport all demolished or removed material in tightly sealed, covered, rubber tired containers; fit out containers with clean polyethylene covers; seal containers completely at perimeters; before leaving construction areas wipe clean all containers with a damp sponge to prevent tracking of dust; and place the sponge and pail inside the dust control barrier entrance and keep them clean and changed daily. E. Provide temporary fans, associated ductwork, and dust control barriers required to maintain a negative pressure in the Work area relative to the surrounding occupied areas. Provide HEPA filtered exhaust fans when utilizing existing exhaust duct system. Submit plan for achieving negative pressure to the CAM for review. Install a visual monitoring system to demonstrate that the area is under negative pressure at all times until construction barriers are removed. F. Provide walk off mats at inside dust control barrier entrances and vacuum or change walk-off mats daily or more often if necessary, to prevent accumulation of dust; provide (sticky) walk-off mats immediately outside dust control barrier entrances. G. Immediately remove any dust tracked outside a dust control barrier. H. Immediately replace any ceiling access panels opened for investigation beyond the sealed areas when unattended. If a ceiling tile is removed in any inpatient area, outpatient transplant clinic, or outpatient cancer clinic the patients must be removed from the space until at least one hour after the ceiling tile was replaced. I. Block off existing ventilation ducts within the construction area and cap ducts to be dust tight and to withstand airflow and pressure. J. Clean renovated areas before removal of dust control barriers by: a) wet mopping all vinyl or sheet flooring; b) vacuuming all carpet or soft surfaces with a HEPA filtered vacuum; and/or c) wiping all surfaces with disinfectant. Obtain approval of University CAM before proceeding with removal of barriers and ceiling protection. Carefully remove barriers and ceiling protection to minimize the spread of dirt and debris. K. Take immediate action to clean deficient areas and cease other construction Work until deficiencies are corrected. 1.2 TEMPORARY DUST CONTROL BARRIERS

The CM/GC shall:



A. Provide temporary dust control barriers where indicated and where reasonably required to ensure protection from dust. [FOR CLASS V ONLY - Dust control barriers shall be full height, non-combustible construction, with a minimum 1/2" gypsum board on one side. FOR CLASS IV ONLY - Install plastic dust barriers to seal Work areas from non-Work areas or implement control cube method (cart with plastic covering and sealed connection to Work site with HEPA vacuum)]. Use 3-inch wide duct tape to tightly seal the perimeter of both sides of the barriers and install tape in a neat and continuous manner. Finish paint outer surface of each barrier and match door and frame finish to existing adjacent areas.

1. Dust control barrier doors: 3'-0" minimum width, with frame, hardware, lock set keyed to University system, and heavy duty closer. Tightly weather-strip door to prevent flow of dust into patient areas. Locate doors as directed and swing into construction areas. Keep barrier doors locked outside of working hours. Precut all material for barriers in unoccupied areas.

2. Dust control barriers may not reduce exit access corridors below the required width of 44 inches.

3. (CLASS V ONLY) Seal all door openings to adjacent areas with duct tape.

B. Use Certainteed WP225 by Owens Corning, or equivalent rigid non-combustible foil faced insulation board barriers, to seal patient areas from Work areas, at the perimeter of Work areas, and between finish ceiling and upper concrete slab. The barrier shall be cut to fit around all existing utilities and shall be sealed with tape or foam around all penetrations. (Note - dust barriers may also be constructed as temporary fire/ smoke barriers. As such the gypsum board should continue to the floor slab above. See Drawings for appropriate wall type.) C. Schedule with the CAM the Work described in the Construction Documents outside the construction dust control barriers, including Work in corridors and lobbies. D. Not store any construction equipment or material outside the construction dust control barrier without the University's written permission. E. Keep dust control barriers in a neat, clean, and dust tight condition at all times; provide necessary manpower and equipment (e.g. dust and wet mops, brooms, buckets and clean wiping rags, HEPA vacuums) for cleaning fine dust from floors in occupied areas and to keep adjacent occupied areas clean at all times. F. Provide dust tight polyethylene covering taped in place to completely seal opening until final patching is done whenever openings are made into walls or ceilings in patient occupied areas. This procedure may only be done if Work is completed in one shift. G. Keep construction areas swept clean with sweeping compound and keep clear of debris daily throughout the course of construction. H. Complete and place into operation all of the above described items of Work before beginning demolition. 1.3 EXECUTION

The CM/GC shall: A. Maintain and operate dust control systems to provide continuous protection to occupied areas of the hospital. B. Modify and extend dust control systems as required.



C. Remove all temporary services installed as a requirement of the Contract Documents and restore utilities to original condition at the completion of the Work. D. Legally and properly dispose of all debris resulting from removal and reconditioning operations. 1.4 ENFORCEMENT

A. The University has the right to halt all construction until deficiencies are corrected if violations and/or non-compliance with the provisions of this section occur. The CM/GC will bear full responsibility for any delay of Work. B. A record of each dust control violation will be maintained by the CAM. C. Failure of the CM/GC to immediately mitigate and promptly correct deficiencies is sufficient grounds for termination and will result in corrective action being taken by the University. All resulting costs will be the responsibility of the CM/GC. D. Continued violations will be cause to find the CM/GC in non-compliance with Contract Documents and shall be sufficient grounds for termination.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Project Identification DEI# 50082886 01 58 00 - 1

SECTION 01 58 00 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

1.1 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN

One painted sign, with assembly and construction, design, size, and content as shown on the drawing attached to this section and as follows: A. Made of new wood or metal and structurally adequate and suitable for the specified finish. The sign surface shall be of exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4-inch thick, standard large sizes to minimize joints. B. The paint and primer is to be an alkyd type and of exterior quality. Two coats of paint shall be applied, consisting of an appropriate primer followed by one coat of paint. Both coats are to be applied to the sign support structure, framing and sign surface. Design, sizes, colors, and styles of lettering as shown on the attached drawing are to be used. The lettering is to be done by a professional sign painter. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATIONAL SIGNS A. Informational signs are to be painted with the same colors and lettering as Project Identification Signs above, or standard products. The size of the lettering shall be such that it is legible at a distance of 100 feet. B. Provide signs to direct traffic into and within the Work site. C. Project sign may be made of hollow core plastic. 1.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install Project Identification Sign within 30 days after Notice to Proceed or as specified in the Notice to Proceed. B. Erect at location(s) as shown on the Site Drawings or as approved by the University. C. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced, and framed to resist winds of 50 miles/hr. D. Install sign surfaces plumb and level, with butt joints, and anchor securely. 1.4 REMOVAL

Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at Substantial Completion of Project and restore the area.








Dewberry Engineers Inc. Execution and Closeout Requirements DEI# 50082886 01 70 00 - 1

SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental General Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Submittal of As-Built markup project documents to A/E. 3. Submittal of Record revision by A/E to University’s PM, CAM, or Resource Center.

4. Submittal of warranties to University’s PM or CAM.

B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions 2 through 33.

C. Detailed requirements for Record and As-Built markup documents to be submitted as part of project

closeout are to be found in Division 1 section, “Project Record Documents, Contractor’s “As-Built” Drawings”.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Procedures: Comply with procedures specified in the Commonwealth of Virginia General Conditions for the Contract for Construction. Before submitting the Certificate of Partial or Substantial Completion by the Contractor (HECO-13.2a) complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial

Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents

and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.

2. Obtain and submit all releases that the University requires in order to lawfully occupy the Work without restriction.

3. Advise the University’s PM or CAM of pending insurance changeover requirements.

4. Submit Commonwealth of Virginia Affidavit of Payment of Claims (CO-13).

5. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. All warranties and guarantees shall be drawn in the name of the Commonwealth of Virginia and Rector and Board of Visitors of the University of Virginia.



6. Submit marked-up project documents, maintenance manuals, and similar information to A/E of

Record. See section 017800 for specific requirements.

7. Deliver extra stock, and similar items

8. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools and similar elements.

9. Complete repair of all deficient work, including the touch up of all deficient finishes. a. The Architect will under no circumstances confirm the Work to be Substantially Complete

unless all deficient finish work has been completely repaired and all deficient finishes touched up.

10. Complete Final Cleaning. a. The Architect will under no circumstances confirm the Work to be Substantially Complete

unless Final Cleaning has been completely performed.

11. Remove temporary lock cylinders and cores.

12. Complete all start-up testing of building systems, special testing, and commissioning; deliver reports to University’s representative (PM or CM).

13. Instruct the University’s representatives in the operation of building systems and deliver Building Automation Systems manuals to University’s representative (PM or CM).

14. Complete the exterior portions of the Work to the same degree as that of the interior. a. Exterior lighting must be complete.

b. Construction operations must not impede walkways or driveways.

c. Dumpster and loading dock pads must be clear and in place.

d. Seeding, planting, and initial watering must be performed.

1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Procedures: Comply with procedures specified in the Commonwealth of Virginia General Conditions for the Contract for Construction. Before submitting the Certificate of Completion by the Contractor (HECO-13.2), complete the following: 1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously

submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required. List exceptions in the request.

2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum.

3. Submit a certified copy of the A/E's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, endorsed, and dated by the A/E. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has



been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or when the University took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

5. Submit consent of Surety to final payment.

6. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

2.0 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Regular construction cleaning is included in Division 1 section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."

B. Cleaning: Employ a professional cleaning service for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to

the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of

Substantial Completion. a. Remove all temporary labels. Do not remove labels describing the fire resistance of doors

and frames.

b. Clean glass, plastic, and all reflective surfaces, including all glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compound, and over-paint. Clean all transparent material on both surfaces.

c. Exterior hard surfaces must be free of stains, shavings, films, gum, and other foreign deposits.

d. Interior hard surfaces, including shelves within built-in casework, must be free of cobwebs, dust, stains, shavings, films, and gum.

e. Electrical and mechanical equipment must be must be free of dust, cobwebs, stains, shavings, films, gum, excess lubricant, and other substances.

f. Interior and exterior lamp lenses, reflectors, and baffles must be free of cobwebs, dust, stains, films, gum, insect droppings and carcasses.

g. Removal of Protection and Facilities: Remove temporary protection and construction facilities installed for the Work, including Contractor’s office and site fencing, as specified in Division 1 section, “Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.” Demount, clean, repaint, and stack on site all wood fence materials removed as directed for the University to retrieve. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-textured surface.



C. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the University's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully. 1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the

University's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the University’s PM/CAM.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Closeout Submittals DEI# 50082886 01 78 00 - 1

SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental General Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The A/E shall prepare and provide to the University Record Drawings and Specifications showing the “As-Built” conditions, locations, and dimensions based on the Contractor’s As-Built set of Drawings and Specifications, and other data furnished by the Contractor to the A/E. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for creation of the Contractor’s As-Built set of Drawings and Specifications.

B. The Contractor will provide the following Project “As-Built” documents to the A/E for Record

document preparation: 1. Marked-up copies of Contract Drawings

2. Marked-up copies of Shop Drawings

3. Newly prepared drawings (as necessary)

4. Marked-up copies of Specifications, Addenda, and Change Orders

5. Marked-up product data Submittals

6. Field records for variable and concealed conditions

7. Draw or detail information on Work that is shown only schematically

The A/E shall provide a digital copy to the University’s PM/CAM/Resource Center for University O&M use until the final Record Drawings and Specifications are prepared by the A/E.

C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:

1. Division 1 section "Submittals" specifies general requirements for preparing and submitting

Project Record Submittals.

2. Division 1 section "Contract Closeout" specifies general closeout requirements.

3. Divisions 2 through 33 sections for specifying Project Record Submittal requirements for specific pieces of equipment or building operating systems.

D. Maintenance of Documents and Samples: Store As-Built markup documents and samples in the

field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use As-Built markup documents for construction purposes. Maintain As-Built markup documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition. Make documents available at all times for the A/E's inspections.



1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS PHOTOS

A. Contractor shall take project photos of the work as it progresses on a regular basis.

B. Photos shall be digital photos.

C. Photos shall be labelled by Station/Location.

D. Photos shall be provided to the University at the end of construction or on a period identified by the UVA CAM

1.4 AS-BUILT MARKUP DRAWINGS

A. Markup procedure: During construction, maintain a plain bond copy of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for Project Record Document purposes. 1. Mark these Drawings to show the actual installation where the installation varies from the

installation shown originally. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. Marked items include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to the Drawings

b. Revisions to details shown on the Drawings

c. Locations and depths of underground utilities

d. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits

e. Changes made by Contract Change Order

f. Details not on original Contract Drawings

2. Mark prints of Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings location.

3. Mark documents with red erasable colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.

4. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings

5. Note Construction Change Order numbers B. Responsibility for Markup: The individual or entity that obtained record data, whether the individual

or entity is the Subcontractor, or similar entity, shall markup the Contract Drawings. 1. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.

2. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.

3. Record and check the markup prior to enclosing concealed installations.



C. Review of Drawings: Immediately prior to Substantial Completion inspection, review completed marked-up drawings with the A/E. 1. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on print sets. Erase, redraw,

and add details and notations where applicable. Identify and date each drawing. Include the printed designation "AS-BUILT PROJECT DRAWINGS" in a prominent location on each drawing.

2. Refer instances of uncertainty to the A/E for resolution. D. Adding Drawings to the As-Built Markup Documents: Prepare new drawings when the A/E determines that neither original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show the actual installation. New drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

3. Consult with the A/E for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. When completed and accepted, integrate newly prepared Drawings with procedures specified for organizing, copying, binding, and submitting marked-up drawings.

4. Each prime contractor has the same responsibility for newly prepared drawings as specified for mark up of prints.

D. Submission of As-Built documents: At time of Substantial Completion, submit As-Built documents to

the A/E for the creation of Record Documents for University's records. 1. Organize marked-up drawings into manageable sets. Bind sets with bond or Kraft-paper cover

sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set.

1.5 AS-BUILT MARKUP PROJECT MANUAL

A. During the construction period, maintain a copy of the Project Manual, including Addenda and modifications issued, for As-Built Project Document purposes. 1. Mark the Specifications to indicate the actual installation where the installation varies from that

indicated in Specifications and modifications issued. Note related As-Built Project Drawing information, where applicable. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of product options, and information on concealed installations that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. a. In each Specification section where products, materials, or equipment units are specified or

scheduled, mark the copy with the proprietary name and model number of the product furnished.

b. Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier, installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made and to document coordination with record product data Submittals and maintenance manuals.

c. Note related record product data, where applicable. For each principal product specified,

indicate whether record product data has been submitted in a maintenance manual instead of as a product data Submittal.



B. Submission of As-Built Markup Project Manual: At time of Substantial Completion, submit As-Built Markup Project Manual to the A/E for preparation of the Record Project Manual for the University's records. 1. Bind Project Manual into heavy-duty, 3-ring, black, vinyl-covered binders, with non-stick

transparent cover and spine pockets, 1 to 3 inches thick as required to contain information. 1.6 PRODUCT DATA SUBMITTALS

A. During the construction period, maintain one copy of each Product Data Submittal for final Project Submittal purposes. 1. Mark product data to indicate the actual product installation where the installation varies

substantially from that indicated in product data submitted. Include significant changes in the product delivered to the site and changes in manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation.

2. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

3. Note related Change Orders and As-Built Markup Drawings, where applicable.

4. Upon completion of markup, submit a complete set of Product Data Submittals to the A/E for the University's records.

5. Where approved Product Data Submittals are required as part of maintenance manuals, submit approved Product Data Submittals as an insert in the manual instead of inclusion in separate Product Data Submittals.

B. Submission of approved Project Data Submittals: At time of Substantial Completion, submit digital

files of approved Product Data Submittals to the A/E to verify accuracy and completeness and then deliver to the PM/CAM/Resource Center for the University’s records. For Agency 209 (Health System) projects, in addition to the digital files, one printed copy of approved Project Data Submittals must be submitted to the A/E for the University's records. 1. Bind Project Data Submittals into heavy-duty, 3-ring, black, vinyl-covered binders, with non-

stick transparent cover and spine pockets, 1 to 3 inches thick as required to contain information or submit as files in folders.

1.7 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS MANUAL SUBMITTAL

A. When each construction activity that requires submittal of maintenance manuals is nominally complete, but before Substantial Completion, submit maintenance manuals specified. 1. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size

2. Provide heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders, with non-stick transparent cover and spine

pockets, 1 to 3 inches thick as required to contain information, sized for 8½” x 11” paper with inside pockets or pocket folders for folded sheets.

3. Bind data into individual binders for each manual, properly identified on front and spine. For large manuals, provide an index sheet and thumb tabs for separate information categories per



the MasterSpec Table of Contents.

4. In each maintenance manual, include information specified in individual Specification sections and the following: a. Copies of applicable Shop Drawings and Product Data Submittals.

b. Names, addresses and trades of all applicable Subcontractors, manufacturers, and

equipment.

c. Complete maintenance instructions from the manufacturer’s local representative for each item of operable equipment, as well as the name, address and telephone number of the installing Subcontractor.

d. Catalog data on all items submitted and other pertinent data such as mortar colors, brick selected, and colors selected for all finished materials and fabrics.

e. Catalog data on all furnished plumbing fixtures, valves, water heaters, heating equipment, light fixtures and similar equipment and systems. Manufacturer’s promotional literature is not acceptable.

f. Manufacturer’s name, model number, service manual, spare parts list, and descriptive literature for all components used.

g. Preventive maintenance instructions and schedules for all major equipment.

h. Lit of most frequently encountered breakdowns and repairs/trouble shooting manual(s).

i. Instructions for starting and operating the actual system as installed.

j. Detailed one-line, color-coded wiring diagrams.

k. Copies of warranties.

l. Inspection procedures.

B. Submission of Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manual: At time of Substantial Completion, submit O&M Manual to the A/E for the University's use. 1. Submit a single draft copy to the A/E for review and comment.

2. Submit digital files of approved O&M Manual binder contents to FM Resource Center.

3. Submit 1 (one) approved final copy of O&M Manual for Academic (Agency 207) and 2 (two)

copies for Health System (Agency 209) projects.

4. Submit spare parts to the University CAM.

5. Submit keys other than those provided by FM to the University CAM.

6. The Contractor shall furnish a COBie format data sheet inventory of all installed equipment and building components to include (if applicable) elevators, fire protection systems, fire detection systems, pressure vessels, emergency lighting, emergency electrical generators, monitoring



systems, electrical, HVAC and refrigeration, roofing, water and sewer, heat distribution, carpentry, plumbing for the preventive maintenance system. The Contractor shall provide all special tools and special test equipment required for Maintenance.

1.8 MISCELLANEOUS PROJECT DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to other Specification sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and Submittals in connection with various construction activities. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for use and reference. At time of Substantial Completion, submit digital (PDF) files and 1 (one) print copy for Health System (Agency 209) projects to the A/E for the University's records. 1. Categories of requirements resulting in miscellaneous records include, but are not limited to,

the following: a. Field records on excavations and foundations.

b. Field records on underground construction and similar work.

c. Survey showing locations and elevations of underground lines.

d. Invert elevations of drainage piping.

e. Authorized measurements utilizing unit prices or allowances.

f. Ambient and substrate condition tests.

g. Certifications received in lieu of labels on bulk products.

h. Batch mixing and bulk delivery records.

i. Testing and qualification of tradesmen.

j. Documented qualification of installation firms.

k. Inspections and certifications by governing authorities.

l. Leakage tests.

m. Final inspection and correction procedures.

2.1 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 3.1 RECORDING

A. Post changes and modifications to the Documents as they occur. Do not wait until the end of the Project.

3.2 AS-BUILT SURVEY

A. See Section 33 05 26 for post-construction survey asbuilt requirements prior to backfill.


Division 2: Existing Conditions

www.dewberry.com



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Site Demolition DEI# 50082886 02 41 19 - 1

SECTION 02 41 19 SITE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes demolition and removal of the following: 1. Existing concrete and asphaltic paving within the areas designated for new construction

work shall be completely demolished and all debris removed from the site. 2. Utilities

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASSE A10.6 - Safety & Health Program Requirements for Demolition Operations

B. NFPA 241 – Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operators

C. Section 01 41 00 – Regulatory Requirements 1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless in-dicated to be removed and salvaged or recycled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.

C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not

otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or recycled.

D. Abandon in Place: Where indicated on the plans, or with written permission of the Owner, con-tractor may abandon underground utilities in place. Contractor shall confirm with the utility owner that the utility has been abandoned, emptied, and/or de-energized/de-pressurized. Con-tractor shall cut the utility and fill conduit with flowable fill (max strength 300 psi concrete). Con-tractor shall note on the asbuilts the location of all utilities that were abandoned in place.

1.5 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during building demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Information Submittals 1. Qualification Data for the Demolition Contractor.



2. Health & Safety Plan of the Demolition Contractor indicating compliance with the refer-ence standards listed above.

3. Schedule of Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services, and locations of temporary protection and means of egress.

4. Pre-demolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction operations.

5. Submit prior to the start of demolition activities.

B. Action Submittals 1. Proposed Protection and Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates

the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include measures for the following: a. Environmental protection. b. Dust control. c. Noise control. d. Pedestrian Protection or Detour Plan (with customized signage as required) e. Maintenance of Traffic Plan

2. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facili-

ty licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before begin-

ning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. 1.8 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Conduct a Pre-Demolition conference at the project site. At a minimum, the meeting shall in-

clude the CM/GC, Demolition Contractor, Architect/Engineer, and Owner.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conduct building demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Provide not less than 10 days notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations, including utility services.

C. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, roads, or other occupied or used facilities with-out written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Owner assumes no responsibility for structures to be demolished.



E. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far

as practical.

F. Before building demolition, Owner will remove the following items: 1. Not Applicable

G. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the

Work.

H. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; im-mediately notify Architect/Engineer and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

I. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations.

B. Contractor shall coordinate with all utility providers in the vicinity.

C. Contractor shall notify Virginia’s Miss Utility underground utility location and notification system. See Section 01 41 00.

1.11 DEMOLITION LIMITS

A. Demolition limits are not shown on the plan for clarity. Contractor shall demolish concrete side-walk, curb, gutter, pedestrian paths, and roadway as required to facilitate construction of the proposed improvements. All existing surfaces have been identified in the survey.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for replacement of all sidewalk, curb, gutter, pedestrian paths, and roadway. All new work shall be in-kind replacement to match existing conditions.

C. All ancillary damage caused as a result of the construction activity shall also be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of building demolition required.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does

not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Docu-ments.

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.



D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements are encountered, investigate

and measure the nature and extent of the element. Promptly submit a written report to Owner.

E. Perform an engineering survey of condition of site features to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during construction operations.

F. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with construction op-

erations. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction be-ing demolished.

B. Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:

1. Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other build-

ing facilities during demolition operations.

B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during demolition. When permitted by Owner, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after demolition operations are complete.

C. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services indicated to remain and protect them against damage

during demolition operations.

D. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless author-ized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and

to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide at least 10 days notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during

changeover.

F. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated.

G. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.

H. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and

damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

I. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around construction operations area and to



and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures.

J. Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain and that are exposed to construction operations.

3.4 DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish indicated items within limits shown on the drawings. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain fire

watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 2. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 3. Locate construction equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose ex-

cessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

B. Engineering Surveys: Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards that may re-sult from construction activities.

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal opera-

tions to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

D. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities

without permission from Owner or building manager and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having juris-diction.

E. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with govern-

ing environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage adjacent con-struction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.

F. When saw cutting asphalt or concrete surfaces (flatwork) contractor shall utilize a water spray to

minimize dust. Contractor shall collect runoff water and discharge to sanitary sewer. Contrac-tor shall prevent runoff from saw cutting operations from reaching the storm sewer system and all bodies of water.

G. When saw cutting concrete walks or curb, contractor shall saw cut at a control joint even if that means extending limits of demolition beyond what is necessary to construct the improvements.

H. Contractor is responsible for measuring concrete scoring patterns/spacing of existing conditions prior to demolition. Contractor shall also note whether existing joints are tooled or saw cut. Contractor shall then construct new concrete to match previous scoring patterns unless indicat-ed otherwise on the plans.

3.5 EXPLOSIVE DEMOLITION

A. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. 3.6 SITE RESTORATION

A. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building demo-lition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in Specifica-tion Sections "Earthwork: Utilities" and “Earth Moving”.

B. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by building demolition opera-



tions.

C. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new ma-terials.

D. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in

a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.

E. When restoring concrete sidewalks or driveways, contractor shall match existing joint spacing, including decorative scoring patterns.

3.7 RECYCLING DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Separate recyclable demolished materials from other demolished materials to the maximum extent possible. Separate recyclable materials by type.

B. Provide containers or other storage method approved by Architect for controlling recyclable ma-

terials until they are removed from Project site.

C. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

D. Stockpile materials away from demolition area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

E. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.

F. Transport recyclable materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

G. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for

recycling building demolition materials shall accrue to Contractor. 3.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

B. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

C. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and

areas.

D. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

E. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building demoli-tion operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition opera-tions began.


Division 3: Concrete

www.dewberry.com



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Cast-in-Place Concrete DEI# 50082886 03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, waterstops, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following work associated with the construction of the manholes and any other cast-in-place structures:

1. Below-Grade Thrust Blocks 2. Interior Slab-on-Grade

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.

E. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Waterstops. 6. Curing compounds. 7. Bonding agents. 8. Repair materials. 9. Adhesives. 10. Joint filler strips.



F. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.

G. Epoxy Doweling System: ICC ES Evaluation Reports showing that the anchor is approved for use in uncracked and cracked concrete.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants. Store waterstops in location within the recommended storage temperature range specified by the manufacturer.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive waterproofing.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed bars.

B. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.



2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.

2.6 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.

2.7 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible PVC Waterstops: Not Allowed.



B. Extruded Bead Waterstop: Manufactured, high performance, extrudable swelling waterstop consisting of one-component, polyurethane-based waterstop meeting the following requirements:

a. Designed to swell up to 100% in potable water. b. Product shall be capable of sealing joints with head pressures up to 50 psi (115 ft

head). c. Elastic to withstand wet/dry cycling d. Temperature application rage: 50 degrees to 90 degrees e. Packaged in 20 fl oz tube. f. Tack free time of 2-3 hours at 73 degrees.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

D. High-Strength Epoxy Doweling System: Epoxy doweling system shall be tested in accordance with ICC Acceptance Criteria 308 demonstrating compliance with the performance features of ACI 355.2. The epoxy doweling system shall be installed according to manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Available Products:

a. Hilti HIT-HY 200 Epoxy Adhesive Anchoring System (ICC ESR-3187) b. ITW Red Head EPCON G5 Adhesive Anchoring System (ICC ESR-1137) c. Simpson Strong-Tie SET-XP Epoxy Adhesive Anchors (Use of SET-PAC system

not allowed). (ICC ESR-2508)



2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Below-Grade Thrust Blocks: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 days: 4,000 psi 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.42 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of

2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery.

B. Interior Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 days: 4,000 psi 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.42 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of

2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Air Content: 3% (Maximum)

2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."



2.13 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Not allowed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.



K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of walls and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.

1. Leave formwork for slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 75 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Engineer.


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.



3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of slabs and at the top of

footings or floor slabs. 4. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. 5. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against

hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

C. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Extruded Bead Waterstops: Install in construction joints and as otherwise indicated on the drawings. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and in continuous placement as much as practicable.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.



D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 305 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.8 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged as long as possible. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install joint filler at least 2 inches deep in joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.



B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FINISHING SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish or to be covered with sheet waterproofing.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view.

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete sidewalks, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.



3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including top of slabs, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

2. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.

3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before



bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Engineer.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,

by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

4. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Engineer's approval.

3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and independent inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Verification of use of required design mixture. 3. Concrete placement, including conveying, depositing and consolidating. 4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 5. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:



1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests

for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31. a. Cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one laboratory-cured specimen at 7 days

and two specimens at 28 days, and retain one specimen for later testing at 56 days if 28 day strength falls below the required specified strength. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set

of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner, Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Engineer but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Engineer.

11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

13. Structurally inadequate in-place concrete: If in-place concrete is found to be structurally deficient based on inspection reports, concrete testing, core tests, or other non-destructive testing, then the rejected in-place concrete shall be repaired, or removed and replaced, as directed by the owner’s representative.


Division 22: Plumbing

www.dewberry.com


University of Virginia 100% Construction DocumentsIRC Plant Connections Hot Water Package January 19, 2017UVA WO: 2513122; PIMS: P04405

Dewberry Engineers Inc. Basic Plumbing RequirementsDEI# 50082886 22 01 00 - 1

SECTION 22 01 00

BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 22.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Submittals.2. Coordination Drawings.3. Record documents.4. Maintenance manuals.5. Rough-ins.6. Mechanical Installations.7. Cutting and patching.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:

1. Division 22 Section “Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods,” for materials and methods common to remainder of Division 22, plus general related specifications including:

a. Access to plumbing installations.b. Excavation for plumbing installations within the building boundaries, and from

building to utilities connections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1.

B. Increase, by the quantity listed below, the number of plumbing related shop drawings, product data, and samples submitted, to allow for required distribution plus two copies of each submittal required, which will be retained by the Mechanical Consulting Engineer.

1. Product Data: 1 additional copy of each item.2. Samples: 1 addition as set.

C. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these Specifications.



1.4 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare record documents that indicate the following installed conditions:1. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and

numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, water hammer arresters, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping.

2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.

4. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare maintenance manuals and include the following information for equipment items. No

faxed copies of any kind will be allowed in maintenance manuals, all copies shall be

original.

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

2. Manufacturer’s printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.


A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-in with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to other equipment specifications in Divisions for rough-in requirements.



3.2 PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of plumbing systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements.

1. Coordinate plumbing systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components.

2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of

construction, to allow for plumbing installations.4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of plumbing materials and equipment

for efficient flow of work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

7. Coordinate connection of plumbing systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations. Provide required connection for each service.

8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to confirm with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.

9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

10. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

11. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems requires to be installed at a specific slope.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods DEI# 50082886 22 05 01 - 1

SECTION 22 05 01

BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following basic plumbing materials and methods to complement other Division 22 Sections:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.2. Grout.3. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.4. Painting and finishing.5. Concrete equipment base construction requirements.6. Supports and anchorages.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Pipe, pipe fittings, and piping include tube, tube fittings, and tubing.

B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

C. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

D. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

E. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

F. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.


A. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting plumbing and electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. No additional costs will be approved for these increases, if larger equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with design and commissioning requirements.




A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Protect stored plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

C. Protect stored piping and tubing from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.

D. Protect stored flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate plumbing equipment installation with other building components.

B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of plumbing materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

E. Coordinate connection of electrical services.

F. Coordinate connection of plumbing systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.

G. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces.

H. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting where devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.



2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Solder Filler Metals domestic water piping in manholes and buildings: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94, tin (approximately 95 percent) and silver (approximately 5 percent) having 0.10 percent lead content. Use water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

C. Braised Filler Metals Direct Buried Water Piping: 15% (minimum) hard silver lead free solder.

2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimlar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion..

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Nipples: Connections of dissimilar metals shall be made with 6-inch long (between the threads) brass nipples. Dielectric unions, flanges and plated nipples shall not be used.

2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Metraflex Co.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates

to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.5 SLEEVES

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.



1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

C. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

2.7 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.



L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's printed instructions.

M. Install escutcheons for penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions, suspended ceilings, and floors according to the following:1. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

Use concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions, and suspended ceilings.2. Insulated Piping: Cast-brass, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated

finish.3. Uninsulated Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations: One-piece, cast-brass type with

polished chrome-plated finish and set screw or spring clips.4. Piping in Equipment Rooms: Cast brass type with set screw or spring clips.5. Uninsulated Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast iron

floor-plate type.

N. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe

or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

Q. Above Grade Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Below Grade, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron “wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire-stop materials. Refer to Section "Through-Penetration Fire-stop Systems" for materials.

T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.



U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS “Soldering Manual”, Chapter 22 “The Soldering of Pipe and Tube”.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

3. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.

4. Align threads at point of assembly.5. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install plumbing fixtures and equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install plumbing fixtures and equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Architect.



C. Install plumbing fixtures and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install plumbing fixtures and equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

E. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

F. Install plumbing fixtures and equipment with the proper clearness to meet and code authorities having jurisdiction.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Section "Painting".

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete".

3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.



D. At no time shall a concealed or exposed plumbing piping be allowed to move freely. Piping shall be completely anchored throughout each system.

3.9 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Plumbing Gauges DEI# 50082886 22 05 19 - 1

SECTION 22 05 19

PLUMBING GAUGES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes gauges for plumbing systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for each gauge, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.

B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of gauges certifying accuracies under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.


A. Comply with applicable portions of American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) and Instrument Society of America (ISA) standards pertaining to construction and installation gauges.

B. Design Criteria: The Contract Documents indicate types, sizes, capacities, ranges, profiles, and connections, of gauges and are based on the specific manufacturer types and models indicated. Gauges having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered, provided that deviations do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Engineer. The burden of proof for equality of gauges is on the proposer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

a. Marsh Belloframb. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.c. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.d. Weiss Instruments, Inc.e. Weksler Instruments

2. Pressure Gauges:



a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Ashcroft Commercial Sales Operation.c. Marsh Bellofram.d. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.e. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.f. Weiss Instruments, Inc.g. Weksler Instruments.h. WIKA Instruments Corp.

3. Test Plugs:

a. Flow Design, Inc.b. MG Piping Products Co.c. National Meter.d. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.e. Sisco Manufacturing Co.f. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

2.2 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL

A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:

1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree scale.2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.

B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.

2.3 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Description: ASTM E 1.

B. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9 inches long.

C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

D. Tube: Red reading, mercury filled with magnifying lens.

E. Scale: Satin-faced non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit installation.

2.4 THERMOMETER WELLS

A. Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold test thermometer.



1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.3. Extension-Neck for Insulated Piping: Nominal thickness of 2 inches, but not less than

thickness of insulation. 4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.5. Cap: Threaded cap nut, with chain permanently fastened to well and cap.6. Pressure Rating: Not less than piping system design pressure.

2.5 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Description: ASME B40.1, phosphor-bronze bourdon-tube type with bottom connection; dry type, unless liquid-filled-case type is indicated.

B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 4-1/2-inch diameter, glass lens.

C. Connector: Brass, NPS 1/4.

D. Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.

E. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.

F. Range: Comply with the following:

1. Vacuum: 30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.2. Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.

2.6 PRESSURE-GAUGE FITTINGS

A. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type.

B. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

2.7 TEST PLUGS

A. Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in NPS 1/2 fitting.

B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.

C. Pressure Rating: 500 psig minimum.

D. Core Inserts: Two self-sealing valves, suitable for inserting 1/8-inch OD probe from dial-type thermometer or pressure gauge.

E. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: 20 to 200 deg F, chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

F. Core Material for Air and Water: Minus 30 to plus 275 deg F, ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.



G. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.

H. Test Kit: Pressure gauge and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers, and carrying case.

1. Pressure Gauge and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the system's operating conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GAUGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install gauges and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for applications where used.

3.2 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION

A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

B. Install in the following locations:

1. At outlet of each water heater.

2. At outlet of mixing valve.

3.3 PRESSURE-GAUGE INSTALLATION

A. Install pressure gauges in piping tees with pressure-gauge valve located on pipe at most readable position.

B. Install pressure gauges in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated:

1. Building water-service entrance in vertical riser.2. On inlet and outlet of hot water recirculation pump.

C. Install pressure-gauge needle valve and snubber in piping to pressure gauges.

3.4 TEST PLUG INSTALLATION

A. Install test plugs in piping tees where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.



B. Install gauges adjacent to machines and equipment to allow servicing and maintenance.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility.

B. Clean windows of meters and gauges and clean factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touchup paint.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Plumbing Valves DEI# 50082886 22 05 23 - 1

SECTION 22 05 23

PLUMBING VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several plumbing piping systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application.

C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment," under "Source Limitations" Paragraph.

B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for power piping.

C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.4. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.

2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Ball Valves, 1 inch and smaller:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Division.b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.c. Grinnell Corpd. Jamesburye. Jenkinsf. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co.g. Metraflexh. Powelli. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.j. Watts

2. Ball Valves, 1-1/4 inch to 4 inch:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Division.b. Grinnell Corpc. Powelld. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.e. Watts

3. Swing Check Valves:

a. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Divisionb. Grinnellc. Hammond Valve Corporation.d. Jenkinse. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co.f. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.g. Powellh. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.

4. Electric Solenoid Valves:

a. Sporlan Valve Co. or equal

2.2 BASIC, COMMON VALVE FEATURES

A. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.

B. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.



C. Operators: Use specified operators and hand-wheels, except provide the following special operator features:

1. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves 6 inches and smaller, except for plug valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Government with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves.

D. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to receive insulation.

E. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.

F. End Connections: As indicated in the valve specifications 1. Threads: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.2. Solder Joint: Comply with ASME B16.18.

a. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840 deg F for check valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.

2.3 BALL VALVES

A. Ball Valves, 1 Inch and Smaller: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 400 psi WOG pressure; two-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, full port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends.

B. Ball Valves, 1-1/4-Inch to 4-Inch: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 400 psi WOG pressure; 3-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, full port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends for 2" and smaller, threaded ends for 2 1/2" and larger.

2.4 CHECK VALVES

A. Swing Check Valves: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern, ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition seat, threaded or soldered end connections Provide valves capable of being reground while the valve remains in the line. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above specifications, with threaded end connections, where system pressure requires or where Class 125 valves are not available. Install check valves in hot and cold water supply piping to all mop sinks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to valve installation, examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, cleanliness, freedom from foreign materials and proper alignment.

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.



C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operation. Following examination, return the valve closure member to the shipping position

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

E. Replace defective valves with new valves.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Where possible, locate valves at a maximum of 6' - 0" above finished floor in mechanical spaces.

E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.

F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

G. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS

A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.

B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket.

C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.

D. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.

E. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.

F. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.

3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS

A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.



B. Align threads at point of assembly.

C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal threading is specified.

D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.


A. Tests: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing, inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valves if leak persists.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare valves to receive finish painting or insulation.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Plumbing Hangers and Supports DEI# 50082886 22 05 29 - 1

SECTION 22 05 29

PLUMBING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and equipment.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.


A. Listing and Labeling: Provide hangers and supports that are listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

1. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components.

1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are

in direct contact with copper tubing.



2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex-head, track bolts and nuts.

C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications.

2. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.4. Water: Potable5. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Specification Sections.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

C. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

D. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.



E. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.

J. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 2 and Larger: Include wood inserts.6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

3.4 METAL FABRICATION



A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section "Painting."

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Plumbing Identification DEI# 50082886 22 05 53 - 1

SECTION 22 05 53

PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following plumbing identification materials, devices and their installation:

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Valve Schedules: Submit valve schedules for each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification. Mark valves intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies) for Maintenance Manuals.


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES AND LABELS

A. General: Products specified are manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 22 Sections. Where more than single type is specified for listed application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.

B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on equipment.



1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data. Submit completion date and warranty information.

2. Location: Accessible and visible.

C. Pre-tensioned Pipe Markers: Pre-coiled semi-rigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.

D. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semi-rigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor barrier.

E. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener.

1. Material: 0.032-inch-thick brass.

F. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

G. Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws.1. Frame: Extruded aluminum.2. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness

glass.

H. Access Panel Markers: 1/16-inch-thick engraved plastic-laminate markers, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for attachment.

I. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical identification, with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.

1. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same name are indicated, identify individual system number as well as service

J. Paint and color code all exposed piping in mechanical and boiler rooms. Piping shall have flow arrows and labels located at 10 foot intervals at all turns and at each floor or wall penetration and shall be color coded as follows:

1. Cold Water - Dark Blue2. Hot Water - Dark Red3. Hot Water Recirculation - Dark Red4. Gas Lines - Yellow

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of plumbing equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where



not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the following general categories of equipment:

1. Fuel-burning units, including heaters.2. Pumps, and similar motor-driven units.3. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices4. Gauges, thermometers, and similar units5. Strainers and filters.

B. Optional Sign Types: Stenciled signs may be provided instead of engraved plastic, at Installer's option, ONLY where lettering larger than 1-inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification. 1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 2

feet, 1/2 inch for distances up to 6 feet, and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering 2/3 to 3/4 of size of principal lettering.

2. Terms on Signs: Indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations

3.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.

1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pre-tensioned pipe markers. Use size to ensure a tight fit.

2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers. Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.

B. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior non-concealed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and non-accessible enclosures.4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run.7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings.

3.3 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose bibs; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:



1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 2 inches, round.b. Hot Water: 2 inches, round

2. Install ceiling panel access markers for valves above ceiling. Attach marker to ceiling grid at all locations where valves are located above ceiling.

3.4 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION

A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Relocate plumbing identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean faces of plumbing identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Plumbing InsulationDEI# 50082886 22 07 00 - 1

SECTION 22 07 00

PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of

insulation.5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.6. Application of field-applied jackets.

C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit Samples in the following sizes:

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2.

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.

E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.



1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Plumbing Hangers and Supports."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.

1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Glass-Fiber Insulation:

a. CertainTeed Manson.b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.d. Schuller International, Inc.

2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the following:

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, all-purpose, vapor-retarder jacket.

2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.



3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and grades:

a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to un-faced glass-fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to un-faced glass-fiber insulation.

b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.

4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

5. Glass-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196.7. Glass-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with

ASTM C 449/C 449M.

B. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Canvas Jacket: 8 ounce.

2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS



A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each piping system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.

E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.

H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.

L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.

1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and shield.

M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.

O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:



1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.

4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.

5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with vapor-retarder mastic.

P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing.

1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below

top of roof flashing.4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.

Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.

R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors.

S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Fire-stopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Section "Fire-stopping."

T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.

1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.

3.4 GLASS-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.



B. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:

1. Apply pre-molded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When pre-molded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.

3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers.

C. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

1. Apply pre-molded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When pre-molded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.

3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure

fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.

5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

A. Apply canvas jacket where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints

3.6 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:

1. Flexible connectors.2. Vibration-control devices.3. Fire-suppression piping.4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.


A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Government.



2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for various pipe sizes.

3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for various pipe sizes.

B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these Specifications.

C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to these Specifications.

3.8 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and field-applied jackets.

B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material, thickness, and jacket requirements.

3.9 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Domestic hot, cold and recirculated hot water piping and horizontal roof drain piping, including roof drain sump, in exposed spaces.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 140 deg F.2. Insulation Material: Glass-fiber, with jacket.3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. All sizes: 1”

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Canvas.5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.6. Finish: None

B. Service: Domestic hot, cold and recirculated hot water piping and horizontal roof drain piping, including roof drain sump, in concealed spaces

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 140 deg F.2. Insulation Material: Glass fiber.3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. All sizes: 1”

4. Field-Applied Jacket: None.5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.6. Finish: None.

C. Service: Exposed sanitary drains and domestic water supplies and stops for fixtures for the disabled.

1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 120 deg F.



2. Insulation: McGuire Prowrap PW2000 or equal.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Domestic Water PipingDEI# 50082886 22 11 16 - 1

SECTION 22 11 16

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes domestic water piping from locations indicated to fixtures and equipment inside the building.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Domestic Water Service Piping: 160 psig.2. Domestic Water Distribution Piping: 150 psig.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article in Part 3.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.



C. Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219, metal, sleeve-type coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

2.2 COPPER TUBING

A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K, water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, braised -joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and braised-joint or threaded ends.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L, water tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, braised-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and braised-joint or threaded ends.

2.3 VALVES

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Valves" for general-duty valves.

B. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for balancing and drain valves.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Domestic Water Service Piping : Use the following piping materials for each size range:

1. NPS 4 and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type K; copper pressure fittings; and braised 15% hard soldered joints.

C. Aboveground Domestic Exposed Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:

1. NPS 4 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.



D. Underground Domestic Water Service Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:

1. NPS 4 and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type K; copper pressure fittings; and braised 15% silver soldered joints.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves.2. Throttling Duty: Use ball valves.3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Section "Water Distribution" for site water distribution and service piping.

B. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.

C. Extend domestic water service piping to exterior water distribution piping in sizes and locations indicated.

D. Install underground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.

F. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods" for wall penetration systems.

G. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gauge, and test tee with valve, inside building at each domestic water service. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Gauges" for pressure gauges, and to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.

H. Install aboveground domestic water piping level and plumb.

I. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

J. Perform the following steps before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.



4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

K. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate water heaters before filling with water.

L. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sectional valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment. Use ball valves for piping NPS 4 and smaller.

B. Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures without supply stops. Use ball valves for piping NPS 4 and smaller.

C. Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.

1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.

3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Hangers and Supports."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.



D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Test domestic water piping as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. All domestic water piping systems shall be hydrostatically tested after installation. The test pressure shall be 200 psi or 1 1/2 times the working pressure, whichever is greater. Components that are not suitable for a 200 psig test may be tested at a lower pressure and then valved off for the 200 psig test. Test duration shall be at least 2 hours for soldered and braised joints; if any mechanical joints are used the test duration shall be 24 hours.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, IPC-610 and the Virginia Department of Health Regulations, or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.11 COMMISSIONING

A. Fill water systems. Check compression tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is completely full of water.



B. Before operating systems, perform these steps:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.2. Open shutoff valves to full open position.3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping systems and plugs used for temporary

sealing of piping during installation.

C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate water heaters before filling with water.

D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

E. Energize equipment and verify proper operation.



University of Virginia 100% Construction Documents

IRC Plant Connections Hot Water Package January 19, 2017 UVA WO: 2513122; PIMS: P04405

Dewberry Engineers Inc. Plumbing Specialties DEI# 50082886 22 13 19 - 1

SECTION 22 13 19

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing specialties for water distribution systems; soil, waste, and vent systems; and storm drainage systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:

1. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Domestic Water Piping, Below Grade: 160 psig. 2. Domestic Water Piping, Above Grade: 150 psig.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections

B. Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following:

1. Backflow preventers. 2. Strainers. 3. Drain valves. 4. Thermostatic Mixing Valves 5. Sleeve penetration systems.

C. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Maintenance Data: For plumbing specialties to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Backflow preventers. 2. Thermostatic Mixing Valves





A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of plumbing specialties and are based on the specific system indicated.

B. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for piping materials and installation.

E. Electrical Component Standard: NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."

F. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate capacities, sizes, and dimensional requirements of system components. Components having equal performance characteristics that deviate from the indicated size and dimensions may be considered, provided deviations do not change the design concept or intended performance. The burden of proof for equality of products is on the Contractor.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

manufacturers specified.

2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hersey Products, Inc.; Grinnell Corp. 2. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

B. General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers.

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body with flanged ends.




a. Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating for backflow preventers having cast-iron or steel body.

3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials. 4. Strainer: On inlet, if indicated. 5. Of size indicated for maximum flow rate indicated and maximum pressure loss indicated

C. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with non-removable and manual drain features, and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet. Units attached to rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.

D. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1013, suitable for continuous pressure application. Consisting of non-rising stem gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test cocks; and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between two positive-seating check valves.

1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.

2.3 STRAINERS

A. Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting piping. Include ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens with 3/64-inch round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum steam working pressure, unless otherwise indicated. 2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends. 3. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy

coating and flanged ends. 4. Y-Pattern Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown.

a. Drain: Pipe plug.

2.4 DRAIN VALVES

A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, NPS 3/4 ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum CWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.

1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads and cap.

B. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 200-psig minimum CWP or MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with NPS 1/8 side drain outlet and cap.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Piping specialties such as escutcheons, dielectric fittings, sleeves, and sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods."

B. Fire-stop Penetration Assemblies: Shall meet Underwriter's laboratories fire resistance directory, Volume II, latest edition.




C. Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.2M, assembly with cast-iron body with bronze sleeve, packing gland, and packing; of size and end types corresponding to connected piping.

2.6 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Leonard Valve Co. 2. Powers Controls, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation 4. Symmons Industries 5. Lawler

B. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: Mixing valve for supplying tepid water featuring dual internal cold water bypass to ensure flow in the event of valve failure or loss of hot water supply. Bypass shall respond to changes in temperature and pressure. The valve shall provide precise temperature control in accordance with ASSE 1017 and effectively shut down on loss of cold water pressure. The valve shall have corrosion resistant, bronze body with union inlets with strainer check stops for easy service. Valve shall include temperature display for visual safety. Valve shall meet requirements of Z358.1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting,

fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

C. Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

D. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid valve.

E. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.

F. Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.

G. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting and recessed-type plumbing specialties.




H. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Valves" for general-duty ball and check valves.

I. Install air vents at piping high points. Include ball valve in inlet and drain piping from outlet to floor drain.

J. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 22 Sections.

D. Ground equipment.

E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

F. Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 26 Sections.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.

2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

3.4 COMMISSIONING




A. Preparation: Perform the following checks before start-up:

1. Systems tests are complete. 2. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired. 3. There is clear space for servicing of specialties.

B. Before operating systems, perform these steps:

1. Open valves to full open position. 2. Remove and clean strainers. 3. Verify drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until clear.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain interceptors.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Domestic Water Pumps DEI# 50082886 22 13 23 - 1

SECTION 22 13 23

DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following all-bronze and bronze-fitted centrifugal pumps for domestic hot-water circulation:

1. Close-coupled, in-line, seal-less centrifugal pumps.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic water pump specified. Include certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected models, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of domestic water pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:



1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

2.2 CLOSE COUPLED, IN-LINE, SEAL-LESS CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.2. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries.3. Grundfos Pumps Corp.4. Taco, Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, close-coupled, in-line, seal-less centrifugal pumps as defined in HI 5.1-5.6.

1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge-type unit with motor and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft mounted horizontally.

2. Casing: Bronze, with threaded companion-flange connections.3. Impeller: Corrosion-resistant material.4. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 CONTROLS

A. Aquastats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Honeywell International, Inc.b. Square D.c. White-Rodgers Div.; Emerson Electric Co.

2. Type: Water-immersion sensor, for installation in hot-water circulation piping.3. Range: 65 to 200 deg F4. Operation of Pump: On or off.5. Transformer: Provide if required.6. Power Requirement: 120 V, ac.

2.4 BUILDING-AUTOMATION-SYSTEM INTERFACE

A. Provide auxiliary contacts in pump controllers for interface to building automation system. Include the following:

1. On-off status of each pump.2. Alarm status.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections before pump installation.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

C. Install centrifugal pumps with motor and pump shafts horizontal.

D. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight.

3.3 CONTROL INSTALLATION

A. Install immersion-type aquastats in hot-water return piping.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.2. Check piping connections for tightness.3. Set aquastats for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps.4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation.

6. Start motor.7. Open discharge valve slowly.8. Adjust temperature settings on aquastats.9. Adjust timer settings.



3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain pumps.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers DEI# 50082886 22 35 00 - 1

SECTION 22 35 00

DOMESTIC-WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Circulating, storage, domestic-water heat exchangers.2. Domestic-water, heat-exchanger accessories.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heat exchanger indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Certificates: For each type of shell-and-tube, domestic-water heat exchanger from manufacturer.

B. Domestic-Water, Heat-Exchanger Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic-water heat exchangers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

C. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label heat-exchanger storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including heat exchanger, storage tank, and supports.b. Faulty operation of controls.c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Circulating, Storage, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers:

1) Storage Tank: Five years.2) Tube Coil: One year.3) Controls and Other Components: One year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Circulating, Storage, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=2424&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd



a. Cemline Corporation.b. Ajax Boiler Inc.c. PVI Industries, LLC.d. RECO USA.e. Sellers Engineering Co.

3. Description: Packaged, large-capacity, hot-water storage tank with heat-exchanger coil; circulator; controls; and specialties for heating domestic water with steam in coil.

4. Flow Pattern: Standard-flow arrangement, with water from bottom of storage tank circulated across heat-exchanger coil and returned to tank. Include hot-water outlet located at top of tank and temperature sensor in tank.

5. Flow Pattern: Reverse-flow arrangement, with water from storage tank drawn across heat-exchanger coil and returned to bottom of tank. Include hot-water outlet and temperature sensor located in or at coil shell.

6. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code 316 stainless steel with 150-psig working-pressure rating. Include nozzle and head for heat-exchanger tube coil.

a. Configuration: Vertical.b. Tappings: Factory fabricated of 316 stainless steel. Attach tappings to tank before

testing and labeling.

1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel

and stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

c. Insulation: Complying with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, unless otherwise indicated, and suitable for operating temperature. Surround entire storage tank and nozzle except connections and controls.

7. Heat-Exchanger Coil: NPS ¾ diameter, double-wall 90:10 Cu-Ni (in) + CU (out) U tubes with tube sheet and supporting baffles. Include heat-exchanger pressure rating equal to or greater than heating-fluid supply pressure.

8. Temperature Control: Heater shall be supplied with solid-state control module with LED backlit LCD display and LED pilot lights to indicate on-off,primary high limit, and secondary high limit. Solid-state control module shall be provided with a field programmable digital electronic PID controller allowing the owner to set operating and temperature limits on the display screen. Solid-state control module shall have red alarm light and alarm horn with built in alarm silence relay.

9. Safety Control: Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff device or system. 10. Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-pressure relief

valves. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of heat exchanger. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

11. Gauges: Factory-mounted thermometer and pressure gage.12. Circulating Pump: UL 778, all-bronze, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled

in-line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3. Include mechanical seals, 125-psig

minimum working-pressure rating, and 225 deg. F continuous-water-temperature rating.

a. Pump Control: Sensor for operating pump and control valve.

13. Support: Factory mounted on skids.14. Energy Management System Interface: Normally closed dry contacts for enabling and

disabling heat exchanger.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456809968&mf=04&src=wd







2.2 DOMESTIC-WATER, HEAT-EXCHANGER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Compression Tanks:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. AMTROL Inc.b. Watts.c. Honeywell International Inc.d. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation.e. State Industries.f. Taco, Inc.

2. Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air pre-charge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.

3. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

B. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

C. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2.

D. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than heat-exchanger working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

E. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include pressure setting less than heat-exchanger working-pressure rating.

F. Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect domestic-water heat exchangers specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test domestic-water heat exchangers to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment.

C. Domestic-water heat exchangers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014300 "Assurance and Control" for retesting and re-inspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.









D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER, HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION

A. Domestic-Water, Heat-Exchanger Mounting: Install domestic-water heat exchangers on concrete base.

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.5. Anchor heat exchangers to substrate.

B. Install domestic-water heat exchangers level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to heat exchangers and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Install shutoff valves on heating hot-water piping to heat exchangers. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

3. Install shutoff valves on steam and condensate piping to heat exchangers. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

C. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage-tank shells of domestic-water heat exchangers with domestic-water storage. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into shells. Extend relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

D. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for domestic-water heat exchangers without storage. Extend relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

E. Install heat-exchanger drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for domestic-water heat exchangers that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

F. Install thermometer on each domestic-water, heat-exchanger, inlet and outlet piping, and install thermometer on each domestic-water, heat-exchanger, heating-fluid inlet and outlet piping. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping."



G. Install pressure gauges on domestic-water, heat-exchanger, heating-fluid piping. Comply with requirements for pressure gauges specified in Section 220519 "Plumbing Gauges."

H. Fill domestic-water heat exchangers with water.

I. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

B. Comply with requirements for heating hot-water piping specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 “Hydronic Piping Specialties."

C. Comply with requirements for steam and condensate piping specified in Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping" and Section 232216 “Steam and Condensate Return Piping Specialties."

D. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

E. Where installing piping adjacent to domestic-water heat exchangers, allow space for service and maintenance of heat exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heat exchangers.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Plumbing Identification."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Domestic-water heat exchangers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014300 "Assurance and Control" for retesting and re-inspecting requirements and Section 017000 "Execution and Closeout Requirements" for requirements for correcting the Work.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.



3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain domestic-water heat exchangers.



Division 23: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning

www.dewberry.com



Dewberry Engineers Inc. HVAC General RequirementsDEI# 50082886 23 01 00 - 1

SECTION 23 01 00

HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. This section includes general requirements and information for Division 23 work.

1.2. DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions:

1. Occupancy Conditions:

a. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire construction period.

b. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion.

2. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

3. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

4. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

5. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

6. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

1.3. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Qualifications:

1. Installer Qualifications: Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.

a. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

b. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."

c. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

d. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."

e. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."



1.5. WARRANTY

A. Project Warranty: All work performed and all materials installed in Division 23 shall be warrantied by the Contractor for 1 year from the Owner’s written acceptance of substantial completion. The warranty shall include all labor and parts. The Contractor shall be on site within 48 hours of Owner notifications.

1. This warranty does not waive the Owner’s obligation to provide routine maintenance. Routine maintenance includes maintenance recommended by each equipment manufacturer and industry standard requirements for overall systems as documented in the project’s Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Replacement of wear items such as filters, belts, etc. are not included in the warranty unless they are incidental to other warranty work being performed. Failures due to the lack of routine maintenance are the responsibility of the Owner.

2. Equipment manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the obligations of the Project Warranty.

3. Extended or special warranties defined in other sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrently with, the Project Warranty.

1.6. PROJECT DOCUMENTS

A. The Division 23 project documents are diagrammatic in nature and are intended to represent complete and functioning systems. If any aspect of the work is undefined or unclear, submit your questions in writing prior to the final addendum deadline as defined in the specifications and/or at the pre-bid conference. If any aspect of the work is undefined or unclear after the final addendum, include the cost for the highest quality solution. The contractor is encouraged to thoroughly review the contract documents and site conditions prior to bidding.

B. Listed Manufacturers: Manufacturers listed in the Division 23 specification sections and on drawings must meet all the requirements of the project documents. Listed manufacturers that do not meet the requirements will not be accepted. The manufacturer listing does not result in an automatic approval. In addition to construction and performance requirements, the proposed equipment must meet the indicated physical dimension, weight, acoustic, power, controls, and plumbing limitations of the project. Verify existing conditions in the field, when applicable, and proposed conditions prior to submitting equipment for Engineer review. When full project coordination drawings are not required, generate coordination drawings to the level of detail necessary to determine if the proposed equipment will comply with the project documents and manufacturer recommended maintenance clearances.

1. If a manufacturer’s equipment does not meet the physical dimension, weight, acoustic, power, controls and plumbing limitations of the project, a change order proposal may be submitted for the Owner’s and Engineer’s consideration. The proposal shall include all changes, including other trades, required and a reduction in cost to accept the non-conforming equipment. The base bid shall include equipment that fully meets the design requirements at no additional cost.



1.7. COORDINATION

A. Maintenance Access: Install equipment and devices in such a manner to be readily accessible for testing, adjusting, balancing, inspection and maintenance. All concealed equipment and devices, including but not limited to equipment, valves, dampers, actuators, sensors, gauges, test ports, filter housings, coils, etc., shall be installed above accessible ceilings, within accessible rooms or chases or within normally inaccessible construction with access doors. All access doors are not shown in the project drawings. All access doors shall be coordinated with the Engineer prior to the installation of the equipment or device. Equipment and/or devices not coordinated prior to installation, as judged by the Engineer, shall be removed and reinstalled at no added cost.

B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.

C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

D. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces.

1.8. VOC CONTENTS

A. Low Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) Requirements: All adhesives, mastics, sealants and compounds factory or field applied that are installed indoors and all paint field applied shall be certified as low VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Adhesives: 50 g/L or less, except 80 g/L or less for calcium silicate and mineral fiber insulation and 30 g/L or less for metal-to-metal adhesives.

2. Mastics: 50 g/L or less.

3. Sealants: 250 g/L or less for duct sealants and 420 g/L or less for equipment insulation joint sealants.

4. Compounds: 490 g/L or less for CPVC welding compounds and 510 g/L or less for PVC welding compounds.

5. Paints: 50 g/L or less for flat paints and primers and 150 g/L or less for non-flat paints.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. PATCHING MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

2.2. ESCUTCHEONS AND FLOOR PLATES

A. Escutcheons:



1. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

2. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

3. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with concealed hinge and setscrew.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. DOCUMENTATION OF PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Project Conditions: Document in digital-format photos and video the existing project conditions and continue to document the conditions as the project progresses. Owner claims of contractor damage will be judged by the documented conditions.

3.2. WELDING AND BRAZING

A. Medium and High Pressure Piping (Above 15 psig):

a. Other high pressure piping systems shall be fabricated, assembled and welded/brazed/ soldered in accordance with ASME B31.3, and Power Piping Codes PFI ES 1, PFI ES 3, PFI ES 7, PFI ES 21, PFI ES 31, PFI ES 35, and PFI TB1 of the Piping Fabrication Institute's companion code requirements.

B. Methods:

1. Radiographic testing in accordance with ASTM E 94:

a. Make identification of defects by comparing radiographs to reference radiographs in ASTM E 390.

b. Film shall positively and properly identify as to member being inspected, location of weld, and location of film on weld.

c. Stamp identification on steel so film may be easily identified and matched to identification mark.

3.3. PIPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.



D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. Refer to Section 230517 for more information about sleeves and sleeve seals.

L. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

M. Piping Connections: Make piping connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2 inches NPS and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4. ESCUTCHEONS AND FLOOR PLATES INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with inside diameter to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with outside diameter that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: Install one-piece cast-brass type for new piping installations. Install deep-pattern type where piping sleeve protrudes from the floor or wall.

2. Existing Piping: Install split-casting brass type for existing piping installations.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with inside diameter to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with outside diameter that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

E. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. HVAC Submittal ListDEI# 50082886 23 01 10 - 1

SECTION 23 01 10

HVAC SUBMITTAL LIST

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. This section is a supplement to the Division 23 specification sections. Submittal descriptions in this section are not intended to alter the requirements defined in other sections.

1.2. HVAC SUBMITTAL LIST

PRE-CONSTRUCTION

SECTION DESCRIPTION

23 01 00 WELDING QUALIFICATIONS

23 05 00 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS

23 05 16 DELEGATED DESIGN FOR PIPE ANCHORS AND GUIDES

23 05 17 SLEEVE SEAL PRODUCTS

23 05 23 GENERAL PURPOSE VALVES

23 07 19 PIPING INSULATION

23 21 33 DELEGATED DESIGN FOR EXPANSION AND CASED PIPING

23 21 33 CASED PIPING SYSTEM




Dewberry Engineers Inc. HVAC Firestopping DEI# 50082886 23 05 00 - 1

SECTION 23 05 00

HVAC FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. This section includes firestopping requirements and information for Division 23 work.

1.2. DEFINITIONS

A. Firestopping: The use of a material or combination of materials in a fire-rated structure (wall or floor) where it has been breached, so as to restore the integrity of the fire rating on that wall or floor.

B. System: The use of a specific firestop material or combination of materials in conjunction with a specific wall or floor construction type and a specific penetrant(s).

C. Barrier: Any bearing or non-bearing wall or floor that has an hourly fire and smoke rating.

D. Through-Penetration: Any penetration of a fire-rated wall or floor that completely breaches the barrier.

E. Membrane-Penetration: Any penetration in a fire-rated wall or floor/roof-ceiling assembly that breaches only one side of the barrier.

F. Approved Testing Agencies: Not limited to: Underwriters Laboratory (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), Warnock Hersey, and Omega Point Laboratory (OPL).

1.3. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Penetrations: Provide through-penetration and membrane-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, passage of smoke and other hot gases according to requirements indicated, to restore the original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated.

B. Provide and install complete penetration firestopping systems that have been tested and approved by nationally accepted testing agencies per ASTM E814 or UL 1479 fire tests in a configuration that is representative of field conditions.

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide firestop systems with F-ratings indicated and as required by the Building Code.

2. T-Rated Systems: Provide firestop systems with T-ratings and F-ratings indicated and as required by the Building Code.

3. L- Rated Systems: Provide firestop systems with L- ratings less than 5cfm/sf.

4. W-Rated systems: Provide firestop systems that are resistant to water. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.

C. For penetrations involving non-metallic, CPVC, PVC, or plastic piping, tubing or conduit, provide firestop systems that are chemically compatible in accordance with Manufacturer requirements.



D. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

E. For penetrations involving fire or fire/smoke dampers, only firestop products approved by the damper manufacturer shall be installed in accordance with the damper installation instructions.

F. Firestopping products shall have flame spread ratings less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84, except firestop products installed in plenum spaces shall have a smoke developed rating less that 50.

G. Engineering Judgment (EJ): Where there is no specific third party tested and classified firestop system available for an installed condition, the Contractor shall obtain from the firestopping material manufacturer an Engineering Judgment (EJ) to be submitted to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and Engineer for approval. The EJ shall follow International Firestop Council (IFC) guidelines.

1.4. ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of firestopping product selected. Manufacturers certification must verify that firestopping materials are free of asbestos, lead and contain volatile organic compounds (VOCs) within limits of the local jurisdiction. Include the following information:

1. Design Listings: Submit system design listings, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each firestop configuration.

2. Installation Instructions: Submit the manufacturer’s installation instruction for each firestop assembly.

3. Engineering Judgements: Where there is no specific third party tested and classified firestop system available for a particular configuration, the Contractor shall obtain from the firestopping material manufacturer an Engineering Judgment (EJ) for submittal.

4. Firestop Schedule: Submit schedule itemizing the following:

a. Manufacturer’s product reference numbers and/or drawing numbers.

b. Listing agency’s design number.

c. Penetrating Item Description/Limits: Material, size, insulated or uninsulated, and combustibility.

d. Maximum allowable annular space or maximum size opening.

e. Construction type.

f. F rating and, if applicable, T, L, and W ratings.


A. Provide firestopping system design listings from UL, FM, Warnock Hersey or OPL in accordance with the appropriate ASTM Standard(s).

B. Single Source Limitations: Obtain firestop systems for all conditions from a single manufacturer.

C. Materials from different firestop manufacturers shall not be installed in the same firestop system or opening.



D. Firestopping material shall be asbestos and lead free and shall not incorporate nor require the use of hazardous solvents.

E. Firestopping sealants must be flexible, allowing for normal movement.

F. Firestopping materials shall not shrink upon drying as evidenced by cracking or pulling back from contact surfaces such that a void is created.

G. Firestopping materials shall be moisture resistant, and may not dissolve in water after curing.

H. Materials used shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

I. All firestop materials shall be installed prior to expiration date. Store and handle materials per manufacturer’s instructions to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.

1.6. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate areas prior to firestopping installation with the Owner, Construction Manager and/or all other Contractors.

B. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that firestopping assemblies are installed according to specified requirements. Opening shall not exceed maximum restrictions allowable for annular spacing per listing or acceptable Engineering Judgments.

C. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.

D. Do not conceal firestopping installations until the Owner’s inspection agency or Authorities Having Jurisdiction have examined each installation.

E. Schedule firestopping after installation of penetrants and joints but prior to concealing or obstructing access to areas requiring firestopping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1.MANUFACTURERS


1. Emerson / Nelson Firestop Products

2. Hilti

3. 3M, Fire Protection Products Division

4. Tremco

2.2. FIRESTOPPING

A. Firestopping products specified in system design listings by approved testing agencies may be used providing they conform to the construction type, penetrant type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved in each separate assembly.



B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestop system that is needed to install fill materials and to comply with “Performance Requirements” Article. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and by the approved testing agencies for the firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to the following items:

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag wool fiber insulation.

b. Foams or sealants used to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.

c. Fire-rated form board.

d. Polyethylene/polyurethane backer rod.

e. Rigid polystyrene board.

2. Temporary forming materials.

3. Substrate primers.

4. Steel sleeves

C. All firestopping products and systems shall be designed and installed so that the basic sealing system will allow the full restoration of the thermal and fire resistance properties of the barrier being penetrated with minimal repair if penetrants are subsequently removed.

D. Mold Resistance: Provide penetration firestoppping with mold and mildew resistance rating of 0 as determined by ASTM G21.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide firestop systems consisting of a material, or combination of materials installed to retain the integrity of fire resistance rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke and/or hot gases through penetrations, fire resistive joints, and perimeter openings in accordance with the requirements of the Building Code for this project.

B. Firestop systems shall be used in locations including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Penetrations through fire resistance rated floor and roof assemblies including both empty openings and openings containing penetrants.

2. Penetrations through fire resistance rated wall assemblies including both empty openings and openings containing penetrants.

3. Membrane penetrations in fire resistance rated wall assemblies where items penetrate one side of the barrier.

3.2. EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance.




C. Verify that all pipes, conduits, cables, and/or other items which penetrate fire-rated construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of firestops.

3.3. PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements:

B. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of firestop systems.

C. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

D. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with firestopping manufacturer’s written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

3.4. INSTALLATION

A. General: Install firestop systems to comply with firestopping manufacturer’s written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Apply firestopping in accordance with approved testing agencies listed system designs or manufacturer’s EJ per the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. Verify that environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of firestop products. Application areas shall be protected from weather, dry and within recommended temperature and humidiy ranges of materials being installed.

D. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire resistance ratings required.

E. Install metal framing, mechanical attachments, safing materials and firestop materials as applicable within the system design.

F. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids, joints and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they fully contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

4. Tool non-sag firestop materials after their application and prior to the time skinning begins. Use tooling agents approved by the firestopping manufacturer.

G. On vertical pipe penetrations, lift riser clamps to permit the installation of firestopping around the entire pipe penetration. For penetrations involving fire or fire/smoke dampers, only firestop products approved by the damper manufacturer shall be installed in accordance with the damper installation instructions.



3.5. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspecting Agency: Authorities Having Jurisdiction, the Owner, or Owner’s Representative shall be allowed to perform random destructive testing during inspection of firestop systems to verify compliance per listings or manufacturer’s installation instructions. All areas of work must be accessible until inspection by the applicable Authorities Having Jurisdiction and inspection agencies. The contractor shall be responsible to repair all tested assemblies with no cost to the owner.

B. Proceed with enclosing firestop systems with other construction only after inspections are complete.

C. Where deficiencies are found as determined by the Engineer, remove and replace firestop systems so they comply with requirements.

3.6. CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings, as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by firestopping manufacturer(s) and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers or damage to adjacent surfaces.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce firestop systems complying with specified requirements.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. HVAC Electrical Provisions DEI# 50082886 23 05 11 - 1

SECTION 23 05 11

HVAC ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. This section includes electrical equipment, materials and work that are the responsibility of Division 23.


A. Product Data: For each type of device, include dimensions, mounting arrangements, location for conduit entries, shipping and operating weights, and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical ratings, characteristics, and finishes.

B. Electrical Connections: Submitted equipment nameplates shall be coordinated with the indicated design electrical characteristics. If the submitted equipment requires changes to the electrical connection(s) (including conduit, wire, circuit breaker, fuse, starter, and disconnect sizes, connection locations, etc.) comply with the requirements of Section 230100. Any changes required to accommodate the equipment shall be responsibility of the contractor.

1. Proposed changes to the design shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval.

2. Accepted changes shall be noted by the contractor on the as-built documentation.

1.3. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For disconnects, motor starters and combination motor starters and disconnects, to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain motor starters, disconnect switches and combination motor starters and disconnect switches of a single type through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exceptions: Disconnect switches that are factory-mounted to HVAC equipment may be provided by the equipment manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: UL listed and labeled and complying with NFPA 70 and Division 26.

1. Where requirements of Division 23, Division 26 or NFPA 70 conflict, conform to the strictest requirements.

1.5. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: One set for each fused device.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES

A. Provide NEMA-rated equipment enclosures for all disconnect switches, motor starters, control panels, variable speed controllers and other similar electrical equipment. When not otherwise indicated, provide enclosures based on the environments of the installations.

1. Inside, Clean Spaces without Water Piping: NEMA 1.

2. Inside, Utility Spaces and Spaces with Water Piping: NEMA 12.

3. Outside, Normal Ambient Conditions: NEMA 3R.

4. Inside or Outside, Manholes, Tunnels and Sumps: NEMA 6

5. Inside or Outside, NEC Hazard Class 1 Locations: NEMA 8

6. Inside or Outside, NEC Hazard Class 2 Locations: NEMA 9

2.2. DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Eaton

2. Emerson

3. Hubbell

4. General Electric

5. Rockwell Automation/Allen Bradley

6. Schneider Electric/Square D

7. Siemens

B. Fusible Disconnect Switches: Single-throw, heavy-duty, service-rated fusible switch, rated for 200 to 600Vac and labeled and listed UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, Type HD with silver-tungsten type fuse clips and equipment ground and neutral kit. When a neutral is not necessary, bond the neutral bus to the enclosure for use as grounding bus. Internal current-carrying components shall be solid copper. Provide auxiliary contacts when needed for control system interface.

C. Non-Fusible Disconnect Switches: Single-throw, heavy-duty, service-rated switch, rated for 200 to 600Vac and labeled and listed UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, Type HD with equipment ground and neutral kit. When a neutral is not necessary, bond the neutral bus to the enclosure for use as grounding bus. Internal current-carrying components shall be solid copper. Provide auxiliary contacts when needed for control system interface.

D. Provide switch accessories required to meet the system requirements indicated.

2.3. MOTOR STARTERS


1. Eaton

2. Emerson

3. Hubbell



4. General Electric



7. Siemens

B. Description: Full-voltage, electrically-held, non-reversing, magnetic motor controllers with 24Vac control circuit, hand-off-auto (HOA) switch, push-to-start switch, manual reset switch, auxiliary control and monitoring contacts and accessories required to meet the system requirements indicated. Cover door shall have red and green pilot lights. The green light shall illuminate when “on”, and red shall illuminated when “off”.

2.4. COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES


1. Eaton

2. Emerson

3. Hubbell

4. General Electric



7. Siemens

B. Description: Combination magnetic motor starter and circuit breaker disconnecting means with auxiliary contacts.

1. Motor Starter: Full-voltage, electrically-held, non-reversing, magnetic motor controllers with 24Vac control circuit, hand-off-auto (HOA) switch, push-to-start switch, manual reset switch, auxiliary control and monitoring contacts and accessories required to meet the system requirements indicated. Cover door shall have red and green pilot lights. The green light shall illuminated when “on”, and red shall illuminated when “off”.

2. Disconnecting Means: Thermal magnetic type molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) with adjustable instantaneous-trip for each pole, auxiliary control and monitoring contacts and test trip button.

2.5. MANUAL MOTOR SWITCHES


1. Eaton

2. Emerson

3. Hubbell

4. General Electric



7. Siemens



B. Description: Manual motor starter and disconnect switch with thermal overload protection for fractional horsepower motors. Toggle switch shall provide manual “on/off” control of one or two-pole single-phase motors rated up to 1 horsepower. The enclosure shall have green pilot light. The green light shall illuminate when “on”. The switch shall have a hand guard to prevent accidental operation and provisions for a padlock in the “off” position. The switch shall be rated for single or two-speed applications as indicated. The enclosure shall be for flush wall-mounting where possible and surface wall-mounting where not.

2.6. FUSES

A. Description: Non-renewable cartridge fuses of the type and size required by NFPA 70 and Division 26.

2.7. POWER AND CONTROL CABLING AND RACEWAY

A. Low-Voltage (100 to 600 V) Power Feeders: Size conductors and raceway per NFPA 70 and Division 26 based on equipment nameplate requirements and manufacturer’s installation recommendations.

B. Control-Voltage (Up to 24 V) Cabling: Provide control cabling for HVAC system per NFPA 70 and Division 26 based on the system manufacturer’s installation recommendations.

1. Paired Cabling: No. 16 AWG Type CMP plenum-rated twisted pair.

2. Class 1 and 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper Type THHN-THWN.

3. Class 3 Control Circuits: Stranded copper Type TW or TF.

C. Power Conductors: Copper, solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller and stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, with THHN-THWN insulation. Aluminum conductors will not be accepted.

D. Grounding Conductors: Copper, solid for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded for No. 6 AWG and larger, with THHN-THWN insulation. Aluminum conductors will not be accepted.

E. Conduits: EMT (electrical metallic tubing) conduit for above grade indoor applications and RNC (rigid non-metallic conduit) Type EPC Schedule 80 PVC for outdoor above and below grade applications unless otherwise indicated.

F. Flexible Connections: FMC (flexible metallic conduit) for above ceiling applications and LFMC (liquid-tight flexible metal conduit) for above grade indoor and outdoor applications. Flexible connections shall be no more than 24inches long.

G. Surface-Mounted Raceway: Non-metallic PVC plastic surface mounted raceway for finished indoor spaces and exposed-to-view EMT conduit for unfinished utility spaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

A. Disconnect Switches: Provide disconnect switches for all HVAC equipment. Disconnect switches shall be sized to comply with NFPA 70. Single fan, blower and pump motors shall be based on nameplate horsepower. All other applications shall be based on nameplate total kW rating. Disconnects shall be provided with dual-element fuses sized based on equipment nameplate rating.



1. Service Disconnect Switches: Where the disconnecting means is not within the line-of-sight, as defined by NFPA 70 and the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), an additional service disconnect shall be located adjacent to the equipment it feeds.

DISCONNECT SWITCH SIZES for MOTORS

MAX HP at VOLTAGE/PHASEAMPERAGE RATING 115V/1ph 200V/1ph 230V/1ph 200V/3ph 230V/3ph 460V/3ph

30A 1.5 3 3 5 7.5 15

60A 3 7.5 10 15 15 30

100A - - - 25 25 60

200A - - - 50 60 100

400A - - - 100 125 250

DISCONNECT SWITCH SIZES for EQUIPMENT

MAX KW at VOLTAGE/PHASEAMPERAGE

RATING120V/1

ph208V/1

ph240V/1

ph277V/1

ph208V/3

ph240V/3

ph480V/3

ph

30A 2.8 5.0 5.8 6.6 8.6 10.0 19.9

60A 5.8 10.0 11.5 13.3 17.3 19.9 39.9

100A 9.6 16.6 19.2 22.2 28.8 33.2 66.4

200A 19.2 33.3 38.4 44.3 57.6 66.4 132.9

400A 38.4 66.6 76.8 88.6 115.1 132.9 265.7

600A 57.6 99.8 115.2 133.0 172.7 199.3 398.6

B. Motor Starters: Provide all motor starters where required for HVAC equipment to operate as intended. Motor starters shall be sized to comply with NFPA 70 and NEMA rated for magnetic starters.

NEMA STARTER SIZES

MAX HP at MOTOR VOLTAGE/PHASENEMASIZE 115V/1ph 230V/1ph 200V/3ph 230V/3ph 460V/3ph

00 0.33 1 1.5 1.5 2

0 1 2 3 3 5

1 2 3 7.5 7.5 10

2 - 7.5 10 15 25

3 - - 25 30 50

4 - - 40 50 100

5 - - 75 100 200

C. Combination Motor Starters and Disconnect Switches: Provide combination motor starters and disconnect switches that meet the requirements of the “Motor Starters” article above. Combination motor starters and disconnect switches shall be used unless otherwise noted or prohibited by NFPA 70.

D. Manual Motor Switches: Provide manual motor switches for fractional horsepower fan, blower and pump motors that do not require automated start and stop functions.

E. Furnish and install devise fuses per equipment unit nameplate.

F. Size and adjust circuit breaker disconnect switches per equipment unit nameplate.



G. Electrical Connections: All electrical connections shall be made in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with NFPA 70. Install and ground equipment connections in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 and Division 26.

1. Electrical Connections, Low Voltage (100 to 600 V): Division 23 contractor is responsible for power wiring and conduit from the equipment connections to the disconnecting means. Division 26 is responsible for the power circuit from the power source to the disconnecting means.

2. Electrical Connections, Control Voltage (Up to 24 V): Division 23 contractor is responsible for all control voltage wiring and conduit for HVAC equipment and controls from the low voltage power source disconnecting means. Division 26 is responsible for the low voltage power circuit from the power source to the disconnecting means.

a. Low Voltage Disconnecting Means: Where dedicated low voltage circuits are indicated in Division 26 documents, the disconnecting means shall be defined as the disconnect switch or junction box provided. Where dedicated low voltage circuits are not explicitly indicated in Division 26 documents, the disconnecting means shall be defined as 20A/1P spare circuit breakers in panelboards.

H. Wiring Pathway, Low and Control Voltage: All low and control voltage power and control wiring shall be installed in conduit unless otherwise noted.

1. Surface-mounted raceway may only be used when indicated or Engineer approved prior to installation. In most cases, conduits shall be installed within walls, above ceilings and below floor slabs. Cut and repair substrates to install raceway.

2. Control voltage cabling shall be plenum-rated and organized with J-hooks when control cabling is not required by the Engineer to be installed in conduit.

I. Grounding and Bonding: Ground and bond equipment and circuits in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 and Division 26.

J. Install duct-mounted smoke detectors, furnished and wired by Division 26. Provide duct access doors for proper maintenance and access.

K. Smoke-rated life-safety dampers shall be wired and controlled by Division 26.

L. Smoke control system devices shall be wired and controlled by Division 26.


A. Comply with NFPA 70E per OSHA 29CFR Part 1910.5, Appendix A.

3.3. DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain electrical devices.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment DEI# 50082886 23 05 13 - 1

SECTION 23 05 13MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for all HVAC motors

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

C. Motors for fans and pumps shall be selected for the maximum brake-horsepower listed in the equipment schedules and no more than 85% of the nominal rated horsepower excluding the service factor.

2.2. MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea-level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3. POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motors.

1. General Use: Open drip-proof (ODP) motors.

B. Efficiency: NEMA Premium Efficiency rated motors.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.

2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

G. Temperature Rise: Class B.

H. Insulation: Class F.

I. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.


Dewberry Engineers Inc. Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment DEI# 50082886 23 05 13 - 2

2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T

2.4. POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

3. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.

2.5. SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Variable-Speed Controllers DEI# 50082886 23 05 14 - 1

SECTION 23 05 14

VARIABLE-SPEED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. This section includes solid-state, pulse-width modulated, variable speed motor controllers for three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.


A. Product Data: For each type of variable speed controller, include dimensions, mounting arrangements, location for conduit entries, shipping and operating weights, and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical ratings, characteristics, and finishes.

B. Harmonic Distortion Analysis: Submit the harmonic distortion analysis, including all assumptions, calculations and results for review by the Engineer.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For variable speed controllers, all installed devices, and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Routine maintenance requirements for variable speed controllers and all installed components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

B. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.

C. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that dip switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motor to be protected.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 100 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain variable speed controllers of a single type through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exceptions: Variable speed controllers that are factory-mounted to HVAC equipment, such as chillers and cooling towers, and branded by the equipment manufacturer may be provided by the equipment manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: UL listed and labeled and complying with NFPA 70 and Division 26.



D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for variable speed controllers minimum clearances between the controllers and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions and clearances.

1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver variable speed controllers in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as indicated.

B. Store variable speed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full load without de-rating, under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: 32 to 105 deg F.

2. Humidity: Less than 90 percent (non-condensing).

3. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet.

B. NEMA-rated enclosures for the installed environment. Refer to Section 230511.

1.7. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of variable speed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

C. Coordinate features of variable speed controllers, installed units, and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect.

D. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each variable speed controller and each installed unit with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and load.

1.8. EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Spare Fuses: One set of three for each variable speed controller.

2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type installed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MANUFACTURERS


1. ABB.

2. Danfoss.

3. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.

4. Emerson Industrial Automation

5. Schneider Electric/Square D.

2.2. VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS

A. Description: NEMA 2, integrated-gate bipolar transistor (IGBT), pulse-width modulated (PWM), variable frequency controller listed and labeled as a complete unit and arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency. Provide unit suitable for operation of premium efficiency motor as defined by NEMA MG 1.

B. Design and Rating: Match load type such as fans, blowers and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.

C. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 66 Hz, with torque constant as speed changes.

D. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input ac voltage tolerance of 208 V, plus or minus 5 percent; 380 to 500 V, plus or minus 10 percent; and 525 to 575 V, plus or minus 10 percent.

2. Input frequency tolerance of 50/60 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent.

3. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load.

4. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent.

5. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0 times the base load current for 3 seconds.

6. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated.

7. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.

E. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1 speed range with an electrical signal of 4 to 20 mA at 24V.

F. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.

2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.

3. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.

4. Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.

5. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.

6. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:



7. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors.

8. Under and over-voltage trips; inverter over-temperature, overload, and overcurrent trips.

9. Motor Overload Relay: Adjustable and capable of NEMA 2, Class 20 performance.

10. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at a natural frequency of the combination.

11. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.

12. Loss-of-phase protection.

13. Reverse-phase protection.

14. Short-circuit protection.

15. Motor over-temperature fault.

G. Multiple-Motor Capability: Controller suitable for service to multiple motors and having a separate overload relay and protection for each controlled motor. Overload relay shall shut off controller and motors served by it when overload relay is tripped.

H. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction. Bidirectional auto-speed search shall be capable of starting into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without damage to controller, motor, or load.

I. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped.

J. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.

K. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.

L. Input Line Conditioning: 5% Line Reactor.

M. VFC Output Filtering: Load reactors (dV/dt filters) for distances greater than 50 feet between drive and load.

N. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators shall indicate the following conditions:

1. Power on.

2. Run.

3. Overvoltage.

4. Line fault.

5. Overcurrent.

6. External fault.

O. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with manual speed control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.

P. Indicating Devices: Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in controller door and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:

1. Output frequency (Hz).

2. Motor speed (rpm).



3. Motor status (running, stop, fault).

4. Motor current (amperes).

5. Motor torque (percent).

6. Fault or alarming status (code).

7. PID feedback signal (percent).

8. DC-link voltage (Vdc).

9. Set-point frequency (Hz).

10. Motor output voltage (V).

Q. Control Signal Interface:

1. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to 10 V or 0/4-20 mA) and 6 programmable digital inputs.

2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the building automation system (BAS) or other control systems:

a. 0 to 10-V dc.

b. 0-20 or 4-20 mA.

c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.

d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.

e. RS485.

f. Keypad display for local hand operation.

3. Output Signal Interface: Minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20 mA), which can be programmed to any of the following:

a. Output frequency (Hz).

b. Output current (load).

c. DC-link voltage (VDC).

d. Motor torque (percent).

e. Motor speed (rpm).

f. Set-point frequency (Hz).

4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of 2 dry circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:

a. Motor running.

b. Set-point speed reached.

c. Fault and warning indication (over-temperature or overcurrent).

d. PID high- or low-speed limits reached.

R. Communications: Provide an RS485 interface allowing variable frequency controller to be used with an external system within a multi-drop local area network (LAN) configuration. Interface shall allow all parameter settings of variable frequency controllers to be programmed via building automation system (BAS) control. Provide capability for variable frequency controllers to retain these settings within the nonvolatile memory.

1. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the building automation system (BAS) to monitor, control and display unit status and alarms.



BACnet communication interface with the BAS shall enable the BAS operator to remotely control and monitor the unit from an operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at unit control panel shall be available through the BAS. The following minimum information shall be transmitted to the BAS:

S. Manual Bypass: Magnetic contactor arranged to safely transfer motor between controller output and bypass controller circuit when motor is at zero speed. Controller-off-bypass selector switch sets mode, and indicator lights give indication of mode selected. Unit shall be capable of stable operation (starting, stopping, and running), with motor completely disconnected from controller (no load).

T. Integral Disconnecting Means: Door interlocked, NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker with lockable handle. Minimum withstand rating shall be as required by electrical power distribution system, but not less than 65,000A.

U. Remote Indicating Circuit Terminals: Mode selection, controller status, and controller fault.

2.3. ENCLOSURES

A. Provide NEMA-rated enclosure appropriate for the installed environment. Refer to Section 230511 for more information.

2.4. ACCESSORIES

A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.

C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with control circuit open.

D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.

E. Standard Displays:

1. Output frequency (Hz).

2. Set-point frequency (Hz).

3. Motor current (amperes).

4. DC-link voltage (VDC).

5. Motor torque (percent).

6. Motor speed (rpm).

7. Motor output voltage (V).

F. Historical Logging Information and Displays:

1. Real-time clock with current time and date.

2. Running log of total power versus time.

3. Total run time.

4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1. EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive variable speed controllers for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before variable speed controllers installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2. APPLICATIONS

A. Select features of each variable speed controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; and duty cycle of motor, controller, and load.

B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.

3.3. INSTALLATION

A. Anchor each variable speed controller assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and grout sills flush with mounting surface.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26.

C. Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Comply with requirements in Division 26.

3.4. IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify variable speed controllers, components, and control wiring according to Section 230514.

3.5. CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between variable speed controllers and remote devices according to Division 26.

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in hand position.

2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.

3.6. CONNECTIONS

A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in Division 26. Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26.




A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except optional tests, stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3.8. ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

3.9. DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain variable frequency controllers.



____________________________________________________________________________________Dewberry Engineers Inc. Expansion Fittings and Loops For HVAC Piping DEI# 50082886 23 05 16 - 1

SECTION 23 05 16

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes expansion joints, expansion loops, fittings and anchors.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide, including analysis data, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections.

2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.

3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure.

4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end connections, and location for each expansion joint.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable and rated for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures.

B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors.

2.2. ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS

A. Alignment Guides: Factory-fabricated, low-friction graphite, steel alignment guide, with 1/2-inch thick low-friction graphite on both upper and lower backing plates; bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for attaching to structure; and two-section guiding slider for bolting to pipe. Advanced Thermal Systems or equal.

B. Anchors: Steel, factory-fabricated anchor. Zinc-coated mechanical fasteners shall be insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.


____________________________________________________________________________________Dewberry Engineers Inc. Expansion Fittings and Loops For HVAC Piping DEI# 50082886 23 05 16 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including tee in main.

B. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee in riser.

C. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee in main.

3.2. ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Refer to structural documents for anchor, slide and guide steel and grout requirements.

B. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

C. Install two guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.

D. Install guides nearest to expansion joint as indicated on drawings and recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Attach guides to pipe, and secure guides to building structure.

F. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

G. Anchor Attachments:

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

2. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, Type 24; U bolts bolted to anchor.

H. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding.

2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Equipment DEI# 50082886 23 05 17 - 1

SECTION 23 05 17

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes sleeves, sleeve seals and associated materials.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: Minimum 20-gauge thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

E. PVC pipe sleeves are not acceptable.

2.2. SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

B. PVC sleeve seal systems are not acceptable.

2.3. GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

1. Insulated piping systems shall have insulation continue through penetrations without interruption. Insulation joints shall not occur within sleeves.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch minimum annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements of sealants.

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping and associated U.L. detail.

3.2. SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.3. SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE



A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves with Sleeve Seals: Exterior concrete walls above and below grade and concrete slabs on grade.

a. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

2. Galvanized Steel Pipe Sleeves: Interior fire-rated partitions; interior non-rated partitions; and concrete slabs above grade.

3. Galvanized Steel Sheet Sleeves: Interior non-rated partitions.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping DEI# 50082886 23 05 19 - 1

SECTION 23 05 19

METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section Includes meters and gauges for hydronic and steam systems.



B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gauge, from manufacturer.

1.4. WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Provide two-year manufacturer’s parts and labor warranty for each flow and energy meter.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gauges to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. THERMOMETERS

A. Standard: ASME B40.200.

B. Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: 9-inch cast aluminum case with adjustable angle; glass tube with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid; non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in deg F and deg C; glass window; aluminum stem of length suitable for application for Thermowell installation; 1-1/4 inch connector with ASME B1.1 screw threads; and accuracy to plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

C. Light-Activated Thermometers: 6-inch metal or plastic case with adjustable angle; digital display with scale graduated in deg F and deg C; aluminum stem of length suitable for application for Thermowell installation; 1-1/4 inch connector with ASME B1.1 screw threads; and accuracy to plus or minus 1 deg C.

D. Thermometer Scale Ranges for Piping Systems:

1. Heating Water: 0 to 250 deg F.

2. Steam and Condensate Return: 0 to 250 deg F.

E. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.



2.2. THERMOWELLS


B. Thermowells: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

1. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: Copper-nickel (90-10) or copper-nickel (70-30).

2. Material for Use with Steel Piping: Corrosion resistant steel.

3. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.

4. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

5. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

6. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

7. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

8. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

9. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer connection.

C. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.3. PRESSURE GAUGES


B. Dial-Type Pressure Gauges: Oil-filled, cast aluminum case with 4-1/2 inch nominal diameter; non-reflective aluminum dial with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi and kPa; bourbon tube pressure element assembly; brass pressure connection with NPS 1/4 or 1/2 inch ASME B1.20 pipe threads and bottom-outlet; mechanical movement with link pressure element and connection to pointer; glass window; stainless steel ring; dark colored metal pointer; and accuracy to plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

C. Scale Ranges for Piping Systems:

1. Heating Water: 0 to 100 psi.

2. Steam Condensate Return: 0 to 100 psi.

3. Steam: 0 to 200 psi.

2.4. GAUGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of stainless pipe with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 pipe threads.

C. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.5. TEST PLUGS

A. Test Plug: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting; brass or stainless steel body including extended stem when used on insulated piping; core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap; ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads; chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber core inserts; rated for a minimum of 500 psig at 200 deg F.

`University of Virginia 100% Construction DocumentsIRC Plant Connections Hot Water Package January 19, 2017UVA WO: 2513122; PIMS: P04405


2.6. TEST-PLUG KITS

A. Furnish one test-plug kit containing two thermometer(s), one pressure gauge and adapter, and carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gauge, and adapter probes shall match diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

B. Low-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 2-inch diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 25 to 125 deg F.

C. High-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 2-inch diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 220 deg F.

D. Pressure Gauge: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2-inch diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig.

E. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.

2.7. SIGHT FLOW INDICATORS

A. Sight Flow Indicators: Inline-installation device for visual verification of flow with sight glass and paddle wheel indicator; bronze or stainless-steel body; threaded end connections for NPS 2-inches and smaller and flanged end connections for NPS 2-1/2 inches and larger; and rated for minimum of 150 psig and 200 deg F.

2.8. FLOW AND THERMAL ENERGY METERS

A. Flow and Thermal Energy Meters shall be furnished by the Owner and installed by the contractor.

B. Electromagnetic Hydronic Flow Meters, In-Line Type: Inline electromagnetic hydronic flow meter with cast-iron body, Class 150 flanges, epoxy-coated steel flow tube, Type 316 stainless steel sensing electrodes and PTFE liner. Yokogawa (ADMAG series); Siemens/Controlotron (SITRANS FM series); or Toshiba (LF series).

1. Pressure Rating: 300 psig.

2. Medium Temperature Rating: 250 deg F.

3. Output Signals: 4-20 mA (flow rate) and pulse (totalization)

4. Accuracy: +/- 1.0 percent at 1 to 20 feet/second.

5. Control Interface: BACnet IP

a. Totalization: Value at remote and BAS displays shall match.

b. Flow Rates

c. Diagnostic Data

6. BTU Meter: Outputs include total energy (BTU), energy rate (BTU/hour), flow rate (gallons/minute) and supply and return temperatures (deg F).

7. Remote Display: Remote wall-mounted LCD display of total energy (BTU), energy rate (BTU/hour), flow rate (gallons/minute) and supply and return temperatures (deg F) with 120VAC/24VDC transformer.

C. Spring-Loaded Variable-Area Steam Condensate Flow Meters, In-Line Type: Inline spring-loaded variable area type meter with ASTM A 106 carbon steel or Type 316L stainless steel body, stainless steel wetted internal components, and Class 150 or 300 flanges to match steam valve specification requirements. Spirax-Sarco Gilflo ILVA series or equal.

1. Pressure Rating: 300 psig.




3. Operating Range: 100:1


5. Accuracy: +/- 1.5 percent of mass; +/- 1.0 percent of volume; and +/- 0.25 percent repeatability.

6. Control Interface: BACnet IP


b. Flow Rates

c. Diagnostic Data

7. Remote Display: Remote wall-mounted LCD display of mass flow rate (pounds/hour) and total mass (pounds of steam) with 120VAC/24VDC transformer. Meter shall calculate and display values independently of the BAS.

D. Ultrasonic Hydronic Flow Meter, Clamp-On Type: Ultrasonic clamp-on hydronic flow meter utilizing differential transit time method in direct or reflect mode with non-wetted ultrasonic transducers. Badger Meter (Dynasonics TFX series); Flexim (FLUXUS series) or Siemens (SITRANS F US series).


2. Operating Range: 400:1


4. Accuracy: +/- 1.0 percent at 1 to 40 feet/second.

5. Control Interface: BACnet/IP


b. Energy and Flow Rates

c. Supply and Return Temperatures

d. Diagnostic Data

6. BTU Meter: Outputs include total energy (BTU), energy rate (BTU/hour), flow rate (gallons/minute), total flow (gallons) and supply and return temperatures (deg F).

7. Remote Display: Remote wall-mounted LCD display of flow rate (gallons/minute) and total flow (gallons) with 120VAC/24VDC transformer. Meter shall calculate and display values independently of the BAS.

E. Flow Meters for Piping Systems:

1. LTHW Heating Water: Ultrasonic, Clamp-On Type.

2. MTHW Heating Water: Ultrasonic, Clamp-On Type.

3. Steam Condensate Return: Spring-Loaded Variable-Area Type

4. Domestic Water: Electromagnetic, In-Line Type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION



A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

G. Install direct-mounted pressure gauges in piping tees with pressure gauge located on pipe at the most readable position.

H. Install remote-mounted pressure gauges on panel.

I. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gauge for fluids (except steam).

J. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gauge for steam.

K. Install test plugs in piping tees.

L. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing.

M. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and flow meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

N. Install flow meter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.

O. Install meters with a minimum unobstructed straight length of 10-pipe diameters upstream and 5-pipe diameters downstream.

P. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.

Q. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.

R. Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support meters.

S. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.

2. Two inlets and two outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger.

3. Inlet and outlet of each thermal-storage tank.

T. Install pressure gauges in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.

2. Suction and discharge of each pump.

U. Install grounding rings on the inlet and outlet side of each electromagnetic style meter when installed in non-metallic or lined piping. Grounding ring dimensions, spacing and wiring shall meet manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.2. CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gauges adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gauges, machines, and equipment.

B. Connect flow meter-system elements to meters.

C. Connect flow meter transmitters to meters.



D. Connect thermal-energy meter transmitters to meters.

3.3. ADJUSTING

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Valves for Hydronic Piping Systems DEI# 50082886 23 05 23 - 1

SECTION 23 05 23

VALVES FOR HYDRONIC PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes general duty valves for HVAC piping systems such as angle, ball, butterfly, check, and globe valves and associated accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.

3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set angle and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.

4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.

6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves 6-inches NPS and larger and all butterfly valves.

2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves 4-inches NPS and smaller except plug valves.

4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 5 plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.

5. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size and with chain for mounting height of 7-feet or higher.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: Provide valves with 2-inch stem extensions for piping temperatures 180 deg F and lower and 4-inch for above 180 deg F.

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.

2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

3. Socket Welded: 2-inch NPS and smaller piping.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2. ANGLE VALVES

A. Angle Valves, 2-inches NPS and smaller: Bronze body with integral seat and union-ring bonnet angle valves with bronze trim, PTFE or TFE seats and asbestos-free packing, Class 150 rated for 300 psig CWP (cold working pressure). Hand-wheels shall be malleable or ductile iron. Valves shall comply with MSS SP-80. Valves shall have threaded or solder ends to match piping.

B. Angle Valves, 2 1/2-inches NPS and larger: Iron body and bolted-bonnet angle valves with bronze trim, PTFE or TFE seats and asbestos-free packing, Class 125 rated for 200 psig CWP (cold working pressure). Hand-wheels shall be malleable or ductile iron. Valves shall comply with MSS SP-85. Valves shall have flanged ends.



2.3. BALL VALVES

A. MTHW High-Performance Ball Valves, 2-inches NPS and smaller: Three-piece, full-port, quarter-turn, carbon steel ball valves with stainless steel ball, stem and trim, PTFE or TFE seats, adjustable stem packing and anti-blowout stem, Class 600, rated for 250 psig at 400 deg F. Valves shall comply with MSS SP-110. Valves shall have socket-welded ends. MSS SP-45 drain connections. Addams Valves, Bray International, Metso/Jamesbury, or Zwick.

B. Ball Valves, 2-inches NPS and smaller: Two-piece, full-port, quarter-turn, forged brass ball valves with stainless steel trim, PTFE or TFE seats, adjustable stem packing and anti-blowout stem, rated for 600 psig CWP (cold working pressure). Valves shall comply with MSS SP-110. Valves shall have threaded ends.

C. Steam and Condensate High-Performance Ball Valves, 2-inches NPS and smaller: Three-

piece, full-port, quarter-turn, carbon steel ball valves with stainless steel ball, stem and trim,

PTFE or TFE seats, adjustable stem packing and anti-blowout stem, Class 600, rated for 270

psig at 413 deg F. Valves shall comply with MSS SP-110. Valves shall have socket-welded

ends. MSS SP-45 drain connections. Addams Valves, Bray International, Metso/Jamesbury,

or Zwick.

2.4. BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Butterfly Valves, 2 1/2-inches NPS and larger: Iron single-flange, cast-iron or ductile-iron butterfly valves with stainless steel disc, stainless steel stem, metal seat, rated for 150 psig CWP (cold working pressure). Valve body shall be lug type suitable for bi-directional dead-end service at rated pressure without the use of a downstream flange. Valves shall comply with MSS SP-67, Type I. Valves shall have flanged ends.

B. MTHW High-Performance Butterfly Valves, 2 1/2-inches NPS and larger: , carbon-steel high-performance butterfly valves with carbon steel disc, stainless steel stem double-offset from seat plane with “Xtreme” or equal seat or triple-offset with metal seat, Class 300, rated for 250 psig at 400 deg F. Valve body shall be lug type suitable for bi-directional dead-end service at rated pressure without the use of a downstream flange. Valves shall comply with MSS SP-68 and be lugged according to ASME B16.1. Valves shall have flanged ends. MSS SP-45 drain connections. Bray Controls, Metso/Jamesbury, or Zwick Armaturen GmbH.

C. Steam and Condensate High-Performance Butterfly Valves, 2 1/2-inches NPS and larger:

Single-flange, carbon-steel high-performance butterfly valves with carbon steel disc, stainless

steel stem double-offset from seat plane with “Xtreme” or equal seat or triple-offset with

metal seat, Class 300, rated for 270 psig at 413 deg F. Valve body shall be lug type suitable

for bi-directional dead-end service at rated pressure without the use of a downstream flange.

Valves shall comply with MSS SP-68 and be lugged according to ASME B16.1. Valves shall

have flanged ends. MSS SP-45 drain connections. Bray Controls, Metso/Jamesbury, or

Zwick Armaturen GmbH.

2.5. CHECK VALVES

A. Swing Check Valves, 2 1/2 to 12-inches NPS: Cast-iron swing check valves for horizontal flow with bolted bonnet, bronze trim, asbestos-free gasket and Class 125 rated for 200 psig CWP (cold working pressure). Valves shall comply with MSS SP-71. Valves shall have flanged ends.

B. Swing Check Valves with Spring Closure, 2 1/2 to 12-inches NPS: Cast-iron swing check valves for horizontal flow with bolted bonnet, bronze trim, asbestos-free gasket, factory-installed exterior lever and spring and Class 125 rated for 200 psig CWP (cold working pressure). Valves shall comply with MSS SP-71. Valves shall have flanged ends.



C. installed exterior lever and spring and Class 125 rated for 150 psig CWP (cold working pressure). Valves shall comply with MSS SP-71. Valves shall have flanged ends.

D. API 594.

E. Center-Guided Check Valves, 2 1/2-inches NPS and larger: Center-guided spring-loaded globe type check valves with gray iron body, EPDM or NBR seat, and Class 300 rated for 300 psig CWP (cold working pressure). Valves shall comply with MSS SP-125. Valves shall have flanged ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2. VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Install valves in branch lines to isolate sections of the piping system.

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. Valves with stems below center of piping are not acceptable.

E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

F. Valves shall be equipped with stem extensions for all applications where the piping will be insulated.

G. Install chainwheels on operators for ball, butterfly, gate and globe valves 3-inches NPS and larger and more than 7-feet above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor. Provide hooks to hold chains to the side to allow a clear walkway path.

H. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.

I. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.



3.3. ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Hydronic piping systems shall use the following valve types unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or in other Division 23 sections:

1. Shutoff: Ball or butterfly.

2. Throttling: Globe, ball or butterfly.

3. Pump Discharge Check Valves: For 2-inches NPS and smaller, swing check valves. For 2 1/2-inches NPS and larger, non-slam wafer-style plate check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

3.5. MTHW VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Class 300 valves shall be used on MTHW, HPS and Condensate piping systems per Part 2 of this specification.

B. MTHW Piping, 4 inches NPS and smaller:

1. High-Performance ball Valves: Class 300 rated for 250 psig at 400 degrees F.

2. Iron Check Valves: Class 300, with resilient seats.

C. MTHW Piping, 2 1/2 inches NPS and larger:

1. High-Performance Butterfly Valves: Class 300, lugged rated for 250 psig at 400 degrees F.


D. LTHW Piping, 4 inches NPS and smaller:



E. LTHW Piping, 2 1/2 inches NPS and larger:



F. LPS and Condensate Piping, 4 inches NPS and smaller:

1. High-Performance Ball Valves: Class 300 rated for 270 psig at 413 degrees F.


G. LPS and Condensate Piping, 2 1/2 inches NPS and larger:

1. High-Performance Butterfly Valves: Class 300, single flange rated for 270 psig at 413 degrees F.






Dewberry Engineers Inc. Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment DEI# 50082886 23 05 29 - 1

SECTION 23 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe hangers and hanger shields, metal framing systems, fastener systems, pipe stands and equipment supports.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.






A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Hangers shall be galvanized. Padded hangers shall be fiberglass pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. Hanger rods shall be continuously threaded with nuts and washers made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components. Hanger rods shall be continuously threaded with nuts and washers made of stainless steel.

2.2. TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3. METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: Shop or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes. Channels shall be continuous slotted steel with in-turned lips. Channel nuts shall be designed to fit into channel slot and when tightened to prevent slipping. Hanger rods shall be continuously threaded with nuts and washers made of carbon steel.

2.4. THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive strength. For cold piping systems, include vapor barrier.

B. Insert and shield shall cover the entire pipe circumference for trapeze of clamped systems and cover the lower 180-degrees of pipe circumference for clevis or band hangers.

C. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.5. FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.6. EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.



2.7. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, 2 1/2-inches NPS and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

L. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. Clamps may project through the insulation of



hot piping systems. Use thermal hanger shield inserts with clamp sized to match outside diameter of insert for cold piping systems.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. Less than 4-inches NPS: 12-inches long and 0.060-inch thick.

b. 4 to 6-inches NPS: 18-inches long and 0.060-inch thick.

c. 8 to 14-inches NPS: 24-inches long and 0.075-inch thick.

d. 16 to 24-inches NPS: 24-inches long and 0.105-inch thick.

5. Pipes 8-inches NPS and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2. EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3. METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4. ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1 1/2 inches.



3.5. PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6. HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports:

1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1)

2. Split-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 69): Piping 2-inches NPS and smaller.

3. Copper Pipe Hangers: For copper piping.

J. Trapeze Pipe-Hangers: Trapeze hangers shall be welded carbon steel pre-formed structural members suspended by threaded rods. Comply with MSS SP-69. Each pipe shall be individually supported.

1. Adjustable Pipe Saddles (MSS Type 38)

2. Copper Pipe Saddles: For copper piping.

K. Vertical-Piping Clamps:

1. Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8)

L. Building Attachments: Install MSS compliant devices for all building attachments. Install them per manufacturer’s instructions.

M. Saddles and Shields:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.



3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Spring Hangers and Supports:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches.

3. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems.

4. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

5. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

6. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

7. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: horizontal (MSS Type 54), vertical (MSS Type 55) or trapeze (MSS Type 56).

O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

3.7. PIPE HANGER INSTALLATION

A. Steel Piping: Install hangers for steel piping with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing:

1. 1 1/4-inch NPS and smaller: 3/8-inch diameter at 7 foot span.

2. 1 1/2-inch NPS: 3/8-inch diameter at 9 foot span.

3. 2-inch NPS: 3/8-inch diameter at 10 foot span.





8. 8 to 12-inch NPS: 7/8-inch diameter at 12 foot span.

9. 14 to 16-inch NPS: 1-inch diameter at 12 foot span.

10. 18 to 20-inch NPS: 1 1/4-inch diameter at 12 foot span.

11. 22 to 24-inch NPS: 1 1/2-inch diameter at 12 foot span.

B. Copper Piping: Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing:



1. 1 1/4-inch NPS and smaller: 3/8-inch diameter at 5 foot span.

2. 1 ½ to 2-inch NPS: 3/8-inch diameter at 8 foot span.




C. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 8-foot intervals between floors.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. HVAC Systems IdentificationDEI# 50082886 23 05 53 - 1

SECTION 23 05 53

HVAC SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes equipment, pipe labels and tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.3. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1/8-inch multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving suitable for temperatures up to 160 deg F with pre-drilled holes for stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws. Labels shall be minimum 2-1/2 inches wide and 3/4-inch tall with 3/8-inch white letters on black background.

1. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's drawing designation or unique equipment number.

2.2. WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Warning Signs and Labels: 1/8-inch multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving suitable for temperatures up to 160 deg F with pre-drilled holes for stainless steel rivets or self-tapping screws. Labels shall be minimum 2-1/2 inches wide and 3/4-inch tall with 3/8-inch white letters on black background.

1. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.



2.3. PIPE LABELS

A. Pipe Labels: Pre-printed, color-coded, self-adhesive vinyl labels with lettering and flow direction arrows. They shall have minimum 1 1/2-inch tall block lettering. The labels shall be suitable for temperatures up to 160 deg F and compatible with each substrate material.

B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service, showing flow direction, pipe size insulation type, insulation thickness and

pipe service.

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Pre-coiled, semi-rigid plastic formed to cover full circumference

of pipe. Attach to piping with stainless steel straps at each end of the pipe label. Rivets shall

be provided in each corner of the pipe label. Straps shall be threaded through the rivets and

around the pipe to hold the pipe label securely in place.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

E. Provide all new piping with “Asbestos free insulation” label.

F. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both

directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

1) Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.4. STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions. Stencil paint shall be exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel.

2.5. VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: 0.032-inch thick brass or 0.025-inch thick stainless steel, stamped or engraved, with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers with pre-drilled or stamped holes for beaded chain or S-hook attachment hardware.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.6. WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: 5-1/4 inches wide and 3-inches tall, pre-printed or partially pre-printed, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing, fastened with reinforced grommet and wire. Tags shall have Yellow backgound and Black letters with large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE."

2.7. SENSOR TAGS



A. Sensor Tags: 1/4-inch wide, pre-printed, clear vinyl adhesive tags with 1/8-inch tall block-letter black text. Each sensor shall be clearly and neatly labelled. Tags shall denote the associated piece of equipment, for example “TU-123”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulates.

3.2. PIPE COLOR AND LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 10 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

B. Piping Color Schedule:

1. Heating Water Piping: Dark Red background with White letters. Include pipe service, flow direction with arrow, pipe size, and insulation type.

2. Domestic Water Piping: Green background with White letters. Include pipe service, flow direction with arrow, pipe size, and insulation type.

3.3. EQUIPMENT COLOR AND LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

C. Equipment Color Schedule: Insulation color and label scheme shall match the associated piping system.

3.4. VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-



watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 1-1/2 inches diameter.

2. Valve-Tag Colors: Black letters on brass finish tags.

3. Heating Water Piping: Dark Red background with White letters.

4. Domestic Water Piping: Green background with White letters.

3.5. WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.

3.6. SENSOR TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install sensor tags for wall or ceiling-mounted sensors on faceplates centered below the device. Install sensor tags for concealed sensors on sensor enclosures or backboxes. Where sensors are located above lay-in ceilings, behind access doors, or otherwise remotely accessible, label the grid or door in addition to the device itself. Tags shall be centered and neatly applied.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. HVAC Piping System Flushing and TestingDEI# 50082886 23 05 55 - 1

SECTION 23 05 55

HVAC PIPING SYSTEM FLUSHING AND TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for HVAC piping system flushing and testing.


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Flushing and Testing Plan: Submit a Flushing and Testing Plan for review and approval of the Engineer. The plan shall include proposed use of building and temporary equipment; extent of piping system to be flushed and tested in each phase, if not performed all at once; source of water; disposal of water; flow rates; temporary bypass details and chemicals; etc.


A. Flushing and Testing Field Reports: For each section of piping that is independently flushed and tested, provide a letter to the Engineer certifying that the flushing and testing was performed in accordance to the requirements; documenting the failures and corrective actions; and recording the final results. Each letter shall be signed and dated by the Mechanical Contractor’s Representative who performed the tests and the General Contractor’ Representative who witness the tests certifying the piping system is clean and leak-free. A plan of the piping systems with sections flushed and tested highlighted shall be attached to each letter. The flushing and testing schedule shall be coordinated with the Owner and Engineer.


A. Flushing and Testing Summary: Submit a copy of the Flushing and Testing Plan with any changes required by field conditions; a copy of each Flushing and Testing Field Report; and a Final Flushing and Testing Field Report that certifies that all applicable sections of each piping system have been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS

A. Heating and Cooling Equipment: At each heating and cooling equipment connection, provide a bypass to isolate the equipment and associated control and balancing valves from the piping.



1. Upon completion of the piping mains and branches up to and including the equipment isolation valves; prior to installing the equipment control and balancing valve assemblies; and prior to installing the pipe insulation, install temporary bypass piping from the supply to the return branches. The bypass shall be of the same size and material as the branch piping. When open, the isolation valves shall allow the flushing and testing procedures. When closed, the isolation valves shall allow the bypass piping to be removed without exposing the completed piping sections.

2. Upon acceptance of piping section, remove the temporary bypasses and complete installation of equipment valve assemblies and equipment connections.

B. Maintain isolation between accepted and unaccepted piping at all times. If accepted piping is exposed to water circulated through unaccepted piping or any other dirt and debris, then the affected sections shall be re-flushed and tested as determined by the Engineer.

C. If accepted piping is modified, then the affected sections shall be re-flushed and tested.

3.2. HYDRONIC PIPING SYSTEM FLUSHING AND TESTING PROCEDURES

A. Prior to start, verify weld inspections and testing is complete as required in Section 230100.

B. Initial Flushing:

1. Install temporary equipment and piping required to perform flushing.

2. Fill piping system with clean water and vent air.

3. Install initial basket screens in circulation pump strainer. Circulate water and clean out strainer periodically until the initial basket screen remains clean for 30 minutes minimum. Insert final fine grit basket screen. Circulate water and clean out strainer periodically until the final basket screen remains clean for 30 minutes minimum.

4. Upon completion of initial flushing, drain water to sanitary sewer and replace strainer basket screens.

C. Pressure and Leak Testing:

1. Conduct pressure and leak testing after the initial flushing and prior to the final flushing of the system.

2. Conduct pressure and leak testing prior to insulating the piping.

3. Prior to testing, verify the maximum test pressure and duration of piping system components with their manufacturer. Do not test piping systems at pressures and durations in excess of the manufacturer’s recommendations.

4. Prepare hydronic piping for testing according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

a. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

b. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

c. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens.

d. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.



e. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

f. Fill piping system with clean water.

g. Remove air from the piping using air vents at all high points in the system. Where air vents have not been installed yet because the final high point will be a part of the equipment valve assembly and connection piping, install manual air vent at the highest point in the temporary bypass piping.

h. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.

D. Perform the following tests on LTHW hydronic piping:

1. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's maximum working pressure but not less than 200 psig. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

a. Refer to Section 232113 and 232133 for hydronic and makeup water piping system operating pressures.

2. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 2 hours, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks for a continuous 2 hours. Piping installed with mechanical joints shall be tested for 24 hours.

a. Verify the test pressure does not drop over the duration of the test. Do not perform tests when the ambient temperature rises or drops enough to affect the test pressure.

b. If the piping fails, identify the leakage points, cut out the non-compliant sections and replace them with new materials. Do not attempt to patch, epoxy or caulk leaks.

3. All welds shall be x-rayed. All x-rays of the welds shall satisfy ASTM-B31.1. Refer to Section 230100 for more information.

4. Record results.

5. Upon completion of testing, drain water to sanitary sewer. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

7. Upon completion of testing, insulating work may begin.

E. Perform the following tests on medium temperature heating water (MTHW) piping:

1. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure for duration of 2 hrs. All MTHW piping shall be tested to 270 psig. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

2. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 2hours, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.



3. All welds shall be x-rayed. All x-rays of the welds shall satisfy ASTM-B31.1. Refer to Section 230100 for more information.

F. Cleaning and Final Flushing:


2. Add pre-cleaning chemical solution designed to remove construction deposits such as pipe dope, oils, loose scale and other materials at manufacturer’s recommended ratios. Circulate for 4 hours minimum and drain to sanitary sewer. Refill and re-flush until alkalinity of water is equal to the makeup water.


4. Add cleaning solution diluted at manufacturer’s recommended ratios to effectively clean the piping surfaces but avoid decay of the surface materials. Cleaners with trisodium phosphate are prohibited. Neutralizer agents as recommended by the cleaner manufacturer shall be used.

5. Circulate water and clean out strainer periodically until the basket screen remains clean for 24 hours minimum.

6. Upon completion of final flushing and cleaning, drain water to sanitary sewer.

7. Refill with clean water, vent air and circulate water for 1 hour minimum. Drain water to sanitary sewer.

8. Refill with clean water and treat per University standards.

a. If the piping will be isolated from the system for more than 7 days, add corrosion inhibitor, NALCO 3DT279 or equal.

b. If the piping system will be connected to a central utility distribution system, then coordinate the final fill and chemical treatment with the Owner.

9. Remove temporary equipment and piping.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Testing, Adjusting and BalancingDEI# 50082886 23 05 93 - 1

SECTION 23 05 93TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) of air and hydronic systems

1. HVAC Piping Systems:

a. TAB of new HVAC piping systems including heating, chilled, condenser, heat recovery, dual temperature, steam, steam condensate return and refrigerant to design requirements.

b. TAB of existing HVAC piping systems including heating, chilled, condenser, heat recovery, dual temperature, steam, steam condensate return and refrigerant prior to the start of work to determine the existing baseline performance.

c. TAB of existing-to-remain HVAC piping systems including heating, chilled, condenser, heat recovery, dual temperature, steam, steam condensate return and refrigerant to design requirements.

2. Plumbing Systems:

a. TAB of new plumbing systems including domestic hot water recirculation to design requirements.


A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and the project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance".

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 60 days of the Notice to Proceed, submit the contract documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of the Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation".

D. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: instrument type and make; serial number; application; dates of use; and dates of calibration.

1.3. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SUBMITTALS

A. Initial certified TAB reports of individual systems for engineer’s review.

B. Commissioning Agent Certification: Provide owner’s commissioning agent’s certification that TAB measurements have been sampled and are considered accurate.


A. Final certified TAB report with all systems in a single report.




A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB).

1. TAB Field Supervisor: TAB contractor employee who is certified by AABC or NEBB.

2. TAB Technician: TAB contractor employee who is certified by AABC or NEBB.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with engineer, owner, construction manager, owner’s commissioning agent and related sub-contractors regarding the approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide 30 day notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.

b. The TAB plan.

c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard AABC report forms as reviewed by the engineer.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE-111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."

F. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."

G. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."

1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

1.7. COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide 10 day notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on hydronic systems have been satisfactorily completed. Alterations of the systems due to incomplete or non-conforming work made after testing will void previous TAB results and require new testing at no additional cost to the owner or engineer. Verify related work is complete before starting.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

H. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.

I. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.

J. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

K. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

L. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2. PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.

3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

4. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

3.3. GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in ASHRAE-111 and in this Section.

1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE-62.1, Section-7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."



B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 233300.

2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to specifications.

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4. GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check liquid level in expansion tank.

3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.

4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.

5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.

7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.

8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.5. PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.

3.6. PROCEDURES FOR STEAM SYSTEMS



A. Measure and record upstream and downstream pressure of each piece of equipment.

B. Measure and record upstream and downstream steam pressure of pressure-reducing valves.

C. Check settings and operation of automatic temperature-control valves, self-contained control valves, and pressure-reducing valves. Record final settings.

D. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.

E. Verify the operation of each steam trap.

3.7. PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Measure water flow through all circuits.

B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.

C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.

D. Measure inlet steam pressure.

E. Check settings and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings.

3.8. PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Efficiency rating.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data.

3.9. TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.

3.10. REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.



3.11. FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Manufacturers' test data.

3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the contract documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

15. Test conditions for pump performance forms including the following:

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Water and steam flow rates.



2. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

3. Balancing stations.

4. Position of balancing devices.

E. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Make and size.

e. Model number and serial number.

f. Water flow rate.

g. Water pressure differential.

h. Required net positive suction head.

i. Pump rpm.

j. Impeller diameter.

k. Motor make and frame size.

l. Motor horsepower and rpm.

m. Voltage at each connection.

n. Amperage for each phase.

o. Full-load amperage and service factor.

p. Seal type.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Static head.

b. Pump shutoff pressure.

c. Actual impeller size.

d. Full-open flow rate.

e. Full-open pressure.

f. Final discharge pressure.

g. Final suction pressure.

h. Final total pressure.

i. Final water flow rate.

j. Voltage at each connection.

k. Amperage for each phase.

F. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.



b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.

3.12. INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing is complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report.

2. Check the following for each system:

a. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.

b. Note deviations from the contract documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of the engineer.

2. Engineer shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

3. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

4. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB work according to the contract documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.13. ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.



B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. HVAC Equipment InsulationDEI# 50082886 23 07 16 - 1

SECTION 23 07 16

HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulation of HVAC equipment.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field-applied if any).

B. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2-inch diameter.

2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 6-inches square.

3. Sheet Jacket Materials: 6-inches square.

4. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range of colors available for each type of finish material.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

B. Storage: Insulation material shall be stored in a dry location sealed in plastic to prevent moisture infiltration. Insulation material, installed or not, that becomes wet, dirty, etc. shall be removed and replaced. “Dried” or “cleaned” insulation materials shall not be used.

1.5. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 230529.

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for equipment insulation application.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Breeching Insulation Schedule" and "Equipment Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

D. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290. Provide Type II with factory-applied vinyl jacket; Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket; or Type III with factory-applied FSP jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

E. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory-applied jacket.

F. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ or FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

G. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory-applied jacket.

H. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2. Type II, 1200 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

I. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semi-rigid board material with factory-applied ASJ jacket complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2. INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.



2.3. ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F.

1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


D. ASJ and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.


E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


2.4. MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.

3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.

4. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.


3. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.

4. Color: White.

2.5. LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).



2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.

3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.

4. Color: White.

2.6. SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.


4. Color: White or gray.

5. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:


2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


4. Color: Aluminum.


C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:




4. Color: White.


2.7. FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.



2.8. FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. Metal Jacket:

1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

b. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 2.5-mil thick polysurlyn.

d. Factory-fabricated fitting covers.

2.9. TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.

2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.





6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches.

2. Thickness: 6 mils.




D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Width: 2 inches.







2.10. SECUREMENTS

A. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding 0.135-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

5. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

6. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch thick, stainless-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

7. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

B. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 ; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4

inch wide with wing seal.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

2.11. CORNER ANGLES

A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2. PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.



4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

O. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to vibration-control devices, testing agency labels and stamps, nameplates and data plates, manholes, handholes and cleanouts.

3.4. INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION

A. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 50 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.

4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels as follows:

a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.

b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service temperature and with substrate.

c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.



e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and vessels.

f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.

g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials.

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.

8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.

9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates.

10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels.

1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.

C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.

2. Fabricate boxes from aluminum, at least 0.050 inch thick.

3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.

3.5. FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch thick coats of lagging adhesive.



3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch wide joint strips at end joints.

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.6. FINISHES

A. Paint pipe insulation with ASJ, glass-cloth, or other paintable jacket material. Color shall be selected by the Owner/Engineer. Refer to Section 230553 – HVAC Piping and Equipment Identification.

1. Prime with 2 coats of water-based white acrylic primer paint designed for use with associated jacket material.

2. Finish with 2 coats of flat latex paint with fungicidal agent additive to render fabric mildew proof.

3. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.

B. Apply paint and primer at the recommended spreading rate and film thickness as recommended by the paint manufacturer.

C. Apply paint and primer within the environmental conditions recommended by the paint manufacturer but not less than 55F; not more than 90F; and not more than 70% RH.

D. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

3.7. EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulate indoor equipment that is not factory insulated.

B. Heating Equipment: Insulate heating equipment such as heat exchangers, air separators, expansion/compression tanks, etc. with one of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

2. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick.

C. Heating and Hot Water Pumps: Insulate pumps with one of the following:




D. Steam System Pumps: Insulate steam condensate and boiler feedwater pumps, receivers, tanks, deaerators, etc. with one of the following:


2. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick.

3.8. INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. Equipment, Concealed: None

C. Equipment, Exposed: 0.032-inch thick painted smooth aluminum.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. HVAC Piping InsulationDEI# 50082886 23 07 19 - 1

SECTION 23 07 19

HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulation of indoor and below-grade (located in manholes and or tunnels) HVAC piping systems.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).

B. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use.

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2-inch diameter.

2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 6 inches square.

3. Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches long by NPS 2-inch diameter.

4. Sheet Jacket Materials: 6 inches square.

5. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range of colors available for each type of finish material.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

B. Storage: Insulation material shall be stored in a dry location sealed in plastic to prevent moisture infiltration. Insulation material, installed or not, that becomes wet, dirty, etc. shall be removed and replaced. “Dried” or “cleaned” insulation materials shall not be used.

1.5. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields.

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping shop drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for



installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.6. SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation installation after pressure testing systems and where required after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation applied prior to satisfactory test results shall be removed and replaced.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule" "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," ," and "Outdoor Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type II with factory-applied vinyl jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

H. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ jacket complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2. INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.

2.3. ADHESIVES



A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


C. ASJ and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.


2.4. MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.


3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.

4. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.


3. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.

4. Color: White.

2.5. LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.

3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.

4. Color: White.

2.6. SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:




2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.


4. Color: White or gray.


B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:




4. Color: Aluminum.


C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:




4. Color: White.


2.7. FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

2.8. FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. Metal Jacket:

1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.



b. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 2.5-mil thick polysurlyn.

d. Factory-fabricated fitting covers.

2.9. TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.





6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.





6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches.

2. Thickness: 6 mils.




D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Width: 2 inches.





2.10. SECUREMENTS



A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 ; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal.

2. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch wide, stainless steel or Monel.

3. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2. PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.



J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Manholes.

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.

Q. Piping insulation shall be continuous and not interrupted by hangers and supports. Hangers shall include factory-fabricated galvanized steel insulation shields that comply with MSS-58. Insulation installed that encapsulates any part of the hanger shall be removed and reinstalled.



3.4. PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

3.5. GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe



diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations necessary to access components. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6. INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.



2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7. FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch thick coats of lagging adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.



4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch wide joint strips at end joints.

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.8. FINISHES

A. Paint pipe insulation with ASJ, glass-cloth, or other paintable jacket material. Color shall be selected by the Owner/Engineer. Refer to Section 230553 – HVAC Systems Identification.

1. Prime with 2 coats of water-based white acrylic primer paint designed for use with associated jacket material.

2. Finish with 2 coats of flat latex paint with fungicidal agent additive to render fabric mildew proof.

3. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.

B. Apply paint and primer at the recommended spreading rate and film thickness as recommended by the paint manufacturer.

C. Apply paint and primer within the environmental conditions recommended by the paint manufacturer but not less than 55F; not more than 90F; and not more than 70% RH.

D. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

3.9. PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.10. INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 deg F and below:

1. Mineral-Fiber Type 1: 1-1/2-inches thick for 3/4 to 1-1/4-inches NPS; 2-inches thick for 1 1/2 to 4-inches NPS; and 2 1/2-inches thick for 6 to 24-inches NPS.

B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 350 deg F and below:



1. Mineral-Fiber Type 1: 3-inches thick for 3/4-inch NPS; 4-inches thick to 5-inches NPS; 4 inches thick for 6 to 18-inches NPS;

C. Hot water fittings

1. Fittings that need maintenance or cannot be properly fitted with insulation shall have a removable thermal blanket attached with straps and double D-rings. Thermal blanket shall be provided by Shannon Enterprises Inc., Insultech Thermal blankets or approved equal.

D. Low Pressure Steam and Steam Condensate, 15 psig and below:

1. Mineral-Fiber: 2 1/2-inches thick for 3/4 to 3-inches NPS; 3-inches thick for 4 to 10-inches NPS; and 3 1/2-inches thick for 12 to 24-inches NPS.

3.11. INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. Piping, Concealed: None

C. Piping, Exposed: 0.032-inch thick aluminum.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Digital Controls and InstrumentationDEI# 50082886 23 09 00 - 1

SECTION 23 09 00

DIGITAL CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.

B. The building automation system (BAS) shall be integrated with the established University of Virginia (UVA) Systems Control Center (SCC). General information, including references to UVA’s standards, is included in Section 230901.

C. UVA will furnish and the Contractor shall install the meters defined in Section 230519.

D. If there are any conflicts between Sections 230900 and 230901 after the final addendum, include the cost for the highest quality solution.


A. Refer to Section 230901 for submittal requirements.


A. Refer to Section 230901 for closeout submittals, including Operation and Maintenance Manuals.



1. Replacement Materials: One replacement diaphragm or relay mechanism for each unique valve motor, controller, thermostat, humidistat and positioning relay.


A. The building automation system (BAS) shall be furnished, engineered, installed, tested and calibrated by factory certified technicians qualified for this work. The contractor shall be factory authorized in good standing with the manufacturer. Factory trained technicians shall provide instruction, routine maintenance, and emergency service within 24 hours upon receipt of request.

1. Upon request, installer shall present records of successful completion of factory training courses including course outlines.

2. Upon request, the installer shall provide a letter from the manufacturer that they are a Factory Authorized installer in good standing with the Manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this project.



C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: UL listed and labeled complying with the requirements of NFPA 70 and Division 26.

D. Comply with UL 916 for Energy Management Systems.

E. Local and Terminal Control Units shall be BACnet Testing Lab (BTL) listed.

F. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.


A. Refer to Section 230901 for delivery, storage and handling requirements.

1.7. COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. Verify all locations with Engineer prior to installation.

B. Coordinate equipment with the fire alarm system to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.

C. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator workstation.

1.8. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. Sequences of Operation are located on the control drawings. Implement standard sequences for incidental items not shown.

1.9. WARRANTY

A. Refer to Section 230901 for warranty requirements.

B. Electronic Actuators: Parts and labor for 5 years from the date of substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Refer to Section 230901 for manufacturer requirements.

B. Products by the DDC system manufacturer shall include user interface, controller software, application programming language and equipment and application controllers. Sensors, actuators, valves, dampers and other components may be manufactured by others as indicated.

C. Description: DDC system with BACnet system level protocol, having all points exposed to BACnet/IP. The control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics. The control system shall be complete and fully operable.



2.2. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Refer to Section 230901 for system performance requirements.

2.3. NETWORKS

A. Refer to Section 230901 ‘System Architecture’ for network requirements.

2.4. DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Does not apply.

2.5. DDC SOFTWARE

A. Refer to Section 230901 for software requirements.

2.6. OPERATOR INTERFACE GRAPHIC SOFTWARE

A. Refer to Section 230901 for software requirements.

2.7. MOBILE DEVICE APPLICATIONS

A. Does not apply.

2.8. DDC CONTROLLERS

A. BAS Controllers:

1. Provide BACnet Controllers that are BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) listed (v12 or later) as specified herein:

a. BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)

b. BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC)

c. BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC)

2. All BACnet Controllers shall use the following communication specifications and achieve performance as specified herein:

a. All controllers shall be able to communicate peer-to-peer without the need for a Network Control Unit (NCU). Any controller on the MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer shall be able to act as a Master to allow for the exchange and sharing of data variables and messages with any other controller connected on the same communication cabling. Slave controllers are not acceptable.

b. Performance:

1. Each BACnet MS/TP controller shall have a minimum of 64Kb of RAM and 384Kb of non-volatile flash memory.

2. Each controller shall have a 32-bit microprocessor operating at 68 MHz and support a BACnet protocol stack in accordance with the



ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2008 and the BACnet Device Profile supported.

3. Each BACnet controller on the BACnet MS/TP communications trunk shall provide a loading characteristic of minimum 1/8th Load.

4. Manufacturers, who wish to supply Local Control Unit (LCU) and Terminal Control Unit (TCU) controllers with less than a 32-bit microprocessor and/or a MS/TP loading characteristic of greater than 1/8th Load, may do so as long as they only provide a maximum of 32 controllers on a single bus segment per NCU.

3. Local Control Units (LCU) and Terminal Control Units (TCU): Shall be fully programmable and the programming software shall have a library of pre-built, tested, and user re-definable control sequences for a wide range of typical HVAC applications. All control sequences programmed into the LCU and TCU shall be stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery, to be retained.

4. BACnet Controllers shall communicate with the Network Control Unit (NCU) via a BACnet/IP connection at a baud rate of not less than 100 Mbps or via the RS485 MS/TP connection at a baud rate of not less than 76.8 kbps.

5. BACnet TCU to have a communications port for connecting a matching room temperature and/or humidity sensor and does not utilize any of the I/O points of the Controller.

6. Provide documentation for each device, with the following information at a minimum:

a. BACnet Device; MAC address, name, type and instance number.

b. BACnet Objects; name, type and instance number.

7. Controllers shall have an enclosure appropriate for their environment as approved by the Engineer. Comply with NEMA enclosure requirements in Section 230511.

a. Outdoor Enclosures: Rated for operation at 0 to 150 deg F.

B. Local Control Units (LCU):

1. Local Control Units (LCU) shall be 32 bit microprocessor-based.

a. They shall also be multi-tasking, real-time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies and input/output point modules.

b. Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the sequence of operations.

2. Each LCU shall have sufficient memory, to support its own operating system and databases, including control processes, energy management applications, alarm management applications, historical/trend data for points specified, maintenance support applications, custom processes, and manual override monitoring.

3. Each LCU shall support monitoring of the following types of inputs, without the addition of equipment outside the DDC Controller cabinet:

a. Analog inputs of 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc, thermistor and RTD in the range 0 to 350,000 ohm.

b. Digital inputs from dry contact closure, pulse accumulators, voltage sensing.

c. Each LCU shall be capable of providing the following control outputs without the addition of equipment outside the DDC controller cabinet:

1. Digital outputs (contact closure for motor starters up to size 4).



2. Analog outputs of 4-20 mA and 0-10 Vdc.

4. LCU analog or universal input shall use a 16 bit A/D converter. Controllers with less than 16 bit A/D converters must provide all analog input sensors with 4-20ma transmitters.

5. LCU analog or universal output shall use a 10 bit D/A converter.

6. Each LCU shall have a minimum of 10% spare capacity for each point type for future point connection.

a. Provide all processors, power supplies and communication controllers complete so that the implementation of a point only requires the addition of the appropriate point input/output termination module and wiring.

b. As a minimum, provide one of each type of point available on the controller.

7. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and have at least 25% of the memory available for future use.

a. The operator interface shall consist of:

1. An icon-based, interactive backlit color display.

2. A turn and select navigation jog dial to access, edit, and modify internal controller functions. The jog dial shall be used to navigate through menus, select options and icons, and change parameters. Scroll buttons (up, down, left and right) shall not be acceptable.

3. Navigable menus to display, select, edit, and modify values and other controller information.

4. List-based menus with a minimum of eight (8) lines of text.

5. Icon-based menus.

6. A display with the following minimum characteristics: a resolution of 400 W x 240 H pixels with an effective viewing area of 2.4-inches L x 1.4-inches H, and 2.8-inches diagonal viewing area.

b. The operator interface shall use color-codes with icons and text lists to indicate values and controller statuses.

c. The operator interface shall, at a minimum, have the following functions:

1. Points: The operator interface shall provide points list menus to view the inputs, setpoints, and output values such as hardware inputs/outputs, analog values, binary values, and multistate values.

a. The points list menus shall allow the operator to monitor, set, and override controller points and values.

b. A color-code shall be used to indicate the conditions and statuses of points displayed in the points list menus.

2. Alarms: The operator interface shall provide a controller’s alarms menu to view details of an alarm, to acknowledge the alarm, and to view the alarm history.

a. The alarm menu shall allow the operator to view the following type of alarms: active not acknowledged, active acknowledged, and inactive not acknowledged.

b. The combination of an icon and its color state shall notify the operator of an alarm condition.



c. The operator shall be able to select a single point in alarm to view further details such as the alarm to/from status, current status, event date and time, alarm event threshold, and alarm event value.

3. Overrides: The operator interface shall provide an overrides menu to view a list of the controller’s overridden points such as hardware input, hardware output, value, constant, or variable. The menu shall allow the operator to select an overridden point and to modify or release the override on the selected point.

4. PID loops: The operator interface shall provide a PID Loops menu to view, configure, and adjust the PID parameters. The interface shall also provide visual PID tuning with live system response graphing (live-trend).

5. The operator interface shall allow personalization of a contact information screen with a minimum of eight (8) lines of user configurable text as well as the option to add a color graphic such as a company logo. The tool shall support, but not be limited to; image file formats such as GIF, PNG, JPG, etc.

6. Favorites: The operator interface shall allow access to a list of bookmarked points.

7. Weather: The operator interface shall provide a weather menu to view the current weather conditions with a weather status icon. The units shall be configured to be displayed in either metric or US units.

8. Password Protected: The controller operator interface shall provide multi-level password protection, with user-defined, alphanumeric, name/password combinations. The operator interface shall return to lock mode after a user-defined log-off delay. A password icon shall indicate the lock mode state.

9. Settings: The operator interface shall provide a settings menu to view and configure date and time parameters such as the current time, time zone, and daylight savings time.

8. LCU shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components.

9. Should the LCU memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the controller software via the BAS LAN operator workstation or server.

10. Provide an onboard network communication jack for connection to the network (RJ-45 or equivalent quick connect)

C. Terminal Control Units (TCU):

1. Provide Terminal Control Units (TCU) for control of each piece of terminal equipment.

2. TCU controllers shall be powered from a 24 Vac source.

3. Controllers shall also function normally under ambient conditions of 32 to 120 deg F and 5 to 90 percent RH (non-condensing).

4. Provide each controller with a suitable cover or enclosure to protect the intelligence board assembly.

5. Terminal Control Units (TCU) shall be 32 bit microprocessor-based.

6. They shall be multi-tasking, real-time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies and input/output point modules.



7. Each TCU shall have sufficient memory, to support its own operating system and databases, including: control processes, maintenance support applications, custom processes, and manual override monitoring.

8. Each TCU shall support monitoring of the following types of inputs, without the addition of equipment:

a. Analog inputs of 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc, thermistor and RTD in the range 0 to 350,000 ohm.

b. Digital inputs from dry contact closure, pulse accumulators, voltage sensing.

c. Each TCU shall be capable of providing the following control outputs without the addition of equipment: digital outputs (contact closure for motor starters up to size 4) and analog outputs of 4-20 mA or 0-10 Vdc.

9. TCU analog or universal input shall use a 16 bit A/D converter. Controllers with less than 16 bit A/D converters must provide all analog input sensors with 4-20ma transmitters.

10. TCU analog or universal output shall use a 10 bit D/A converter.

11. Controllers shall include all point inputs and outputs necessary to perform the specific control sequences.

a. As a minimum, 25% of the point outputs shall be of the universal type; that is, the outputs may be utilized either as modulating or two-state, allowing for additional system flexibility.

b. Analog outputs shall be industry standard signals such as 24V floating control, allowing for interface to a variety of modulating actuators.

12. Each controller shall perform its primary control function independent of other NCU controller LAN communication, or if LAN communication is interrupted.

a. Reversion to a fail-safe mode of operation during LAN interruption is not acceptable.

b. The controller shall receive its real-time data from the NCU controller time clock to insure LAN continuity.

c. Each controller shall include algorithms incorporating proportional, integral, and derivative (PID) gains for all applications.

d. All PID gains and biases shall be field-adjustable by the user via terminals as specified herein.

e. This functionality shall allow for tighter control of space conditions and shall facilitate optimal occupant comfort and energy savings.

13. Provide each TCU with sufficient memory to accommodate point databases, operating programs, local alarming and local trending.

a. All databases and programs shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM, EPROM and PROM.

b. The controllers shall be able to return to full normal operation without user intervention after a power failure of unlimited duration.

c. Operating programs shall be field selectable for specific applications.

d. In addition, specific applications may be modified to meet the user's exact control strategy requirements, allowing for additional system flexibility.

e. Controllers that require factory changes of all applications are not acceptable.



2.9. ANALOG CONTROLLERS

A. Step Controllers: 6 or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and operated by electric motor.

B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg F, and single- or double-pole contacts.

C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and authority.

D. Receiver Controllers: Single- or multiple-input models with control-point adjustment, direct or reverse acting with mechanical set-point adjustment with locking device, proportional band adjustment, authority adjustment, and proportional control mode.

1. Remote-control-point adjustment shall be plus or minus 20 percent of sensor span, input signal of 3 to 13 psig.

2. Proportional band shall extend from 2 to 20 percent for 5 psig.

3. Authority shall be 20 to 200 percent.

4. Air-supply pressure of 18 psig input signal of 3 to 15 psig, and output signal of zero to supply pressure.

5. Gages: 1 1/2-inch diameter, 2.5 percent wide-scale accuracy, and range to match transmitter input or output pressure.

2.10. ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required.

B. Provide sensors as indicated in control diagrams and sequences of operation or as needed to perform the intended operations.

C. Temperature Sensors:

1. General Requirements:

a. Accuracy:

1. Thermistor: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point.

2. RTD: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point.

b. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.

2. Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Sensor: Thermistor or RTD compatible with BMS installed in wall-mounted weatherproof enclosure with conduit entrance and aluminum LB with PVC sun and windscreen.

3. Wall-Mounted Temperature Sensor: Thermistor or RTD compatible with BMS with insulated back.

a. Private Spaces: White plastic enclosure with set point adjustment and push button override.

b. Public Spaces: Stainless steel plate sensor that fits in a standard 4-inch by 2-inch junction box with tamperproof screws.



4. Thermowell-Mounted Immersion Temperature Sensor: Thermistor or RTD compatible with BMS sealed in a probe with a three-part moisture protection system in a brass or stainless steel thermowell. Rigid 0.25-inch stainless steel probe that has minimum length of 20% of the pipe width. Metal (for indoor) or weatherproof (for outdoor applications) enclosure with conduit entrance.

D. Pressure Sensors:

1. Water Pressure Sensors: Sensor with 4-20 mA output proportional to water pressure with stainless steel wetted parts in a weatherproof wiring housing. Sensors shall have over pressure input protection of minimum two times rated input and burst pressure of minimum five times rated input.

a. Range: 0 to two times the set point or anticipated pressure.

b. Accuracy: 0.25 percent of range.

c. Temperature: Minus 40 to positive 260 deg F.

2. Water Differential/Gage Pressure Sensors: Sensor with 4-20 mA or 0-10 Vdc output proportional to the pressure sensed with stainless steel wetted parts in a weatherproof wiring housing. Sensors shall have over pressure input protection of minimum five times rated input.

a. Range: 0 psig to 150 percent of maximum design pressure.

b. Accuracy: 1 percent of full-scale reading.

c. Temperature: Minus 40 to positive 260 deg F.

E. Electronic Sensors:

1. Current Relays / Switches: Current relays shall be rated for their associated load; have input and output isolation via current transformer; and be self-powered with no insertion loss. The output relay shall have an accessible trip adjustment over its complete operating range. Provide LED indication of relay status. Relay shall be in a dustproof housing.

a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale.

b. Temperature: 0 to 140 deg F.

2. Current Sensor: Sensor with 4-20 mA, 0-10 or 0-5 Vdc output proportional to current draw and rated for 50/60 Hz operation.

a. Accuracy: 1 percent

b. Temperature: Minus 20 to positive 120 deg F.

2.11. STATUS SENSORS

A. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump.

B. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current.

C. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.

D. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor.



E. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements.

F. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.

G. Water-Flow Switches: Snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating, stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure.

2.12. DETECTION EQUIPMENT

2.13. ACTUATORS

A. Manufacturers: All valve actuators shall be supplied from a single manufacturer. Provide actuators manufactured by one of the following:

1. Belimo

2. Honeywell

3. Johnson Controls

4. Schneider Electric (TAC Dura-Drive)

5. Siemens

B. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 230513.

2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

3. Non-Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than 2 1/2-inch NPS: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than 2 1/2-inch NPS: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

C. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type with stroke indicator and designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

1. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure.

2. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.

3. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.

4. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on non-spring-return actuators.

5. Power Requirements:

a. Two-Position Spring Return: 24Vac.

b. Modulating: Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.

6. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback signal.



7. Temperature Rating:

a. Standard Valves: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.

8. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed unless otherwise noted.

9. Housing: Minimum NEMA Type 2, mounted in any orientation, for indoor locations and NEMA Type 3R, mounted in any orientation, for outdoor locations.

2.14. ELECTRIC CONTROL COMPONENTS

A. Limit Switches: Single-pole double-throw (SPDT) or double-pole double-throw (DPDT) type, UL-listed with adjustable trim arm.

B. Control Relays: Rated for application, UL-listed, and mounted in NEMA 1 enclosure for indoor locations and NEMA 4 for outdoor with pilot light indicator of power-to-coil.

1. Time Delay Relays: Capable of on or off delay functions with adjustable timing periods, cycle timing light with solid state, plug-in type coils with transient suppression devices.

C. Control Transformers: Rated for application, UL-listed, and mounted in NEMA 1 enclosure for indoor locations and NEMA 4 for outdoor with replaceable fuses on the primary and secondary side. Transformers shall be sized so that connected load does not exceed 75 percent of rating.

D. Power Contactors: NEMA ICS 2 AC general purpose magnetic contactor mounted in NEMA 1 enclosure for indoor locations and NEMA 4 for outdoor.

2.15. CONTROL CABLE

A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring shall comply with Section 230511 and Division 26.

2.16. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Provide 24V transformers for all control equipment fed by low-voltage (100 to 600 V) power feeders. Coordinate the exact requirements with the Electrical Contractor.

B. Comply with the requirements of Section 230511 and Division 26.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Section 230901 for installation requirements.

3.2. ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Section 230901 for electrical wiring requirements.




A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator.

4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required.

5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions.

6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.

7. Test software and hardware interlocks.

B. DDC Verification:

1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks.

2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.

3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, and other applicable considerations.

4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.

5. Check installation of air supply for each instrument.

6. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet side is identified and that meters are installed correctly.

7. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-contained pressure regulators.

8. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.

9. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.

10. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.

11. Check DDC system as follows:

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable.

b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system.

c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.

d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.

e. Verify all control valves have been installed at the correct locations.

f. Verify all control dampers have been installed at the correct locations.

C. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

3.4. ADJUSTING



A. Calibrating and Adjusting:

1. Calibrate instruments.

2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog instrument.

3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated.

4. Control System Inputs and Outputs:

a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.

b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output.

c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire.

d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.

e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistant source.

5. Flow:

a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3-point calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span.

b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact.

6. Pressure:

a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.

b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential set at minimum.

7. Temperature:

a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistance source.

b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.

8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and closed.

9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.

10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system.

11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to six visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.



3.5. DEMONSTRATION

A. Refer to Section 230901 for demonstration and training requirements.

3.6. SOFTWARE UPDATES

A. At 12-monthsfrom the date of Substantial Completion, update the BAS software to the most recent release. The update(s) shall be scheduled with the Owner and performed under their direct supervision. Verify proper operation after the installation and correct any problems created by the installation process.

1. Software update shall include all labor, licensing and associated fees.


University of Virginia 100% Construction Documents IRC Plant Connections Hot Water Package January 19, 2017 UVA WO: 2513122; PIMS: P04405

Dewberry Engineers Inc. Building Automation Systems – UVA Supplement DEI# 50082886 23 09 01 - 1

SECTION 23 09 01 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS – UVA SUPPLEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. General Requirements

B. Description of Work

C. Quality Assurance

D. System Architecture

E. Distributed Processing Units/Quantity and Location

F. Demolition and Reuse of Existing Materials and Equipment

G. Sequence of Work

1.2 RELATED AND REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

A. Section 230900 – Digital Controls and Instrumentation.

B. University of Virginia “Building Automation System Standards” (http://ubo.virginia.edu/Pages/FDG.aspx)

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Building automation system shall adhere to the most recent version of the UVa Building Automation System Standards found at the link in paragraph 1.02.C. BAS Contractor shall reference the version being used in their submittal. If the UVa Building Automation System Standards are found to be in conflict with any drawings or specifications, Contractor shall submit an RFI.

B. Contractor shall furnish and install a direct digital control and building automation system (BAS). The new BAS shall utilize electronic sensing, microprocessor-based digital control, and electronic actuation of dampers, valves and devices to perform control sequences and functions specified. Refer also to control drawings, sequences of operation, and point lists.

C. The HVAC systems being controlled include variable volume air handlers, terminal units with reheat coils, fume hood and general exhaust fans, heating and chilled water pumps and distribution, fan coil units, and terminal equipment. This Section defines the manner and method by which these controls function.

D. All control work shall be installed by the BAS contractor, unless specified otherwise. Where a piece of equipment can be controlled by the BAS then BAS controls alone shall be used (i.e. all control logic shall reside in a native BAS controller not an OEM controller). All labor, materials, equipment, software, and services necessary for the installation of a complete integrated system shall be provided by the BAS contractor.

E. All costs associated with the work of this Section shall be included in the Contractor’s proposal.

1.4 PROCUREMENT

A. The BAS and digital control and communications components installed, as work of this contract shall be an integrated distributed processing system of the following manufacturer. No other vendor’s products will be considered as substitutions.



B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Automated Logic Corporation, WebCTRL®

2. Johnson Controls, Inc., Metasys®

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

B. Electronics Industries Alliance

1. EIA-709.1-B-2002: Control Network Protocol Specification

2. EIA-709.3-99: Free-Topology Twisted-Pair Channel Specification

3. EIA-232: Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange.

4. EIA-458: Standard Optical Fiber Material Classes and Preferred Sizes

5. EIA-485: Standard for Electrical Characteristics of Generator and Receivers for use in Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems.

6. EIA-472: General and Sectional Specifications for Fiber Optic Cable

7. EIA-475: Generic and Sectional Specifications for Fiber Optic Connectors and all Sectional Specifications

8. EIA-573: Generic and Sectional Specifications for Field Portable Polishing Device for Preparation Optical Fiber and all Sectional Specifications

9. EIA-590: Standard for Physical Location and Protection of Below-Ground Fiber Optic Cable Plant and all Sectional Specifications

C. Underwriters Laboratories

1. UL 916: Energy Management Systems.

D. NEMA Compliance

1. NEMA 250: Enclosure for Electrical Equipment

2. NEMA ICS 1: General Standards for Industrial Controls.

E. NFPA Compliance

1. NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control sequences.

2. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)

3. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

F. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

1. IEEE 142: Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

2. IEEE 802.3: CSMA/CD (Ethernet – Based) LAN

3. IEEE 802.4: Token Bus Working Group (ARCNET – Based) LAN

G. All distributed, application controllers supplied shall be in compliance with the following listings and standards:

1. UL916 for Open Energy Management

2. CE Electro Magnetic Compatibility

3. BACnet Testing Lab (BTL) listed.

H. Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply. Nothing in this specification or related documentation shall be construed to permit work not conforming to applicable codes.



1.6 FUNCTIONAL INTENT

A. Throughout these Sections detailed requirements are specified, some of which indicate a means, method or configuration acceptable to meet that requirement. Contractor may submit products that utilize alternate means, methods, and configurations that meet the functional intent. However these will only be allowed with prior approval by the University.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Electronic Submittals: Control submittals and O&M information shall be provided electronically in Adobe PDF format. Control drawings shall be electronically provided in Adobe PDF in a size no less than 11”x17”. Preferably documents will be developed in a preferred format or converted from their native electronic format directly to a preferred format. Any documents scanned as images must be converted to a searchable text format using OCR (Optical Character Recognition) and reduced in size prior to submission.

B. Qualifications: Manufacturer, Installer, and Key personnel qualifications.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device, panel, and accessory furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also include installation and start-up instructions.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each control system, including a complete drawing for each air handling unit, system, pump, device, etc. with all point descriptors, addresses and point names indicated. Each shop drawing shall be provided in Adobe PDF format and contain the following:

1. Cover Sheet /Title Sheet: Attached to the Front of all Submittal Sheets, this shall include a minimum of: UVA Project Name; Project Location; UVA Project Number, Building Number; Controls Contractor Name, Address, Phone Number(s); Project Engineer Name; Mechanical Contractor Name; Submission Date; Date and Name of the Project Construction Documents used to create the Submittal. When resubmitted for Record Documentation, they shall be marked as “RECORD DRAWINGS” and the current Date shall be added.

2. Index: The first sheet of the Shop Drawings shall be an Index of all sheets in the set.

3. Legend: A description of symbols and acronyms used shall be provided at the beginning of the set of Shop Drawings.

4. Device Addressing Scheme: Install controllers implementing an addressing scheme consistent with the Reference-document "UVA BACnet Addressing Standard". The document is available through UVA’s Instrumentation & Controls Group.

5. Each unique controlled system or piece of equipment shall include the following items:

a. System Schematic

b. Sequence of Operation

c. Point-to-point Wiring Details

d. Bill of Material

e. Configuration Details

f. On-line Graphic (sample)

6. System Architecture and System Layout:



a. One-line diagram indicating schematic locations of all control units, workstations, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate network number, device ID, drawing reference number, and controller type for each control unit. All optical isolators, repeaters, end-of-line resistors, junctions, ground locations etc. shall be located on the diagram.

b. Indicate device instance and MAC address for each CU. Indicate media, protocol, baud rate, and type of each LAN.

c. Provide floor plans locating all control units, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. Include all WAN and LAN communication wiring routing, power wiring, power originating sources, and low voltage power wiring. Wiring routing as-built conditions shall be maintained accurately throughout the construction period and the drawing shall be updated to accurately reflect accurate, actual installed conditions.

d. Indicate network number, device ID, address, device instance, MAC address, drawing reference number, and controller type for each control unit. Indicate media, protocol, baud rate, and type of each LAN. All optical isolators, repeaters, end-of-line resistors, junctions, ground locations etc. shall be located on the floor plans.

7. Schematic flow diagram of each air and water system showing fans, coils, dampers, valves, pumps, heat exchange equipment and control devices. Include narrative description of sequence of operation as it will be applied by the proposed control system (providing verbatim copy of contract documents is not acceptable). Indicate which items will be installed by others.

8. All physical points on the schematic flow diagram shall be indicated with names, descriptors, and point addresses identified as listed in the points list summary table.

9. Points List: The points list shall include all I/O points, all Alarm points and all Trend points. Information on each point shall include the following:

a. Point type

b. Point description

c. Point name (see paragraph 1.14 Point Naming Convention)

d. Object instance number

e. Alarm limits, if applicable

f. Whether or not a Trend is Enabled on point

g. What Trend is triggered on, if applicable

h. Whether or not Trend historian (archive) is enabled on point

i. Event Category and Event Template assigned to point

j. Event parameters

k. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure.

10. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.

11. Label each input and output with the appropriate range.

12. Provide a Bill of Materials with each schematic. Indicate device identification to match schematic and actual field labeling, quantity, actual product ordering number, manufacturer, description, size, voltage range, pressure range, temperature range, etc. as applicable.

13. Provide a Control Valve Schedule listing valve and actuator information including: size, Cv, design flow, design pressure drop, manufacturer, model number, close off rating, control signal, line size, line pressure, tag number, system service, valve type, material construction of body, stem, disc, etc. Indicate normal positions of automatic return valves.



14. Provide a Control Damper Schedule listing damper and actuator information including: size, material, blade arrangement, manufacturer, model number, control signal, etc. Indicate normal positions of spring return dampers.

15. Provide an Air Flow Monitoring Station Schedule listing the following information: size, material, manufacturer, model number, control signal, CFM, velocity, etc.

16. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Electrical wiring diagrams shall include both ladder logic type diagram for motor starter, control, and safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminal block numbers identified. Provide panel termination drawings on separate drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on system schematic. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring, which are existing, factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

17. Provide details of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling shown in plan or elevation indicating the installed locations. Provide panel layout drawing including power supply, control unit(s) and wiring terminals.

18. Sheets shall be consecutively numbered.

19. Each sheet shall have a title indicating the type of information included and the HVAC system controlled.

20. Table of Contents listing sheet titles and sheet numbers followed by a symbol legend and list of abbreviations.

E. Laminated Control Drawings: Laminated control drawings including system control schematics, sequences of operation and panel termination drawings, shall be provided in panels for major pieces of equipment. Terminal unit drawings shall be located in the central plant equipment panel or mechanical room panel.

F. Control Logic Documentation

1. Submit control logic program listings to document the control software of all control units.

2. Include written description of each control sequence.

3. Include test plan for each unique control program.

4. Include control response, settings, set points, throttling ranges, gains, reset schedules, alarm settings, adjustable parameters and limits.

G. Operation and Maintenance Materials:

1. Submit documents under provisions of Division 1. Documents shall be provided electronically as described above.

2. Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists for each type of control device, control unit, and accessory.

3. Include all submittals (product data, shop drawings, control logic documentation, hardware manuals, software manuals, installation guides or manuals, maintenance instructions and spare parts lists) in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. Only include sections for equipment and software used on this project. Do not provide entire catalog of product data with extraneous information.

4. Submit BAS User’s Guides (Operating Manuals) for each controller type and for all workstation hardware and software and workstation peripherals.

5. Submit BAS advanced Programming Manuals for each controller type and for all workstation software.



H. Controls contractor shall provide University with all product line technical manuals and technical bulletins, to include new and upgraded products, by the same distribution channel as to dealers or branches throughout the warranty period of the project.

I. Manufacturers Certificates: For all listed and/or labeled products, provide certificate of conformance.

J. Product Warranty Certificates: Coordinate and submit manufacturers product warranty certificates covering the hardware provided.

1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit documents. Documentation shall be provided electronically as defined in submittal section above.

B. Record copies of product data and control shop drawings updated to reflect the final installed condition.

C. Record electronic copies of approved control logic programming and database. Accurately record actual set points and settings of controls, final sequence of operation, including changes to programs made after submission and approval of shop drawings and including changes to programs made during specified testing.

D. Record electronic copies of approved project specific graphic software..

E. Record copies shall include individual floor plans with controller locations with all interconnecting wiring routing including space sensors, LAN wiring, power wiring, low voltage power wiring.

F. Provide record riser diagram showing the location of all controllers.

G. Record Points List: The Record Points List shall be submitted at the end of the construction period. The Table shall include all I/O points, all Alarm points and all Trend points. Information on each point shall include the following:

1. Point type

2. Point description

3. Point name

4. Object instance number

5. Alarm limits, if applicable

6. Whether or not a Trend is Enabled on point

7. What Trend is triggered on, if applicable

8. Whether or not Trend historian (archive) is enabled on point

9. Event Category and Event Template assigned to point

10. Event parameters

11. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure.

1.9 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. The system provided shall incorporate hardware resources sufficient to meet the functional requirements of this project plus 10% additional capacity. This additional capacity shall be specifically reflected in additional controller universal inputs/outputs and at the wiring terminal within each CU. The Contractor shall include all items not specifically itemized in these Specifications that are necessary to implement, maintain, and operate the system in compliance with the functional intent of these contract documents.



B. The system shall be configured as a distributed processing network(s) capable of expansion.

C. The system architecture shall consist of an Ethernet-based, wide area network (WAN), a single Local Area Network (LAN) or multi-leveled LANs that support BCs, AACs, ASCs, Operator Workstations (OWS), Smart Devices (SD), and Portable Operator Terminals (POTs) as applicable. The following indicates a functional description of the BAS structure.

1. UVA WAN: Internet-based TCP/IP network connecting multiple facilities with a central data warehouse and server, accessible via standard web-browser. This is an existing infrastructure and contractor is not required to configure any components of this WAN.

2. Local Supervisory LAN: The Local Supervisory LAN shall be an Ethernet-based, 100/1000 Mbps LAN connecting Primary Control LANs and OWSs. The LAN serves as the inter-BC gateway and OWS-to-BC gateway and communications path. Contractor shall provide this as a dedicated LAN for the control system. LAN shall be IEEE 802.3 Ethernet over Fiber or Category 5/6e cable with switches and routers that support 100/1000 Mbps throughput. Power-line carrier communication shall not be acceptable for communications.

3. Primary Controller LAN (‘Primary LAN’): High-speed, peer-to-peer communicating LAN used to connect Building Controllers (BCs) and communicate control information. Acceptable technologies include:

a. Ethernet (IEEE802.3)

b. ARCNET (IEEE802.4)

4. Secondary Controller LAN (‘Secondary LAN’): Network used to connect AACs, ASCs or SDs. These can be Master Slave/ Token Passing (EIA-485), in addition to those allowed for Primary Controller LANs. Network speed vs. the number of controllers on the LAN shall be dictated by the response time and trending requirements.

D. Dynamic Data Access: Any data throughout any level of the network shall be available to and accessible by all other devices, Controllers and OWS, whether directly connected or connected remotely.

E. Remote Data Access: Coordinate remote access connectivity with UVA. The system shall support the following methods of remote access to the building data:

1. After DDC commissioning, new systems shall be migrated to production server of one of the approved BAS vendors.

2. Browser-based access: A remote user using a standard browser shall be able access all control system facilities and graphics with proper password. UVA shall provide the required server side internet connection.

F. The communication speed between the controllers, LAN interface devices, and operator interface devices shall be sufficient to ensure fast system response time under any loading condition. In no case shall delay times between an event, request, or command initiation and its completion be greater than those listed herein. Contractor shall reconfigure LAN as necessary to accomplish these performance requirements:

1. 5 seconds between a Level 1 (critical) alarm occurrence and enunciation at operator workstation.



2. 10 seconds between a Level 2 alarm occurrence and enunciation at operator workstation.

3. 20 seconds between and a Level 3-5 alarm occurrence and enunciation at operator workstation.

4. 10 seconds between an operator command via the operator interface to change a setpoint and the subsequent change in the controller.

5. 5 seconds between an operator command via the operator interface to start/stop a device and the subsequent command to be received at the controller.

6. 10 seconds between a change of value or state of an input and it being updated on the operator interface.

7. 10 seconds between an operator selection of a graphic and it completely painting the screen and updating at least 10 points.

G. Control Systems Server (CSS): This shall be a computer (or computers) that maintain the systems configuration and programming database. It shall hold the backup files of the information downloaded into the individual controllers and as such support uploading and downloading that information directly to/from the controllers. Alternatively, appropriate software shall be provided so backup files can be stored in a central location. It shall allow secure multiple-user access to the control information.

H. The Operator Interface shall provide for overall system supervision, graphical user interface, management report generation, alarm annunciation, and remote monitoring.

I. The BCs, AACs, ASCs, and SDs shall monitor, control, and provide the field interface for all points specified. Each BC, AAC, or ASC shall be capable of performing all specified energy management functions, and all DDC functions, independent of other BCs, AACs, or ASCs and operator interface devices.

J. Systems Configuration Database: The system architecture shall support maintaining the systems configuration database on a server or workstation on the Local Supervisory LAN. User tools shall be provided to allow configuring, updating, archiving, maintaining, etc. current configurations and settings whether they are initiated at the server or the OWS.

K. Interruptions or fault at any point on any Primary Controller LAN shall not interrupt communications between other nodes on the network. If a LAN is severed, separate networks shall be formed and communications within each network shall continue uninterrupted.

L. All line drivers, signal boosters, and signal conditioners etc. shall be provided as necessary for proper data communication.

1.10 WARRANTY MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall warrant all products and labor for a period of one year after Substantial Completion.

B. The University reserves the right to make changes to the BAS during the warranty period. Such changes do not constitute a waiver of warranty. The Contractor shall warrant parts and installation work regardless of any such changes made by the University, unless the Contractor provides clear and convincing evidence that a specific problem is the result of such changes to the BAS. Any disagreement between the University and the Contractor on such matters shall be subject to resolution through the contract ‘Disputes’ clause.

C. During the warranty period, the Contractor shall provide maintenance services for software and hardware components as specified below, at no cost to the University:



1. Maintenance services shall be provided for all BAS devices and hardware specified in these sections. Service all equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendations. All devices shall be calibrated within the last month of the warranty period. A label indicating the date of calibration and initials of the technician performing calibration shall be affixed to the device at that time.

2. Emergency Service: Any malfunction, failure, or defect in any hardware component or failure of any control programming that would result in property damage or loss of comfort control shall be corrected and repaired following notification by the University to the Contractor.

a. Response by telephone to any request for service shall be provided within two (2) hours of the University's initial telephone request for service.

b. In the event that the malfunction, failure, or defect is not corrected through the telephonic communication, at least one (1) hardware and software technician, trained in the system to be serviced, shall be dispatched to the University's site within eight (8) hours of the University's initial telephone request for such services, as specified.

3. Normal Service: Any malfunction, failure, or defect in any hardware component or failure of any control programming that would not result in property damage or loss of comfort control shall be corrected and repaired following telephonic notification by the University to the Contractor.

a. Response by telephone to any request for service shall be provided within eight (8) working hours (contractor specified 40 hr per week normal working period) of the University's initial telephone request for service.

b. In the event that the malfunction, failure, or defect is not corrected through the telephonic communication, at least one (1) hardware and software technician, trained in the system to be serviced, shall be dispatched to the University's site within three (3) working days of the University's initial telephone request for such services, as specified.

4. Telephonic Request for Service: Contractor shall specify a maximum of three telephone numbers for University to call in the event of a need for service. At least one of the lines shall be attended at any given time at all times. Once contacted a technician shall respond to every call within 15 minutes.

5. Technical Support: Contractor shall provide technical support by telephone throughout the warranty period.

6. Preventive maintenance shall be provided throughout the warranty period in accordance with the hardware component manufacturer's requirements.


A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. Maintain cartons during shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and protect from construction work and weather.

1.12 LISTING AND LABELING

A. The BAS and components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 916) as an Energy Management System.

1.13 POINT NAMING CONVENTION

A. All point names and descriptions shall adhere to the UVA “Building Automation System Standards” format, which shall be requested from UVA Instrumentation & Controls department. The point naming standard is generally outlined below.



B. All point/object names shall include the respective building number, controller identification, and appropriate point abbreviation separated by a period. The controller is defined as the first device that wires from a sensor physically connect to. For example, "0001.VAV-01.ZN-T" would represent a zone temperature associated with variable air volume controller number 01 in building number 0001. Point/object names shall not include floor or room number information, this information shall be reserved for an associated details/description type field.

C. Any associated description or detail field should include as much clarifying information as possible. In the aforementioned example, an appropriate description would be "FLR 1 : RM 111 : AHU-01". At a minimum, the details/description field should contain floor, room, and associated cooling/heating source (where applicable) in that order. In cases where the heating/cooling source may not be applicable or the user would be better served by knowing the system associated with the given point, the system or equipment shall precede the location information. This would be most common for air handlers, water systems, etc. See the following examples:

1. Example 1 - Heating/Cooling Source Only:

2. Room Zone Temperature - "FLR 3 : RM 321 : AHU-06" This would indicate the room of the point and its respective heating/cooling source, which is air handler 06.

3. Example 2: - System/Equipment Only:

4. Air Handler Supply Air Temperature - "AHU-03 : FLR 3 : RM 345" This description indicates that the system is air handler 03 and the location of the supply air sensor is in room 345 located on the 3rd floor.

5. UVA shall designate the Building descriptor. All other descriptors shall be as defined in UVA’s “Building Automation System Point Naming Standards”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials shall be new, the best of their respective kinds without imperfections or blemishes and shall not be damaged in any way, and shall consist of the manufacturer’s latest technology. Used equipment shall not be used in any way for the permanent installation except where drawings or specs specifically allow existing materials to remain in place.

B. The system must be fully BACnet compliant at the time of installation. This means

that the system must use BACnet as the native communication protocol between workstations or servers on the network.

2.2 UNIFORMITY

A. To the extent practical, all equipment of the same type serving the same function shall be identical and from the same manufacturer.

2.3 BAS INTERFACING WITH 3RD-PARTY SUB-SYSTEMS

A. General: The Contractor shall be responsible for connecting all sub-systems to the BAS via native BACnet interface (provided by the original equipment manufacturer), or if not native BACnet, a sub-system shall be integrated via a gateway that converts the proprietary protocol to the BACnet protocol. In some cases, such as certain meters, a MODBUS interface is acceptable. Sub-systems may include RTU(s), ERU(s), VFD(s), Chiller(s), Lighting Controls and/or Utilities Monitoring provided as part of this project.



A. Where equipment is integrated to the BAS the integration shall be over an RS-485 wire directly connected to a BAS controller. If integration is required over the University IP network, contractor shall coordinate with the UVa Automation Services Department.

B. Gateway: The gateway(s), required for the sub-system(s), shall be provided by the original equipment manufacturer (OEM). The gateway(s) is (are) further specified below:

1. The gateway Submittal shall be provided by the OEM to the Controls Contractor to be included with the BAS Shop Drawings Submittal.

2. All system information specified in the sequence of operation and related documents shall be available to the BAS. Read and write capability, as indicated by an object table provided by the OEM, shall be provided for the mechanical and electrical equipment indicated and be available to the BAS system. The OEM shall provide to the Controls Contractor, a table of gateway objects and their functionality, including normal operating limits. The equipment OEM will expose all available objects as BACnet objects for use by the Controls Contractor.

3. OEMs shall bid a fully BACnet compliant device to facilitate interoperability between OEM electrical/mechanical sub-systems and the BACnet BAS or provide the necessary gateway to integrate into the web-based BACnet BAS using the BACnet protocol.

a. The OEM shall provide any software or hardware required to access or modify any electrical/mechanical subsystems (e.g. RTUs, ERUs, VFD, Chillers, Lighting Controls and/or Electrical Monitoring).

C. A Modbus interface may be used only when a BACnet interface is not available from the equipment OEM. If the equipment manufacturer does not have this capability, they shall contact the authorized representative of the Controls Contractor for assistance and shall include in their equipment price any necessary hardware and/or software obtained from the Controls Contractor to comply with this section. Cost alone is not an acceptable reason for not providing a BACnet interface.

D. OEM Configuration Tools and Licenses: Configuration Tools, and all software licenses, required to configure all OEM controllers installed on this project shall be provided.

E. For all 3rd party controls, the following points at a minimum shall be writable from the building automation system interface:

1. All setpoints including but not limited to temperature, humidity, airflow.

2. All actuator commands (e.g.valves and dampers).

2.4 SOFTWARE USER INTERFACE

A. Local Displays

a. All controllers installed on Major equipment (e.g. AHUs, Chilled Water, Hot Water, etc.) shall have local digital displays.

B. Online Graphics:

1. Equipment Graphic:

a. See UVA Building Automation System Standards.

b. All controlled equipment (Mechanical, Electrical, Primary, Terminal, etc.) shall have a representative equipment graphic.



c. At a minimum, all hardware points and setpoints shall be displayed on each equipment graphic as well as the points indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. All setpoints shall be adjustable from the graphics screen.

d. The latest version of the BAS vendor’s advanced animated graphics software shall be used to its fullest extent in the creation of the equipment graphics. Fans, dampers, coils, pumps, etc. shall be rendered as animated graphics.

e. Hypertext links to the cooling source and heating source of each piece of equipment shall be defined on the graphic.

f. Hypertext links to the sequences of operations as programmed.

g. Object in alarm condition shall be shown red and signify “Alarm” on the graphic.

h. The device communication status shall be displayed on all equipment online graphics.

i. The program run state shall be displayed on all equipment online graphics.

j. An online text description of the Sequence of Operation, or a link to the electronic file, shall be provided for each piece of equipment on the equipment graphics.

2. Logic Programming:

a. All equipment shall have an interactive link on the equipment graphic page that links to the logic programming. The programming logic shall be shown with real-time values, accessible via the standard thin-client user interface program.

b. A vendor-supplied toolset that allows the University to view the logic programming with real time values will be acceptable, but is not preferred.

3. Area Served/Equipment graphic

a. The Controls Contractor shall provide a Floor Plan graphic representing the spaces served by each piece of Primary Equipment (Air systems, and Heating-only systems) The Floor Plan graphic will include the Room Numbers of the Spaces being served, and the Spaces shall be color-shaded to indicate they are served by the noted Primary Equipment.

b. Floor Plans shall dynamically update to visually depict the Zone alarm (event) status of the Spaces being served.

c. If the Primary Equipment serves Spaces on several Floors, the Area Served/Equipment graphic will be comprised of portions of several Floor Plans.

4. Floor Plan graphics.

a. All floors in the building shall have a graphic screen.

b. Equipment locations and space temperatures shall be displayed on the floor plan graphic.

c. Hypertext links to the room controller parameters shall be defined by clicking on the room location the controller serves.

d. Hypertext links to equipment parameters shall be defined by clicking on the equipment location on the floor plan.

C. Equipment Occupancy Scheduling:

1. All equipment occupied/unoccupied scheduling shall be accomplished via a BACnet BV that is controlled by a BACnet schedule.

2. The Controls Contractor shall provide a BACnet BV for all VAVs, FCUs, Air Handlers, Exhaust equipment to be implemented in schedules. It is the



University’s goal to schedule all terminal equipment and allow the call for starts to turn on the up-line equipment.

3. The Controls Contractor shall coordinate equipment schedules between the University Project Manager and the University customer.

4. The system shall allow the operator to designate any combination of equipment to form a group that can be scheduled with a single operator command through the mouse interface at the workstation.

a. Any designated group shall have the capability to be a member of another group.

b. The operator shall be able to make all schedule additions, modifications and deletions using the mouse and appropriate dialog boxes. In addition, the operator shall have the capability to edit all schedules and then download any or all schedule changes to the control modules with a single operator command through the mouse interface.

c. The operator shall be able to view a forecast of schedules for instant overview of facilities schedules. Schedule forecast shall include indication of all types of schedules, i.e. normal, holiday and override.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which control systems are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, roughing-in drawings and details shown on drawings.

B. Critical safety interlocks which are not directly wired by the Division 26 sub-contractor, such as freezestats, high limit protectors, end switches etc., shall be directly connected, through wire or pneumatic tubing, so as not to depend on any digital control system “Sequence of Operation” to perform their safety function.

C. All electric actuators specified on the contract documents or necessary for the control system to function are to be furnished and installed under this section.

D. All conduit, wiring, etc., to accomplish the sequence of operation, shall be provided under this section. All electrical work performed under this section shall comply with the National Electric Code and Underwriters Laboratories where applicable, and shall be installed by licensed journeyman electricians.

E. Furnish to the Mechanical Contractor for installation, control valves, wells for any sensors that are to monitor water temperatures. Provide stainless steel separable wells.

F. Furnish to the Mechanical Contractor for installation, any sensors such as flow sensors, which are to be installed in water lines.

G. Refer to additional requirements in other sections of this specification.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, rough-in drawings and equipment details. Install electrical components and use electrical



products complying with requirements of applicable Division 26 sections of these specifications.

B. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed neatly and professionally, in accordance with requirements of applicable Specification Division 26 sections and all national, state, and local electrical codes. All the wiring shall be installed in accordance with the current National Electrical Code (NEC).

C. All new wiring shall be plenum rated shielded cable.

D. Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by equipment manufacturer's to serve specified control functions.

E. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and disconnect switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes as required.

F. The term "control wiring" is defined to include the providing of wire, conduit, and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric or electronic control devices in pilot circuits of contactors, starters, relays, etc., and wiring for valve and damper operators.

G. Install signal, communication, and fiber-optic cables according to Division 26 Section "Control/ Signal Transmission Media", and as follows:

1. Bundle and harness multi-conductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path.

2. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors.

H. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

I. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.

J. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function.

K. All exposed control wiring and control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, telephone, and similar rooms shall be installed in raceways. All other wiring shall be installed neatly and inconspicuously above ceilings.

L. Install exposed control wiring system in conduit for electric/electronic control systems. Conceal wiring, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. UL plenum-rated cable shall be provided when located in ceiling spaces. All control wiring shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner parallel to building lines with adequate support. Both conduit and plenum wiring shall be supported from or anchored to structural members. Conduit or plenum wiring supported from or anchored to piping, duct supports, the ceiling suspension system, is not acceptable. Wiring buried in slab-on-grade concrete or explosion-proof areas shall be in rigid metal conduit. Provide adequate strain relief for all field terminations.

M. Number-code or color-code conductors, excluding those used for individual zone controls, appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. The Contractor shall label each system device with a point address or other clearly identifiable notation inside the device cover. Labels shall be permanent.



B. All control equipment shall be clearly identified by control shop drawing designation as follows:

1. Control valves and damper actuators: brass tags or engraved phenolic (“Bakelite”) tags.

2. Other Remote Control Devices: Metal tags or laser printed, adhesive backed, metalized polyester film labels.

3. Control Enclosures and Panels: Engraved nameplate with panel number and system served.

C. Duct static-pressure sensors and piping differential-pressure sensors locations shall be:

1. Indicated on the Installation Mark-up Drawings (kept on-site) for transfer of this information onto the As-Builts; and

2. Identified on the BAS Floor Plan online graphic; and

3. Identified in the building using a label on the nearest ceiling grid, or access-panel where concealed.

3.5 CONTROL PANELS, CONTROLLER QUANTITY AND LOCATION

A. Control panels shall consist of one or multiple controllers to meet requirements of this specification. Control panels shall be wall mounted within mechanical equipment rooms. In no case shall panels, other than terminal unit controllers, be located above ceilings.

B. This Contractor shall extend power to the control panels from a dedicated power circuit with a surge protector. Power shall enter the control panel at an internal junction box that includes a standard receptacle and switch for panel power. If the control contractor wishes to further distribute panels to other locations, control contractor is responsible for extending power to that location also. Furthermore, contractor is responsible for ensuring adequate locations for the panels that do not interfere with other requirements of the project and maintain adequate clearance for maintenance access.

C. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide enough controllers (with no controller installed to exceed 90% of capacity) to ensure a completely functioning system, according to the point list and sequence of operations.

D. For rooftop AHUs and ERUs, controllers rated for use outside the building envelope shall be mounted inside the unit casings. If adequate space is not available for installation of the controllers per the manufacturer’s recommendations, they shall be installed in NEMA4X enclosures adjacent to the unit served. For all other controllers serving rooftop equipment coordinate with UVA for control panel location, typically within the building envelope directly below equipment served in an accessible location.

E. Controllers for terminal equipment:

1. For equipment located in the conditioned space, controllers shall be mounted inside the unit enclosure. Where sufficient mounting space is not available inside the unit enclosure, a control panel shall be installed above the drop ceiling, inside the room, as close to the room space sensor as possible.

2. For equipment located above the drop ceiling, controllers shall be unit mounted. Provide adhesive backed ceiling labels, affixed to ceiling grid below all ceiling concealed controllers, affix to ceiling panel access door for solid ceilings. Coordinate acceptable labels with UVA Project Manager and Architect.

F. Control drawings, including system control schematics, sequences of operation and panel termination drawings, shall be provided in panels for major pieces of equipment.



Terminal unit drawings shall be located in the central plant equipment panel or mechanical room panel.

3.6 SURGE PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install any power supply surge protection, filters, etc. as necessary for proper operation and protection of all BCs, AAC/ASCS operator interfaces, routers, gateways and other hardware and interface devices. All equipment shall be capable of handling voltage variations 10% above or below measured nominal value, with no affect on hardware, software, communications, and data storage.

3.7 DEMOLITION AND REUSE OF EXISTING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. For systems which are indicated to receive a new BAS, all existing materials and equipment associated with the existing pneumatic controls and EMCS shall be removed unless otherwise specified or indicated to remain, or unless reused in accordance with the above requirements, except for the following:

1. Conduit and electrical boxes (but not wiring within conduit) may remain in place if not reused (leave a pull line);

2. Inaccessible pneumatic tubing may remain in place if not reused. Tubing must be sealed and permanently labeled as “Abandoned in Place”.

3.8 CONTROL POWER SOURCE AND SUPPLY

A. Contractor shall extend all power source wiring required for operation of all equipment and devices provided under BAS Sections.

B. General requirements for obtaining power include the following:

1. All control panels shall be served by dedicated power circuits. BC control panels serving emergency and/or critical equipment shall additionally be provided with external UPS power supplies to meet the requirements for BC power failure operation. Control panel shall be labeled with electrical panel & circuit source.

2. Where a controller controls multiple systems on varying levels of power reliability (normal, emergency, and/or interruptible), the controller shall be powered by the highest level of reliability served.

3.9 BAS START UP, COMMISSIONING AND TRAINING

A. Contractor shall submit a Training Plan.

B. On-Site Training: Provide services of controls contractor’s qualified technical personnel for one 8-hour day for each controller type installed to instruct University's personnel in operation and maintenance of BAS. Instruction shall be in classroom setting at the project site for appropriate portions of the training. Training may be in non-contiguous days at the request of the University. The University’s representative shall notify contractor 1 week in advance of each day of requested training. Training agenda shall generally be as follows:

1. Basic Operator Workstation (OWS) Training – For all potential users of the OWS:

a. Brief walk-through of building, including identification of all controlled equipment and condensed demonstration of controller portable and built-in operator interface device display capabilities.

b. Brief overview of the various parts of the O&M Manuals, including hardware and software programming and operating publications, catalog data, controls installation drawings, and DDC programming documentation.



c. Demonstration of workstation login/logout procedures, password setup, and exception reporting.

d. Demonstration of workstation menu penetration and broad overview of the various workstation features.

e. Overview of systems installed.

f. Present all site-specific point naming conventions and points lists, open protocol information, configuration databases, back-up sequences, upload/download procedures, and other information as necessary to maintain the integrity of the BAS.

g. Overview of alarm features.

h. Overview of trend features.

i. Overview of workstation reports.

2. BAS Hardware Training – For Maintenance and Control Technicians

a. Review of installed components and how to install/replace, maintain, commission, and diagnose them

3. BAS Technician Training

a. Introduction to controller programming and overview of the programming application interface.

b. General review of sequence of operation and control logic for the project site, including standalone and fail-safe modes of operation.

c. Uploading/Downloading and backing up programs.

d. Network administration.

e. Review of setpoint optimization and fine-tuning concepts.

3.10 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. Sequences of operation are located on the drawings.

B. Where appropriate, control sequences shall comply with UVA’s standard control sequences found at http://www.fm.virginia.edu/fpc/BASControls.htm. If there are any conflicts between the sequences on the drawings and in UVA’s standards, notify the Engineer and UVA immediately.

END OF SECTION 230901



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Hydronic Piping DEI# 50082886 23 21 13 - 1

SECTION 23 21 13

HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for above ground hydronic piping.


A. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Design calculations and detailed fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors and alignment guides, hangers and supports for multiple pipes, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure.

2. Locations of pipe anchors and alignment guides and expansion joints and loops.

3. Locations of and details for penetrations, including sleeves and sleeve seals for exterior walls, floors, basement, and foundation walls.

B. Pipe and fitting manufacturing source list confirming the materials will be products of the United States of America.




A. Installer Qualifications:

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.

D. All piping and fittings shall be products of the United States of America. All other piping and fittings will be removed from the project at the contractor’s expense.

1. This requirement does not apply to piping that is internal to and factory-fabricated and installed in unitary equipment. The requirement does apply to all field-installed piping and skid-mounted assemblies with factory-fabricated and installed piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be pressure tested, leak tested and flushed according to Section 230555 based on the following working pressures:

1. LTHW Heating, Water Closed Loop Systems: 100 psig.

2. Medium Temperature (200 to 250 deg F) Heating Water Piping: 180 psig.

3. Make-Up (Domestic) Water: 80 psig.

B. Medium temperature heating water piping and components shall be capable of withstanding a working pressure of 180 psig at 230 deg F.

2.2. COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.

C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.

D. Wrought-Copper Fittings and Unions: ASME B16.22.

2.3. STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 or A 106, black carbon steel with plain ends; ERW electric resistance welded (Type E) or seamless (Type S), Grade B. Refer to Part 3 for applications.

“Standard Weight” steel piping is not equal to Schedule 40 at 12-inches NPS and larger. Provide piping materials that comply with Part 3 of this section. The following are the minimum pipe thicknesses for each application:

STEEL PIPE WALL THICKNESSES

STD. WEIGHT SCHEDULE 40 SCHEDULE 80

NOMINAL WALL WALL WALL

PIPE SIZE THICKNESS THICKNESS THICKNESS

(INCHES) (INCHES) (INCHES) (INCHES)

3/4 0.113 0.113 0.154

1 0.133 0.133 0.179

1 1/4 0.140 0.140 0.191

1 1/2 0.145 0.145 0.200

2 0.154 0.154 0.218

2 1/2 0.203 0.203 0.276

3 0.216 0.216 0.300

4 0.237 0.237 0.337

6 0.280 0.280 0.432

8 0.322 0.322 0.500

10 0.365 0.365 0.594

12 0.375 0.406 0.688



14 0.375 0.438 0.750

16 0.375 0.500 0.844

18 0.375 0.562 0.938

20 0.375 0.594 1.031

24 0.375 0.688 1.219

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.

E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.

F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

G. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of material group 1.1, butt-welded end connections, and raised facings:

H. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.

2.4. JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. Metallic spiral wound gasket with metallic inner and centering rings, spiral wound design, and PFTE or “Flexcarb Thermiculite” filler. Flexitallic (LSI series) or equal.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, Grade B7, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

E. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures.

2.5. CONNECTIONS OF DISSIMILAR METALS

A. Connections of dissimilar metals shall be made with 6-inch long (between the threads) brass nipples. Dielectric unions, flanges and plated nipples shall not be used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. LTHW Heating Water Piping, Above Ground, 2-inches NPS and smaller:

1. Steel Piping: Schedule 40, Type S, Grade B steel, Class 125 cast-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. LTHW Heating Water Piping, Above Ground, 2 1/2-inches NPS and larger:



1. Steel Piping: Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B steel, Class 150 wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and butt-welded and flanged joints.

C. Medium Temperature (200 to 250 deg F) Heating Water Piping:

1. Steel Piping: ASTM A 106 Schedule 40, Type S, Seamless Grade B steel, Class 300 wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and butt-welded and flanged joints.

D. Make-Up (Domestic) Water Piping, Above Ground:

1. Copper Piping: Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings and soldered joints.

E. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which blowdown drain is installed.

F. Air-Vent Piping: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

G. Safety-Valve Inlet and Outlet Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed.

3.2. PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.





K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, line-size full port-ball valve, and short line-size nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

1. Piping 6-inches NPS and smaller: 3/4-inch

2. Piping 8 to 12-inches NPS: 1-inch

3. Piping 14-inches NPS and larger: 2-inch

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.



N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Section 230523.

Q. Install unions in piping, 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, 2 1/2-inch NPS and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

T. Comply with requirements in Section 230516 for installation of expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides.

U. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 for identifying piping.

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517.

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517.

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230100.

3.3. CONNECTIONS OF DISSIMILAR METALS

A. Connections of dissimilar metals shall be made with 6-inch long (between the threads) brass nipples. Dielectric unions, flanges and plated nipples shall not be used.

3.4. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.

3.5. PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:





F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.6. MEDIUM TEMPERATURE HEATING WATER PIPING INSTALLATION

A. All MTHW piping 2-inches NPS and smaller shall be socket-welded. Al MTHW piping 2 1/2-inches NPS and larger shall be welded.

3.7. TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections. Comply with requirements in Section 230519.


A. Inspect welds in accordance with Section 230100.

B. Flush, leak test and pressure test piping in accordance with Section 230555.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully.

2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.

3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.

4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).

5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.

6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values.

7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Hydronic Piping SpecialtiesDEI# 50082886 23 21 16 - 1

SECTION 23 21 16

HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes special-duty valves and specialties for hydronic piping systems.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Valves: Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.

2. Air-control devices.

3. Hydronic specialties.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide specialty valves, air vents, tanks and strainers by the following, unless otherwise noted:

1. Amtrol

2. Armstrong

3. Bell & Gossett

4. TACO

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=7603&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd



2.2. PRESSURE REDUCING VAVES

A. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves: Bronze or brass body diaphragm-operated pressure reducing valves with PTFE disc, brass seat, EPT diaphragm, EPDM O-ring stem seals, low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer that is removable without system shutdown and non-corrosive valve seat and stem and ASME labeled. Valve size, capacity and operating pressure shall be selected to suit system. Operating pressure and capacity shall be factory-set and field adjustable.

2.3. SAFETY RELIEF VALVES

A. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Relief Valves: Bronze or brass body diaphragm-operated safety relief valves with PTFE disc, brass seat, EPT diaphragm, EPDM O-ring stem seals, brass and rubber internal wetted working parts, inlet strainer that is removable without system shutdown and non-corrosive valve seat and stem and ASME labeled. Valve size, capacity and operating pressure shall be selected to suit system. Operating pressure and capacity shall be factory-set and field adjustable.

2.4. AIR-CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manual Air Vents: Manual air vent with bronze body, non-ferrous internal parts, screwdriver or thumbscrew operator, 1/2-inch NPS inlet connection and 1/8-inch outlet connection and rated for 150 psig CWP (cold working pressure) and up to 225 deg F operating temperature.

B. Automatic Air Vents: Automatic air vent with bronze body, non-ferrous internal parts, non-corrosive metal float operator, 3/4-inch NPS inlet connection and 1/4-inch outlet connection and rated for 150 psig CWP (cold working pressure) and up to 240 deg F operating temperature.

C. Bladder Expansion Tanks: Factory-fabricated welded steel bladder-type expansion tank with taps for pressure gage, air charge fitting and drain fitting. Tanks shall be rated for 125 psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature and labeled according to ASME Boiler and pressure Vessel Code Section VIII, Division 1.

1. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain required expansion capacity.

2. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.

D. Tangential-Type Air Separators: Factory-fabricated welded steel tangential-type air separators with perforated stainless steel air collector tube; threaded inlet and outlet connections for 2-inch NPS and smaller and flanged for 2 1/2-inch and larger; and threaded blowdown connection. Separators shall be rated for 125 psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature and ASME labeled. Separators shall be sized for maximum system flow or larger as scheduled.

2.5. HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers: Y-pattern strainer with cast-iron body, bolted cover and bottom drain connection; threaded end connections for 2-inch NPS and smaller and flanged for 2 1/2-inch and larger; medium-straining mesh stainless steel strainer screen; and rated for 125 psig CWP (cold working pressure).

B. Basket Strainers: Basket strainers with cast-iron body, bolted cover and bottom drain connection; threaded end connections for 2-inch NPS and smaller and flanged for 2 1/2-inch



and larger; fine-straining mesh stainless steel start-up strainer; medium-straining perforated stainless steel basket with 50-percent free area; and rated for 125 psig CWP (cold working pressure).

C. Stainless-Steel Bellow Flexible Connectors: Flexible connector constructed of stainless steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket; capable of 3/4-inch misalignment; threaded end connections for 2-inch NPS and smaller and flanged for 2 1/2-inch and larger; and rated for 150 psig CWP (cold working pressure) and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature.

2.6. ESCUTCHEONS AND FLOOR PLATES

A. Escutcheons:

1. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

2. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

3. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with concealed hinge and setscrew.

B. Floor Plates:

1. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

2. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

B. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.

3.2. HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. Install manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

B. Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with gate or full-port ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain.

C. When indicated, install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure that tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.

3.3. ESCUTCHEONS AND FLOOR PLATES INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.



B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: Install one-piece cast-brass type for new piping installations. Install deep-pattern type where piping sleeve protrudes from the floor or wall.

2. Existing Piping: Install split-casting brass type for existing piping installations.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

E. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Hydronic PumpsDEI# 50082886 23 21 23 - 1

SECTION 23 21 23

HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes HVAC hydronic system pumps.


A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

B. Proposed pump data shall include all potential motor sizes, impeller sizes, total head, flow rates and efficiency curves. Pump curves showing only the proposed selection point data is not acceptable.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. HVAC PUMPS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:

1. Centrifugal Pumps:

a. Armstrong Pumps

b. Bell & Gossett

c. Patterson

d. TACO



B. Motors: Comply with requirements of Section 230513.

1. Shaft Grounding Rings (SGR): Pump motors 20 hp and larger shall have solid or split type shaft grounding rings designed to prevent bearing damage due to adjustable speed drive induced currents. SGR shaft diameter shall match the motor’s standard NEMA “u” dimension.

2.2. SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled, end-suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting, with pump and motor shafts horizontal.

B. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and Class 250 flanged connections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and provide attached piping to allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping or requiring the realignment of pump and motor shaft.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For pumps not frequency-drive controlled, trim impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.

4. Seal: Mechanical seal rated for 250 deg F, consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel spring, and ethylene propylene terpolymer (EPT) or ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) bellows and gasket.

5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fittings.

C. Shaft Coupling: Molded-rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration. Couplings shall be drop-out type to allow disassembly and removal without removing pump shaft or motor. EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications.

D. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel; removable; attached to mounting frame.

E. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and motor.

F. Motor: Single speed, secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.

2.3. PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Suction Diffuser:

1. Angle pattern.

2. 175-psig pressure rating, ductile-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting.

3. Strainer:

a. Closed-Loop Systems: Bronze fine-straining startup screen and stainless-steel medium-straining permanent screen strainers.

4. Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes.

5. Drain plug.



6. Factory-fabricated support.

7. Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.

8. Brass gage ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation.

C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2. PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4 and HI 2.4.

B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

D. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open drain.

E. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases.

F. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of size required to support weight of in-line pumps.

3.3. ALIGNMENT

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service.

B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute (HI) standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame.

C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

D. Use a laser-alignment tool and provide a report documenting the results of the final alignment within acceptable tolerances. Verify the alignments are within the manufacturer’s recommended tolerances or the following maximums, whichever is stricter:

1. Short Couplings:

a. Pumps at 1200 rpm: 3.0 mils (0.0030-inches) offset and 0.6 mils/inch angularity.

b. Pumps at 1800 rpm: 2.5 mils (0.0025-inches) offset and 0.4 mils/inch angularity.



c. Pumps at 3600 rpm: 1.5 mils (0.0015-inches) offset and 0.3 mils/inch angularity.

2. Spacer Couplings:

a. Pumps at 1200 rpm: 1.1 mils/inch angularity.

b. Pumps at 1800 rpm: 0.8 mils/inch angularity.

c. Pumps at 3600 rpm: 0.4 mils/inch angularity.

E. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

3.4. CONNECTIONS

A. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.

B. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

D. Install check, shutoff and throttling valves on discharge side of pumps not equipped with a variable speed drive. Install check and shutoff valves on discharge side of pumps equipped with a variable speed drive.

E. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of base-mounted pumps and Y-type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of in-line pumps.

F. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves.

G. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.

H. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.

I. Ground equipment according to Division 26 specifications.

J. Connect wiring according to Division 26 specifications.

3.5. STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean strainers on suction piping.

4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation.



6. Start motor.

7. Open discharge valve slowly.

3.6. DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Underground Hydronic Piping DEI# 50082886 23 21 33 - 1

SECTION 23 21 33

UNDERGROUND HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for underground hydronic piping.


A. Shop Drawings: For underground hydronic piping. Signed and sealed by a professional engineer.

1. Calculate requirements for expansion compensation for underground piping.

2. Show expansion compensators, offsets, and loops with appropriate materials to allow piping movement in the required locations. Show anchors and guides that restrain piping movement with calculated loads, and show concrete thrust block dimensions.

3. Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show piping in trench, conduit, and cased-pipe with details showing clearances between piping, and show insulation thickness.





A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."


B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.

C. All piping and fittings shall be products of the United States of America. All other piping and fittings will be removed from the project at the contractor’s expense.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be pressure tested, leak tested and flushed according to Section 230555 based on the following operating pressures:

1. Medium Temperature (200 to 250 deg F) Heating Water Piping: 180 psig.

B. Medium temperature heating water piping and components shall be capable of withstanding a working pressure of 180 psig at 250 deg F.

2.2. STEEL PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: A106, black carbon steel with plain ends; seamless (Type S), Grade B. Refer to Part 3 for applications.

“Standard Weight” steel piping is not equal to Schedule 40 at 12-inches NPS and larger. Provide piping materials that comply with Part 3 of this section. The following are the minimum pipe thicknesses for each application:






3/4 0.113 0.113 0.154

1 0.133 0.133 0.179

1 1/4 0.140 0.140 0.191

1 1/2 0.145 0.145 0.200

2 0.154 0.154 0.218

2 1/2 0.203 0.203 0.276

3 0.216 0.216 0.300

4 0.237 0.237 0.337

6 0.280 0.280 0.432

8 0.322 0.322 0.500

10 0.365 0.365 0.594

12 0.375 0.406 0.688

14 0.375 0.438 0.750

16 0.375 0.500 0.844

18 0.375 0.562 0.938

20 0.375 0.594 1.031

24 0.375 0.688 1.219

B. Cast-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Class 250.

C. Malleable-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300.



D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 250.

E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 250, raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.


G. Wrought Cast and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of material group 1.1, butt-welded end connections, and raised facings:

H. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, seamless or welded.

I. Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.

J. Joining Materials:

1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1) ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless otherwise indicated. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3. CASED PIPING SYSTEM


1. Insul-Tek Piping Systems.

2. Perma-Pipe.

3. Thermacor Process.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated piping with carrier pipe, insulation, and casing.

C. Carrier Pipe: ASTM A106 Type S Grade B Carbon Steel Seamless Schedule 40 steel piping and Class 300 fittings.

D. Carrier Pipe Insulation: Polyurethane rigid, cellular foam insulation high-pressure injected between carrier pipe and jacket. Comply with ASTM C 591; thermal conductivity (k-value) shall not exceed 0.14 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F after 180 days of aging. Insulation shall be rated for 366 deg F minimum. Field applied insulation on the MTHW inside the manholes shall be rated for 800 deg F minium.

E. Casing: HDPE with wall thickness of 125 mils for pipe up to 12” and 150 mils for larger pipe.

F. Casing accessories include the following:

1. Joint Kit: Half-shell, pourable or split insulation, casing sleeve, and shrink-wrap sleeve.

2. Expansion Blanket: Elastomeric foam, formed to fit over piping.

3. End Seals: Shrink wrap the casing material to seal watertight around casing and carrier pipe.

4. Manufactures electronic monitoring leak detection system. Leak detection wire shall be provided inside the jacket.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. EARTHWORK

A. Comply Division 31 for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2. PIPING APPLICATION

A. MTHW and LTHW, Direct Buried: Cased ASTM A 106 Schedule 40, Type S, Grade B piping with welded joints and polyurethane insulation 2-inches thick for 4-inches NPS and smaller; and 3-inches thick for 6-inches NPS and larger.

B. MTHW Piping, Inside Manhole: ASTM A 106 Schedule 40, Type S, Grade B carbon steel piping with Class 300 fittings and flanged joints, and mineral fiber insulation and aluminum jacket complying with the requirements of Sections 230719 and 232113 for outdoor hydronic piping and Section 230523 for isolation valves.

3.3. PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Remove standing water in the bottom of trench.

C. Do not backfill piping trench until field quality-control testing has been completed and results approved.

D. Install piping at uniform grade of 0.2 percent. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4-inch NPS ball valve, and short 3/4-inch NPS threaded nipple with cap, at low points and elsewhere as required for system drainage. Install manual air vents at high points.

E. In conduits, install drain valves at low points and manual air vents at high points.

F. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.



I. See Section 230517 for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals through exterior building walls.

J. Secure anchors with concrete thrust blocks.

K. All hot water fittings including valves in the manholes that need maintenance or cannot be properly fitted with calcium silicate or fiberglass insulation shall have a removable thermal blanket attached with straps and double D-rings. Acceptable manufacturers are Shannon Enterprises Inc., Insultech Thermal Blankets, Advanced Thermal Systems, or other approved manufacturer.

3.4. JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.




C. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

D. Flanged Joints (Inside Manhole or Above Grade Only): Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

E. Conduit and Cased Piping Joints: Assemble sections and finish joints with pourable or split insulation and exterior jacket sleeve, and apply shrink-wrap seals.

3.5. IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tapes during back filling of trenches for underground hydronic piping. Locate tapes 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly over piping. Comply with the requirements of division 31 for warning-tape materials and devices and their installation.



B. Flush, leak test and pressure test piping in accordance with Section 230555.

C. Test outer jacket of the pre-insulated pipe to 5 psig for a duration of 2 hours. Repair leaks and retest until piping passes pressure test.

D. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Steam and Condensate Return Piping DEI# 50082886 23 22 13 - 1

SECTION 23 22 13STEAM AND CONDENSATE RETURN PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe and fittings for steam and condensate piping.


A. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Design calculations and detailed fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors and alignment guides, hangers and supports for multiple pipes, expansion joints and loops and attachments of the same to the building structure.

2. Locations of pipe anchors and alignment guides and expansion joints and loops.

3. Locations of and details for penetrations, including sleeves and sleeve seals for exterior walls, floors, basement, and foundation walls.





A. Installer Qualifications:

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to the following:

1. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.1, "Power Piping," and ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.


D. All piping and fittings shall be products of the United States of America. All other piping and fittings will be removed from the project at the contractor’s expense.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Operating Pressures: Steam piping systems shall be defined as follows:

1. High Pressure Steam (HPS): 100 to 175 psig

2. Medium Pressure Steam (MPS): 16 to 99 psig

3. Low Pressure Steam (LPS): 1 to 15 psig

B. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressures and temperatures unless otherwise indicated:

1. High Pressure and Medium Pressure Steam and Condensate Piping: 270 psig at 413 deg F.

2. Low Pressure Steam Piping: 100 psig at 338 deg F.

3. Low Pressure Condensate Piping: 100 psig at 250 deg F

4. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F

5. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Equal to pressure of the piping system to which it is attached.

6. Air-Vent and Vacuum-Breaker Piping: Equal to pressure of the piping system to which it is attached.

7. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to pressure of the piping system to which it is attached.



2.2. STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A106, black carbon steel with plain ends; seamless (Type S), Grade B, meeting the requirements of ASME B36.10. Refer to Part 3 for applications.

1. “Standard Weight” steel piping is not equal to Schedule 40 at 12-inches NPS and larger. Provide piping materials that comply with Part 3 of this section. The following are the minimum pipe thicknesses for each application:






3/4 0.113 0.113 0.154

1 0.133 0.133 0.179

1 1/4 0.140 0.140 0.191

1 1/2 0.145 0.145 0.200

2 0.154 0.154 0.218

2 1/2 0.203 0.203 0.276

3 0.216 0.216 0.300

4 0.237 0.237 0.337

6 0.280 0.280 0.432

8 0.322 0.322 0.500

10 0.365 0.365 0.594

12 0.375 0.406 0.688

14 0.375 0.438 0.750

16 0.375 0.500 0.844

18 0.375 0.562 0.938

20 0.375 0.594 1.031

24 0.375 0.688 1.219

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.

E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.


G. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of material group 1.1, butt-welded end connections, and raised facings:

H. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.

2.3. JOINING MATERIALS



A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

B. Metallic spiral wound gasket with metallic inner and centering rings, spiral wound design,

and PFTE or “Flexcarb Thermiculite” filler. Flexitallic (LSI series) or equal.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, Grade B7, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

E. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being welded.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. LOW PRESSURE STEAM (LPS) PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. LPS Piping, 2-inches NPS and smaller: ASTM A 106 Schedule 40, Type S, Grade B, Carbon Steel Pipe; Class 150 wrought-steel fittings, flanges, and flange fittings; and welded and flanged joints.

B. LPS Piping, 2 1/2-inches to 10-inches NPS: ASTM A 106 Schedule 40, Type S, Grade B, Carbon Steel Pipe; Class 150 wrought-steel fittings, flanges, and flange fittings; and welded and flanged joints.

C. LPS Piping, 12-inches NPS and larger: ASTM A 106 Schedule 40 Type S, Grade B, carbon steel pipe; Class 150 wrought-steel fittings, flanges, and flange fittings; and welded and flanged joints.

3.2. MEDIUM PRESSURE STEAM (MPS) PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. MPS Piping, 2-inches NPS and smaller: Schedule 40 Standard Weight, Type S, Grade B, carbon steel pipe; Class 250 cast-iron fittings; and threaded joints.

B. MPS Piping, 2 1/2-inches to 10-inches NPS: Schedule 40 Standard Weight, Type S, Grade B, carbon steel pipe; Class 300 wrought-steel fittings, flanges, and flange fittings; and welded and flanged joints.

C. MPS Piping, 12-inches NPS and larger: Schedule 40, Type S, Grade B, carbon steel pipe; Class 300 wrought-steel fittings, flanges, and flange fittings; and welded and flanged joints.

3.3. HIGH PRESSURE STEAM (HPS) PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. HPS Piping, 2-inches NPS and smaller: Schedule 40 Standard Weight, Type S, Grade B, carbon steel pipe; Class 250 cast-iron fittings; and threaded joints.

B. HPS Piping, 2 1/2-inches to 10-inches NPS: Schedule 40 Standard Weight, Type S, Grade B, carbon steel pipe; Class 250 wrought-steel fittings, flanges, and flange fittings; and welded joints.

C. HPS Piping, 12-inches NPS and larger: Schedule 40, Type S, Grade B, carbon steel pipe; Class 250 wrought-steel fittings, flanges, and flange fittings; and welded joints.

3.4. LOW PRESSURE CONDENSATE RETURN PIPING APPLICATIONS



A. Condensate Return Piping, above grade, 2-inches NPS and smaller: ASTM A 106 Schedule 80, Type S, Grade B, carbon steel pipe; Class 125 cast-iron fittings; and threaded joints.

B. Condensate Return Piping, 2 1/2-inches and larger: ASTM A 106 Schedule 80, Type E or S, Grade B, carbon steel pipe; Class 150 wrought-steel fittings, flanges, and flange fittings; and welded joints.

3.5. ANCILLARY PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which blowdown drain is installed.

B. Vacuum-Breaker Piping: Outlet, same as service where installed.

C. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed.


A. All steam and condensate piping 2-inches NPS and smaller shall be socket-welded. Al steam and condensate piping 2 1/2-inches NPS and larger shall be welded.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.





K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, line-size full port-ball valve, and short line-size nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

1. Piping 6-inches NPS and smaller: 3/4-inch

2. Piping 8 to 12-inches NPS: 1-inch

3. Piping 14-inches NPS and larger: 2-inch

M. Install steam supply piping at a minimum uniform grade of 0.2 percent downward in direction of steam flow.



N. Install condensate return piping at a minimum uniform grade of 0.4 percent downward in direction of condensate flow.

O. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side down.

P. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to top of main pipe.

Q. Install valves according to Section 230523.

R. Install unions in piping, 2-inches NPS and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install flanges in piping, 2 1/2-inches and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

T. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

U. Install strainers on supply side of control valves, pressure-reducing valves, traps, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 3/4-inch NPT nipple and full port ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers 2-inches NPT and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than 2-inches NPT.

V. Comply with requirements in Section 230516 for installation of expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides.

W. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 for identifying piping.

X. Install drip legs at low points and natural drainage points such as ends of mains, bottoms of risers, and ahead of pressure regulators, and control valves.

1. On straight runs with no natural drainage points, install drip legs at intervals not exceeding 300 feet.

2. Size drip legs same size as main. In steam mains 6-inches NPS and larger, drip leg size can be reduced, but to no less than 4-inches NPS.

Y. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517.

Z. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517.

AA. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230100.

3.7. STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 232216 for installation requirements for strainers, flash tanks, special-duty valves, steam traps, thermostatic air vents and vacuum breakers, and steam and condensate meters.

3.8. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 for installation of hangers and supports. Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing.

3.9. PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION



A. Ream ends of pipes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.


C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:



D. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.


A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install vacuum breakers downstream from control valve, close to coil inlet connection.

E. Install a drip leg at coil outlet.



B. Prepare steam and condensate piping according to ASME B31.1, "Power Piping," and ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

C. Subject HPS and HPC to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 270 psig for a duration of not less than 2 hours. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. . Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength.

D. Subject MPS, MPC, LPS and LPC piping systems to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 200 psig for a duration of not less than 2 hours. Test pressure shall not exceed



maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength.

E. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 2 hours, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

F. The hydrostatic testing of the HPS and MPS shall be witnessed by the UVA Utilities and Energy Department Utilities Distribution Manager or his designee.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Steam and Condensate Return Piping SpecialtiesDEI# 50082886 23 22 16 - 1

SECTION 23 22 16

STEAM AND CONDENSATE RETURN PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following piping specialties for steam and condensate piping, including strainers, flash tanks, safety valves, pressure reducing valves, steam traps and thermostatic air vents and vacuum breakers.


A. Product data


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For valves, safety valves, pressure-reducing valves, steam traps, air vents, vacuum breakers, and meters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to the following:

1. ASME Compliance: Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp flash tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. VALVES

A. Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Section 230523. Valves shall be class-rated equal to or greater than the performance requirements defined for each piping system defined in Section 232213.

B. Stop-Check Valves: Malleable-iron body and bonnet stop-check angle valves with brass alloy stem; cylindrical disc with removable liner and machined seat; PTFE-impregnated packing with two-piece packing gland assembly; outside screw and yoke; and Class 250 rated for 400 deg F saturated steam and 500 psig CWP (cold working pressure). Hand-wheels shall be malleable or ductile-iron. Valves shall comply with MSS SP-85. Valves shall have flanged ends.

2.2. STRAINERS

A. Y-Pattern Strainers: Y-pattern strainer with cast-iron body, bolted cover and bottom drain connection; threaded end connections for 2-inch NPS and smaller and flanged for 2 1/2-inch and larger; 20-mesh stainless steel strainer screen; tapped blow-off plug; and Class 250 rated for 400 deg F saturated steam and 500 psig CWP (cold working pressure).



B. Basket Strainers: Basket strainers with cast-iron body, bolted cover and bottom drain connection; threaded end connections for 2-inch NPS and smaller and flanged for 2 1/2-inch and larger; 20-mesh stainless steel start-up strainer; perforated stainless steel basket with 50-percent free area; and Class 250 rated for 400 deg F saturated steam and 500 psig CWP (cold working pressure).

2.3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIALTIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steam specialties including pressure reducing and safety valves, steam traps, air vents and vacuum breakers, and flash tanks by the following, unless otherwise noted:

1. Armstrong

2. Bell & Gossett / Hoffman Specialty

3. Spence Engineering Co. – Pressure Reducing Valves only

4. Shipco Pumps – Flash Tanks only

5. Spirax-Sarco

6. Watson McDaniel

7. Watts / Illinois – Steam Traps and Air Vents/Vacuum Breakers only

2.4. FLASH TANKS

A. Flash Tanks: Factory-fabricated welded steel steam flash tank with tappings for low-pressure steam and condensate outlets, high-pressure condensate inlet, air vent, safety valve, and legs. Tanks shall be rated for 150 psig working pressure and 400 deg F saturated steam and listed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

2.5. SAFETY VALVES

A. Safety Relief Valves, 2-inches NPS and smaller: Bronze or brass body safety relief valves with forged copper alloy disc; factory set and sealed, fully enclosed steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff; ASME labeled; and Class 250 rated for 400 deg F saturated steam. Drip-pan elbow shall have threaded inlet, outlet and drain. Valve size, capacity and operating pressure shall be selected to suit system. Operating pressure and capacity shall be factory-set and field adjustable. Valves shall have threaded ends.

B. Safety Relief Valves, 2 1/2-inches and larger: Cast-iron body safety relief valves with forged copper alloy disc with bronze nozzle; factory set and sealed, fully enclosed cadmium-plated steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff; ASME labeled; and Class 250 rated for 400 deg F saturated steam. Drip-pan elbow and exhaust head shall have threaded inlet, outlet and drain. Valve size, capacity and operating pressure shall be selected to suit system. Operating pressure and capacity shall be factory-set and field adjustable. Valves shall have flanged ends.

2.6. PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES

A. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Cast-iron body, pilot-actuated, diaphragm-operated pressure reducing valves with hardened stainless steel trim; non-asbestos gaskets; adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff; replaceable main head stem guide fitted with flushing and pressure-arresting device cover over pilot diaphragm; and ASME labeled. Valve size, capacity and pressure rating shall be selected for inlet and outlet pressures indicated. Valves



shall have threaded end connections for 2-inch NPS and smaller and flanged for 2 1/2-inch NPS and larger.

1. Pressure reducing valves shall be selected to develop no more than 85 dbA at 3 feet above the floor and 10 feet in any direction from uninsulated pipe surface. Schedule 80 piping may be used at the valve inlet and outlet to help achieve the noise requirement.

2. Pressure reducing valve inlet and outlet piping maximum velocity shall be:

a. 15,000 FPM for piping 2-inches NPS and smaller.

b. 10,000 FPM for piping 2 1/2 to 8-inches NPS.

c. 8,000 FPM for piping 10-inches NPS and larger.

3. Pressure regulator outlet maximum velocity shall be:

a. 45,000 FPM for piping 2-inches NPS and smaller.

b. 30,000 FPM for piping 2 ½ to 8-inches NPS.

c. 24,000 FPM for piping 10-inches NPS and larger.

4. Pressure regulator capacity shall not exceed 120% of the design maximum capacity.

5. Muffling orifice is required for pressure reducing valve outlet velocities greater than 30,000 FPM.

2.7. STEAM TRAPS

A. Thermodynamic Traps: Thermodynamic type traps with stainless steel body with screw-in cap; stainless steel disc and seat; and rated for 600 psig. Valves shall have threaded ends.

B. Float and Thermostatic Traps: Balanced-pressure type traps with cast-iron body and bolted-cap; replaceable stainless steel float mechanism; stainless steel thermostatic bellows; hardened stainless steel head and seat; and Class 125 rated. Valves shall have threaded ends.

2.8. THERMOSTATIC AIR VENTS AND VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Thermostatic Air Vents: Thermostatic type air vents with cast-iron, bronze or stainless steel body; stainless steel float, valve and seat; thermostatic element with phosphor bronze bellows in a stainless steel cage; and rated for 125 psig pressure and 350 deg F temperature. Vents shall have threaded ends.

B. Vacuum Breakers: Vacuum breakers with cast-iron, bronze or stainless steel body; stainless steel sealing ball, retainer, spring and screen; EPR O-ring seal; and rated for 350 deg F temperature. Vacuum breakers shall be rated for 125 psig in low pressure steam systems and 300 psig in medium and high pressure systems. Vacuum breakers shall have threaded ends.

2.9. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Stainless-Steel Bellow Flexible Connectors: Flexible connector constructed of stainless steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket; capable of 3/4-inch misalignment; threaded end connections for 2-inch NPS and smaller and flanged for 2 1/2-inch and larger; and rated for 150 psig CWP (cold working pressure) and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff duty valves at branch connections to steam supply mains, at steam supply connections to equipment, and at the outlet of steam traps.

B. Install safety valves on pressure-reducing stations and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.


A. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

B. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4-inch NPS full port-ball valve, and short 3/4-inch NPS threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

C. Install valves according to Section 230523.

D. Install unions in piping, 2-inches NPS and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

E. Install flanges in piping, 2 1/2-inches and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

G. Install strainers on supply side of control valves, pressure-reducing valves, traps, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 3/4-inch NPS nipple and full port ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers 2 1/2-inches NPS and larger. Match size of strainer blow-off connection for strainers smaller than 2-inches NPS.

H. Flash Tank:

1. Pitch condensate piping down toward flash tank.

2. If more than one condensate pipe discharges into flash tank, install a check valve in each line.

3. Install thermostatic air vent at tank top.

4. Install safety valve at tank top.

5. Install full-port ball valve, and swing check valve on condensate outlet.

6. Install inverted bucket or float and thermostatic trap at low-pressure condensate outlet, sized for three times the calculated heat load.

7. Install pressure gage on low-pressure steam outlet.

3.3. STEAM-TRAP INSTALLATION

A. Install steam traps in accessible locations as close as possible to connected equipment.

B. Install full-port ball valve, strainer, and union upstream from trap; install union, check valve, and full-port ball valve downstream from trap unless otherwise indicated.



3.4. PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install pressure-reducing valves in accessible location for maintenance and inspection with no less than 36-inches clearance in front and 6-inches behind the station.

B. Install bypass piping around pressure-reducing valves, with globe valve equal in size to area of pressure-reducing valve seat ring, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install gate valves on both sides of pressure-reducing valves.

D. Install unions or flanges on both sides of pressure-reducing valves having threaded- or flanged-end connections, respectively. Inlet piping shall have an eccentric reducer and outlet piping a concentric reducer at the connection points.

E. Install pressure gages on low-pressure side of pressure-reducing valves after the bypass connection in accordance with Section 230519.

F. Install strainers upstream for pressure-reducing valve.

G. Install safety valve downstream from pressure-reducing valve station.

H. Install steam trap assemblies with an isolation valve and drain valves at the bottom of the inlet and outlet pipe risers.

I. Install pressure reducing stations in accordance with the valve manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide a minimum length of 10 pipe diameters between the inlet riser tee to the inlet of the pressure reducing valve and a minimum length of 10 pipe diameters between the concentric reducer on the outlet to the pressure sensing line tap.

3.5. SAFETY VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install safety valves according to ASME B31.1, "Power Piping"; and ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

B. Pipe safety-valve discharge without valves to atmosphere outside the building.

C. Install drip-pan elbow fitting adjacent to safety valve and pipe drain connection to nearest floor drain.

D. Install exhaust head with drain to waste, on vents equal to or larger than 2 1/2-inch NPS.


A. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

B. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.

C. Install vacuum breakers downstream from control valve, close to coil inlet connection.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Heat Exchangers for HVAC DEI# 50082886 23 57 00 - 1

SECTION 23 57 00

HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SUMMARY

A. Section includes shell-and-tube and plate heat exchangers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:

1. Armstrong

2. Bell & Gossett

3. TACO

2.2. SHELL-AND-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Description: Packaged assembly of tank, heat-exchanger coils, and specialties.

B. Construction: Factory-fabricated with cast-iron flanged head bolted to steel shell; seamless copper tubes of diameter determined by manufacturer to meet service requirements; Cupro-nickel tubesheets and baffles; and piping connections. Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.

1. Piping Connections 2-inches NPS and smaller shall have threaded ends.

2. Piping Connections 2 1/2-inches and larger shall have flanged ends.

C. Configuration: U-tube with removable bundle, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

D. Support Saddles: Fabricated of materials similar to the shell. Foot mount shall have provisions for anchoring support.



2.3. ACCESSORIES

A. Hangers and Supports:

1. Steel supports and cradles for mounting on floor-mounted structural steel support stand, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

2. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 for hangers and supports.

B. Miscellaneous Components for High-Temperature Hot-Water Unit: Control valve, valves, and piping.

C. Miscellaneous Components for Steam Unit: Strainers, steam-control valve, steam trap, valves, pressure gage, thermometer, and piping.

D. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped, steel pressure relief valves with setting at 75 psig for Class 150 piping systems, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

2.4. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect heat exchangers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. Affix ASME label.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for structural rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat exchangers.

B. Examine roughing-in for heat-exchanger piping to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.


3.2. SHELL-AND-TUBE HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Install heat exchangers on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases.

B. Install heat exchangers on saddle supports.

C. Heat-Exchanger Supports: Use factory-fabricated steel cradles and supports specifically designed for each heat exchanger.

3.3. CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Section 232113 and 232116. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Comply with requirements for steam and condensate piping specified in Section 232213 and 232216. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for tube removal, service, and maintenance.

D. Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow space for service and maintenance of heat exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of heat exchangers.



E. Install shutoff valves at heat-exchanger inlet and outlet connections.

F. Install relief valves on heat-exchanger heated-fluid connection and install pipe relief valves, full size of valve connection, to floor drain.

G. Install vacuum breaker at heat-exchanger steam inlet connection.

H. Install hose end valve to drain shell.

I. Install thermometer on heat-exchanger and inlet and outlet piping, and install thermometer on heating-fluid inlet and outlet piping. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 230519.

J. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger and heating-fluid piping. Comply with requirements for pressure gages specified in Section 230519.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.5. CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

3.6. DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers.



Division 26: Electrical

www.dewberry.com



IRC Plant Connections Hot Water Package January 19, 2017 UVA WO: 2513122 PIMS: P04405

Dewberry Engineers Inc. Basic Electrical Requirements DEI# 50082886 26 01 00-1

SECTION 26 01 00

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 26.

B. All sections of Division 26 are interrelated. Where materials are required to complete work associated with equipment in a specific section, but the materials are not specified within that specific section, the requirements for those materials shall be as specified elsewhere in Division 26.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for electrical installations. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand the requirements specified in Division 01: 1. Submittals. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Record documents. 4. Maintenance manuals. 5. Rough-ins. 6. Electrical installations. 7. Cutting and patching. 8. Inspections

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," for materials and methods

common to the remainder of Division 26.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures".

B. Specific Requirements to Electrical Product Data and Shop Drawing Submittals: 1. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to scale where applicable. Do not reproduce

Contract Documents or use Contract Document images in the preparation of submittals. 2. Any deviations from Contract Documents shall be clearly noted and highlighted, encircled,

or otherwise visually identified. 3. Product Data and Shop Drawings are separate items and shall be submitted with separate

submittal numbers. Where both Product Data and Shop Drawings are required by the same specification section (i.e. Fire alarm) both items shall be submitted for review at the same time. Product Data and Shop Drawings will be reviewed separately by Engineer, but Engineer reserves the right to withhold review until both items have been received.

4. Submittal Documents Quality: Facsimile documents are prohibited. Submittals containing sheets copied from facsimile documents will be automatically Rejected and returned to




Contractor without review. Also submittals containing poor quality copies will be automatically Rejected and returned to Contractor without review.

5. Submittal Document Binding: Use report covers with 3-hole, dual-prong tang fasteners or slide fasteners. Velo- and comb bound documents are also acceptable. Use of 3-ring binders is prohibited and will be automatically Rejected and returned to Contractor without review.

C. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these Specifications.

D. Substitution of Equivalent Products: Where individual sections require submittal for substitution of manufacturers and products equivalent to those listed under Manufacturers paragraph, submittals shall be in accordance with that section. Engineer has final authority on equivalence and acceptance. 1. Submittal of Substitution Request Forms are permitted by Prime Bidders only. Substitution

Request Forms submitted by a vendor, distributor, or sub-contractor will not be accepted or reviewed.

1.4 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, indicate installed conditions for: 1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of control

devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements.

2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials

installed.

1.5 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Product data for all equipment installed during construction. Product data shall be

manufacturer literature, cut-sheets, and/or catalogs and shall clearly depict manufacturer and model number along with standard features and optional features where applicable.

2. Where available for installed equipment, Contractor shall include manufacturer’s published Installation and/or Owner’s manuals.

3. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

4. Programming report/summary for all systems with conditional logic programming (i.e. fire alarm, lighting control system, and PLCs)

5. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

6. Warranty Information: Copies of documentation for all additional and secondary warranties shall be included.





A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 26 for rough-in requirements.

3.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building

components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of

construction, to allow for electrical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for

efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

7. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.

9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

10. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required

to be installed at a specified slope.




B. Basis of Design: Where specific systems and products are shown or specified with a Basis of Design, the supporting work and appurtenances are shown and specified uniquely for the Basis of Design. Where systems and products other than the Basis of Design are installed, Contractor shall adjust circuiting, raceway infrastructure, cable type, wire size, supporting means, backbox type, and any other appurtenance as required for a complete, fully functional and operational system or product.

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to:

a. Remove and replace defective Work. b. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents. c. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide

for Engineer observation of concealed Work. 2. Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components, and

materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of electrical items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the new Work.

3. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.

4. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

5. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.

3.4 INSPECTIONS

A. Authority Having Jurisdiction: Notify and schedule all inspections, with a minimum of 10 days notice in writing prior, to the Authority Having Jurisdiction.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Basic Electrical Materials and Methods DEI# 50082886 26 05 00-1

SECTION 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrical Equipment Installation. 2. Sleeves and sleeve seals for raceway and cable. 3. Firestopping. 4. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 5. Touchup painting.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.

1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed.

B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in rooms.

C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.

1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components.

2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services.

D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.2 TOUCHUP PAINT

A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.

B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Provide any additional supporting means not provided by manufacturer to install equipment.

D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.



D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Sleeves for power raceway and cables: Steel, cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Sleeves for telecommunication cables: Rigid galvanized steel conduit, extend sleeves 2” on each side of wall. Provide plastic bushing on each end.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.



3.6 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Refinish and touch up paint.

1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location.

2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats.

3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Conductors and Cables DEI# 50082886 26 05 19-1

SECTION 26 05 19

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports: Submit all cable tests reports to Engineer ten days prior to Final Inspection.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Southwire Company.

B. Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN and XHHW.




2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 2. Ideal Industries, Inc. 3. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 4. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: UL listed, factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. Splices in solid conductors shall be made using Ideal Wirenuts, 3M Scotchlocks, or T&B Marrette pressure type wire connectors. Permanent crimp connectors are not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

C. Minimum Size: No. 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN or XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN or XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

C. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN or XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN or XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

E. Fire Alarm Circuits: See Section “Fire Alarm”, in raceway.

F. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN or XHHW, in raceway.

G. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN or XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.




B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Voltage Drop: Conductor size shall be increased to account for voltage drop as follows: 1. Where the conductor length from the panel to the first outlet on a 120V circuit exceeds 50

feet, the branch circuit conductors from the panel to the first outlet shall not be smaller than #10 AWG. Increase an additional wire size for every additional 50’ to first outlet.

F. Dedicated Neutrals: Provide dedicated neutral for all single-pole branch circuits, unless otherwise noted on plans.

G. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

H. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. No feeders shall be spliced. No splicing shall be made except within outlet or junction boxes, troughs, or gutters.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Splices shall be made using with pre-insulated spring/coil connectors (wire nuts), insulated barrel mechanical lugs, or box mounted insulated terminal strips.

2. Push-in type, permanent crimp-on type, and split-bolt type are prohibited. 3. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Technician

1. The testing technicians shall be trained in all the methods of correctly and safely conducting the required test. The technician shall have regular experience conducting the required tests and they must have the knowledge to determine the serviceability of a specific piece of equipment.

C. Tests and Inspections: After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test conductors for compliance with following requirements.




1. Physical Inspection and Testing

a. Verify cable ratings and data correspond to drawings and specifications. b. Verify electrical connections are made to provide the electrical system described in

the drawings and specifications. c. Confirm bolted electrical connections are low impedance using one of the following

means:

1) Measure the resistance with a low-resistance ohmmeter. Bolted electrical connection resistances shall be compared to resistances measured on similar connections. Any similar resistance values that deviate more than 50 percent should be investigated.

2) Inspect the bolted connection and verify that it is at the manufacturer’s rated torque using a calibrated torque wrench.

d. Inspect cable connectors to verify they are correctly installed. e. Verify all cables are identified and arranged according to the drawings and

specifications. f. Verify that all cable jackets and insulation are in good condition and did not sustain

damage during installation.

2. Electrical Inspection and Testing

a. For feeder current-carrying phase conductors and neutrals: test the insulation resistance with respect to ground for one minute. Cables rated for 300 volts shall be tested with 500 volts DC and cables rated for 600 volts shall be tested with 1000 volts DC. All insulation resistance data gathered shall comply with manufacturer’s documentation; if documentation does not exist, comply with the values found in Table 100.1 in the ANSI/NETA ATS-2009.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Grounding and Bonding DEI# 50082886 26 05 26-1

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Cable: stranded conductor sized per NEC 250 requirements. 4. Bonding Conductor: stranded conductor sized per NEC 250 requirements. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; sized

per NEC 250 requirements.




2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. The raceway shall not be relied on for ground continuity.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Provide exothermic-welded connection to building structural steel.

C. Grounding Bushings and Jumpers: Boxes provided with concentric, eccentric or over-sized knockouts shall be provided with bonding bushings and jumpers lugged to box.




D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter and Backflow Preventer Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters and backflow preventers where located inside the building. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

E. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.



C. Physical Inspection and Testing

1. Inspect grounding system to verify that it complies with the requirements in the drawings and specifications, as well as, NFPA 70 National Electric Code Article 250.

2. Inspect the physical and mechanical condition and verify that it complies with manufacturer’s standards. All portions of the grounding system shall be free of corrosion.

3. Confirm bolted electrical connections are provided with high impedance using one of the following means:

a. Measure the resistance with a low-resistance ohmmeter. Bolted electrical connection resistances shall be compared to resistances measured on similar connections. Any similar resistance values that deviate more than 50 percent should be investigated.

b. Inspect the bolted connection and verify that it is at the manufacturer’s rated torque using a calibrated torque wrench.

4. Verify that adequate anchorage is in place for the grounding system.

D. Electrical Inspection and Testing

1. Conduct tests for fall of potential as defined by ANSI/IEEE 81 on the grounding system. 2. Determine the resistance to ground throughout grounding system including equipment

frames, systems neutral, and equipment grounding bars. Measure ground resistance not




less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform ground resistance in all of, but not limited to, the areas listed below:

a. Main electrical distribution ground bar: 15 ohms

E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

1. Retest required to show compliance with above value.

F. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

G. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:






Dewberry Engineers Inc. Hangers and Supports DEI# 50082886 26 05 29-1

SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For anchors, supports, and slotted channel/strut systems.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COATINGS

A. Coating: Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic.




2.2 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, two-hole conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps as described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

B. Fasteners: Types, materials, and construction features as follows:

1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type. 4. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory-fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for sealing around conduit, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.

D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

E. U-Channel Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly; 16-gage steel channels, with 9/16-inch-diameter holes, at a minimum of 8 inches on center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of the same manufacture.

2.3 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. General: Shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U-channel components.

B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC requirements.

B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation.

C. Raceway Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements:




1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports. 2. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by

a safety factor of at least four. Where this determination results in a safety allowance of less than 200 lbs, provide additional strength until there is a minimum of 200 lbs safety allowance in the strength of each support.

3. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

4. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers. 5. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners

may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use 1/4-inch-diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing. Spring steel fasteners are not permitted for use where exposed.

6. Support raceways installed on interior of exterior building walls a minimum of ¼ inch from wall surface using “clamp-back” struts.

7. Space supports for raceways in accordance with Table I of this section. Space supports for raceway types not covered by the above in accordance with NEC.

8. Support exposed and concealed raceway within 1 foot of an unsupported box and access fittings. In horizontal runs, support at the box and access fittings may be omitted where box or access fittings are independently supported and raceway terminals are not made with chase nipples or threadless box connectors.

9. In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals. Spring steel fasteners are not permitted for use in vertical runs. Support individual vertical runs using two-hole straps. Support parallel runs of vertical raceway together on channel using bolted clamps.

D. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, and other devices.

E. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be supported separately except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved type of fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.

F. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, boxes, disconnect switches, and control components in accordance with the following:

1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel. Threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of expansion bolts and machine or wood screws. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws.




2. Holes cut to depth of more than 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used.

3. Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test load. Use vibration- and shock- resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs.




3.2 TABLE I: SPACING FOR RACEWAY SUPPORTS

HORIZONTAL RUNS Raceway No. of RMC & Size Conductors IMC EMT OFR (Inches) in Run Location (1) (1) (1) 3/4 1 or 2 Flat ceiling or wall. 5 5 5 3/4 1 or 2 Where it is difficult 7 7 5

to provide supports except at intervals fixed by the building construction.

3/4 3 or more Any location. 7 7 ... 3/4-1 3 or more Any location. 1 & larger 1 or 2 Flat ceiling or wall. 6 6 ... 1 & larger 1 or 2 Where it is difficult to 10 10 5

provide supports except at intervals fixed by the building construction.

1 & larger 3 or more Any location. 10 10 ... Any .... Concealed. 10 10 ... VERTICAL RUNS

No. of RMC & Raceway Size Conductors IMC EMT OFR (Inches) in Run Location (1,2) (1) (1) 3/4 .... Exposed. 7 7 ... 1,1-1/4 .... Exposed. 8 8 ... 1-1/2 and larger .... Exposed. 10 10 ... Up to 2 .... Shaftway. 14 10 ... 2-1/2 .... Shaftway. 16 10 ... 3 & larger .... Shaftway. 20 10 ... Any .... Concealed. 10 10 5 NOTES: (1) Support spacing listed in feet. Maximum spacing of supports 10 feet. (2) Maximum spacings for IMC above apply to straight runs only.

Otherwise the maximums for EMT apply. Abbreviations: EMT Electrical metallic tubing.

IMC Intermediate metallic conduit. RMC Rigid metallic conduit.





Dewberry Engineers Inc. Raceways and Boxes DEI# 50082886 26 05 33-1

SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes interior raceways, fittings, boxes, and enclosures for electrical wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

E. RSC: Rigid steel conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For raceways, wireways and fittings, and hinged-cover enclosures.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.




2. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 3. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

D. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Plated-steel hexagonal compression type. Cast, pot metal, set-screw,

or crimp type fittings are not acceptable. a. Couplings shall be “concrete tight” where concealed in masonry. b. Box connectors shall be insulated throat type.

G. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. 4. Austin Electrical Enclosures

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Hoffman. 4. RACO; a Hubbell Company.




5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit.

a. Exposed conduit routed vertically and horizontally below 8’ above finished floor in mechanical, electrical, and telecom rooms is considered subject to physical damage.

b. Exposed conduit routed vertically up through floor slabs shall be considered subject to physical damage until it reaches 8’ above finished floor or enters a box, cabinet, or enclosure.

c. Exposed conduit routed down vertically from above 8’ which enters boxes, cabinets, or enclosures mounted 48” to top above finished floor or higher is not considered exposed and subject to physical damage and EMT may be used.

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel

in damp or wet locations. 7. Raceway Color Coding: Apply color coding to concealed raceway and exposed raceway

in non-finished areas. a. Fire Alarm Raceway: EMT raceway containing fire alarm wiring shall have a factory

applied red color finish. b. HVAC Controls Raceway: EMT raceway containing HVAC controls wiring shall have

a factory applied yellow finish. c. Rigid steel conduit used for the above systems shall be field painted to match

corresponding EMT Finish.

B. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless

otherwise indicated.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Minimum Raceway Size:




1. Interior: 3/4-inch trade size.

C. Conceal conduit and EMT, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.

D. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

E. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate headroom.

F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

G. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Supporting Devices."

H. Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.

I. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab.

J. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Use raceway fittings compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. For intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

L. Run concealed raceways, with a minimum of bends, in the shortest practical distance considering the type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.

M. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Raceway shall not be installed embedded within floor and roof slabs. 1. Roofing slab: Raceway shall not be embedded in roofing slabs.

N. Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members, and follow the surface contours as much as practical. 1. Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common supports where practical. 2. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel. Use

factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.

O. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. 1. Make raceway terminations tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject

to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight. 2. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

P. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations are not secure with 1 locknut, use 2 locknuts: 1 inside and 1 outside the box. 1. Where concentric, eccentric, or over-sized knock outs are encountered, a grounding-type

insulated bushing shall be provided.

Q. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so the coupling is square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed.




R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of the pull wire.

S. Install raceway sealing fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as the boundaries of refrigerated

spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

T. Stub-up Connections: Where underground raceways are required to turn up into equipment, cabinets, etc., the elbow and stub-up shall be rigid steel. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with the finished floor. Extend to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded flush plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.

U. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 6 feet (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use liquidtight flexible conduit in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

V. Install hinged-cover enclosures plumb. Support at each corner.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.





Dewberry Engineers Inc. Identification for Electrical Systems DEI# 50082886 26 05 53-1

SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes electrical identification materials and devices required to comply with ANSI C2, NFPA 70, OSHA standards, and authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of all electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. Schedule shall depict preliminary printouts of proposed equipment labels for review prior to order.


A. Comply with ANSI C2.


C. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and NFPA 70 for color-coding.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS

A. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide (0.08 mm thick by 25 to 51 mm wide).

B. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters.




C. Plasticized Card-Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field-printed legends. Orange background, unless otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener.

2.2 NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS

A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.

B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates and Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes. 1. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

C. Baked-Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.

D. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32, stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb (22.3 kg) minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: According to color-coding.

B. Paint: Formulated for the type of surface and intended use. 1. Primer for Galvanized Metal: Single-component acrylic vehicle formulated for galvanized

surfaces. 2. Primer for Concrete Masonry Units: Heavy-duty-resin block filler. 3. Primer for Concrete: Clear, alkali-resistant, binder-type sealer. 4. Enamel: Silicone-alkyd or alkyd urethane as recommended by primer manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Identification Materials and Devices: Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations with corresponding designations in the Contract Documents or with those required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. 1. General 120/208V Equipment: Black label with white core. 2. Fire Alarm Equipment: Red label with white core.

C. Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completing finish work.




D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.

E. Install painted identification according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting. 2. Prime surfaces using type of primer specified for surface. 3. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of enamel.

F. Color Banding Raceways and Exposed Cables: Band exposed and accessible raceways of the systems listed below. Banding of colored conduit is not required. 1. Bands: Pretensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves; colored adhesive tape; or a

combination of both. Make each color band 2 inches (51 mm) wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. Also provide color banding at outlet box stub-ups.

3. Apply the following colors to the systems listed below: a. Fire Alarm System: Red.

4. Color code cover of raceway junction boxes following the colors listed above. 5. Spare raceway for future use shall be identified as such and shall indicate where raceway

originates and terminates on each end.

G. Caution Labels for Indoor Boxes and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Install pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive labels identifying system voltage with black letters on orange background. Install on exterior of door or cover.

H. Circuit Identification Labels on Outlet Boxes, Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes: Install labels externally. 1. Outlet boxes (receptacles and switches) and exposed junction boxes: Pressure-sensitive,

self-adhesive plastic label on faceplate. Use clear label with black letters. 2. Concealed junction and pull boxes: Neat handwritten label using permanent black marker. 3. Labeling Legend: Permanent, waterproof listing of panel and circuit number or equivalent. 4. Future Use Circuits: Circuits for future use shall be identified as such and list panel and

circuit number of source.

I. Secondary Service, Feeder, and Branch-Circuit Conductors: Color-code throughout the secondary electrical system. 1. Color-code 208/120-V system as follows:

a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White. e. Ground: Green.

2. Factory apply color the entire length of all conductors, except the following field-applied, color-coding methods may be used instead for service conductors: a. Colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 6

inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide tape in colors specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable identification markings.

b. Colored cable ties applied in groups of three ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches (76 mm) from the terminal and spaced 3 inches (76 mm) apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten to a snug fit, and cut off excess length.




J. Apply identification to conductors as follows: 1. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers. 2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with

source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color-coding to identify circuits' voltage and phase.

3. Multiple Control and Communication Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use a consistent system of tags, color-coding, or cable marking tape.

K. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows: 1. Warnings, Cautions, and Instructions: Install to ensure safe operation and maintenance of

electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.

L. Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved plastic laminate. Install on each unit of equipment, including central or master unit of each system. Locate label on exterior of any enclosure. This includes power, lighting, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory identification. Unless otherwise indicated, provide three lines of text with 1/4-inch high lettering on 1-1/2-inch high label; where four lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. Use surface and core colors as listed in Part 2 above. Provide labels for all electrical equipment listed below. In general, all labels shall include riser diagram ID, amperage, voltage, number of phases/poles, and equipment served from (source). Provide additional information as listed below: 1. Panelboards: MCB/MLO. 2. Disconnect switches: equipment served by.

a. Provide label for all disconnects provide by Division 23, 24 or 26. 3. Enclosed circuit breakers: equipment served by.

a. Provide label for all disconnects provide by Division 23, 24 or 26. 4. Fire Alarm Control Panel and auxiliary power supplies and enclosures.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Wiring Devices DEI# 50082886 26 27 26-1

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes receptacles, connectors, floor boxes, switches, wall-box dimmers, and finish plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Wiring Devices:

a. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div. b. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. General Purpose Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade, rated 20A minimum. Comply with UL498. 1. NEMA 5-20R (standard #WD1.101968). 2. Arranged for back and side wiring. 3. Grounding type. Separate single or double grounding terminals with screw lugs and a

direct, green insulated conductor connector to system ground. Screw shall be green and hex-headed. Self-grounding type are not acceptable.

4. Weather-resistant receptacles shall be marked with WR on face. 5. Listed by an approved third party agency.

B. GFCI Receptacles: Non feed-through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an adapter. Comply with UL 498 and UL 943, Class A.

2.3 SWITCHES

A. Equipment Disconnect Snap Switches: Heavy-duty, quiet type. Comply with NEMA WD1 and UL 20. 1. 30A, 120/277v, AC only. 2. Grounding type, with green hex-head grounding screw. 3. Quiet type operating mechanism; shall not utilize mercury switches. 4. Listed by an approved third party agency.

2.4 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 3. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in "wet locations."

2.5 FINISHES

A. Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White, unless otherwise indicated or

required by NFPA 70 or device listing.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish

materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on

devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs

that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)

in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted

receptacles to the right.

F. Damp and Wet Locations:




1. Provide weather-resistant receptacles with weatherproof cover in damp and wet locations. 2. Provide additional weather-resistant receptacles with weatherproof cover as indicated on

the plans.

G. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

a. Provide 2% quantity of spare cover plates of each type to Owner.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device at least six times.

B. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Replace damaged or defective components.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates or devices.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Fuses DEI# 50082886 26 28 13-1

SECTION 26 28 13

FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches and controllers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than

six of each size and type.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Class RK1, UL listed, current limiting, 200kA interrupting rating.

B. Motor and Motor Controller Branch Circuits: Class RK5, UL listed, current limiting time delay, 200 kA interrupting rating.

C. Other Individual Equipment Branch Circuits: Class RK5, UL listed, non-time delay, 50 kA interrupting rating.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Fuses shall be selected as to provide a fully selective system.

B. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.




3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.





Dewberry Engineers Inc. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers DEI# 50082886 26 28 16-1

SECTION 26 28 16

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers used for the following: 1. Feeder and branch-circuit protection. 2. Motor and equipment disconnecting means.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Field quality-control reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:




1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Fusible Switches:

a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D Co.

2. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D Co.

2.2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

A. All Switches: 1. Heavy Duty type with nonteasible, positive, quick make-quick break mechanisms. 2. Handles whose positions are easily recognizable and are padlockable in either the “on” or

“off” positions. 3. Defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the operating handle

is in the “on” position.

B. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle.




C. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with two padlocks. 1. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

B. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 1. Breakers Serving Transfer Switches: Type and Frame size as required to meet “Specific

Coordinated Molded Case Breaker” as required by automatic transfer switch for a minimum 42,000 A withstand rating.

2. Breakers Serving Elevator Controllers: Field adjustable instantaneous-trip setting for circuit-breaker.

C. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.

D. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.




B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Tests and Inspections:



C. Physical Inspection and Testing

1. Verify equipment rating correspond to drawings and specifications. 2. Inspect the physical and mechanical condition and verify that it complies with

manufacturer’s standards. 3. Verify equipment is properly secured and aligned as specified in the drawings and

specifications. 4. Verify the equipment is clean. 5. Open and close circuit breaker to verify smooth and proper operation. 6. Confirm bolted electrical connections are low impedance using one of the following means:

a. Measure the resistance with a low-resistance ohmmeter. Bolted electrical connection resistances shall be compared to resistances measured on similar connections. Any similar resistance values that deviate more than 50 percent should be investigated.

b. Inspect the bolted connection and verify that it is at the manufacturer’s rated torque using a calibrated torque wrench. If manufacturer’s data is not available verify the torque meets the requirements of Table 100.12 in the ANSI/NETA ATS-2009.

D. Electrical Inspection and Testing

1. Test the insulation resistance on each pole. The resistance should be measured from phase to phase and phase to ground while the breaker is engaged. When the switch is not engaged the insulation resistance should be measured across each pole. For testing purposes apply a voltage as recommended by the manufacturer. If no recommendations are available from the manufacturer refer to Table 100.1 in the ANSI/NETA ATS-2009.

E. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.




F. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.

H. Retain paragraph below if tests and inspections are performed by Contractor or manufacturer's field-service representative engaged by Contractor.

I. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:





Division 31: Earthwork

www.dewberry.com



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Site Preparation: Clearing and Grubbing DEI# 50082886 31 10 00 - 1

SECTION 31 10 00 SITE PREPARATION: CLEARING AND GRUBBING


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplemental

General Conditions, and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. The purpose of this Section is to specify the methods and requirements for site preparation, clearing

and grubbing. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. Virginia "Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook", latest edition.


A. Deliver materials to, store at the site, and handle in a manner which will maintain the materials in

their original manufactured or fabricated condition until ready for use. 1.5 SCHEDULE

A. Contractor may only conduct mass tree removal, limb removal, and clearing operations between

September 16th and April 14th. If the contractor would like to conduct these operations outside of this time frame, the contractor shall have a competent and knowledgeable professional conduct a field survey to ensure no Northern Long-Eared Bat Roosts are in the vicinity. Any roosts found may not be disturbed throughout the duration of the project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TRAFFIC

A. Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks,

businesses, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without prior permission from Owner, V.D.O.T., and/or authorities having jurisdiction.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. General: Provide temporary fences, barricades, coverings, or other protection to preserve

existing items indicated to remain and to prevent injury or damage to persons or property. Provide protection for adjacent properties as required.

B. Restoration/Repair: Restore damaged items to condition existing prior to start of WORK.



C. Existing Trees/Vegetation: Protect existing trees and vegetation adjacent to the actual WORK area or borrow area from physical damage. Do not store equipment or materials within tree drip line.

D. Roads and Walks: Keep roads and walks free of dirt and debris at all times.

E. Utility Lines: Protect existing utility lines that are indicated to remain from damage. Notify

ENGINEER immediately of damage to or an encounter with any unknown existing utility lines. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the repairs of damage to existing utility lines that are indicated or made known to CONTRACTOR prior to start of clearing and grubbing operations. When utility lines which are to be removed are encountered within the area of operations, CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER and OWNER and Utility Owner within 7 days time to minimize interruption of the service.

3.3 EROSION/SEDIMENT CONTROL

A. Provide appropriate erosion and sediment control measures for all off-site borrow areas in full

compliance with the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and regulations of the local jurisdiction. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for all borrow sites outside of the Project area.

3.4 CLEARING

A. Clearing shall consist of the felling, trimming, and cutting of trees into sections and the

satisfactory disposal of the trees and other vegetation designated for removal, including downed timber, snags, brush, and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared. Cut off flush with or below the original ground surface trees, stumps, roots, brush, and other vegetation in areas to be cleared, except for trees and vegetation indicated or directed to be left standing. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate all clearing with OWNER prior to proceeding.

3.5 TREE REMOVAL

A. Where indicated or directed by OWNER, trim designated trees or remove designated trees and

stumps and grub roots. 3.6 GRUBBING

A. Remove and dispose of roots larger than 3 inches in diameter, matted roots, and stumps from

the indicated grubbing areas. Excavate this material together with logs, organic and metallic debris, brush, and refuse and remove to a depth of not less than 18 inches below the original soil surface in areas indicated to be grubbed and in areas indicated as construction areas for this Project. Fill depressions made by grubbing with suitable material and compact in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents to make the new surface conform with the existing adjacent surface of the ground.

3.7 DISPOSAL OF CLEARED AND GRUBBED MATERIALS

A. Nonsalable Materials: Disposal shall be CONTRACTOR's responsibility.

3.8 STORING MATERIALS

A. Strip and stockpile topsoiling material and other cleared materials that will be reused in the

WORK.



3.9 EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS/FACILITIES

A. Remove existing improvements, both above-grade and below-grade to extent indicated or as otherwise required to permit new construction and provide for proper disposal off-site. Existing improvements and facilities such as mailboxes, signs, ornamental or decorative items, etc. that require temporary removal to permit new construction shall be promptly replaced and/or restored to the location and condition prior to construction. Improvements and facilities that are damaged by the CONTRACTOR during the course of construction shall be promptly replaced at the CONTRACTOR's expense.

3.10 SALVABLE ITEMS

A. No salvable items are anticipated for this project.

3.11 FUGITIVE DUST

A. Control air pollution caused by dust and dirt; comply with governing regulations.

3.12 FILLING

A. Fill depressions and voids resulting from site clearing operations. Comply with the requirements

of Specification Section 312000, “Earth Moving.” 3.13 GRADING

A. Grade ground surface to conform to required contours and to provide positive surface drainage

away from the WORK or borrow area. 3.14 DISPOSAL

A. Dispose of waste materials, including trash and debris, and excess topsoil, legally off-site.

3.15 BURNING

A. Burning of waste materials is prohibited for this project.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Earth Moving DEI# 50082886 31 20 00 - 1

SECTION 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Prior to beginning construction, the Geotechnical Engineer should evaluate the subgrade soils for suitability based on observations of proofrolling with a loaded dump truck or other method considered acceptable to the Geotechnical Engineer. Fill meeting the requirements herein shall then be placed to the grade shown.

1.3 REFERENCE SECTIONS

A. Section 02 41 19 – Site Demolition

B. Section 33 05 00 – Earthwork: Utilities

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Excavation: Removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations and the reuse or disposal of materials removed.

B. Subgrade: The uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill

immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

C. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not available from excavations.

D. Subbase Course: The layer placed between the subgrade and surface of a pavement or walk.

E. Design Subgrade: Elevation of bearing for foundations, bottom of porous fill beneath slabs on

grade (4" below bottom of slab), bottom of turn down slabs, and bottom most portion of stairs and ramps.

F. Drainage Fill: Course of washed granular material supporting slab-on-grade placed to cut off

upward capillary flow of pore water.

G. Unauthorized Excavation: Removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without direction by the Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Engineer, shall be at the Contractor's expense.

H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and

electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below ground surface.

I. Utilities: Include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground

services within building lines.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Test Reports: In addition to test reports required under field quality control, submit the following:

1. Laboratory analysis of each soil material proposed for fill and backfill from on-site and borrow sources.

2. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each soil material. 3. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of each

stratum tested.

C. Submit excavation support system design and details for trench excavation including jack and bore launch/receiving pits.


A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These include, but are not limited to, University of Virginia, City of Charlottesville, Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation, and the State of Virginia.

B. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner shall employ a qualified independent geotechnical

engineering testing agency to classify proposed on-site and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with specified requirements and to perform required field and laboratory testing.


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted in writing by the Engineer and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. 1. Provide a minimum 10 day notice to the University and receive written notice to proceed

before interrupting any utility.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. If utilities cannot be removed due to existing field conditions they shall be filled with flowable fill (minimum 300psi) and noted as “Abandoned” on as-built drawings. Coordinate with utility companies to shutoff services if lines are active.

C. Excavation support system design and details for trench excavation, shall be sealed and signed

by a professional engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia, copy of design shall be filed with ENGINEER.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide approved borrow soil materials from off-site when sufficient approved soil materials are not available from excavations. Contractor is responsible for locating appropriate off-site borrow areas.

B. Satisfactory Soil Materials and Engineering Fill: Select material classifying CL, ML, SC, SM, SP,

SW, GC, GM, GP, or GW in accordance with ASTM D 2487. The maximum particle size should



not exceed 4 inches. Fill should be free of debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and any other deleterious matter. Off-site borrow materials should have a CBR value no less than 6 percent.

C. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials.

D. Porous Fill: VDOT # 57 stone.

E. Filtering Material: Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone and

natural sand, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 50 sieve.

F. Flowable Fill: Comply with ACI 229 (300 psi maximum @ 28 days).

G. Aggregate Base: VDOT 21B.

2.2 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC

A. Medium Duty Geotextile Fabric as follows: 1. Weight: 6.0 oz/sy as per ASTM D-3776-79. 2. Grab Strength: 300 lbs as per ASTM D-4632-86. 3. Grab Elongation: 15% as per ASTM D-4632-86. 4. Trapezoid Tear Strength: 115 lbs as per ASTM D-4533-85. 5. Mullen Burst Strength: 600 psi as per ASTM D-3786-87. 6. Puncture Strength: 145 lbs as per ASTM D-4833-88. 7. Wide Width Strip Tensile: 200x230 lbs/in as per ASTM D-4595-86. 8. Wide Width Strip Elongation: 15x15 % as per ASTM D-4595-86. 9. Thickness: 25 mils as per ASTM D-1777-64. 10. Permittivity: .1 sec(-1) as per ASTM D-4491-85. 11. Water Flow Rate: 9.2 gal/min/sf as per ASTM D-4491-85. 12. Apparent Opening Size: 30-70 U.S. Std Sieve as per ASTM D-4751-87. 13. Ultraviolet Stability: 90% as per ASTM D-4355-84.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide

protective insulating materials as necessary.

C. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

D. Prior to proceeding with construction, all topsoil and other deleterious, non-soil materials shall be

stripped from proposed construction area. Stripping shall extend at least 5 feet horizontally beyond building limits, and stripping of unsatisfactory soils shall be as identified by the Geotechnical Engineer.

E. Subgrades which are to support slabs, pavements, or compacted fill shall be proofrolled using a

Scraper (i.e., Pan) or a loaded dump truck having an axle weight of at least 10 tons to identify areas of localized soft soil or unsuitable soil. Any soft or unsuitable material encountered during



proofrolling shall be removed and replaced with engineered fill. The Geotechnical Engineer shall observe all proofrolling operations.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water

accumulation.

C. Dewatering disposal shall be in accordance with Erosion and Sediment Control permit. 3.3 EXCAVATION

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

B. Classified Excavation: See specification Section 330500, “Earthwork: Utilities” for excavation classifications.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.

Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

2. Excavation for Mechanical or Electrical Appurtenances: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface.

3.5 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE

A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. When Engineer determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by the Engineer. 3.6 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending indicated bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill or flowable fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position.

3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill soil materials, including acceptable borrow materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent wind-blown dust.

3.8 BACKFILL



A. Backfill excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, damp-proofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Testing, inspecting, and approval of underground utilities. 4. Concrete form-work removal. 5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation. 6. Removal of temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

3.9 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE BACKFILL

A. Subsurface Drain: Place a layer of filter fabric around perimeter of drainage trench or at footing, as indicated. Place a 6-inch compacted course of filtering material on filter fabric to support drainage pipe. After installing and testing, encase drainage pipe in a minimum of 6 inches of compacted filtering material and wrap in filter fabric, overlapping edges at least 6 inches.

B. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact drainage backfill of filtering material over subsurface

drain, in width indicated, to within 18 inches of final subgrade. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of filter fabric, overlapping edges at least 6 inches.

C. Impervious Fill: Place and compact impervious fill material over drainage backfill to final

subgrade. 3.10 FILL

A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills. 1. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill

material will bond with existing surface.

B. When subgrade or existing ground surface to receive fill has a density less than that required for fill, break up ground surface to 8 inches, pulverize, moisture-condition or aerate soil and recompact to required density.

C. Place fill material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below.

1. Under grass, use satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use aggregate base, or satisfactory excavated or borrow

soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, aggregate base. 4. Under building slabs, use porous fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill, aggregate base, or flowable fill. 6. Behind below-grade walls, use engineered fill or porous fill.

3.11 MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 3 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or

ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry satisfactory soil material that is too wet to

compact to specified density. a. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet satisfactory soil material. b. If excavation must remain open overnight or rainfall becomes imminent while the

bearing soils are exposed, place a 1 to 3 inch thick “mud mat” of lean concrete be



placed on the bearing soils before the placement of reinforcing steel. 3.12 COMPACTION

A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations. Place

backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 698: 1. Under structures, slabs, and steps compact fill or backfill to 95 percent maximum dry

density. 2. Under lawn compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum dry

density. 3.13 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 0.10 foot. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 0.10 foot.

C. Grading Inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of ½ inch when tested with a

10-foot straightedge. 3.14 POROUS FILL

A. Under slabs-on-grade, place porous fill course on prepared subgrade. 1. Compact porous fill to required cross sections and thickness.


A. Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency to inspect and test each subgrade and each fill or backfill layer. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with requirements. 1. Perform field in-place density tests according to ASTM D 6938, (nuclear method)

provided that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556. With each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages according to ASTM D 6938. a. When field in-place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make

calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Engineer.



2. Utility Subgrade: The Geotechnical Engineer shall observe all subgrades and determine suitability to support underground utilities. Perform one test every 50 ft along the trench.

3. Utility backfill: The Geotechnical Engineer shall observe each backfill layer around and above the underground utility.

4. Footing Subgrade: The Geotechnical Engineer shall observe all subgrades and determine suitability to support design loads.

5. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for every 2,500 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.

6. Foundation Wall Backfill: In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests along a wall face.

B. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills are below specified density, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, recompact and retest until required density is obtained.

3.16 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed

surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the Engineer; reshape and

recompact at optimum moisture content to the required density.

C. Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction period, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,

and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.17 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waster material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner’s property. Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with disposal and for all erosion and sediment control measures at off-site disposal areas.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Dewatering DEI# 50082886 31 23 19 - 1

SECTION 31 23 19 DEWATERING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Keep all excavations and site structures free from water during construction.


A. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sediment Control

1.4 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Intent: The provisions and intent of the AGREEMENT, including the General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, and other requirements of the Contract Documents apply to the WORK as specified in this section. WORK related to this Section is described throughout the Specifications.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Dewatering Plan: CONTRACTOR shall submit, for ENGINEER'S review, Drawings and data showing its proposed plan and required equipment for dewatering of all WORK areas. The Drawings and data shall include the planned method of dewatering excavations, wells, well points, sumps, collection and discharge lines, standby units proposed, and protective fills and ditches required for control of ground water, leachate and surface water.

B. Schedule: The plan for dewatering shall be submitted within 7 days before the start of work. CONTRACTOR shall furnish such other information as may be required for ENGINEER'S complete understanding and analysis of the dewatering, grading and excavation plan.

C. Engineer's Approval: If, during the progress of the WORK, it is determined by ENGINEER that the

dewatering system grading and excavation Drawings, text and proposed methodology are inadequate, or that CONTRACTOR'S plan of construction is inoperative, CONTRACTOR shall, at its sole expense, furnish, install and operate such additional dewatering equipment and make such changes in other features of the Dewatering Plan or operation as may be necessary to perform the WORK in a manner satisfactory to ENGINEER.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 METHODS



A. Method: Dewatering can be accomplished by ordinary pumping methods, by the use of underdrains

or deep well points, whichever will produce the above results. In order to assure the continuous dewatering, duplicate units of the selected system incorporated with emergency power should be employed so that a reliable operation may be obtained.

B. Location: All site WORK areas shall be dewatered where surface, leachate and/or ground water

flows, if any, will adversely impact construction.

C. Maintenance: All permanent improvements shall be constructed in areas free from water. Construct and maintain all permanent or temporary slopes, dikes, levees, drainage ditches, sumps, and observation wells necessary for the removal of water from WORK areas. Design, furnish, install, maintain, and operate all necessary pumping and other dewatering equipment required for dewatering the various site WORK areas and for keeping the foundation and other areas free from water from any and all sources.

D. Schedule: All dewatering shall be performed in advance of grading, excavation and/or filling. The

dewatering shall be accomplished in a manner that will prevent loss of fines from the foundation, will maintain stability of all excavated slopes and bottoms of excavations, and will permit all construction operations to be performed in the dry. Dewatering of excavations shall be performed to the extent required to permit placement of compacted fill materials in the dry and to prevent sloughing of the excavation side slopes.

E. Requirements: Lower the ground water level a minimum of 3 feet below sub-foundation grade or as

recommended by Geotechnical Engineer prior to sub-foundation preparation and placement of foundation materials. During the placement and compaction of fill or bedding materials, the water level at every point within the limits of fills being placed shall be maintained a minimum of 3 feet or greater or as recommended by Geotechnical Engineer below fill placement level in order that the required compaction can be achieved.

Where conditions are such that running or standing water occur in the trench bottom or the soil in the trench bottom displays a "quick" tendency, the water shall be removed by pumps and suitable means such as well points or previous underdrain bedding until the pipe has been installed and the backfill has been placed to a sufficient height to prevent pipe flotation. No installation will be permitted in trenches unless the subgrade is dry. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR has failed to obtain an absolutely dry trench bottom by use of all known methods of trench dewatering, the ENGINEER may then order the CONTRACTOR to excavate below grade and place sufficient selected fill material over the trench bottom. Additional excavation and fill shall meet the requirements of Section 33 05 00.

3.2 PROTECTION OF FOUNDATIONS AND EXISTING FACILITIES

A. Contingency: Furnish standby equipment of sufficient size and capacity to insure continuous operation of the dewatering system. All damage to structures due to a failure of dewatering equipment shall be repaired by CONTRACTOR at its expense, to the satisfaction of ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR may consider the use of recharge systems or other methods of protection of existing facilities.

B. Completion: Dewatering shall be maintained in the WORK areas for as long as is necessary for the

completion of WORK. Upon completion of the dewatering and control of water operation, all temporary dewatering facilities shall be removed in a manner satisfactory to ENGINEER.

3.3 DISPOSAL OF DRAINAGE WATER



Effluent from dewatering operations shall be filtered or passed through an approved sediment

trapping device, or both, and discharged in a manner that does not adversely affect flowing streams or off-site property (MS-16). An adequately sized silt/sediment bag is often used. Be sure the pumping rate will not overwhelm the bag, forcing muddy water through. Concentrated runoff (such as dewater pump discharge) shall not flow down denuded slopes unless contained within an adequate temporary or permanent channel, flume or slope drain (MS-8).




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Erosion and Sediment Control DEI# 50082886 31 25 00 - 1

SECTION 31 25 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Compliance: This WORK shall be performed in accordance with the erosion and sediment control plan of the construction Drawings and the details provided therein, and as described, detailed and required by the Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation Division of Soil and Water Conservation in the most recent edition of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

B. Details: In the event a detailed plan is not shown, CONTRACTOR shall comply with the

requirements of the local authority and provide a plan if required by that authority. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, latest edition. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Temporary Seed Mixture: Provide written notification as to the temporary seed mixture to be used.

1.5 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain all erosion and sediment control structures to be utilized during the life of the Project in compliance with the regulations of the Division of Soil and Water Conservation until vegetative cover is acceptable to the Division's field personnel and approval acceptance is received.

B. The General Contractor shall maintain all Erosion and Sediment Controls while the UVA

Landscape Department is installing plantings, vegetation, grass, mulch, etc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STORM DRAIN INLET PROTECTION

A. Sediment deposits shall be removed when deposits reach approximately one-half the design depth of the trap.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES

A. Measures: Silt fence, straw bales, construction entrance, check dams, temporary vegetation, and all other items for erosion and sediment control shall be constructed as directed by the


Dewberry Engineers Inc. Erosion and Sediment Control DEI# 50082886 31 25 00 - 2

ENGINEER or in the locations shown or designated on the Drawings in accordance with the details provided.

B. Schedule: CONTRACTOR shall institute the erosion and sediment control program as a part of

clearing and grubbing, and prior to rough grading. The initial program shall include, however is not limited to, the installation of silt fences, staked straw bales, diversion ditches and/or gravel weirs as shown on erosion and sediment control Drawing at the limits of clearing and grubbing where silt-carrying surface water runoff may be diverted and/or filtered prior to leaving the disturbed area.

C. Temporary Seeding: Establish temporary cover for erosion control by seeding and/or mulching

graded areas which may otherwise be exposed for a period greater than 30 days. This should be accomplished as soon as rough grading WORK is done. Begin temporary seeding within 72 hours after earth disturbance.

D. Pipe Outfalls: All pipe outfall areas disturbed by construction shall be protected with non-

erodible materials conforming to the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

E. Maintenance: All siltation and erosion control devices installed during the course of construction shall be maintained in proper working order at all times, and shall not be removed until final stabilization of all disturbed areas or at the direction of the ENGINEER.

3.2 CLEANING OF ROADS AND STREETS

A. CONTRACTOR shall maintain a vehicle wash station at all vehicle egress areas. All vehicles shall be thoroughly cleaned of mud and silt before leaving the construction site to avoid tracking mud and silt onto roads, streets, and highways. In the event that tracking does occur, CONTRACTOR shall immediately clean the street or road of all debris, mud or silt and shall pay all damages resulting therefrom. A daily survey of the condition of the adjacent streets and roads shall be made and recorded in the field log along with daily cleanup of the streets of the tracking from the site onto roads, alleys, parking lots, and highways.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for street sweeping on a regular basis and at the conclusion of each segment of construction.

3.3 PROTECTION OF STORMWATER SYSTEMS

A. Stormwater structures which will receive runoff from the construction shall be protected from the buildup of mud or silt as outlined by the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook or as directed by ENGINEER.

3.4 FUGITIVE DUST

A. Contractor is responsible for controlling all fugitive dust from earthwork and saw cutting activities. Contractor shall utilize non-potable water for dust control. Contractor shall control all excess water application and direct runoff to sanitary sewer.


Division 32: Exterior Improvements

www.dewberry.com



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Asphalt Paving DEI# 50082886 32 12 16 - 1

SECTION 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING



1.2 SUMMARY

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for repairing asphalt concrete pavement and preparing subgrade in those areas where improvements are proposed as shown on the plans.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with Virginia Department of Transportation standard specifications "Road and Bridge Specifications", latest edition.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Apply prime and tack coats when ambient temperature is above 50 degrees F. (10 degrees C), and when temperature has not been below 35 degrees F. (1 degree C.) for 12 hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains an excess of moisture.

B. Construct asphalt concrete surface course when atmospheric temperature is above 40 degrees

F. (4 degrees C.), and when base is dry. Base course may be placed when air temperature is above 30 degrees F. (-1 degree C.) and rising.

C. Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Asphalt concrete paving and base course as shown on drawings. Contractor shall match existing pavement for repairs. Contractor shall incorporate a pea gravel surface where necessary to match existing pavement.

B. General: Use locally available materials and gradations which exhibit a satisfactory record of

previous installations. Materials shall meet requirements of VDOT "Road and Bridge Specifications."

C. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, ready mixed, complying with FS TT-P-115, Type I,

or AASHTO M-248, Type N, Color: White. PART 3 - EXECUTION

Materials placement shall be in accordance with VDOT "Road and Bridge Specifications."

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION


Dewberry Engineers Inc. Asphalt Paving DEI# 50082886 32 12 16 - 2

A. Remove loose material from compacted subgrade surface immediately before applying

herbicide treatment or prime coat. Proof roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction under the observation of the Geotechnical Engineer. Notify Owner of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving work until deficient subgrade areas have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.

3.2 PLACING MIX

A. Place asphalt concrete mixture on prepared surface, spread and strike-off. Place inaccessible and small areas by hand. Place each course to required grade, cross-section, and compacted thickness.

B. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days' work, to

ensure continuous bond between adjoining work. Construction joints to have same texture, density and smoothness as other sections of asphalt concrete course. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat. Place asphalt within 24 hours of applying tack coat.

3.3 ROLLING

A. Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

B. Patching: Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials and defective areas.

Cut-out such areas and fill with fresh, hot asphalt concrete. Compact by rolling to maximum surface density and smoothness.

C. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and

hardened.

D. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.


A. Test in-place asphalt concrete courses for compliance with requirements for thickness, compaction, and surface smoothness. Test in-place base course for compliance with requirements for thickness and compaction. Repair or remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Architect.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Concrete Paving DEI# 50082886 32 13 13 - 1

SECTION 32 13 13

CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes concrete walkways.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Where differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry stand-ards, utility company regulations and the Contract Documents occur, the most stringent shall govern. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner’s Representative in writing of any such difference.

B. Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with local codes, laws and ordinances, industry standards or other governing regulations, the Work shall be cor-rected on noncompliance deficiencies with the Contractor bearing all costs.

C. Codes and Standards: Comply with Virginia Department of Transportation standard specifications "Road and Bridge Specifications", latest edition.

D. Specifications listed below are included by reference and are hereby incorporated into the Contract Documents.

1. University of Virginia; Facilities Design Guidelines

2. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Sup-plemental General Conditions, and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

3. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

4. National Ready Mix Concrete Association (NRMCA)

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product, ingredient, or admixture requiring color selection.

C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

2. Concrete Color

D. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

E. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.

3. Curing compounds.



4. Applied finish materials.

5. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive.

6. Joint fillers.

F. Field quality-control reports.


A. Detectable Warning Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer of stamped concrete paving systems.

B. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.

F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups of full-thickness sections of concrete paving to demonstrate typical joints; surface finish, texture, and color; curing; and standard of workmanship.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to concrete paving, including but not limited to, the following:

a. Concrete mixture design.

b. Quality control of concrete materials and concrete paving construction practices.

2. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with concrete paving to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent.

b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.

c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.

d. Concrete paving subcontractor.



e. Manufacturer's representative of stamped concrete paving system used for detectable warnings.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet or less. Do not use notched and bent forms.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.


A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray Portland cement Type I:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service-record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar paving applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Exposed Aggregate: Selected, hard, and durable; washed; free of materials with deleterious reactivity to cement or that cause staining; from a single source, with gap-graded coarse aggregate as follows:

1. Aggregate Sizes: 1/2 to 3/4 inch nominal.

2. Aggregate Source, Shape, and Color: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

F. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.



6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

G. Concrete Color: Concrete shall have integral color as indicated on the plans. Concrete with integral color shall include air entrainment, brown sand, and Soloman Colors, Inc. #306 Colorflow Liquid Color (Canvas) at a rate of 6.4 lbs liquid color per cubic yard of concrete or approved equal by Owner. Brown sand under concrete shall have a consistent color throughout the project. Contractor shall match color of existing adjacent walks.

2.3 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. /sq. yd. dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

F. White, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B, dissipating.


A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, two-component epoxy resin capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of grade complying with requirements, and of the following types:

1. Types I and II, non-load bearing for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

D. Chemical Surface Retarder: Water-soluble, liquid, set retarder with color dye, for horizontal concrete surface application, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of concrete to a depth of 1/8 to 1/4 inch.

2.5 DETECTABLE WARNING MATERIALS

A. Detectable Warning Stamp: Semirigid polyurethane mats with formed underside capable of imprinting detectable warning pattern on plastic concrete; perforated with a vent hole at each dome.

1. Size of Stamp: One piece matching detectable warning area shown on Drawings.

B. Liquid Release Agent: Manufacturer's standard, clear, evaporating formulation designed to facilitate release of stamp mats.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.



B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi for concrete sidewalks.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45.

3. Slump Limit: 5 inches plus or minus 1 inch.

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:

1. Air Content: 4-1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use high-range, water-reducing and retarding admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than Portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Not allowed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.

2. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons or similar piece of equipment.

3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.



3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated.

3. Butt Joints: Use epoxy bonding adhesive at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 30 feet unless otherwise indicated.

2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.

3. Terminate joint filler 1/4 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated.

4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated.

5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together.

6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate grooving-tool marks on concrete surfaces.



2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation and items to be embedded or cast-in.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating joint devices.

H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

J. Slip-Form Paving: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce paving to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.

1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of slip-form paving machine during operations.

K. Cold-Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following:

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.



3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.

L. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.6 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.

2. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.

3.7 DETECTABLE WARNINGS

A. Blockouts: Form blockouts in concrete for installation of detectable paving units specified on drawings.

1. Tolerance for Opening Size: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.

B. Stamped Detectable Warnings: Install stamped detectable warnings as part of a continuous concrete paving placement and according to stamp-mat manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Before using stamp mats, verify that the vent holes are unobstructed.

2. Apply liquid release agent to the concrete surface and the stamp mat.

3. Stamping: While initially finished concrete is plastic accurately align and place stamp mats in sequence. Uniformly load, gently vibrate, and press mats into concrete to produce imprint pattern on concrete surface. Load and tamp mats directly perpendicular to the stamp-mat surface to prevent distortion in shape of domes. Press and tamp until mortar begins to come through all of the vent holes. Gently remove stamp mats.

4. Trimming: After 24 hours, cut off the tips of mortar formed by the vent holes.



5. Remove residual release agent according to manufacturer's written instructions, but no fewer than three days after stamping concrete. High-pressure-wash surface and joint patterns, taking care not to damage stamped concrete. Control, collect, and legally dispose of runoff.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound or a combination of these as follows:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring during installation or curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas that have been subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 1/4 inch.

2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch,

3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch.

4. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2 inch per 12 inches of tie bar.

5. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch.

6. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch.

7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch per 12 inches of dowel.

8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.



9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.

10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

C. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

E. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

F. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

H. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.


Division 33: Utilities

www.dewberry.com



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Utility Line Testing DEI# 50082886 33 01 00 - 1

SECTION 33 01 00 UTILITY LINE TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The purpose of this Section is to specify the methods and requirements for testing and quality

assurance of utility lines. Seventy-Two (72) hours notice to the OWNER is required prior to undertaking any tests.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Virginia Water Works Regulations, latest revision

B. Virginia Sewage Collection and Treatment Regulations, latest revision

C. American Waterworks Association Standards, latest revision

D. International Plumbing Code-610


A. Quality assurance testing shall be done in the presence of the OWNER and ENGINEER or his

representative

1.5 FEES

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all costs associated with testing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING OF WATER LINES

A. All testing and flushing will be performed in accordance with the current revision of ANSI/AWWA C600-93, IPC-610 and NFPA 13. The Contractor shall provide the Owner or Owner’s Representative with 72 hours notice prior to undertaking any tests.

B. Pressure Test: After the pipe has been laid, all newly laid pipe or any valved section thereof shall be

subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of at least 200 psi.

Test Pressure Restrictions. Test pressures shall:

1. Not exceed pipe or thrust restraint design pressure;



2. Be of at least 2-hour duration; 3. Not exceed twice the rated pressure of the valves or hydrants when the pressure boundary of

the test section includes closed gate valves or hydrants; 4. Not exceed the rated pressure of the valve.

a. Pressurization: Each valved section of pipe shall be filled with water slowly and the specified test pressure shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Owner or Owner’s Representative. The water and container used to pump up the line to be tested shall be properly disinfected.

b. Air Removal: Before applying the specified test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from the pipe, valves, and hydrants.

c. Examination: All exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and joints shall be examined carefully during the test. Any damaged or defective pipe, fittings, valves, or hydrants that are discovered following the pressure test shall be repaired or replaced with sound material and the test shall be repeated until it is satisfactory to the Owner or Owner’s Representative.

5. Leakage will not be accepted during waterline testing. 6. Testing must be completed prior to connection with the existing system.

3.2 WATERLINE DISINFECTION

A. General - All domestic waterlines shall be disinfected prior to being placed in operation. Prior to

disinfection all waterlines shall be flushed unless the tablet method of disinfection is used. All valves and hydrants shall be operated during this operation. Flushing velocities shall not be less than 2.5 ft./sec. If ductile iron pipe is being used, the water used to disinfect the waterline should not remain in contact with the waterline for more than 24 hours.

B. Methods of Chlorine Application

1. Continuous Feed Method - Potable water shall be introduced into the pipe line at a constant flow rate. Chlorine shall be added at a constant rate to this flow so that the chlorine concentration in the water so that the chlorine concentration in the water in the pipe is at least 50 mg/l. The chlorinated water shall remain in the pipe line at least 24 hours, after which, the chlorine concentration in the water shall be at least 10 mg/l. All valves and appurtenances shall be operated while the chlorinated water remains in the pipe line.

2. Slug Method - Potable water shall be introduced into the pipe line at a constant flow rate. This water shall receive a chlorine dosage which will result in a chlorine concentration of 100 mg/l in a "slug" of the water. The chlorine shall be added long enough to insure that all portions of the pipe are exposed to the 100 mg/l chlorine solution for at least 3 hours. The chlorine residual shall be checked at regular intervals not to exceed 2,000 feet to insure that adequate disinfection is occurring. As the chlorinated water passes valves and appurtenances, they shall be operated to insure disinfection of these appurtenances.

3. Tablet Method - This method shall not be used if non-potable water or foreign material have entered the lines or if the water temperature is below 5oC (41oF). The tablets shall be placed in each pipe section and in all appurtenances. Enough tablets shall be used to insure that a chlorine concentration of 25 mg/l is provided in the water. They shall be attached by an adhesive to the top of the pipe sections and crushed or rubbed in all appurtenances. The adhesive shall be approved by the Engineer. The velocity of the potable water in the pipe line shall be less than 1 ft./sec. The water shall remain in contact with the pipe for 24 hours. All valves and appurtenances shall be operated while the chlorinated water is in the pipe.

C. Final Flushing - After the required retention period, the heavily chlorinated water shall be flushed

from the pipe lines using potable water and discharged to a sanitary sewer manhole.

D. Testing - after the lines have been flushed to NFPA Standards, the waterlines shall be tested in the following methods: 1. All chlorine residual determinations shall be made using only those methods approved by the



Virginia Department of Health. One approved method is the DPD Kit method. 2. Two water samples for bacteriological analysis must be collected at least 24 hours apart and

analyzed by a certified laboratory. The results of these samples must indicate no contamination before the pipe, tanks or equipment can be utilized as part of the waterworks. If contamination is indicated, then the disinfection procedure must be repeated. Samples shall be collected at regular intervals, not exceeding 2,000 feet throughout the length of pipeline.



TABLE 1

SPECIFICATION TIME REQUIRED FOR A 1.0 PSIG PRESSURE DROP FOR SIZE AND LENGTH OF PIPE INDICATED FOR Q = 0.0015

PART 1A

Pipe Diameter

(in.)

Minimum

Time (min:sec)

Length for Minimum Time (ft)

Time for Longer Length (sec)

Specification Time for

Length (L) Shown (min:sec) 100'

150'

200'

250'

4

3:46

597

.380 L

3:46

3:46

3:46

3:46

6

5:40

398

.854 L

5:40

5:40

5:40

5:40 8

7:34

298

1.520 L

7:34

7:34

7:34

7:34

10

9:26

239

2.374 L

9:26

9:26

9:26

9:53 12

11:20

199

3.418 L

11:20

11:20

11:24

14:15

15

14:10

159

5.342 L

14:10

14:10

17:48

22:15 18

17:00

133

7.692 L

17:00

19:13

25:38

32:03

21

19:50

114

10.470 L

19:50

26:10

34:54

43:37 24

22:40

99

13.674 L

22:47

34:11

45:34

56:58

27

25:30

88

17.306 L

28:51

43:16

57:41

72:07 30

28:20

80

21.366 L

35:37

53:25

71:13

89:02

33

31:10

72

25.852 L

43:05

64:38

86:10

107:43 36

34:00

66

30.768 L

51:17

76:55

102:34

128:12

PART 1B

Pipe Diameter

(in.)

Minimum

Time (min:sec)

Length for Minimum Time (ft)

Time for Longer Length (sec)

Specification Time for

Length (L) Shown (min:sec) 300'

350'

400'

450'

4

3:46

597

.380 L

3:46

3:46

3:46

3:46

6

5:40

398

.854 L

5:40

5:40

5:42

6:24 8

7:34

298

1.520 L

7:36

8:52

10:08

11:24

10

9:26

239

2.374 L

11:52

13:51

15:49

17:48 12

11:20

199

3.418 L

17:05

19:56

22:47

25:38

15

14:10

159

5.342 L

26:42

31:09

35:36

40:04 18

17:00

133

7.692 L

38:27

44:52

51:16

57:41

21

19:50

114

10.470 L

52:21

61:00

69:48

78:31 24

22:40

99

13.674 L

68:22

79:46

91:10

102:33

27

25:30

88

17.306 L

86:32

100:57

115:22

129:48 030

28:20

80

21.366 L

106:57

124:38

142:26

160:15

33

31:10

72

25.852 L

129:16

150:43

172:21

193:53 36

34:00

66

30.768 L

153:50

179:29

205:07

230:46

The minimum acceptable time durations are shown on Table I. If the elapsed time to drop 1 psi is less than that shown on Table I, then the air loss shall be considered excessive and the section of pipe has failed the test.



3. Testing of Manholes and Structures

All new manholes and structures shall be tested by vacuum testing. a. Vacuum Test: Manholes and Structures shall be vacuum tested as follows:

All vacuum testing shall be performed prior to backfilling around all manholes and structures. All pipe openings shall be plugged by pneumatic or mechanical plugs and braced to sustain 10" mercury vacuum. The rim to cone joint shall be tested on all manholes. No one shall be inside the manhole during testing. The test shall be at 10 in. mercury. Installation and operation of vacuum equipment and indicating devices shall be in accordance with equipment specifications for which performance information has been provided by the manufacturer.

Minimum Time to hold 1 in. Mercury Drop MH Dia. MH Height Hg Time (Minimum) 4' 10' or less 1 in. 1 min. 0 sec. 4' 10-15' 1 in. 1 min. 15 sec. 4' 15-25' 1 in. 1 min. 30 sec. For manholes five feet in diameter, add an additional 15 seconds and for manholes six feet in diameter, add an additional 30 seconds to the time requirements for four-foot diameter manholes. If a manhole joint mastic is completely pulled out during the vacuum test, the manhole shall be disassembled and the mastic replaced.

E. Deflection Test for PVC Gravity Pipe: All PVC pipe with a stiffness of 200 psi or greater may be

excluded from the deflection test (Manufacturer shall certify stiffness in excess of 200 psi). Deflection tests shall be a test on installation and be performed no sooner that 30 days after final full backfill has been placed. The CONTRACTOR shall test the pipe for deflection by means of a GO-NO-GO mandrel to assure that a deflection of 5 percent has not been exceeded. The mandrel, one for each size pipe, shall be a nine arm mandrel, with proving ring, sized at 5 percent less than the ASTM dimension for the pipe in accordance with TABLE II.

The mandrel shall be pulled through the sewer line manually. Ten percent of all sewer line shall be tested at locations specified by the ENGINEER. Should any of the 10% fail the test, it shall be corrected until it does pass the test, at the CONTRACTOR's expense. Additional sewer shall be tested at the discretion of the ENGINEER, and any sewer not passing the test shall be corrected until it does pass the test.

TABLE II

Nominal PVC-SDR 35 Diameter ASTM D3034 (inches) L(inches) D (inches)

__________________________________________

8 8 7.50 10 10 9.33 12 12 11.16 15 15 13.60 18 18 16.60

L = Mandrel Arm Length



D = I.D. of Proving Ring

F. The test shall be made only under the supervision of the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all equipment and perform all work required for the purposes. In case any section under test shows leakage in excess of the allowable amount, the CONTRACTOR shall make such repairs to the line as are required to bring the loss within the stipulated limits.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Earthwork: Utilities DEI# 50082886 33 05 00 - 1

SECTION 33 05 00 EARTHWORK: UTILITIES



1.2 SUMMARY

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor and equipment for excavation, installation, backfill,

and testing of all utility lines and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. This section specifies excavation and backfill for all underground utilities.


A. Section 02 41 19 – Site Demolition

B. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving 1.4 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) B. VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations (OSHA)

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Excavation support system design and details for trench excavation. Excavation support system shall be signed and sealed by a Virginia Licensed Professional Engineer.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating all excavations with the following:

All planned excavations on University property require a University "Request for Excavation Permit”, shall be completed and submitted to the CAM and the Utilities Department within two hours of contacting MISS UTILITY. The University’s "Request for Excavation Permit” notifies only the University of planned excavation and does not result in notification of MISS UTILITY.

The University is a subscriber to the "MISS UTILITY” underground utility location and notification

system. In addition to University and MISS UTILITY requirements, the City of Charlottesville (434-971-3320) also requires that requests for excavation permits be submitted for City maintained streets or sidewalks. Any excavation of state roads requires notification and coordination with the Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT). All planned excavations require notification of MISS UTILITY per state and federal regulations. It is the responsibility of the contractor, to notify MISS UTILITY at 1-800-552-7001 of the planned excavation and at 1-800-552-3120 to obtain subsequent verification that utilities have been marked. Excavation shall not proceed without a University Excavation Permit and the completion of the above requirements.




A. Standards: Testing of backfill material shall comply with the following standards. ASTM D6938 Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-

Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). ASTM D698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).

B. Excavation support system design and details for trench excavation, shall be sealed and signed by a professional engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia, copy of design shall be filed with ENGINEER.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKFILL AND PIPE BEDDINGS MATERIALS:

A. All new pipe installed shall use crushed aggregate to meet the requirements of Aggregate Standard size No.10 as defined by VDOT standard specifications for pipe bedding. All new piping in paved area shall use backfill to meet the requirements of Aggregate Standard size No.21B as defined by VDOT standard specifications. All new pipe shall be backfilled in accordance with Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION

A. General: All excavation shall be performed in accordance with the current VOSH and OSHA guidelines and all other regulatory authorities having jurisdiction. Provide adequate equipment to comply with VOSH and OSHA regulations. All excavation may be open-cut type except where otherwise shown on the Drawings. The slope of the sides of the excavation shall be kept as nearly vertical as possible consistent with the types of materials encountered. A clear area shall be maintained a sufficient distance back from the top edge of the excavation to avoid overloading which may cause slides, cave-ins or shifting of the pipe. All damage to pipes or structures occurring through settlements, heaving, water or earth pressures, slides, cave-ins or other causes shall be repaired by CONTRACTOR at its expense. CONTRACTOR has the option of shoring, including sheet piling, which shall be installed during excavation where required for the protection of workmen, banks, roadways and adjacent paving, structures, and utilities or as directed by ENGINEER.

B. Excavation Classification: Excavation will be classified as Common Excavation or Rock Excavation in accordance with the following definitions or will be designated as classified.

C. Common Excavation shall be defined as the excavation of all materials that can be excavated,

transported and unloaded by the use of heavy ripping equipment and wheel tractor-scrapers with pusher tractors or that can be excavated and dumped in place or loaded onto hauling equipment by means of excavators having a rated capacity of one cubic yard and equipped with attachments (such as shovel, bucket, backhoe, dragline or clam shell) appropriate to the character of the materials, and the site conditions. Common Earth Excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other obstructions visible to ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions, and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock excavation.



D. Rock Excavation shall be defined as any material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material exceeding 1 cu. yd. that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to late-model, track mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch wide, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 120-hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force not less than 25,000 lbf and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,700 lbf; measured according to SAE J-1179, without systematic drilling, ram hammering or ripping (blasting not permitted).

E. Protection: Protect existing structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities in

areas of work. Barricade open excavations and provide warning lights. Maintain service to/from existing homes, businesses, and facilities.

F. Shoring or Sheeting: Shoring or sheeting shall be removed as the WORK progresses, unless

left in place by written order of ENGINEER. Sheeting or shoring to remain after completion of the project shall be cut a minimum of 1’ below finished grade.

G. Trench Excavation: CONTRACTOR shall comply with all local, state and federal guidelines

when excavating trenches. The width of the trench at and below the top of the pipe shall not exceed the outside diameter of the pipe plus 24 inches, except the minimum trench width shall be 36 inches in all cases. The width of the trench above the top of the pipe may be as wide as necessary for sheeting and bracing and the proper performance of the WORK.

H. Sidewalls: The sidewalls of pipe trenches shall be as nearly vertical as practicable to a point

above the top of the pipe.

I. Over-excavation: Trenches shall be excavated to the design grade of the pipe to provide uniform bearing and support along the entire length of pipe. Care shall be taken not to over excavate. Over excavation of otherwise suitable material shall be replaced with suitable material as directed by ENGINEER. The cost of such fill shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.

J. Rock: Where the bottom of the pipe trench occurs in rock, the rock shall be excavated to a

minimum of 6 inches for pipes 24-inches in diameter and smaller and 9 inches for pipes 30-inches in diameter and larger, below the trench depth indicated on the Drawings or specified elsewhere. Over depths in rock excavation and unauthorized over depths shall be backfilled with VDOT No. 10 crushed stone or gravel at CONTRACTOR'S expense.

K. Unsuitable Material: Whenever wet or otherwise unsuitable material, which is incapable of

properly supporting the pipe, is encountered in the trench bottom, such material shall be over-excavated to a depth necessary to allow for construction of stable pipe bedding. The trench shall be backfilled with suitable materials to proper grade. The CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER immediately when such conditions are encountered and the ENGINEER will determine the amount of over-excavation required.

L. Disposal: All excavated material being disposed of off site shall be done legally.

3.2 BACKFILLING

A. Operation: CONTRACTOR shall keep trenches backfilled on a daily basis. Prior to the end of the working day, each trench will be completely backfilled. All backfill shall be brought up equally along each side of the pipe in such manner as to avoid displacement of or damage to the pipe.

B. Material: Shall conform to PART 2 – PRODUCTS above.

C. No fill shall be placed until the subgrade has been checked and approved by the Geotechnical



Engineer, and in no case shall fill be placed on a subgrade that is muddy, frozen, or that contains frost.

D. Disposal of Unsatisfactory Material: When, in the opinion of ENGINEER, the excavated

material is not satisfactory for use as backfill, the material shall be disposed of offsite legally. Select material shall be brought in by CONTRACTOR.

E. Compaction:

1. VDOT No. 10 Stone Bedding Material or sand shall be brought up in layers not exceeding 3 inches in compacted depth for the full length of pipe. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted by mechanical tampers or hammers.

2. Compaction of pipe backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving.

F. Testing: The backfill shall be tested to insure that the required density is being achieved.

OWNER is responsible for costs associated with testing. ENGINEER shall select the depth at which the test is to be taken. Backfill not compacted to the required density shall be removed, recompacted, and retested at CONTRACTOR'S expense until the requirements are met.

G. Excess Disposal: Excess material shall be disposed of on site or off site legally at the

discretion of the OWNER.

H. Settlement: All backfilled areas where settlement occurs shall be filled and maintained during the life of the Project and for a period of 1 year following the date of final acceptance of all WORK.

I. Hazards: When the CONTRACTOR is notified by ENGINEER or OWNER that all backfill

presents a hazard, CONTRACTOR shall correct such hazardous condition at once. 3.3 BORROW

A. Availability: Where satisfactory materials are not available in sufficient quantity from required excavations, suitable materials shall be obtained from approved off-site borrow areas.

B. Placement: Borrow material shall be placed and compacted only when approved by

ENGINEER and a Licensed Geotechnical Engineer.

C. Payment: No separate payment will be made for furnishing and placing approved borrow material. Compensation in full is included in the agreed to price paid for this Project.

3.4 BLASTING

A. Not Applicable.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Pre-Cast Concrete: Manholes DEI# 50082886 33 05 13 - 1

SECTION 33 05 13 PRE-CAST CONCRETE: MANHOLES



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This work entails providing materials and installation of pre-cast Sanitary, and Storm Sewer manholes and appurtenances, including appropriate penetrations for piping, grouting the inverts, sealing the pipe penetrations and joints, and application of an epoxy liner.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT) Road and Bridge Specifications

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

C. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer including dimensions, reinforcing, and material Specifications.


A. CONTRACTOR shall notify the UVA Utilities inspector prior to construction of all manholes.

B. Manholes shall be manufactured and designed by the precast supplier in accordance with ASTM C890 for HS 20 loading and in accordance with the latest ACI, Standard 318, Building Code, ASTM C 478, and ACI 350.

C. Standard manhole frame and cover shall be as specified on the drawings with a minimum 24”

clear opening.

D. Iron castings shall conform to the standard Specifications for Gray Iron Castings ASTM Specification A 48, Class 30S.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. CONTRACTOR shall provide an area on-site for off-loading and storage of pre-cast structures delivered to the site. The surface on which the structures are placed shall not cause eccentric loadings which may damage the items. Prior, and during installation, precast structures will be moved utilizing equipment of sufficient capacity to safely move and place such structures. Any damage to pre-cast structure shall be reported to the ENGINEER for determination as to its ability to meet its intended use. Any structure damaged such that it cannot be used as intended, will be rejected by the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR shall replace in-kind at its sole expense.



1.7 PROHIBITED MATERIALS

A. The use of bricks to raise manhole frame and covers to final grade is prohibited.

B. Do not grout the manhole frame in place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANHOLES

A. Precast Manhole: Unless authorized by ENGINEER, manholes will be of the precast concrete type as shown on the Drawings. Manholes shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest ACI Building Code, Chapter 13, for Class A, Air-Entrained Concrete. Pre-cast manholes shall conform to ASTM C-478. Manholes shall be 4 foot diameter, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Manholes shall be delivered to site with bitumastic waterproofing on exterior.

B. Gaskets: All gaskets shall be flexible neoprene rubber and conform to the requirements of

ASTM C443. Manhole section gaskets shall be of the O-Ring gasket type with butyl rope mastic applied to the joint adjacent to the outside wall and grout applied on the inside wall as shown on the drawings.

C. Manhole Frame and Cover: The manhole frame and cover shall conform to the requirements

of: ASTM A47, Grade 32510 for malleable castings, ASTM A48 Class 30S for gray iron castings, ASTM A536, Grade 60-40-18 for ductile iron castings, ASTM A27, Grade 65-35 for carbon steel castings, and ASTM A296, Grade CA-15 for Chromium alloy steel castings. Tolerances, workmanship, and strength requirements for castings shall conform to FS RR-F-621. All testing shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer or representative.

D. Pipe Connections: All manholes shall have factory installed flexible connections for all pipe

penetrations, and service laterals shall enter the sewerage system at manholes.

E. Inverts: The use of precast inverts is encouraged, however no additional compensation will be afforded the CONTRACTOR for replacements of bases caused by line relocation to avoid existing utilities or structures. Field constructed inverts shall be shaped in accordance with VDOT IS-1 Detail.

F. Manhole Step: All manholes shall have a factory installed step designed so their foot cannot

slide off the end. General dimensions shall be 12 inches wide (min.) uniformly spaced from 12 inches minimum to 16 inches maximum. Step shall be of the cast-in-place or grouted type manufactured and coated, and installed in accordance with the latest O.S.H.A. Regulations.

G. Openings for Pipe: Shall be precast and supplied with a flexible connection boot. The boot shall

be of neoprene secured to the manhole by a water tight compression ring seal to provide a flexible joint. The joint shall be of neoprene rubber. The boot shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturing instructions. Grout: Grout for inverts, joints, and other repairs, shall be a self-bonding, non-shrink, high strength cement mortar with a set time of 60 seconds or less. Grout shall conform with ASTM C150 and ASTM C144. All joints, lift holes, inlets, and outlets to be sealed and non-shrink grouted inside and out.

H. Interior Coating: The interior of sanitary manholes shall have an epoxy sealant with either

Sikagard 62 High-Build Protective Coating, Cor+Gard Protective Coating or Raven 405 Protective Coating, or approved equal. Sealant shall be field applied.

I. Exterior Coating: Bitumastic waterproofing (Coal Tar Epoxy)



J. Elastomeric Adhesive/Sealant: one part advanced polyurethane elastomeric sealant/adhesive

(Sikaflex-11FC or equal). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY

A. The exterior of all manholes shall be coated in the bitumastic waterproofing prior to delivery to the site.

3.2 PLACEMENT

A. Manholes shall be placed on a properly compacted foundation after review and approval by ENGINEER and in conformance with the manufacturers recommended practices. Prior to backfilling, the Contractor shall seal all joints, lift holes, inlets, and outlets with non-shrink grouted inside and out. Once grout has cured, field apply bitumastic over the new grout and overlap adjacent manhole sections by a minimum of 6-inches.

3.3 ARRANGEMENT

A. Manholes shall be of watertight construction. In streets, manhole tops shall be set by the road grade. A maximum of 12 inches of adjustment rings may be used to reach grade. In easements a minimum of 2 inches, maximum of 24 inches of manhole shall be above grade, with ground sloping away from the manhole for a distance of 3’ from the center of the cover. No adjustment rings shall be used to reach this elevation. All lift rings shall be removed and all lift holes sealed. Inverts shall be installed in a workmanlike manner, providing a smooth flow line without obstructions in accordance with the Drawings.

3.4 MANHOLE COMPLETION

A. After the manhole has been installed and prior to completion, the Contractor shall field apply non-shrink grout per the manufacturer’s instructions at all joints and pick holes and coat with bitumastic waterproofing per the manufacturer’s instructions. Apply the manufacturer’s recommendation for number of coats to ensure quality control and complete coverage of the epoxy protective coating to the interior of the manhole. Surface preparation and application shall be in accordance with manufacture’s specifications.

3.5 TESTING

A. Testing of manholes shall be in accordance with Section 330100 - Utility Line Testing. 3.6 DISPOSAL

A. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for legal disposal of all existing manholes that are replaced.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Precast Concrete: Utility Structures DEI# 50082886 33 05 14 - 1

SECTION 33 05 14

PRECAST CONCRETE: UTILITY STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the construction and installation of underground precast concrete utility structures, including heating hot water pipe box conduit and box culvert (tunnels), and electrical manholes.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Where differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the Contract Documents occur, the most stringent shall govern. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner’s Representative in writing of any such difference.

B. Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with local codes, laws and ordinances, industry standards or other governing regulations, the Work shall be corrected on noncompliance deficiencies with the Contractor bearing all costs.

C. Specifications listed below are included by reference and are hereby incorporated into the Contract Documents.


2. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.


A. Underground precast concrete utility structures shall be adequately designed to support HS-20 highway loading and the amount of backfill indicated on drawings. Underground precast structures shall be designed to resist hydrostatic uplift forces using the assumption that groundwater level could reach ground surface elevation. Underground precast structures shall be watertight and openings shall be coordinated to prevent the necessity of field adjustments.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.

B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Precast Concrete Utility Structure Shop Drawings: Details of structure dimensions, elevations, reinforcing, and openings. Include special reinforcement required for openings.

D. Structural Calculations: Structural analysis and design calculations for precast concrete utility structures signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer responsible for its design.

E. Concrete Compressive Strength: Concrete 28-day compression strength test results for precast concrete structure.

F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.



2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.

3. Admixtures.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing precast concrete structures. Manufacturer’s precast plant shall be certified tin the Prestressed Concrete Intsitute’s (PCI) Plant Certification Program or the National Precast Concrete Association’s (NCPA) Plant Certification Program.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.

C. Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."

2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete".

3. ASTM C 891, "Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures."


A. Deliver, store, and handle precast concrete utility structures in accordance with ASTM C 891 and the manufacturer’s recommendation using methods that will prevent damage to the components and their joint surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.


A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded.

C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.

2.3 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.

B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.


A. Lift Loops: Lift loops shall be ASTM A 416 steel strand.

B. Flexible Joint Sealants: Flexible joint sealants shall be butyl rubber based conforming to Federal Specifications SS-S-210A, AASHTO M-198, Type B – Butyl Rubber and suitable for application temperatures between 10 and 100 degrees F.

C. Joint Sealant: Waterproofing sealant shall be used at all joints between precast conduit base and precast covers and at joints between adjacent precast concrete sections and building. The sealants shall be butyl resin or one part polyurethane. Polyurethane



sealants shall be equal to Sikaswell S and butyl resin sealants shall be equal to Conseal.

D. Waterproofing Membrane: A waterproofing membrane shall be installed over the entire top and sides of all precast concrete utility structures. The membrane shall continue to the face the proposed structure and/or building to seal the joint between the utility structures and building.

E. Drains in Precast Box Conduits: Precast Box Conduit shall have a continuous 1-1/2 inch x 3-1/2 inch internal drain in the conduit base slab. The drain shall extend the full length of the conduit system and shall be located at the centerline of the conduit base. Drains shall discharge into manholes from the box conduit without obstruction.

F. Drains in Precast Box Culvert (Tunnels): Provide mild slope from side walls to tunnel centerline. Do not provide “keyway” type drains in Precast Box Culvert (Tunnels).

2.5 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Concrete shall conform to ASTM C 478, shall be normal-weight, and shall be proportioned as follows:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5,000 psi.

2. Cement: Type I, ASTM C-150. Minimum of 564 pounds per cubic yard.

3. Air Content: 4 percent minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Precast structures shall be installed on a firm stabilized foundation so prepared to prevent settlement and misalignment. The subgrade for the manhole and controlled backfill around the manhole shall be observed and tested by a Geotechnical Engineer. If an organic soil layer is encountered at the bottom of the excavation for the manhole, then a minimum of 3 feet of over excavation of the soil layer shall be required. Removed soil shall be replaced as directed by a geotechnical engineer.




Dewberry Engineers Inc. Directional Drilling DEI# 50082886 33 05 23 - 1

SECTION 33 05 23

DIRECTIONAL DRILLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment for installation of water mains, sewer mains, force-mains, and appurtenances utilizing directional drilling methods as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Where differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the Contract Documents occur, the most stringent shall govern. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner’s Representative in writing of any such difference.

B. Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with local codes, laws and ordinances, industry standards or other governing regulations, the Work shall be corrected on noncompliance deficiencies with the Contractor bearing all costs.

C. Specifications listed below are included by reference and are hereby incorporated into the Contract Documents.


2. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

3. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)

4. Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT) - Road and Bridge Specifications

5. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations (OSHA)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall furnish qualifications of the drilling Contractor and Engineering data covering products, design and installation. Submittals shall be made in a timely manner so that the project schedule can be met but no less than thirty (30) days prior to the start of the drilling. The data to be submitted shall as one (1) package and include the following:

B. Qualifications of the drilling Contractor.

1. The Contractor shall submit written a “Work plan” with descriptions of the proposed construction and installation methods, procedures, schedule, equipment to be used, and locations necessary for equipment and material access, drilling fluid (mud) collection and containment areas.

2. The Contractor shall submit technical data with complete physical properties for all materials. A certificate of compliance with the specifications shall be furnished for all material supplied.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. All materials and Workmanship shall be warranted for a period as specified in the General Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARRIER PIPE

University of Virginia 100% Construction Documents Gooch to Gibbons to Runk Dining Chilled Water November 18, 2016 UVA WO: 2481928 PIMS: P04387


A. The carrier pipe and fittings shall be a PE3408 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe and comply with the requirements of ASTM D1248, ASTM 3350, AWWA C901 (2" through 3"), AWWA C906 (4" through 63"), and NSF Standards 14 and 61. Materials used in the manufacture of HDPE Pipe and fittings shall have the following minimum physical properties:

Property Test Method Value

Cell Classification ASTM D3350 345434C Density ASTM D1505 0.955 gm/cc Flexural Modulus ASTM D790 136,000 psi Tensile Strength @ Yield ASTM D638 3,500 psi Elastic Modulus ASTM D638 125,000 psi Brittleness Temperature ASTM D746 < -180 °F Melting Point ASTM D789 260° F Hardness ASTM D2240 Shore D 64 Impact Strength (IZOD) ASTM D256 42 In.-lb/in.

B. The outside diameter and minimum wall thickness shall be manufactured to Ductile Iron

Pipe sizes and have a Standard Dimension Ration (SDR) of 11 and a pressure rating of 160 psi (Class 160).

C. All fittings shall be pressure rated to match the system piping to which they are joined. At the point of fusion, the outside diameter and minimum wall thickness of the fitting shall meet the outside diameter and minimum wall thickness specification of AWWA C901/C906 for the same size pipe. All fittings shall be properly rated and clearly labeled. The fitting manufacturer shall be the same as the pipe manufacturer. Molded fitting shall be made from PE3408 and have fusion capability with the pipe. Fitting shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3261 for butt-type fittings.

D. Pipe and fittings shall be joined by thermal butt fusion, flange assemblies or mechanical methods in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the requirements of AWWA C901/C906. The HDPE pipe supplier shall provide the fusion equipment necessary for connecting the pipe and fittings. All butt fusions shall be done by McElroy fusion equipment or approved equal.

E. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the manufacturer, date of manufacturer, lot number, size, PE code, pressure class, SDR #, AWWA designation number, and other information as described in AWWA C901/C906.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DRILLING

A. The Contractor shall cooperate closely with the Owner, and the Engineer. Extreme care shall be taken to hold the pipe on line and grade.

B. All Work and operations shall be carried out in strict accordance with all applicable OSHA, State, and local regulations, safety standards, and permits.

C. The location of access point shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. Should the Contractor need to relocate any access point or obtain additional access points, a written request shall be submitted with the “Work plan” described above. The written request shall include any appropriate sketches deemed necessary by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining necessary permits and approvals as they relate to the new location should they be approved by the Engineer and Owner.

D. The Contractor shall take an adequate number of measurements along the route to ensure



that the pipeline on line and grade as shown on the Contract Drawings.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of all drilling fluid (mud) at an approved site. The Owner shall provide, at a reasonable location near the site, all make-up water necessary for the directional drilling operations.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for all Erosion and Sediment Control measures and protection of all streams, ditches, and waterways from runoff from the directional drilling operations.

G. Upon completion of the directional drilling operations, all disturbed areas shall be restored in accordance with other sections of the Contract Documents.

3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. The HDPE Pipeline shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C901/C906 and the manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Every precaution shall be taken to insure that the entire length of pipe is supported evenly. Pipe bedding shall be as specified by the pipe manufacturer.

C. All materials shall be shipped, unloaded, and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. All materials shall be handled in such a manner as to avoid damage to the material. When such damage cannot be repaired to the Engineer's satisfaction, the item shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. The interior of all pipe and accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times.

D. Trench preparation shall be in accordance with Section 330500 - EarthWork: Utilities. Dewatering shall be in accordance with Section 312319 - Dewatering.

E. Installation of all piping, fittings, valves, and appurtenances shall be to the lines, grades and locations shown on the Contract Drawings. All pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be carefully placed using suitable equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe or fittings. Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped. The pipe or accessories shall be inspected for defects prior to installation.

F. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed installed. When pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer.

G. Pipe and fittings shall be joined by thermal butt fusion, flange assemblies or mechanical methods in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the requirements of AWWA C901/C906. The HDPE pipe supplier shall provide the fusion equipment necessary for connecting the pipe and fittings. All butt fusions shall be done by McElroy fusion equipment or approved equal.

H. To minimize thermal stresses, the pipe shall be allowed to reach thermal equilibrium with the ground before being cut to the final installed length.

3.3 TESTING

A. All HDPE pipe, valves, fittings, and appurtenances shall be tested and inspected for water tightness and soundness before being accepted in accordance with the requirements the Plastic Pipe Institute Technical Report #31 (PPI TR-31) and as directed by the Engineer. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Engineer or his representative, and all costs associated with testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

B. HDPE pipe, valves, fittings, and appurtenances shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure of 1.5 times the design pressure rating. The test procedure shall consist of two steps: the initial expansion and the test phases. In order to compensate for the initial expansion of the



pipe under test, sufficient make-up water should be added to the system at hourly intervals for 3 hours to return to the test pressure. After the completion of this first phase, i.e., around 4 hours after initially pressurizing the pipe under tests, the actual test then commences. At the conclusion of the 4th hour, the pipe is again filled to stabilize the test pressure at its target value. The pump is them turned off and the final test pressure held for two (2) hours by use of make-up water to compensate for diametral strain at elevated hoop stress. The test phase should not exceed 3 hours. During this testing period, a measured amount of make-up water should be added to return to the test pressure. The amount of make-up water shall not exceed the allowance given in the following table.

ALLOWANCE FOR EXPANSION UNDER TEST PRESSURE

These allowances only apply to the test period and not to the initial expansion phase.

Nominal Pipe 2-Hour Test (Size, in.) (Gallons/100 ft.) 3 0.15 4 0.25 6 0.60 8 1.0 10 1.3 11 2.0 12 2.3 14 2.8

Note: Under no circumstances shall the total time under test exceed eight (8) hours at 1-1/2 times the pressure rating. If the test is not completed due to leakage, equipment failure, etc., the test section shall be permitted to “relax” for eight (8) hours prior to the next testing sequence. All details and/or leaks shall be corrected in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations and Engineers approval.



Dewberry Engineers Inc. Utility Location And Identification DEI# 50082886 33 05 26 - 1

SECTION 33 05 26 UTILITY LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION



1.2 SUMMARY

A. The purpose of this Section is to specify the requirements for utility location tape and buried detection wire. In general, all utility pipelines shall be marked by appropriately marked metallic tape 12 to 24 inches above the conduit. Buried detection wire shall be buried just above conduit.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Code of Virginia 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. 1.5 SEQUENCING

A. The tape or wire shall be installed at the same time as the pipeline or conduit. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

A. Polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic-faced, acid-and alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 4 inch minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read, “CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW” or similar wording. Color and printing shall be permanent, unaffected by moisture or soil.

Warning Tape Color Codes Red: Electric

Yellow: Gas, Oil; Dangerous Materials Blue: Water Green: Sewer Purple: Storm

B. Warning Tape for Metallic Piping: Acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming

to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of tape shall be 0.003 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi otherwise, and 1250 psi crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent elongation.

C. Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping: Polyethylene plastictape conforming to the

width, color and printing requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of the tape shall be


Dewberry Engineers Inc. Utility Location And Identification DEI# 50082886 33 05 26 - 2

0.004 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise. Tape shall be manufactured with integral wires, foil backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3 feet deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection. Color coded tape shall be installed flat with color side up to 12 inches to 24 inches over all installed utility lines including main line and service lateral or service connection.

2.2 BURIED DETECTION WIRE

A. Detection wire shall be insulated single strand, solid copper with a minimum of 12 AWG for a buried depth of less than 4 feet and 4 AWG for a buried depth greater than or equal to 4 feet. Detection wire shall be buried directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to exceed twelve (12) inches above the top of pipe. The wire shall extend continuously and unbroken, from point of access to point of access. The ends of the wire shall terminate with a minimum of three (3) feet of wire, coiled, remaining accessible inside each manhole, vault, tank, structure, fire hydrants and inside. The wire shall be exposed at the connection between contact A & B until the connection can be made to the wire by the last contractor to make the pipe connection.

2.3 RFID TRACKER BALLS

A. The University Geospatial Engineering Services (GES) will install RFID tracker ball technology

along the length of all new utilities and will mark all utilities crossing the excavation. University to supply and program all RFID tracker balls. Contractor to engage and schedule installation with GES prior to backfill. Contractor to install RFID trackers balls.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 AS-BUILT UTILITY SURVEY A. The University Geospatial Engineering Service (GES) will utilize survey grade GPS to survey the

horizontal and vertical location of the ductbank prior to backfill. Contractor to engage, schedule, and assist the University with this survey effort.
